JP2023002826A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of easily switching over between a first state and a second state alternately.

SOLUTION: When a game ball is sent out from a delivery port 821c to a receiving plane 844 of a seesaw member 840, a receiving plate 21872 of a rotary member 21870 receives the game ball. Thereby, the rotary member 21870 is rotated in a direction protruding its push-out plate 21873 above an inclined plane 845 and a discharge plane 846. Due to the rotation, a game ball rolling on the inclined plane 845 or the discharge plane 846 is pushed out by the push-out plate 21873 to be discharged into a discharge port 821d. As the result, the game ball rolling on the inclined plane 845 or the discharge plane 846 can be made easily to be discharged quickly to the discharge port 821d. Accordingly, a time when a second state is formed is made short, thereby an alternate switching-over between a first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 163

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotary shaft between one end side and the other end side thereof, and in an unloaded state, a first state is exerted by the weight of a game ball. There is a game machine that respectively forms a second state (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-283136

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is impossible to alternately switch between the first state and the second state when a plurality of game balls are consecutive.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that can easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

In order to achieve this object, a game machine according to claim 1 comprises a seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side, wherein the seesaw member is in an unloaded state. Then, a first state is formed in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised, and the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft, so that the one end side is raised and the other end side is raised. It forms a lowered second state, and has a discharging means for easily discharging the game ball placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft.

A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein said ejecting means comprises a shaft support portion rotatably supported by a shaft, and a shaft support portion disposed on one side of said shaft support portion and ejecting from said guide means. A receiving part for receiving the guided game ball, and a pushing part disposed with respect to the receiving part with the shaft supported therebetween, wherein the receiving part receives the game ball guided from the guide means. , the push-out portion is projected to the other end side of the seesaw member by the rotation about the shaft support portion.

A game machine according to claim 3 is the game machine according to claim 2, wherein said discharge means has said shaft supporting portion rotatably supported by said seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to facilitate switching between the first state and the second state alternately.

According to the game machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 1, it is possible to facilitate switching between the first state and the second state alternately.

According to the game machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 2, it is possible to facilitate switching between the first state and the second state alternately.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; It is a front view of a rotary body raising/lowering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit; It is an exploded back perspective view of a rotary body raising/lowering unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a container. (a) is a side view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and (b) is a front view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a first rotating body. It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body. It is a side view schematic diagram of the first rotating body and the second rotating body showing a transition state when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. It is a side view schematic diagram of the first rotating body and the second rotating body showing a transition state when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. It is a front view of a light-emitting decoration unit. Fig. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the light-emitting decoration unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the luminous decoration unit. (a) is a front view of the central rotary unit in a retracted position, and (b) is a front view of the central rotary unit in an extended position. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the central rotating unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central rotating unit; It is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. (a) is a front view of a connecting displacement member, (b) is a side view of the connecting displacement member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32(a), and (c) is a diagram of FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the connecting displacement member taken along line XXXIIa-XXXIIa; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; 39(a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base and the connecting displacement member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base and the connecting displacement member taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39(a). It is a diagram. 40(a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base and the first displacement member, and (b) is a view of the front base and the first displacement member as viewed in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40(a). FIG. 40(c) is a schematic side view, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base and the first displacement member taken along line XLc-XLc of FIG. 40(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a counterclockwise rotation unit. It is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member; (a) is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the XLVIII section of FIG. and a side view of a second displacement member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device. (a) is a front view of the winning device, (b) is a rear view of the winning device, and (c) is a top view of the winning device. 51(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning device taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the prize winning device taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the prize winning device along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52(b). FIG. 52(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line LIV-LIV. It is a back schematic diagram of a winning device. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged; FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged; FIG. It is a front perspective view of a center frame. 4 is a front view of an area forming section; FIG. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the region forming portion taken along line LX-LX in FIG. 59; It is a front view of the game board in the second embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a 4th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a 5th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a top view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a top view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a 6th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; (a) to (c) are schematic front views of a right rotation unit according to a fourth embodiment, and (d) to (g) are schematic front views of a right rotation unit according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a seventh embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a left rotation unit in an eighth embodiment. It is an exploded back perspective view of a counterclockwise rotation unit. It is a front view of a guide part. FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a left rotation unit in a ninth embodiment. It is an exploded back perspective view of a counterclockwise rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; It is a back schematic diagram of the counterclockwise rotation unit in 10th Embodiment. (a) is a front view of the cage, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the cage taken along line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of (a), and (c) is taken along line CXVIIc-CXVIIc of (a). It is a sectional view of a retainer. FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left rotation unit in an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 32 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a twelfth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base taken along line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in (a). FIG. 5 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member; FIG. 31 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a thirteenth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a sectional view of the front base taken along line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in (a). FIG. 5 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the front base and the displacement-side engagement member; FIG. 32 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a fourteenth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit with the second displacement member disposed at the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross section of the counterclockwise rotation unit taken along line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb of (a). It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in a state in which the second displacement member is arranged at the extended position, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the counterclockwise rotation unit taken along line CXXXIXb-CXXXIXb of (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. FIG. 31 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit according to a fifteenth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base taken along line CXLIb-CXLIb in (a). FIG. 5 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member; FIG. 32 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a sixteenth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base taken along line CXLIVb-CXLIVb in (a). FIG. 4 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the front base (opening) and the displacement-side engagement member; FIG. 32 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 5 is a schematic top view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the rear base and the displacement-side engagement member; FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of a right rotation unit in an eighteenth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a nineteenth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of a winning device in a twentieth embodiment; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the second state. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device in the twenty-first embodiment. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of a prize winning device according to a twenty-second embodiment. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device. FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning device in a twenty-third embodiment; (a) and (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device. FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device in the twenty-fourth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device. (a) is a front view of the rotating shaft, and (b) is a side view of the rotating shaft as viewed in the direction of an arrow CLXXIb in (a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the second state. 172(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along line CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa in FIG. 172(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 172(b). FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device in the twenty-fifth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the second state. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 176(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along the line CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along the line CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId in FIG. 176(b).

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 60. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 16a is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. A mouth 63, a first winning mouth 64, a second winning mouth 640, a third winning mouth 82, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a second through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. The peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the third winning opening 82, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when any one of the first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 wins. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased, and the balls are likely to enter the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 and a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the third winning hole 82. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. The amount of time that the When the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in an open state (open state), the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are closed (closed state). A ball is more likely to enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 than in the case of . Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the balls are likely to enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or during the time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, or the opening In addition to changing the time, a change may be made to increase the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened per hit. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. At least one of the opening time and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened per time may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened, The number of times the electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82 are released may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second symbol may be changed to be higher than in the normal state.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displayed with variable display triggered by winning (starting winning) of any one of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the third winning port 82. A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing, and the spheres of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided, which is composed of an LED that variably displays the second pattern with passage as a trigger.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 . Further, when the rotating body elevating unit 300, the central floating unit 400 and the left/right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 thereof protrude into the opening of the center frame 86, and the opening is opened. visible through the part.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)). and are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time to perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the second symbol attached to the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 The first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are configured to be in an operating state (released) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, the player is given more opportunities to open the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a of the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82.例文帳に追加be able to. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a for one hit, etc. When the state is such that the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole during time saving, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the first electric role product 640a and the second electric role product 82a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first thru gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the left side of the variable display unit 80 , and the second thru gate 67 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 . The first thru gate 66 and the second thru gate 67 are configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls launched to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is held up to four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B and the second pattern is displayed. A holding lamp (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). can be set to Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. A third prize winning port 82 is arranged on the right side of the first prize winning port 64 when viewed from the front. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning hole switch is turned on. As a result, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a lottery for a big win, and the first symbol display device 37B displays the result of the lottery.

Also, the first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 640, and the third prize winning port 82 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 are the same, but the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 are changed. A different number, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 is three, and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82. may be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning hole 640. - 特許庁The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 640a is displayed. It will be in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball will easily enter the second winning port 640 .

In addition, the third prize winning port 82 is accompanied by a second electric accessory 82a. The second electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the second electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the third winning opening 82. ing. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the second through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the second electric accessory 82a is displayed. It becomes an open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the third winning port 82 .

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ , and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened becomes longer than during the normal time during the variable probability or the time saving. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to enter the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 during the variable probability or the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 and when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82, the probability of winning the jackpot is high even in a low probability state. state is the same. However, the probability of winning the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82, and the ball enters the first prize winning port 64. It is set higher than if you win a prize. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a like the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82, and the ball can always win a prize. state.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessories associated with the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 are often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82. A ball is shot toward the first prize winning port 64 with no electric accessory so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left hitting”), and by winning the first prize winning port 64 It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of the big win lottery and to aim for the big win.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning port 82 is likely to be in an open state, and the third winning port 82 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the third prize winning opening 82 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hit"), and is passed through the second through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to set the second electric accessory 82a in an open state and to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the third prize winning opening 82.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

It should be noted that any of the first thru gate 66 and the second thru gate 67 may draw a winning lottery for a symbol other than the second symbol when the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67. , the second electric accessory 82a associated with the third winning opening 82 or the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 may be displaced to the open state. In this case, as the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the symbols to be drawn are different, so the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. will be selected one by one.

As a result, for example, when the second symbol is selected to win, the second electric accessory 82a is opened. When a win is selected in the lottery of two symbols, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and when the ball is hit to the left and passed through the first through gate 66, a symbol different from the second symbol is drawn and the second symbol is selected. A game state in which the first electric accessory 640a is opened when winning is selected in a pattern different from the pattern can be set.

Therefore, if the game state is such that it is easy to win the lottery of the second symbol during the variable probability, and the game state is such that the symbol different from the second symbol is easy to win during the time saving, during the variable probability, the second through gate 67 is hit to the right. A game state in which the second electric accessory 82a is passed to open the second electric accessory 82a to easily win the ball, and during the time saving, the first electric accessory is released to open the first electric accessory to pass the first through gate 66 and win the ball. It is possible to make a game state that is easy to play. Therefore, since the game states during normal, during shortening of time, and during variable probability can be set to different game states, the player can enjoy each game state.

In addition, if the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a hit is selected for the second symbol, hitting the ball to the right to pass through the second through gate 67 will result in a different result from the second symbol. A pattern is drawn, and when a win is selected in the drawing of a pattern different from the second pattern, the first electric accessory 640a is opened, and when the ball is struck left and passed through the first through gate 66, the second pattern is obtained. is drawn and a game state in which the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a win is selected in the second symbol can be made.

In this case, when the ball passes through the second through gate 67 by striking to the right, the first electric accessory is opened and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640 regardless of whether the probability is variable or the time is shortened. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 by striking to the left, the second electric accessory 82a is opened to make the game state in which the ball easily enters the third prize winning port 82.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player needs to change the way of hitting from right to left or from left to right. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting can be changed at any time.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of any one of the first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 64 and the third prize winning port 82 becomes a big win, a predetermined time (fluctuation time) is set. After the lapse of time, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is lit so as to become the stop symbol of the big win, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, thereby winning the big win. Occurrence is indicated. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. , the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out hole 71. be. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, MPU 201 performs main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result in second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420 , 530 , 630 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the action unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the action unit 200. FIG. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

7 shows a state in which the rotating body lifting unit 300 is at the lowered position, and the central rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 are at the extended positions. The drawing shows a state in which the body lifting unit 300 is at the raised position, and the center rotation unit 500, the right rotation unit 600, and the left rotation unit 700 are at the retracted positions.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a box-shaped back case 210. In the inner space of the back case 210, there is a rotator elevating unit 300 below the back case 210, which emits light upward. A decoration unit 400 and a center rotation unit 500 are arranged, and a right rotation unit 600 and a left rotation unit 700 are arranged on the left and right sides, respectively.

The rear case 210 has a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. The box is opened on one side (left front side of FIG. 6) by these wall portions 211 and 212. formed into a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, and the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the external shape of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, in which the third pattern display device 81 can be arranged).

The rotating body elevating units 300 are composed of box-shaped housing bodies 330 in which a plurality (three in this embodiment) are arranged side by side in the width direction, and a plurality (two in this embodiment) to be housed in each of the housing bodies 330. ) (first rotating body 340a and second rotating body 340b).

The plurality of containers 330 are formed so as to be vertically movable (vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8) independently of each other. In this case, in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and are invisible to the player. On the other hand, in the raised position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can visually recognize through the opening. be done.

The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotatably supported by the housing body 330, and the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b sequentially allow the player to visually recognize a plurality of figures (three in this embodiment) drawn on the outer peripheral surface. Let The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed as columnar bodies having a triangular cross section, and different figures are drawn on the three surfaces of the outer periphery.

In the present embodiment, one driving motor 350 is shared as the drive source for the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, thereby making it possible to reduce the cost of the parts while reducing the cost of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. The combinations of figures 340b can be changed, and a total of nine combinations can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 20). Details will be described later.

The light-emitting decoration unit 400 mainly includes a base body 410 and a light-emitting device 420 arranged in the central portion of the base body 410, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs 421 arranged inside the light-emitting device 420. By changing the aspect (for example, the number of LEDs 421 to irradiate), effects by light emission are performed. Details will be described later.

The central rotating unit 500 includes a rear base 510 and a pair of displacement members 530 rotatably supported on the rear base 510 at their base ends, and is arranged on the rear side of the light emitting decoration unit 400 . The pair of displacement members 530 are located at a protruding position (see FIG. 7) protruding into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and retracted to the rear side of the light-emitting decoration unit 400 to be invisible to the player. It is rotated between the retracted position (see FIG. 8). Details will be described later.

The right rotation unit 600 includes a base body (rear base 610 and front base 620) disposed on the front surface of the front base 315 of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and a base body rotatably supported by the base body. and members (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640). On the other hand, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 has a base body (rear base 610 and front base 620) arranged in front of the front base 317 of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and its proximal end is rotatably supported by the base body. and a displacement member (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640). Each displacement member has a projecting position (see FIG. 7) that projects into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and a retracted position (see FIG. 7) that retracts to the back side of the game board 13 and is invisible to the player ( (see FIG. 8). Details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 60, detailed configurations of the rotating body elevating unit 300, the light emitting decoration unit 400, the center rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 will be described. First, the detailed configuration of the rotating body lifting unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22 .

FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body lifting unit 300. FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotating body elevating unit 300 includes a central unit 300C for raising and lowering the central container 330, and left and right units 300L and 300R for respectively raising and lowering the left and right containers 330. It is formed from three units of The left unit 300L is superimposed on the front side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, thereby arranging the three containers 330 side by side in the width direction.

Here, detailed configurations of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. FIG. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300C includes a rear base 311 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front, a front base 312 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 311, and a front base 312 on the front side of the front base 312. A drive motor 320 provided, an accommodation body 330 that moves up and down with respect to the rear base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, a first rotating body 340a and a first rotation body 340a accommodated in the accommodation body 330 It mainly includes a second rotating body 340b and a transmission mechanism that is housed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 311 and the front base 312 and transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing body 330. As shown in FIG.

The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322, A rack gear 324 which is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and which is formed as a rack having tooth cuts on the side surface of a flat member, and the rack gear 324 is arranged on one side and a container 330 is arranged on the other side. and a connecting member 325 provided.

A pair of shafts protrude from the front surface of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported on each of these shafts. Slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged parallel to each other on the front surface of the rear base 311 so that the guiding direction is the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 12). ) and the container 330 are guided vertically. That is, the movement directions of the connecting member 325 and the container 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324. , along with the linear motion of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is vertically displaced (lifted) together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically elongated portion where the rack gear 324 is arranged and the vertically elongated portion where the container 330 is arranged, with the horizontally elongated portion connecting the lower ends thereof. , and is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front. As a result, even when the central container 330 is positioned at the raised position while the left container 330 is positioned at the lowered position, the horizontally elongated portion of the connecting member 325 can be positioned on the rear surface of the front base 312. , it is possible to avoid being viewed by the player.

The slide guide 351 is a linear guide made up of a guide groove formed on the front surface of the rear base 311 and a sliding body slidably formed along the guide groove and fixed to the rear surface of the connecting member 325. Formed as a mechanism. The same applies to the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, which will be described later. The slide guide 352 includes a first rail fixed to the rear base 311, a second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the container 330, and a slide guide 352 interposed between the first rail and the second rail. It is formed as a telescopic linear guide mechanism with an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

Here, since the left container 330 is arranged side by side (left side in FIG. 12) of the central container 330 (see FIG. 9), the width of the connecting member 325 (left and right direction in FIG. 12) ) dimension is longer. Furthermore, as described above, since the oblong portion is interposed to avoid being viewed by the player, the connecting member 325 is formed in a U shape when viewed from the front, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the center container 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction tends to occur).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since an extendable linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is arranged on the back side of the central container 330, the state where the central container 330 is arranged at the raised position However, the elongated slide guide 352 can restrict the swinging in the horizontal direction and stabilize the posture of the center container 330 . On the other hand, in a state in which the central containing body 330 is arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being viewed by the player.

Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300L includes a rear base 313 which is vertically long in front view and arranged in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C, and the rear base 313. An intermediate base 314 superimposed on the front side, a front base 315 superimposed on the front side of the intermediate base 314, a drive motor 320 arranged on the rear side of the intermediate base 314, and a driving force of the drive motor 320. A housing body 330 that moves up and down with respect to each of the bases 313 to 315 by means of a and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330 .

The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321, and a pinion gear 323 coaxially fixed to the transmission gear 322b. , a rack gear 324 which is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and is formed as a rack formed by tooth cutting on the side surface of a flat member, and a connecting member 326 which connects the rack gear 324 to the container 330 .

A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the intermediate base 314, and a transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on this shaft. A shaft support hole is formed in the intermediate base 314, and a transmission gear 322b and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported in the shaft support hole while being coaxially fixed.

A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 313 so that the guiding direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided vertically by the slide guide 351. . A guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300 . The guide plate 353 has a guide groove 353a, which is an elongated opening, extending in the vertical direction. Interpolated. Accordingly, the container 330 is guided vertically along the guide groove 353 a of the guide plate 353 . That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 326 and the container 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b. With the linear motion of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is vertically displaced (lifted) together with the connecting member 326 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L includes a rear base 316 that is formed in a substantially L-shaped front surface and is connected to the right end of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C. A front base 317 superimposed on the front side of the back base 313 , a drive motor 320 arranged on the front side of the front base 317 , and the driving force of the drive motor 320 moves up and down with respect to the back base 316 and the front base 317 . a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b housed in the housing body 330; and a transmission mechanism that transmits to the body 330 .

The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321, and a plate-shaped member meshed with the pinion gear 323. A rack gear 324 formed as a rack with toothed sides and a connecting member 327 connecting the rack gear 324 to the container 330 are provided.

A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the rear base 316, and a pinion gear 323 is rotatably supported on this shaft. A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 316 so that the guiding direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is guided vertically by the slide guide 351. . Further, the front base 316 has a guide groove 316a, which is an elongated opening, extending in the vertical direction. (not shown). Accordingly, the container 330 is guided vertically along the guide groove 316a of the rear base 316. As shown in FIG. That is, the movement directions of the connecting member 327 and the container 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the z of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324, and the rack gear 324 is rotated. Along with the linear motion, the container 330 is vertically displaced (lifted) together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

As described above, in the central unit 300C, the width dimension of the connecting member 325 is long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central container 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the horizontal direction is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, since the rack gear 323 is provided at a position adjacent to the side surface of the left container 330 and the right container 330, the width of the connecting members 326 and 327 (Figs. The left-right direction) dimension can be shortened to increase its rigidity. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the attitude of the left and right containers 330 (to make it difficult to swing in the left-right direction).

Accompanying this, there is no need to dispose a telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the rear side of the left and right housing bodies 330, and the guide plates 353 or the guide grooves 353a and 316a of the rear base 316 are used for guidance. It can stabilize the posture sufficiently. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Next, the housing 330 and the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19. FIG.

17 is an exploded front perspective view of container 330. FIG. 18(a) is a side view of container 330 viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 18(b) is a front view of container 330 viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18(a). is. 18(a) and 18(b) illustrate a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334 and the decorative body 335 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the container 330 includes a base 331, left and right side walls 332 and 333 provided on the left and right sides of the base 331, and inner surfaces of the left side wall 332. and a decorative body 335 disposed on the front surface of the base 331. These parts 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening to form a box shape.

The base 331 is a member that forms the rear surface (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 18B), the upper surface and the lower surface (the upper side and the lower side of FIG. 18B) of the container 330, and is a combination of three plate-like members. formed integrally. A reflecting part RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the front side of the portion forming the rear side of the container 330 .

The reflector RF is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that extends at least vertically beyond the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b when viewed from the front. (see FIG. 18(b)).

The side walls 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-shaped members forming the left and right side surfaces of the container 330, and are provided with holding holes 332a and 333a at two locations, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which fixed shafts 341 (described later) of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are inserted, and hold the fixed shafts 341 so as not to rotate. The holding holes 332a and 333a have a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis of the inner peripheral surface thereof, which is formed by removing one of the two points on the circumference of the circle and dividing the circle by a straight line.

The partition body 334 is a rectangular plate-shaped member having substantially the same outer shape as the side wall body 332 , and rotatably supports the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 between the surfaces facing the side wall body 332 . In addition, the partition body 334 is provided with two insertion holes 334 a for inserting the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 .

The decoration body 335 is a member that decorates the front surface of the housing body 330, and is formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually recognize the manner of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

The storage body 330 formed in this manner includes a drive motor 350 arranged in the partition body 334, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 350, and a driving motor. A transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the motor 350 to the first rotor 340a and the second rotor 340b and a detection mechanism for detecting the rotational position of the first rotor 340a are mainly housed.

The transmission mechanism in the container 330 includes a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, a transmission gear 352 meshed with the drive gear 351 in order, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354 and a second gear 355. and a gear train consisting of The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are connected to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. They are fixed to the axial end faces, respectively.

Here, with reference to FIG. 19, detailed configurations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotor 340a.

Note that since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have substantially the same configuration except that the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are different, the first rotating body 340a will be used as a representative example below. , and description of the second rotating body 340b is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end plates 342 rotatably supported on both axial ends (shaft portions 341a) of the fixed shaft 341, and a pair of It mainly includes three display boards (first display board 343A, second display board 343B, and third display board 343C) that are installed between the end plates 342 .

The fixed shaft 341 includes a trunk portion 341b and shaft portions 341a connected to both axial ends of the trunk portion 341b. The fixed shaft 341 is a portion that is non-rotatably held by the side walls 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) of the container 330, and connects a pair of shaft portions 341a located at both ends in the axial direction. and a trunk portion 341b.

The axial cross-sectional shape of the shaft portion 341a is a shape obtained by removing one of the sections from a circular shape by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line (a shape obtained by chamfering a portion of the outer peripheral surface of a cylinder). , and is similar in shape to the holding holes 332a and 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side walls 332 and 333, respectively. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333, the fixed shaft 341 can be non-rotatably held in the container 330 (side wall bodies 332 and 333).

A plurality of (four in this embodiment) LEDs 344 are attached to the body portion 341b, and light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be irradiated to the inner surfaces of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C.

In this case, when the shaft portion 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall members 332 and 333 and held so as not to rotate, the body portion 341b is arranged so that the irradiation direction of the LED 344 is directed to the front surface of the housing member 330 (decorative member 335). The opening 335a of FIG. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 344 can be irradiated to the inner surface of one of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C, which is arranged in front of the container 330 (“viewing position” described later). can.

The fixed shaft 341 (shaft portion 341a, body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with both ends in the axial direction open. It can be pulled out of the container 330 through the opening at the direction end. In addition, since the fixed shaft 341 is not rotatable with respect to the container 330, as described above, even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, the wiring of the LED 344 is not subjected to external force such as twisting or pulling. can be avoided.

The end plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a shaft support hole 342a having a circular cross-section perpendicular to the axis. The inner diameter dimension of the shaft support hole 342 a is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the shaft portion 341 a of the fixed shaft 341 . Therefore, the end plate 342 is rotatably supported with respect to the fixed shaft 341 by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a. Thereby, the end plate 342 is rotatably held inside the container 330 via the fixed shaft 341 .

Here, since the fixed shaft 341 has a trunk portion 341b larger in diameter than the shaft portion 341a, the end plate 342 is formed between the side walls 332 and 333 of the container 330 and the trunk portion 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The axial position can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side walls 332 and 333 via the end plate 342 .

A first gear 353 of the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end plates 342, and a base gear 361 of the detection mechanism, which will be described later, is fixed to the other. The second gear 355 of the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end plates 342 of the second rotating body 340b, but the attachment of the base gear 361 to the other is omitted (see FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

Each of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is a substantially rectangular plate-shaped member when viewed from the front. It is bridged between the end plates 342 and together with the end plates 342 forms a triangular prism.

A figure is drawn on the outer surface of each of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C. Therefore, when the triangular columnar body is rotated, the figures drawn on the outer surfaces of the respective display plates 343A to 343C are sequentially visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335. FIG.

At least a part of the outer surface of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C is curved in an outwardly convex arc shape when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341 . As a result, as will be described later, even when there is a deviation of a predetermined rotational angle (for example, 12 degrees) between the rotational positions of the first rotor 340a and the second rotor 340b, each display plate 343A It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the figure drawn on the outer surface of 343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

In this embodiment, when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341, the widthwise ends of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C are curved in an arcuate shape that protrudes outward. A width direction central portion is formed in a substantially flat surface shape. Accordingly, it is possible to achieve both ensuring the visibility of the graphic and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. In addition, the arc radius of the curved arc-shaped portion is a value larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each of the display plates 343A to 343C (for example, 2 times or more and 4 times below).

Here, in the following description, the positions of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular columnar body is rotated are assumed to be the front surface of the container 330 (the surface on the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 18B). The position at which the figure drawn on the outer surface can be viewed by the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is called a "visible position", and the outer surface is directed to the inner surface of the container 330 (base 331). A position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is invisible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a "shielding position".

Therefore, for example, when the first display panel 343A is arranged at the visible position, the second display panel 343B and the third display panel 343C are arranged at the shielding position (see FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)). . From this state, when the triangular prism body is rotated by 120 degrees in the forward direction or the reverse direction, either the second display panel 343B or the third display panel 343C is arranged at the viewing position, and the second display panel 343B or the third display panel is positioned. The other of the plates 343C and the first display plate 343A are arranged at the shielding position.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display panel 343A is formed in a shape that does not allow light to pass through, while the second display panel 343B and the third display panel 343C have a transparent portion PN through which light can pass. in part. In addition, a reflecting portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the inner surface of the first display panel 343A.

As described above, the LED 344 is arranged at a position capable of illuminating the inner surface of the display board arranged at the visible position among the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C. Therefore, in a state where the second display panel 343B or the third display panel 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is transmitted through the transparent portions PN of the respective display panels 343B and 343C and directly viewed by the player. can be made

On the other hand, in the state where the first display panel 343A is placed at the viewing position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected by the reflecting portion RF on the inner surface of the first display panel 343A. and transmitted through the transmission portion PN of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C, and then reflected by the reflection portion RF of the base 331 of the container 330, and the reflected light from the reflection portion RF of the base 331 can be visually visually recognized by the player indirectly.

For example, by stopping the first rotating body 340a at the rotational position where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position and causing the LED 344 to emit light, the reflected light reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the base 331 of the container 330 is visually recognized. The player can be reminded of the figure of the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C arranged at a position (shielding position) invisible to the player. This makes it possible for the player to expect or suggest that the first rotating body 340a will be rotated to a position where the graphics on the second display panel 343B or the third display panel 343C can be visually recognized.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed to have triangular cross-sections, when the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the reflector plate The distance between RF and the outer surface of each rotor 340a, 340b (display plates 343A to 343C), the distance between the outer surfaces of each rotor 340a, 340b (vertical distance in FIG. 18(b)), or The apparent diameter (vertical dimension in FIG. 18(b)) of each rotating body 340a, 340b can be increased or decreased, and the outer surface of each rotating body 340a, 340b (each display plate 343A to 343C) can be opposed to the reflector RF. You can change the angle. That is, as the rotating bodies 340a and 340b rotate, the light emitted from the LED 344 and emitted from the transmission portion PN is displayed as reflected light from the reflection portion RF of the substrate 331. The aspect (eg, the size of the area in which the light is visible) can be changed periodically.

Returning to FIGS. 17 and 18, description will be made. The detection mechanism includes a base gear 361 fixed to the end face plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362. A terminal gear 363 having a detection target plate 363a projecting outward, and a sensor device 364 for detecting the detection target plate 363a of the terminal gear 363 are provided.

The intermediate gear 362 and the terminal gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall 333, and the sensor device 364 is arranged on the base 331 with the detection area arranged on the movement locus of the plate 363a to be detected. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detection state of the detected plate 363a. That is, based on the detection result of the sensor device 364, the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position).

Next, rotation operations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 rotates, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b via the transmission mechanism, and these rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

Specifically, when the drive motor 350 rotates, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 rotates. Thereby, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. Also, when the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. As a result, the second rotating body 340b rotates in the same direction as the first rotating body 340a. Also, when the rotation direction of the driving motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite direction.

As a result, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body 340a and the figure of the second rotating body 340b visually recognized by the player is changed in order. In this case, the number of combinations of figures of both rotors 340a and 340b is limited to three in the conventional product.

That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are synchronously driven to rotate by one driving motor, a combination that can be formed is, for example, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. A first combination in which the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b is placed at the display position, and the second display plate 343B of the first rotating body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotating body 340b are placed in the display position. There were only three second combinations, that is, a third combination in which the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are placed at the display positions.

On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are independently rotationally driven by different drive motors, a maximum of nine combinations can be formed. It can appear arbitrarily. However, in this case, the parts cost increases due to the need for two drive motors.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of drive motors 350 is limited to one, and nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed. It can appear arbitrarily. In addition, in the present embodiment, by allowing a predetermined amount of deviation of the rotational positions without requiring the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to be perfectly matched, the nine combinations can be quickly realized. can let you out. The combination of the figures of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. FIG.

FIG. 20 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are schematic side views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing transition states when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated. (a) to FIG. 21(e) are shown in FIG. 22(a) to 22(e) are shown in FIG. They correspond to the states shown as 6-10, respectively.

In FIG. 20, as a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the state in which the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visible position is indicated by the symbol "A" or "A'". The state in which the second display panel 343B is arranged in the visible position is indicated by the code "B" or "B'", and the state in which the third display panel 343C is arranged in the visible position is indicated by the code "C" or "C'". be done.

For example, No. in FIG. In the state represented by 10 "A, C'", the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visible positions, and the first rotating body A figure drawn on the first display panel 343A from 340a and a figure drawn on the third display panel 343C from the second rotator 340b correspond to a state visually recognized by the player.

Also, in FIG. 21, to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotor 340a are denoted by reference numerals "A to C". The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the rotator 340b are illustrated using reference numerals "A' to C'", respectively.

Here, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 fixed to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are set to different values. In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 is 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 is 20. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b rotates 108 degrees. is formed to

No. in FIG. 1 and FIG. 21(a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are placed at their respective viewing positions (No. 1 "A', A", first combination), the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees, and the second display plate 343B is placed at the viewing position. 2 and FIG. 21(b), the second rotating body 340b places the second display panel 343B at the viewing position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 "B', B" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In this case, the second rotating body 340b rotates 108 degrees while the first rotating body 340a rotates 120 degrees. , 340b from the direction perpendicular to the axis, it is difficult for the player to recognize the difference in rotation angle of 12 degrees. It can be recognized that the figures drawn on the outer surface of 343B are arranged at respective viewing positions (the second combination is formed).

In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C are curved in an outwardly convex arc shape when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. (that is, the surface on which the figure is drawn is curved along the direction of rotation of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b). , the difference (deviation) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be made difficult to recognize.

No. in FIG. 2 and FIG. 21(b), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is positioned at the visible position. 3 and FIG. 21(c), the rotational position of the second rotating body 340b is displaced from the first rotating body 340a. That is, in this state, a difference of 24 degrees is formed in the rotation angle between the two, so that the player is made to recognize the deviation of the figure (no combination, No. 3 "-, C" in FIG. 20). be able to.

Similarly, No. in FIG. 4 and FIG. 21(d) to No. 4 in FIG. 9 and the state shown in FIG. 340b is arranged at a position where its rotational position is displaced from the first rotating body 340a. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize the deviation of the graphics (no combination, No. 4 "-, A" to No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20).

No. in FIG. 9 and FIG. 22(d) (No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is positioned at the visible position. 20 No. 10 and FIG. 22(e), the second rotor 340b places the third display panel 343C at the viewing position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 10 “C′, A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

Note that, according to the present embodiment, the second rotation is also performed in the section where the figure deviation (the combination is not established, No. 3 "-, C" to No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20) is formed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the graphics visually recognized by the player can be switched continuously, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which graphics will be combined in the third combination.

After that, substantially the same as the above-described aspect (rotation in the section from the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 (a) to the state shown in No. 9 of FIG. 20 and FIG. 22 (e)) The aspect is repeated two more times to complete one cycle (the table is cycled from start to end).

In this case, No. in FIG. 11 to No. 20, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. B”), a fifth combination (No. 12 “B′, C” in FIG. 20) and a sixth combination (No. 20 “C′, B” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

Moreover, No. in FIG. 21 to No. 30, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. C”), the eighth combination (No. 22 “B′, A” in FIG. 20) and the ninth combination (No. 30 “C′, C” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to the first rotor 340a and the second rotor 340b includes a plurality of gears (the drive gear 351 to the second gear 355 ), and is formed to be capable of transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at different rotation ratios.

Thereby, the rotation period of the first rotor 340a and the rotation period of the second rotor 340b can be made different. As a result, even with only one drive motor 350, it is possible to form nine sets of combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (desired Any combination can appear).

In addition, by forming the transmission mechanism as a gear train, not only is it possible to simplify the structure, reduce the cost of parts, and improve durability and reliability, but also the gears are always meshed. Therefore, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between normal and reverse, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched.

Therefore, for example, proceeding in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) in the table of FIG. After or just before the third combination (No. 10 “C′, A” in FIG. 20) appears, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, and the table in FIG. 20 is reversed. A series of actions of returning to the direction (the upward direction in FIG. 20) can be repeated, thereby providing an effect that the player expects the appearance of the third combination.

Alternatively, for example, from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 "A', A" in FIG. 20) is formed, the ninth combination (No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20) appears. 20 in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) to reveal the ninth combination, and in addition, reverse the table in FIG. 20 (upward in FIG. 20). to reveal a ninth combination. That is, in the former case, it is necessary to rotate the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees 30 times, whereas in the latter case, it is necessary to rotate the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees once. Since it is sufficient to do so, a desired combination of figures can be made to appear quickly.

Here, when the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 60 degrees with respect to the rotation of the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees (that is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is equivalent to the rotation of the first rotating body 340a). , when set to "1/integer" times), a plurality of combinations of figures can be formed without causing a difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. can be done. However, in this case, the maximum number of graphics that can be combined is three.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 "A', A", No. 11 "A', B" and No. 11 "A', B" in FIG. 20). 21 "A', C"), in the remaining six combinations (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth and ninth combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body A difference (deviation) of a predetermined rotation angle is allowed to occur in the rotation position of 340b. As a result, the number of figures that can be combined can be nine.

That is, in the structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated by one driving motor 350, setting the number of possible combinations of figures to nine sets means that the rotation of the driving motor 350 is controlled by the first rotating body 340a. and the second rotating body 340b. This is possible only by allowing the occurrence of a difference (deviation) in the predetermined rotation angle. As a result, the required number of drive motors 350 can be suppressed, and the product cost can be reduced, while improving the presentation effect by increasing the number of combinations of graphics.

In this case, a combination of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth combinations) in which the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are different (shifted) by a predetermined rotation angle. combination), the stop positions at which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are stopped may be corrected.

For example, in the second, fifth and eighth combinations (No. 2 "B', B", No. 12 "B', C" and No. 22 "B', A" in Fig. 20), Fig. 21 As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is delayed, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotational position where the phase is advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. , for example, is stopped at a rotational position rotated by 126 degrees. This makes it possible to disperse the positional deviation from the reference plane to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and make it inconspicuous.

Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth and ninth combinations (No. 10 “C′, A”, No. 20 “C′, B” and No. 30 “C′, C” in FIG. 20) 22(e), the phase of the second rotating body 340b is advanced, so the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotational position delayed in phase by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. , for example, is stopped at a rotational position rotated by 114 degrees. This makes it possible to disperse the positional deviation from the reference plane to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and make it inconspicuous.

As described above, the rotating body elevating unit 300 is formed such that each containing body 300 can move up and down. , so that it is invisible to the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the figure of the first body of rotation 340a and the figure of the second body of rotation 340b can be displayed promptly at the required timing.

That is, in the present embodiment, nine combinations of figures can be formed, so the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to rotate the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b relatively many times, which increases the time.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by arranging each containing body 300 in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are retracted to a position invisible to the player. can be done. As a result, the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be rotated in advance to a predetermined rotating position without being recognized by the player. When the timing arrives, each container 300 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 8), and the remaining rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are executed to rapidly achieve the desired combination. can be made to appear in

It should be noted that the placement of each containing body 300 in the lowered position may be performed only when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in a specific variation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively short, each container 300 is not placed in the lowered position, and each While the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b is started and stopped at a position visible to the player, the time from the start of rotation of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, each rotating body 340a, 340b may be rotated in advance at a position invisible to the player.

In this case, in this embodiment, the preliminary rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the lowered position is performed when a predetermined operating means is operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

That is, when rotating the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, a relatively loud sound is generated. The generated sound may make the player aware that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have been rotated in advance.

On the other hand, by performing the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b during the operation of the predetermined operating means, it is possible to blend them into the operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

Incidentally, examples of the operating means include the payout device 133, the audio output device 226, or the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 3 or 4). When these operation means are operated, for example, a relatively loud sound is generated with the delivery of the ball, the output of sound, or the shooting of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

Alternatively, or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b may be rotated in advance. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the player's attention can be focused on the predetermined effect. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the body 340b.

Next, the light emitting decoration unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG. FIG. 23 is a front view of the luminous decoration unit 400. FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the luminous decoration unit 400 includes a horizontally long rectangular base body 410 in a front view, which is disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210, and a width of the base body 410. A light-emitting device 420 arranged in front in the center of the direction, a light-shielding member 430 covering the front surface of the light-emitting device 420, and a cover member 440 covering the front surface of the light-shielding member 430 and made of a light-transmitting material. , and ring-shaped peripheral decorations 450 and 460 surrounding the light emitting device 420 , the light shielding member 430 and the cover member 440 when viewed from the front.

On the front side of the light emitting device 420, a plurality of (15 in this embodiment) light emitters (LEDs 421) are arranged in a dispersed state over the entire surface, and are formed so as to be able to irradiate the back surface of the light shielding member 430 with light. . Here, the light shielding member 430 includes a main body portion 431 made of a light shielding material (non-light-transmitting material), and partition walls 432 erected from the front and rear surfaces of the main body portion 431 .

A main body portion 431 of the light shielding member 430 is provided with circular openings 431a in a front view at a plurality of locations (15 locations in the present embodiment). The plurality of openings 431a are arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 421 of the light emitting device 420 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 421 can reach the rear surface of the cover 440 through the opening 431a of the light shielding member 430 .

The partition wall 432 is formed in an annular shape with a diameter smaller than that of the body portion 431 when viewed from the front, and is arranged at a position eccentric from the center of the body portion 431 . As a result, the space between the light emitting device 420 and the cover body 440 is divided into a circular first space surrounded by the partition wall 432 and a substantially crescent-shaped first space positioned on the outer peripheral side of the partition wall 431 when viewed from the front. 2 spaces.

In this way, the division by the division wall 431 makes it possible to clarify the outline of the light visually recognized from the cover member 440 . That is, when only the LEDs 421 in the first space emit light, a circle can be seen, and when only the LEDs 421 in the second space emit light, a crescent shape can be seen.

Next, the central rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. FIG. FIG. 26(a) is a front view of central rotation unit 500 in the retracted position, and FIG. 26(b) is a front view of central rotation unit 500 in the extended position. . 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the center rotation unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center rotation unit 500. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 26 to 28, the central rotating unit 500 includes a rear base 510 disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210, and a front base 510 superimposed on the front of the rear base 510. a base 520, a pair of displacement members 530 whose base ends are rotatably supported by the rear base 510 and the front base 520, a driving motor 540 for generating a driving force for rotating the displacement members 530, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530 .

A front surface of the rear base 510 and a rear surface of the front base 520 are respectively recessed with shaft support holes 511 and 521 for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotating shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 . A support shaft 512 for rotatably supporting a crank gear 542 in the transmission mechanism projects from the front surface of the rear base 510 .

The displacement member 530 is a member whose front end side is decorated, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 531 , a connecting gear 532 , and a crank groove 533 . As described above, the rotating shaft 531 is a shaft supported by the support holes 511 and 521 of the rear base 510 and the front base 520, and protrudes from the front and rear surfaces of the displacement member 530 on the proximal end side.

The connection gear 532 is a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the displacement member 530 on the base end side with the rotation axis 531 as the center of rotation. When one of the displacement members 530 is rotated about the rotating shaft 531, the connecting gear 532 transmits the rotation to the other connecting gear 532 to rotate it. As a result, the other displacement member 530 is rotated around the rotating shaft 531 .

The crank groove 533 is a linear groove in a front view into which a connecting pin 542a of a crank gear 542 of the transmission mechanism, which will be described later, is slidably inserted. It is recessed in the rear surface of the displacement member 530 on the right side). As will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 542 is transmitted to the crank groove 533 via the connecting pin 542a, so that one displacement member 530 rotates about the rotation shaft 531. As shown in FIG.

As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530, and includes a pinion 541 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 and a pinion 541 meshed with the pinion 541. and a crank gear 542. The crank gear 542 has a connecting pin 542 a protruding from a position eccentric from its rotation center (support shaft 512 ) and inserted into the crank groove 533 of the displacement member 530 .

According to the central rotation unit 500 configured in this way, the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 is transmitted to the crank gear 542 via the pinion 541, and when the crank gear 542 is rotated, the crank gear 542 is rotated. Along with the rotation, the connecting pin 542a is displaced while drawing an arc-shaped trajectory, and the displacement of the connecting pin 542a acts on the inner wall surface of the crank groove 533, thereby displacing one side (the left side in FIG. 27 and the right side in FIG. 28). A member 530 is rotated around a rotating shaft 531 . In this case, the other displacement member 530 is also synchronously rotated via the connecting gear 532 . As a result, the pair of displacement members 530 are retracted to the projecting position (see FIGS. 7 and 26(a)) projecting into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and the rear surface of the luminous decoration unit 400. It is rotatable between the retracted position (see FIGS. 8 and 26(b)).

Next, the right rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 40. FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 600, and FIGS. 30 and 31 are exploded rear perspective views of the right rotation unit 600. FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 31 illustrates a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 600 is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the right rotation unit 600 includes a base body composed of a rear base 610 and a front base 620, and a first displacement unit displaceably disposed on the front side of the front base 620 of the base body. The member 630 and the second displacement member 640, a driving motor 650 that generates a driving force for displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 and is arranged on the rear surface of the rear base 610, and its driving and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 650 .

A part of the transmission mechanism (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653) is housed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 610 and the front base 620. As shown in FIG. A bearing recess 621 for rotatably supporting the first pinion 651 is recessed on the rear surface of the front base 620, and a sliding groove of the rack member 652 is formed to define the moving direction of the rack member 652. A pair of insertion pins 622 are provided to be inserted through 652a.

Further, the front base 620 has circular shaft support holes 624 and 625 penetrating therethrough for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 and the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654, respectively. They are arranged side by side in the width direction (transverse direction) of the front base 620 at predetermined intervals.

It should be noted that the shaft support hole 624 that supports the first displacement member 630 is closer to the opening side of the game board 13 than the shaft support hole 625 that supports the transmission member 654 (the overhang position side of the first displacement member 630, FIG. 29). left side), as will be described later, at the overhang position, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can secure the overhang area for overhanging the opening side of the game board 13, while at the retracted position and the extended position, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden behind the first displacement member 630 .

A ridge 626 and a bearing 627 protrude from the front surface of the front base 620 . The ridge 626 is a laterally elongated protrusion extending along the width direction of the front base 620 and has a substantially triangular cross section. The ridge 626 is formed such that its top is curved in an arc centered on the shaft support hole 624 when viewed from the front. When the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) is displaced, the apex of the ridge 626 can be brought into contact, and as will be described later, compared to the case where the front surface of the front base 620 is in full face contact. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the contact area and suppress the sliding resistance, and it is possible to suppress the formation of cloudiness due to rubbing on the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light transmissive material.

On the left side of the front base 620 in front view (the left side in FIG. 29, i.e., the opening side of the game board 13), an inclined surface 620a is provided by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side surface and the front surface. . Therefore, as will be described later, when retracting to the retracted position, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and unable to be displaced (see FIG. 33).

The bearing portion 627 is formed as a cylindrical body concentric with the shaft support hole 624 , and rotatably supports the rotating shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 with the shaft support hole 624 on its inner peripheral surface. A protruding portion 628 is formed to protrude radially outward and downward from the front base 620 from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627 . The protruding portion 628 can restrict the rotation of the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range and prevent the first displacement member 630 from tilting forward. Details thereof will be described later (see FIG. 40).

In the present embodiment, the bearing recess 621 is recessed in the rear surface of the front base 620 , so that the bearing recess 621 is used to move the first pinion 651 between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 610 and the front base 620 . It can be held rotatably. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to fasten and fix the first pinion 651 to the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing the parts cost and assembly cost.

On the other hand, when the bearing recess 621 is recessed in the rear surface of the front base 620 , a projecting portion 623 protrudes from the front of the front base 620 along with the recess. In this embodiment, since a part of the second displacement member 640 is pivotally supported on the distal end side of the first displacement member 630, when the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced, the front-rear direction sway is likely to occur, and there is a risk that the second displacement member 640 will interfere with the protruding portion 623, but such interference can be suppressed by the ridge 626. As shown in FIG. The details will be described later (see FIG. 39).

The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 651 attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, a second pinion 653 fastened and fixed to the rotating shaft 654a of the transmission member 654, and the first pinion 651 and the second pinion 653 having teeth. and a rack member 652 formed as a rack in which a rack gear to be combined is tooth-cut on the side surface of a flat member.

The rack member 652 is provided with two sliding grooves 652a extending along its longitudinal direction and having an elongated hole shape when viewed from the front. By doing so, the moving direction is held in a specified state. That is, the rack member 652 is held between the facing surfaces of the rear base 610 and the front base 620 so as to be linearly movable.

The transmission member 654 includes a rotating shaft 654a protruding from the back surface of one end, a drive pin 654b protruding from the front surface of the other end opposite to the rotating shaft 654a, and the rotating shaft 654a and the drive pin. A recessed portion 654c formed by recessing an arcuate portion between 654b when viewed from the front. Supported.

The drive pin 654b is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a first groove 635 and a second groove 641b of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, which will be described later. The arcuate shape of the recessed portion 654c in front view is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 (that is, in a shape capable of receiving the bearing portion 627 on its inner peripheral side).

Therefore, while the arrangement position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 is brought close to the arrangement position of the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630, interference with the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 is suppressed, and the transmission member The rotatable range of 654 can be increased. Therefore, as will be described later, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be further displaced while miniaturizing the entire right rotation unit 600 (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 651 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 , the rotation of the first pinion 651 is transmitted to the second pinion 653 via the linear motion of the rack member 652 . As the second pinion 653 is rotated, the transmission member 654 is rotated around the shaft support hole 625 of the front base 620 . As will be described later, by rotating the transmission member 654 and causing the drive pin 654b to act on the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b, the displacement corresponding to the shape of the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b can be changed to the second groove. Each of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be operated independently (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

A rotation shaft 631, support shafts 632 and 633, and a contact portion 634 are provided on the rear surface of the first displacement member 630, and a first groove 635 is provided thereon. As described above, the rotating shaft 631 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted through the shaft support hole 624 of the front base 620 . rotatably supported on the A retainer C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 624 is fastened and fixed to the axial end face of the rotation shaft 631 , thereby restricting the rotation shaft 631 from slipping out of the shaft support hole 624 .

The support shafts 632 and 633 are shaft-shaped bodies having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640, respectively. That is, the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 are rotatably held on the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 via support shafts 632 and 633, respectively.

A pair of abutting portions 634 are arranged around the rotating shaft 631 at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. A protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is disposed between the pair of contact portions 634 when the first displacement member 630 is assembled to the front base 620 . Therefore, as will be described later, when the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 with respect to the front base 620, the contact portion 634 is brought into contact with the side surface of the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620. Thus, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be restricted within a predetermined range.

The first groove 635 is a concave groove through which the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and is formed by bending in a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first groove 635 includes an action section 635a that extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, and a first displacement member 635 that is curved in an arc shape concave on the rotating shaft 631 side. A non-interfering section 635b extending along the width direction of the member 630 (that is, formed into a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape concentric with the rotating shaft 631) is provided. As will be described later, the action section 635a is a section that receives action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, and the non-interference section 635b is a section that the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 does not interfere with.

The second displacement member 640 is formed by being divided into two members, a driven member 641 and a connecting displacement member 642 . A shaft support hole 641a is formed through the driven member 641 at the center in the longitudinal direction, and a second groove 641b and a connecting groove 641c are formed at one end and the other end of the driven member 641, respectively. Note that the connecting displacement member 642 is made of a light-transmitting resin material.

As described above, the shaft support hole 641a is a circular hole through which the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted. It is rotatably journalled on the rear surface of member 630 . A screw having a head portion larger in diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 641a is fastened to the axial end surface of the support shaft 632, thereby restricting the support shaft 632 from coming out of the shaft support hole 641a. .

The second groove 641 b is a groove-shaped opening through which the drive pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641 . The second groove 641 b overlaps the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 when the driven member 641 is supported on the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 . Therefore, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 can be inserted through the first groove 635 via the second groove 641b. In addition, the second groove 641b is formed as an action section that receives action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, as will be described later.

The connecting groove 641c is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641, and a connecting pin 643 of a connecting displacement member 642, which will be described later, is slidably inserted. That is, the second displacement member 640 is formed to be able to transmit the rotation of the driven member 641 to the connection displacement member 642 via the connection groove 641 c and the connection pin 643 .

A shaft support hole 642a is formed through the connecting displacement member 642, and a decorative portion 642b and a protruding portion 642c are formed to protrude outward across the shaft support hole 642a. A connecting pin 643 projecting toward the front side is arranged on the connecting displacement member 642 .

As described above, the shaft support hole 642a is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 633 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted. It is rotatably journalled on the rear surface of member 630 . A retainer C having a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the axial end face of the support shaft 633, thereby restricting the rotation shaft 633 from slipping out of the shaft support hole 642a.

The connecting pin 643 is inserted through the connecting groove 641 c of the driven member 641 as described above, so that the rotation of the driven member 641 can be transmitted to the connecting displacement member 642 . That is, by rotating the driven member 641 with the support shaft 632 as the rotation center, it is possible to rotate the coupling displacement member 642 with the support shaft 633 as the rotation center.

In this way, the second displacement member 640 is divided into two parts, the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642, and the driving member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are connected by the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643 to form the second displacement member. Since the link mechanism is configured by being rotatably supported by the displacement member 640, the amplifying effect of the link mechanism is used to perform the first displacement of the connection displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b), as will be described later. The amount of relative displacement with respect to member 630 can be increased (see FIG. 37). As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, the detailed configuration of the connecting displacement member 642 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 . 32(a) is a front view of the connecting displacement member 642, FIG. 32(b) is a side view of the connecting displacement member 642 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32(a), and FIG. 32(c). 32(a) is a cross-sectional view of the connecting displacement member 642 taken along the line XXXIIa-XXXIIa of FIG. 32(a).

As shown in FIG. 32, the connecting displacement member 642 is formed with an overhanging portion 642c on the opposite side of the decorative portion 642b across the pivot hole 642a. The protruding portion 642c can serve as a weight for balancing when and after being lifted.

In this case, the overhanging portion 642c is formed so as to protrude from the decorative portion 642b on the front side (lower side in FIG. 32(b)) and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member 630, which will be described later. Thus, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), rattling of the connecting displacement member 642 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be suppressed. In addition, since the overhanging portion 642c serves both as a weight and as a contacting portion with respect to the first displacement member 630, the structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

Further, the overhanging portion 642c is formed by four side walls erected on the rear side from the four sides of the bottom wall forming the front side of the connecting displacement member 642 (the side facing the rear surface of the first displacement member 630). , is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. Therefore, weight and rigidity can be ensured while reducing the outer shape. Therefore, as will be described later, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), a state in which the projecting portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, a state in which it is not visible from the front) is ensured. At the same time, the function as a weight and the function of contacting the first displacement member 630 to suppress rattling can be reliably exhibited.

The overhanging portion 642c is formed with a ridge 642c1 that protrudes from the bottom wall and extends along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 642a. It is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of 630 . Therefore, compared with the case where the entire surface of the bottom wall of the projecting portion 642c contacts the rear surface of the first displacement member 630, sliding resistance can be suppressed.

The connecting pin 643 is made of a metal material (brass material in this embodiment) and has a higher hardness than a resin material. , the surface facing the front base 620 ), and is embedded (insert-molded) in the connecting displacement member 642 .

In this case, the top of the ridge 626 of the front base 620 extends along the displacement trajectory of the connecting pin 643 when the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced. The rear end surface of the connecting pin 643 can be mainly brought into contact with the . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of cloudiness due to rubbing between the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light-transmitting resin material and the ridges 626 of the front base 620 . Therefore, it is possible to continuously exhibit the presentation effect by allowing light to pass through the connecting displacement member 642 .

Next, operations of the right rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39. FIG. 33 and 34 are front views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state during operation between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 10A and 10B are rear views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when rotating. 37 and 38 are schematic rear views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

33(a) shows FIGS. 35(a) and 37(a), FIG. 33(b) shows FIGS. 35(b) and 37(b), and FIG. 35(c) and FIG. 37(c) are in the same state, respectively, and FIG. 34(a) is FIG. ), FIG. 38(b), and FIG. 34(c) are the same states as FIG. 36(c) and FIG. 38(c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 33(c) is the same as FIG. 34(a), FIG. 35(c) is the same as FIG. 36(a), and FIG. 37(c) is the same as FIG. be.

As shown in FIGS. 33(a), 35(a), and 37(a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 630 is in an upright state, and the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are facing forward. It is arranged in front of the base 620 .

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 37A), the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second 33(b), 35(b), and 37(b) by pushing the inner wall surface of the groove 641b in the projecting direction (the right side in FIG. 37(a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654. As shown, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the projecting direction with the rotating shaft 631 as the rotating shaft. In this case, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 because the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the action section 635b of the first groove 635, and the first displacement member 640 It is displaced integrally with member 630 .

33(b), 35(b), and 37(b), the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in Fig. 37(b)), the same as in the case described above. In addition, the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 are extended by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 (Fig. 37(b) right), thereby rotating the first displacement member 630 about the rotation shaft 631 in the projecting direction, and displacing the second displacement member 640 integrally with the first displacement member 630 .

Through the states shown in FIGS. 33(b), 35(b) and 37(b), the states shown in FIGS. 33(c), 35(c) and 37(c) ), and the states shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 38(a)), the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. is reached at the connection part of the

33(c), 35(c) and 37(c) (that is, FIG. 34(a), FIG. 36(a) and FIG. 38(a)), the first displacement member 630 One contact portion 634 of the pair of contact portions 634 is brought into contact with one side surface of the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620, so that the rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the projecting direction is prevented. Regulated.

34(a), 36(a) and 38(a), when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 38(a)), the transmission member 654 The driving pin 654b moves along the non-interfering section 635b without interfering with the inner wall surface of the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 . As a result, the first displacement member 630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 38(a).

On the other hand, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 is pushed downward (downward in FIG. 38(a)) by the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654, thereby 36(b) and 38(b), the driven member 641 is rotated about the support shaft 632 in a direction to raise the connecting groove 641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(b)). The rotation of the driven member 641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 642 via the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 642 rotates about the support shaft 633 in the direction in which the decorative portion 642b is lifted ( 38(b) clockwise). That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630. FIG.

34(b), 36(b), and 38(b), the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in Fig. 38(b)), the same as in the case described above. Then, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630. As shown in FIG. After that, when the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the end of the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, FIG. ), and as shown in FIGS. 36(c) and 38(c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are arranged at the overhang position.

Contrary to the case described above, the transmission member 654 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(c)) from the extended position shown in FIGS. 34(c), 36(c), and 38(c). When driven, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves along the non-interfering section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, so that the first displacement member 630 is shown in FIG. maintained in the indicated state (position).

On the other hand, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 is pushed upward (the upper side in FIG. 38(c)) by the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654, thereby As shown in FIGS. 36(b) and 38(b), the driven member 641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 in a direction (clockwise in FIG. 642 is rotated around support shaft 633 in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(b)) in which decorative portion 642b is swung down. That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630. FIG.

34(b), 36(b), and 38(b), the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(b)). Similarly, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 in the direction of swinging down the decorative portion 642b.

Through the states shown in FIGS. 34(b), 36(b) and 38(b), the states shown in FIGS. 34(a), 36(a) and 38(a) ), and the states shown in FIGS. 35(c) and 37(c)), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. is reached at the connection part of the

Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 37(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 33(c), 35(c) and 37(c), the first displacement The inner wall surfaces of the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 are pushed in the standing direction (left side in FIG. 37(c)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654. Then, as shown in FIGS. 33(b), 35(b) and 37(b), the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 in the upright direction. In this case, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 because the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the action section 635b of the first groove 635, and the first displacement member 640 It is displaced integrally with member 630 .

33(b), 35(b), and 37(b), the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the reverse direction (clockwise in Fig. 37(b)), the same as in the case described above. Then, the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 in the upright direction, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630 . After that, when the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the starting end of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, FIG. 35(a) and 37(a), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are arranged at the retracted position.

33(a), 35(a), and 37(a), the other contact portion 634 of the pair of contact portions 634 of the first displacement member 630 is positioned at the front base. The rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the upright direction is restricted by contacting the other side surface of the projecting portion 628 of 620 .

In this way, the right rotation unit 600 rotates the first displacement member 630 in a posture in which the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are superimposed (superimposed) in the thickness direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIGS. 33 and 34). And since the second displacement member 640 is disposed on the front side of the front base 620, compared with the conventional product in which the first and second grooves are arranged side by side in the same plane, the first groove 635 Also, the planar space required for disposing the second groove 641b (that is, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the outer shape (planar space) in a front view.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an increase in size of the display device (third symbol display device 81) is required. However, even in this case, the space in the thickness direction (the front-rear direction, for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIGS. 10 and 11) is relatively large. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, if the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped and a relatively large space in the thickness direction is used, the outer shape of the right rotation unit 600 when viewed from the front is small. This is particularly effective for increasing the size of the display device.

Further, if the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped, one drive pin 654b transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission member 654 to the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, respectively. This eliminates the need for separate drive pins (transmission members) for the first and second grooves, unlike conventional products. That is, the parts can be used in common, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

As described above, the second displacement member 640 is divided into the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642, and the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are connected by the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643. Since the link mechanism is configured by being rotatably supported by the support shafts 632 and 633 of the first displacement member 630, the amplifying effect of the link mechanism can be utilized. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, the amount of relative displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this case, in this embodiment, the second displacement member 640 is divided into a driven member 641 and a connecting displacement member 642 to form a link mechanism, and a support shaft that pivotally supports the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642. By disposing 632 and 633 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, as shown in FIGS. A posture in which the member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are superimposed can be formed.

This makes it easier to hide the second displacement member 640 behind the first displacement member 630 (make it easier to make invisible to the player). Therefore, when the first displacement member 630 is tilted from the upright posture to the overhanging posture, it is possible to reduce the outer size of the right rotation unit 600 in the front view at the retracted position (see FIG. 33(a)). (see FIGS. 33(a) to 33(c)), while hiding the presence of the second displacement member 640 (decorative portion 642b) from the player, after the first displacement member 630 is tilted to the overhanging posture, The second displacement member 640 can be protruded from the back surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 34(a) to 34(c)), making it easier to perform effects that give impact to the player.

As described above, the movement of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 from the retracted position shown in FIG. 33(a) to the extended position shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 33(c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced (rotated) in the overhanging direction (that is, the falling direction, referred to as the “first direction”) while being integrated. 33(c) and 34(a), after the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 630 is stopped, as shown in FIGS. 34(a) to 34(c), the second displacement member 630 The connecting displacement member 642 of the member 640 displaces (rotates) the decorative portion 642b in a lifting direction (referred to as a “second direction”). That is, the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.

As a result, the inertial force associated with the stopping of the first displacement member 630 displaced in the first direction can be canceled by the inertial force when the second displacement member 640 starts displacing in the second direction. As a result, a series of movements from the retracted position to the extended position can be performed smoothly, which not only enhances the performance effect, but also reduces the load on the parts due to the action of inertial force and improves durability. can be achieved.

In this case, in this embodiment, since the weight of the first displacement member 630 is made heavier than the weight of the second displacement member 640, the retracted position shown in FIG. In the operation of displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 to , the heavy first displacement member 630 may be stopped first, and the light weight second displacement member 640 may be stopped last. As a result, the load on the driving motor 650 and the gears (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653, see FIGS. 29 and 30) in the transmission mechanism can be reduced.

That is, from the state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are integrally displaced in the overhanging direction (first direction) (see FIGS. 33(a) to 33(c)), the The displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33(c) and 34(a)), and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts its decorative portion 642b (second direction). The transition to the displaced state (see FIG. 34(a) to FIG. 34(c)) is made by the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moving from the action section 635a of the first groove 635 to the non-interference section 635b. Therefore, the rotation of the drive motor 650 and the gears (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653) in the transmission mechanism can be continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member 630 is stopped in the middle of such state transition, it is possible to avoid the load on the gear of the drive motor 650 transmission mechanism due to the stop.

On the other hand, the displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33(c) and 34(a)), and the direction in which the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts its decorative portion 642b (the second 34(a) to 34(c)) to a state in which the second displacement member 640 is stopped (see FIG. 34(c)), the drive motor 650 and the gears of the transmission mechanism (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653) must be stopped. However, in this case, the only member that is stopped is the second displacement member 640, which is light in weight, so the load on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

Here, as described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 extends outward on the opposite side of the decorative portion 642b across the portion (shaft support hole 642a) that is pivotally supported by the first displacement member 630. A protruding portion 642c is provided (see FIG. 32), and the protruding portion 642c can serve as a weight.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36, and 38, when the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated to lift the decorative portion 642b upward, the projecting portion 642c is formed on the opposite side of the decorative portion 642b. As a result, the weight of the overhanging portion 642c can be used to facilitate upward lifting of the decorative portion 642b. Therefore, it is possible to quickly lift the decorative portion 642b, thereby enhancing the presentation effect and suppressing the driving force of the driving motor 650 required for the lifting operation.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 34(c), 36(c) and 38(c), after the decorative portion 642b is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion 642b and the weight of the overhanging portion 642c are suspended. Therefore, compared to the cantilevered state in which only the decorative portion 642b is formed, the posture in which the decorative portion 642b is lifted can be stabilized, and at the same time, it is necessary to maintain the posture. Therefore, the driving force of the driving motor 650 can be suppressed.

In this case, as described above, the projecting portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed so that its bottom wall (projection 642c1, see FIG. 32) can contact the rear surface of the first displacement member 630. As shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, when displacing (rotating) the connecting displacement member 642, the projecting portion 642c is brought into contact with the rear surface of the first displacing member 630, thereby displacing the connecting displacement. Rattling of the member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the decorative portion 642b when it is displaced, thereby enhancing the presentation effect and suppressing wear and damage to the pivot portion due to looseness.

In addition to the role of the weight, the protruding portion 642c also plays the role of suppressing rattling by coming into contact with the first displacement member 630. Therefore, it is preferable to separately provide portions for these two roles. It can be made unnecessary, and the structure of the connecting displacement member 642 can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Furthermore, the projecting portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed in a substantially box shape as described above (see FIG. 32). As a result, weight and rigidity can be ensured while reducing the outer shape of the projecting portion 642c. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, in a state in which the overhanging portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, in a state in which it is invisible to the player in front), the connection displacement While ensuring that the member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be displaced, the projecting portion 642c reliably exhibits the function of a weight and the function of suppressing rattling by contacting the back surface of the first displacement member 630. can be made

Here, in the front base 620, as described above, the shaft support hole 624 that supports the first displacement member 630 is located closer to the opening of the game board 13 than the shaft support hole 625 that supports the transmission member 654. 29 to 31), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 630 are arranged at the overhang position (see FIGS. 33 to 38). While the projecting area for projecting the 640 to the opening side of the game board 13 can be ensured, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden behind the first displacement member 630 while it is displaced from the retracted position to the projecting position.

In this case, as described above, the front base 620 includes the bearing 627 that supports the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 (see FIG. 29), and the transmission member 654 is configured as shown in FIGS. As shown in (c), when the second displacement member 640 is displaced to the overhanging position, it is formed so as to be able to abut against the bearing portion 627 , so that the second displacement member 640 is positioned relative to the first displacement member 630 . Rotation can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member 654, which serves to transmit the driving force of the drive motor 650, can also serve as a stopper that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range. Therefore, the structure can be simplified, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

Moreover, since the bearing portion 627 is a portion for raising the first displacement member 630 from the front base 620 and arranging the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 in an overlapping posture (Fig. 29), the rigidity is relatively high, and a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be ensured, and the durability can be improved. can be improved.

Furthermore, as described above, the transmission member 654 is provided with a recess 654c corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing 627 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), and as shown in FIG. When the displacement member 640 is extended to the extended position, the bearing portion 627 is formed to be received in the recessed cutout portion 654c, so that the movable range of the transmission member 654 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the amount of displacement of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be secured accordingly. In other words, while ensuring the movable range of the transmission member 654, the position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 can be brought close to the bearing portion 627. 38, while the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position, the transmission member 654 is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, , invisible to the player in front).

As described above, the front base 620 is formed to be inclined on the left side of the front view (the opening side of the game board 13, for example, the left side of FIG. 33(c)) by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side and front surfaces. An inclined surface 620a is provided. 34(c), the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced (rotated) in the direction in which the decorative portion 642b is lowered, through the state shown in FIG. 34(b), and then to the state shown in FIG. 34(a). When formed, the inclined surface 620a can prevent the connecting displacement member 642 from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and unable to be displaced. Similarly, from the state shown in FIG. 33(c), the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) is displaced (rotated) toward the retracted position integrally with the first displacement member 630, and the state shown in FIG. 33(a) through the state shown in FIG. 33(a), the inclined surface 620a can prevent the coupling displacement member 642 from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and unable to be displaced.

In particular, in this embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is arranged in a cantilevered state with the rotation shaft 631 as a fulcrum, and the second displacement member 640 is arranged on the first displacement member 630, and the weight is reduced. As a result, the first displacement member 630 is likely to sway in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 33) (that is, sway in the direction in which the connecting displacement member 642 approaches and separates from the front base 620), and the connecting displacement member 642 The side surface of the front base 620 is easily locked. Therefore, the configuration in which the front base 620 is provided with the inclined surface 620a is particularly effective.

Further, the front base 620 is provided with the ridge 626 that protrudes from the front surface and extends along the displacement direction (rotational direction) of the first displacement member 630, as described above. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 33, 35 and 37, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, only the top portion of the ridge 626 is displaced to the second displacement member 640. can be contacted. Therefore, compared to the case where the entire front surface of the front base 620 contacts the second displacement member 640, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed. As a result, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be smoothly displaced, and the driving force required for the drive motor 650 can be suppressed.

Here, the relationship between the ridge 626 of the front base 620 and the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39(a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the connecting displacement member 642, and FIG. and a schematic cross-sectional view of a connecting displacement member 642. FIG.

As described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 is made of a light transmissive resin material. Therefore, the decorative effect can be enhanced by transmitting light emitted from the light-emitting body or the display device. On the other hand, since the connecting displacement member 642 is a member arranged to face the front base 620 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), shaking and rattling occur when the second displacement member 640 is displaced. As a result, it abuts on the front surface of the front base 620 . In this case, when the front surface of the front base 620 comes into contact with the front surface of the front base 620, the friction between the front surface of the front base 620 and the front surface of the front base 620 forms fogging on the front surface of the front base 620, which impairs light transmission.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, the front surface of the front base 620 is provided with the ridge 626, and only the top of the ridge 626 can be brought into contact with the connecting displacement member 642. It is possible to partially suppress fogging (a portion where light transmittance is impaired) formed on the connecting displacement member 642 due to rubbing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the second displacement member 640 is provided with a metal connection pin 643 for connecting the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642. The ridge 626 of the front base 620 is integrated with the first displacement member 630 along the trajectory of the connecting pin 643 when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (see FIGS. 33, 35 and 37). extended.

As a result, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, the rear end surface of the connecting pin 642 (the right surface in FIG. can be brought into contact. Therefore, the surface pressure acting on the connecting displacement member 642 from the top of the ridge 626 can be borne by the rear end surface of the connecting pin 642, and the surface pressure acting on other portions of the connecting displacement member 642 can be weakened accordingly. can. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of fogging on other portions of the connecting displacement member 642 due to friction with the ridges 626, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the function of transmitting light.

Next, referring to FIG. 40, the function of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 will be described. FIG. 40(a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630, and FIG. 40(b) is a front base viewed in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630 along line XLc-XLc in FIG. 40(a).

As shown in FIG. 40 , the front base 620 includes a bearing portion 627 that rotatably supports the first displacement member 630 . A space for disposing the second displacement member 640 can be formed between the front surface of the front base 620 and the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 because the base 620 is pivotally supported in a raised state. That is, as described above, the second displacement member 640 can be superimposed on the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 29 to 31).

As described above, the front base 620 includes the protruding portion 628 that protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, and the first displacement member 630 protrudes from the rear surface thereof. The contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the projection 628 of the front base 620, so that the first displacement member 630 can rotate relative to the front base 620 within a predetermined range. can be regulated within

In this case, the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 is erected from the front of the front base 620 as a large-diameter cylindrical body to increase its rigidity and form a dead space on the outer peripheral side. A projecting portion 628 is projected radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, and the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the projecting portion 628. The rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be ensured, and durability can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the outer shape of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 40(a)) of the first displacement member 630 is set to a size that includes the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620 when viewed from the front. That is, the front surface of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 40(a)) is formed so as to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 . As a result, rattling when the first displacement member 630 is displaced and tilting of the first displacement member 630 forward (in the direction of arrow Fr in FIG. 40(c)) can be suppressed.

In addition, the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620 receives the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 on its side surface and serves as a stopper for restricting relative displacement. Since it is possible to share the role of receiving and suppressing rattling and tilting, it is not necessary to separately provide parts for these two roles, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is arranged in a cantilevered state with the rotating shaft 631 (bearing portion 627 of the front base 620) as a fulcrum. Since the displacement member 640 is provided and the weight increases, the first displacement member 630 is likely to sway in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 40(a)). The swinging of the first displacement member 630 in the direction of approaching the front base 620 (the direction opposite to the arrow X in FIG. 40(c)), but the swinging in the direction in which the first displacement member 630 separates from the front base 620 (the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40(c)) cannot be regulated. Since it is bulky, damage near the fulcrum is likely to occur. Therefore, a configuration in which the front surface of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 to suppress forward swinging (tilting) of the first displacement member 630 is particularly effective.

In this case, the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620 protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627 and is connected to the front surface of the front base 620, so that the rigidity of the projecting portion 628 can be increased. In particular, when the first displacement member 630 tilts forward (direction of arrow Fr in FIG. 40(c)), the direction in which the tilting is supported (that is, the projection 628 is positioned between the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 and the front base 620). Since the rigidity in the direction sandwiched between the first displacement member 630 and the front surface can be increased, the forward tilting of the first displacement member 630 can be effectively suppressed.

Next, the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 48. FIG. 41 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 700, and FIG. 42 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG. 43 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 41 to 43, the left rotation unit 700 has a base body composed of a rear base 710 and a front base 720, and a base body disposed on the front side of the front base 720 so that the base end thereof can be displaced. A first displacement member 730, a second displacement member 740 displaceably disposed on the distal end side of the first displacement member 730, and a driving force for displacing the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. and a drive motor 750 disposed on the rear surface of the rear base 710, a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 750, and a connecting member ( A first connecting member 760 and a second connecting member 770 ), and a cover body 780 covering the front surface of the front base 720 on the lower end side.

A part of the transmission mechanism (the first pinion 751, the rack member 752 and the second pinion 753) is accommodated between the facing surfaces of the rear base 710 and the front base 720. As shown in FIG. A pair of insertion pins 722 that are inserted into the sliding grooves 752a of the rack member 752 are projected from the rear surface of the front base 720 to define the movement direction of the rack member 752 .

Circular shaft support holes 723 , 724 , 725 are formed through the front base 720 in a front view. The rotating shaft 754a and the rotating shaft 761 of the first connection member 760 are rotatably supported. Similarly, a circular shaft support hole 781 is formed through the cover body 780 when viewed from the front, and the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is rotatably supported in this shaft support hole 781 .

A base-side engaging member 726 is projected from the front surface of the front base 720, and a receiving concave portion 727 is formed. The base-side engaging member 726 includes a base portion 726a erected from the front of the front base 720, and a bent portion 726b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 726a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface. , the engagement surfaces of the second displacement member 740 and a displacement-side engagement member 742, which will be described later, can be engaged with each other. Thereby, as will be described later, it is possible to suppress forward tilting of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 with respect to the front base 720 (see FIG. 47).

The receiving recess 727 is a substantially rectangular recess in front view that is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 726. By forming with an opening area larger than the outer shape, it is formed so as to be able to receive the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742 . Thereby, as will be described later, at the retracted position, relative displacement of the second displacement member 730 in the approaching direction with respect to the front base 720 is permitted, and damage due to collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47(c)).

The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 751 attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 750, a second pinion 753 fastened and fixed to the rotating shaft 754a of the transmission member 754, and the first pinion 751 and the second pinion 753 having teeth. and a rack member 752 formed as a rack in which a rack gear to be combined is tooth-cut on the side surface of a flat member.

The rack member 752 has two sliding grooves 752a extending along its longitudinal direction and having the shape of an oblong hole when viewed from the front. By doing so, the moving direction is held in a specified state. That is, the rack member 752 is held between the facing surfaces of the rear base 710 and the front base 720 so as to be linearly movable.

The transmission member 754 includes a rotating shaft 754a protruding from the rear surface of one end side, and a drive pin 754b protruding from the front surface of the other end opposite to the rotating shaft 754a. It is rotatably supported on the front side of the front base 720 by being inserted through the shaft support hole 724 . The drive pin 754b is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted through a drive groove 762 of the first connecting member 760, which will be described later.

According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 751 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 750 , the rotation of the first pinion 751 is transmitted to the second pinion 753 via the linear motion of the rack member 752 . As the second pinion 753 is rotated, the transmission member 754 is rotated around the shaft support hole 724 of the front base 720 .

When the transmission member 754 is rotated, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 acts on the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 to drive the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770, as will be described later. . As a result, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 via the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770 . can be displaced with respect to the front base 720 (see FIG. 46).

The first displacement member 730 has a rotating shaft 731 projecting from one longitudinal end thereof (lower side in FIG. 42), and a shaft at the other longitudinal end side opposite to the rotating shaft 731 (upper side in FIG. 42). A support hole 732 is formed through the first displacement member 730, and a slide groove 733 having an oval shape in a front view is recessed in the rear surface of the first displacement member 730, and a connecting pin 734 is protruded. An engaged portion 735 is formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 on the other longitudinal end side and on the side of the shaft support hole 732 .

The rotating shaft 731 is, as described above, a shaft-like body inserted through the shaft supporting hole 723 of the front base 720 and the shaft supporting hole 781 of the cover body 780. It is rotatably pivotally supported on the front side of the front base 720 by being inserted through the support holes 723 and 781 . That is, the first displacement member 730 is rotatably pivotally supported on the base end side between the facing surfaces of the front base 720 and the cover body 780 .

The shaft support hole 732 is a circular hole in front view, and rotatably supports the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 . The sliding groove 733 is a concave groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and the end of the connecting shaft 790 is slidably inserted therethrough. The connecting shaft 790 pivotally supports the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 so as to be relatively rotatable. As will be described later, when the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 are driven, the connecting shaft 790 acts on the sliding groove 733 with respect to the first displacement member 730, so that the first displacement member 730 moves forward. It is displaced (rotated) with respect to the base 720 (see FIG. 45).

The connecting pin 734 is a shaft-like member having a circular cross section and is inserted into a slide groove 772 of the second connecting member 770, which will be described later. placed in Therefore, the direction in which the connecting shaft 790 slides along the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 should coincide with the direction in which the connecting pin 734 slides along the sliding groove 772 of the second connecting member 770. can be done. That is, as will be described later, when the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are driven, the form of relative displacement of the second connecting member 770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is linear motion (sliding displacement). (See FIG. 45).

The engaged portion 735 is a portion formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 extending to a position overlapping the second displacement member 740 in a rear view. The side engaging member 742 (the engaging surface of the bent portion 742b) is formed to be engageable (see FIG. 48). Thereby, as will be described later, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed at the extended position (see FIG. 48).

The second displacement member 740 includes a rotating shaft 741 and a displacement-side engaging portion 742 protruding from its back surface, a receiving recess 743 recessed from its back surface, and a flange member fastened and fixed to the end surface of the rotating shaft 741. 744 and.

As described above, the rotating shaft 741 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted through the shaft support hole 732 of the first displacement member 730. By inserting the rotating shaft 741 through the shaft support hole 732, the first displacement member A second displacement member 740 is rotatably supported on the distal end side of 730 in the longitudinal direction. The flange member 744 has a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 732 at the base end side that is fastened and fixed to the rotation shaft 741 , thereby restricting the rotation shaft 741 from slipping out of the shaft support hole 732 .

A connecting pin 744a is projected from the rear surface of the flange member 744 at a position eccentric from the axis of the rotating shaft 741 . The connecting pin 744a is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted through a connecting groove 772 of the second connecting member 770, which will be described later. As will be described later, when the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are driven, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 receives action from the connecting groove 772 of the second connecting member 770, thereby causing the second displacement. The member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 730 (see FIG. 46).

The displacement side engaging member 742 includes a base portion 742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 742a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface, As described above, in the retracted position, the engagement surfaces are formed to be engaged with the displacement-side engagement member 726 of the front base 720, and in the overhang position, the first displacement member 730 is engaged. The joint portion 735 is formed to be engageable with an engaging surface.

The receiving recess 743 is a substantially rectangular recess in a front view that is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742. The base-side engagement member 726 is formed so as to receive the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 726 by forming it with a large opening area. Thereby, as will be described later, at the retracted position, relative displacement of the second displacement member 730 in the approaching direction with respect to the front base 720 is permitted, and damage due to collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47(c)).

The connecting first member 760 has a rotary shaft 761 protruding from the rear surface of one longitudinal end side (lower side in FIG. 42) and a sliding groove 762 opened in the substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction. A connecting groove 771 and a sliding groove 772 are opened at one longitudinal end side (the upper side in FIG. 42) and at the longitudinal central portion, respectively.

The rotating shaft 761 of the first connecting member 760 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 725 of the front base 720 , and the connecting groove 771 of the second connecting member 770 is connected to the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740 . A pin 744a is inserted. Further, the other longitudinal ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are rotatably supported by a connecting shaft 790 inserted through the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 .

That is, one longitudinal end of the first connecting member 760 is displaceably connected to the front base 720, and one longitudinal end of the second connecting member 770 is displaceably connected to the second displacement member 740. A connecting portion (connecting pin 790) between the other ends in the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 770 is connected to the first displacement member 730 so as to be displaceable.

As will be described later, this allows the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 to be displaced relative to each other and relative to the front base 720, while allowing the first coupling member 760 and the second coupling member 770 to move to the first position. It can be hidden behind the displacement member 730 to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 from being exposed at the overhang position and impairing the appearance (see FIGS. 44(c) and 45c(c)).

As described above, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is inserted through the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760, and the sliding groove 772 of the second connection member 770 is provided with the first displacement member 730. connecting pin 734 is inserted.

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG. 44 is a front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIG. 45 is a front view of each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. 7 is a rear view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG. 46A and 46B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

Note that FIG. 44 illustrates a state in which the cover body 780 is omitted. 44(a) shows FIGS. 45(a) and 46(a), FIG. 44(b) shows FIGS. 45(b) and 46(b), and FIG. 45(c) and FIG. 46(c), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 44(a), 45(a), and 46(a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and arranged in front of the front base 720. is set.

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(a)), the inner wall surface of the driving groove 762 of the first connecting member 760 is protruded by the driving pin 754b of the transmission member 754. By being pushed in the direction (left side in FIG. 46(a)), the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(a)) about the rotation axis 761 thereof.

When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 moves to the connecting shaft that connects the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 . 46(a) to the left), the first displacement member 730 is pushed toward its rotation axis as shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b) and 6(b). 731 as the center of rotation, and rotates in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(a)).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770 connected to each other by the connection shaft 790 move downward (lower side in FIG. 46(a)). ), and the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 771 of the second connecting member 770 pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, thereby As shown in FIG. 46(b), the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (rotated relative to the first displacement member 730) in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(a)) about the rotation axis 741 thereof. ) is done.

In this case, the second connecting member 770 is arranged along the extending direction of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the sliding groove 772 of the second connecting member 770 so that the connecting shaft 790 and the first displacement member 730 The connecting pins 734 of the first displacement member 730 are linearly moved (slide displaced) along the longitudinal direction.

From the states shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b) and 46(b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(b)), and the first connecting member 760 When rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(b)) about the rotating shaft 761, the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the overhanging direction as described above. (Fig. 46(b) counterclockwise), and the second displacement member 740 rotates about its rotation axis 741 with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (Fig. 46(b) clockwise). relative displacement (relative rotation) to

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted as shown in FIGS. A state is formed in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhang position, and the second displacement member 740 is displaced (relatively rotated) to the maximum relative to the first displacement member 730 .

44(c), 45(c) and 46(c), the transmission member 754 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(c)). When driven, the driving pin 754b of the transmission member 754 pushes the inner wall surface of the driving groove 762 of the first connecting member 760 in the retracting direction (the right side in FIG. 46(c)), so that the first connecting member 760 It rotates in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(c)) about the rotating shaft 761 as the center of rotation.

When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 moves to the connecting shaft 790 that connects the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770. 46(c) right side), the first displacement member 730 rotates its rotating shaft 731 as shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b) and 6(b). It is rotated in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(c)) as the center of rotation.

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 770, in which the first connecting member 760 and the other end are connected to each other by the connecting shaft 790, moves upward (upward in FIG. 46(c)). 44(b), 45(b) and FIG. 44(b), 45(b) and FIG. 6(b), the second displacement member 740 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. ) is done.

From the states shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b) and 46(b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(b)), and the first connecting member 760 is When the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 46B), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the retracting direction (see FIG. 46B). 46(b) clockwise), and the second displacement member 740 rotates relative to the first displacement member 730 about its rotation axis 741 in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(b)). Displaced (relatively rotated).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the starting end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is erected as shown in FIGS. A state is formed in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position, and the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is minimized.

Thus, according to the counterclockwise rotation unit 700, since the connection member (connection first member 760 and connection second member 770) that connects between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740 is provided, such a connection member is provided. By acting between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 causes relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 730 with respect to the first displacement member 730. ).

In this case, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is installed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the first displacement member 730 protrudes from the front base 720 and is displaced in the direction in which it is spaced apart (projection direction). Then, the connecting member is exposed between the front base 720 and the second displacing member 740 and can be visually recognized by the player, thereby spoiling the appearance.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the connecting member is divided into two members, the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770, and one longitudinal end of the first connecting member 760 is connected to the front base 720, The other longitudinal end of the second connection member 770 is connected to the second displacement member 740, the other longitudinal ends of the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770 are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, and the connection Since the portion (connecting shaft 790) is displaceably connected to the first displacement member 730, even when the first displacement member 730 projects from the front base 720 and is displaced in a direction (protruding direction) in which the connecting member (The first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770) can be hidden behind the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connection member from being exposed and the appearance from being spoiled.

In this case, as described above, the second connecting member 770 is held by the first displacement member 730 in a form of linear movement (sliding displacement) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730. 730 is displaced (rotated) in the direction in which 730 protrudes from the front base 720 and is separated from the front base 720 (projection direction). Even in such a case, the second connecting member 770 can be kept hidden behind the first displacing member 730 to avoid being seen by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connection member from being exposed and the appearance from being spoiled.

Here, in this embodiment, the second displacement member 740 includes a light emitter (not shown), and an electrical connection line W for supplying power to the light emitter is wired on the back surface of the first displacement member 730. (See Figure 45). In this case, the connection line W is introduced from an opening formed in the rear surface of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740 and connected to the light emitter. Therefore, the connection line W is wired along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 on the rear surface of the first displacement member 730 . Therefore, when the connecting member is displaced on the back surface of the first displacement member 730, the connecting member may interfere and damage the connection line W.

In this case, the connecting member (second connecting member 770) is disposed on the first displacement member 730 so as to linearly move (sliding) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, as described above. , the second connection member 770 can be prevented from interfering with the connection line W. Therefore, it is possible to avoid interference with the connecting second member 770 without securing a large space for wiring the connection line W (that is, the dimension in the width direction of the first displacement member 730). The space for arranging the wire W can be reduced, and the shape of the first displacement member 730 when viewed from the front (especially, the size in the width direction) can be reduced accordingly.

Here, if the above-described connection members (the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770) are provided, the driving force of the drive motor 750 is applied to the first displacement member 730 (that is, the first displacement member 730 Even in a configuration in which a drive groove is provided and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be made to perform the same operation as described above. can.

However, in the case of this configuration, the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 is increased. That is, it is necessary for the connecting member to displaceably connect the connecting portion between the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 to the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730. It is arranged between the facing surfaces of the displacement member 730 and the front base 720 . Therefore, when a drive groove is provided in the first displacement member 730 and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove, the transmission member 754 and the connection member (connection first member 760 and connection second member 770) In order to avoid interference with the first displacement member 730, it is necessary to provide a drive groove in the first displacement member 730 at a position that does not overlap with the displacement trajectory of the connecting member. Therefore, the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 needs to have a size (area) that includes both the displacement trajectory of the connecting member and the drive groove. Make larger.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive groove 762 is provided in the first connection member 760, and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760, so that the driving force of the drive motor 750 is reduced. is given to the connecting first member 760, the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced.

That is, there is no need to avoid interference between the transmission member 754 and the connecting members (the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770), and the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 corresponds only to the displacement trajectory of the connecting members. The size (area) is sufficient, and the size (area) does not need to include the driving groove, so the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced accordingly.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48, the engagement action by the base-side engaging member 726 and displacement-side engaging member 742 will be described.

FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member 726 and displacement-side engaging member 742, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. 45(a). do.

47(a) shows the state immediately before the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted positions, and FIG. 47(b) shows the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. A state in which the displacement member 740 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated. 47(c) shows a state in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in the direction of approaching the front base 720 in FIG. 47(b).

As described above, the base-side engaging member 726 is projected from the front surface of the front base 720, and the displacement-side engaging member 742 is projected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 740. The engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 are disposed with their open sides (the distal end side of the bent portion 726b) facing each other (see FIGS. 41 to 43).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47(a), when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in the retracting direction (upper side in FIG. 47) with respect to the front base 720, the bending portions 726b of each other , 742b can enter the inner surfaces of the mating bent portions 726b, 742b, and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position as shown in FIG. , the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other.

Here, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is installed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740 are positioned relatively apart from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. The member 740 is connected by a connecting member. Therefore, in the retracted position, even if the first displacement member 730 tilts the tip portion (that is, the second displacement member 740) on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 731 in the direction (forward) away from the front base 720, By the action of the connecting member interposed between the base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the tilting can be suppressed.

However, in this embodiment, one longitudinal end of the second coupling member 770 is coupled to the second displacement member 740 , while one longitudinal end of the first coupling member 760 is relative to the rotation axis 731 of the first displacement member 730 . It is connected to the front base 720 at a proximal position. Therefore, at the retracted position, the rotating shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 becomes the proximal end (fulcrum), and the distal end portion on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 731 (that is, the second displacement member 740 side) becomes the free end of the cantilever. In this state, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in the standing posture. Therefore, the first displacement member 730 has a free end due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member 740. ) away from the front base 720 (forward, right in FIG. 47(b)).

On the other hand, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position, the second displacement member is engaged with the base-side engagement member 726 of the front base 720 as shown in FIG. 47(b). Since the displacement-side engaging member 742 of 740 can be engaged, the tip portion (second displacement member 740) of the first displacement member 730 opposite to the rotating shaft 731 moves away from the front base 720 (forward, It is possible to suppress tilting to the right in FIG. 47(b).

The displacement-side engaging member 742 may protrude from the rear surface of the first displacement member 730, but in this embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 protrudes from the rear surface of the second displacement member 740. be done. Therefore, the engagement position between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 can be set at a position away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 . As a result, the tip portion (second displacement member 740) of the first displacement member 730 on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 731 is effectively tilted in the direction away from the front base 720 (forward, right side in FIG. 47(b)). can be suppressed to

On the other hand, when the displacement-side engaging member 742 is formed on the second displacement member 740, the displacement-side engaging member 742 is located away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730, so the first displacement member 730 becomes susceptible to swinging in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 47), and the positional relationship between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 becomes unstable. Therefore, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted positions, it becomes difficult to engage the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 has an engaging surface on the inner surface of the bent portion 742b that is arranged in the second direction from the distal end side of the bent portion 742b toward the base end side (base portion 742a side). The displacement member 740 is slanted toward the back surface thereof. As a result, the distance between the engagement surface and the rear surface of the second displacement member 740 can be widened on the receiving side of the displacement-side engagement member 742 (the tip side of the bent portion 742b, the upper side in FIG. 47(a)). Even if shaking occurs when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, the engagement between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 can be facilitated. .

In this manner, the engagement between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 is facilitated, and when these engagements are started, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are moved to the retracted position. As the second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the front base 720 (left side in FIG. 47(b)), the second displacement member 740 is brought closer to the front base 720 side (left side in FIG. 47(b)) along with the inclination of the engagement surface of the base side engagement member 742 (bent portion 742b). be able to.

As a result, at the retracted position, the tip portions (on the second displacement member 740 side) of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are separated from the front base 720 with the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum. Not only is it possible to suppress tilting in the direction (forward, right in FIG. 47(b)), but also the projection dimension of the second displacement member 740 from the front base 720 can be suppressed, , the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are slightly elastically deformed as a whole. 720 can be suppressed to stably maintain its posture in a stopped state.

On the other hand, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 have the tip portion (second displacement member 740 side) of the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum toward the front base 720 (forward , left side of FIG. 47(b)) is allowed. In this case, the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 are plate-like bodies bent into a substantially V-shaped cross section, and when tilted, the rear or front base of the second displacement member 740 is bent. If it collides with the front of 720, it will be deformed in a bending direction, so there is a high possibility of breakage.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the receiving recesses 727 and 743 for receiving the mating bent portions 726b and 742b are recessed on the front surface of the front base 720 and the back surface of the second displacement member 740. 47(c), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are tilted toward the front base 720 (forward, leftward in FIG. 47(b)). When receiving, the corresponding bent portions 726b, 742b can be received in the receiving concave portions 727, 743. As shown in FIG. As a result, breakage due to collision between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 can be suppressed.

When tilting, the rear surface of the second connecting member 770 facing parallel to the front surface of the front base 720 collides with the front surface of the front base 720 in a face contact manner over the entire surface, so the surface pressure at the time of collision is reduced. (dispersion) can be Therefore, damage can be suppressed.

FIG. 48(a) is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 in the XLVIIIa section of FIG. 45(c), and FIG. 48(b) is an arrow XLVIIIb direction of FIG. 48(a). Fig. 11 is a side view of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 in perspective;

As described above, when the left rotation unit 700 is shifted from the retracted position to the extended position, the first displacement member 730 is extended and the second displacement member 740 is moved relative to the first displacement member 730 . is relatively displaced (rotated) around its rotation axis 741 (see FIGS. 45(a) to 45(c)).

As shown in FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b), according to this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhang position (FIG. 45(c) ), the engaging surface of the displacement-side engaging member 742 (bent portion 742b) is engaged with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacing member 730, whereby the first displacing member 730 and the second displacing member 740 are engaged. can be combined with Therefore, it is possible to suppress rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 at the extended position.

In particular, since the engagement surface of the displacement-side engagement member 742 is inclined as described above, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are slightly elastically deformed by the inclination. They can be displaced toward each other. Therefore, at the retracted position, rattling between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be suppressed, and the posture can be stably maintained in the stopped state.

In addition, the displacement-side engaging member 742 engages with the base-side engaging member 726 of the front base 720 at the retracted position to connect the second displacement member 740 to the front base 720. Since the engagement with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacement member 730 can also be used to couple the second displacement member 740 to the first displacement member 730, the portions for these two roles are separately provided. The provision can be made unnecessary, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Next, the winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 55. FIG. 49 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 50 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 65. FIG. 51(a) is a front view of the winning device 65, FIG. 51(b) is a rear view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 51(c) is a top view of the winning device 65. FIG.

52(a) and 52(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning device 65 taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 51, and FIGS. and FIG. 52(b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the winning device 65 along the LIIIa-LIIIa line and the LIIIb-LIIIb line.

It should be noted that illustration of the opening/closing plate 860 is omitted in FIG. 51, and illustration of the guide rib 813a is omitted in FIG. Further, FIG. 52(a) shows the state in which the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 52(b) shows the state in which the seesaw member 840 forms the second state.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the winning device 65 includes a front base 810, an intermediate base 820 superimposed on the rear side of the front base 810, and a rear base 830 superimposed on the rear side of the intermediate base 820. , a seesaw member 840 and a follower member 850 disposed between the facing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820, and an opening/closing plate 860 for opening/closing the winning opening 65a.

The prize winning device 65 is formed in a box shape having an internal space by a front base 810, a front base 820 and a rear base 830. In the internal space, there is a guide passage through which balls winning from the prize winning port 65a are guided. The weight of the game ball acts on the seesaw member 840 when the game ball passes through the guide passage.

The seesaw member 840 forms a first state in which one end side (one end decoration portion 853) is lowered and the other end side (other end decoration portion 843) is raised when the weight of the game ball is not applied (Fig. 52(a)), when the weight of the game ball is applied to the other end side, a second state is formed in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered (see FIG. 52(b)).

That is, the prize winning device 65 utilizes the weight of the game ball passing through the guide passage to cause the seesaw member 840 to alternately appear in the first state and the second state, and one end side (one end decoration) of the seesaw member 840 is displayed. 853) and the other end side (the other end side decoration body 843) are formed to be capable of performing an effect of vertically displacing them.

Here, as will be described later, the seesaw member 840 has a length dimension of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 larger than the length dimension of the receiving surface 844 in the direction connecting the one end side and the other end side. be. Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass continuously, the game balls stay on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the second state is likely to be maintained. In contrast, in this embodiment, even when a plurality of game balls pass continuously, the weight of the game balls prevents the seesaw member 840 from remaining in the second state. and alternately appearing can be reliably executed. The configuration of the winning device 65 for performing such effects will be described below.

The front base 810 includes a front substrate 811 forming its front surface, and a front first side wall 812, a front second side wall 813, a front first bottom wall 814, and a front second bottom wall 815 projecting from the rear side of the front substrate 811. and are mainly provided.

In the front base 810, recessed portions 811a and 811b formed by recessing the lower edge of the front base 810 are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval in the width direction. And part of the driven member 850 (the one end side decorative portion 853 and the other end side decorative portion 843) is exposed so as to be visible to the player.

The front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 are portions forming side walls of a guide passage for guiding game balls, and are arranged to face each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. The front first bottom wall 814 and the front second bottom wall 815 are parts that form the bottom walls of the guide passages, and are connected to the lower end sides of the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813, respectively.

Between the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 facing each other, an open portion on the upper end side thereof serves as a prize winning port 65a, and game balls flow into the guide passage through this open portion (winning prize port 65a). In this case, the front second side wall 813 is formed substantially vertically, while the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814 are inclined downward toward the front second bottom wall 815 and The front second bottom wall 815 is arranged at a position lower than the wall 814 . Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the guide passage from the winning opening 65a can be guided to the second front bottom wall 815 by the downward inclination of the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814 .

The front second bottom wall 815 is formed with a guide bottom surface 815a that slopes downward toward the side away from the front substrate 811 (that is, the intermediate base 830 side). Therefore, the game ball guided by the front second bottom wall 815 rolls along the downward slope of the guide bottom surface 815a and is guided to the guide passage (receiving port 821b) of the intermediate base 830. As shown in FIG.

In addition, guide ribs 813a are erected at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) on the second front side wall 813 . The guide rib 813a is formed in such a shape that the erected height from the second front side wall 813 becomes lower as it is separated from the front base 811, so that the erected end face is an inclined surface. As a result, for example, as a result of colliding with the front first side wall 812 and rebounding when flowing (dropping) into the guide passage from the winning opening 65a, the game ball advances to the front second side wall 813 at a relatively high speed. Even in such a case, the game ball can be smoothly guided toward the guide passage of the intermediate base 830 by the inclined surface of the standing tip of the guide rib 813a.

The intermediate base 820 has an intermediate substrate 821 facing the front substrate 811 of the front base 810 with a predetermined gap therebetween, an intermediate first sidewall 822, an intermediate second sidewall 823, and an intermediate bottom wall protruding from the rear surface of the intermediate substrate 821. 824 and .

The intermediate substrate 821 is formed with an opening/closing plate advance/retreat port 821a, a receiving port 821b, a delivery port 821c, and a discharge port 821d. , stopper portions 821g and 821h are protrudingly provided.

The opening/closing plate entrance/exit 821a of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for allowing the opening/closing plate 860 to move forward/backward. When the opening 65a is closed and the opening/closing plate 860 is retracted (retracted) to the opening/closing plate advance/retreat opening 821a, the winning opening 65a is opened.

The receiving port 821b of the intermediate substrate 821 is an opening for receiving the game ball guided from the front second bottom wall 815 (guide bottom surface 815a) of the front base 810 into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side. (Receiving bottom surface 821b1) is formed continuously with the guide bottom surface 815a of the second front bottom wall 815. As shown in FIG.

The delivery port 821c of the intermediate substrate 821 is an opening for delivering game balls from the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. Formed by That is, the game ball that has passed through the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 and is delivered to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the delivery port 821c.

The discharge port 821 d of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for receiving the game ball discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 , and the bottom surface of the opening is formed by the discharge bottom wall 825 . A game ball ejected from the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and received in the ejection port 821d rolls on the ejection bottom wall 825 and enters an ejection passage (not shown) connected to the rear side of the rear base 830. sent out.

The support shaft 821 e of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 and is inserted through the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 . The bearing 821f of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft hole for rotatably supporting the driven member 850, and the rotating shaft 851 of the driven member 850 is inserted therethrough.

The stopper portions 821g and 821h of the intermediate substrate 821 are portions for contacting the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 to restrict the rotation of the seesaw member 840. The stopper portion 821g is located at the other longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840. The stopper portion 821h is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface (surface opposite to the discharging surface 846), and the stopper portion 821h is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface (surface opposite to the receiving surface 844) on one longitudinal end side of the seesaw member 840. be done.

The first state of the seesaw member 840 is formed by restricting the rotation of the seesaw member 840 by the stopper portion 821h (see FIG. 52(a)). It is formed by being restricted by the portion 821g (see FIG. 52(b)).

Here, as described above, the stopper portion 821g is formed at a position where it can come into contact with the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 opposite to the ejection surface 846, so that the ejection of the game ball can be stabilized. That is, when a game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and the second state is formed by the weight thereof, the stopper portion 821g supports the lower surface opposite to the discharge surface 846. Therefore, for example, the stopper portion 821h is supported. As compared with the case where the stopper portion 821g supports a position near the support shaft 821e (for example, the lower surface on the side opposite to the inclined surface 845), the seesaw member 840 can be prevented from swinging on the discharge surface 846 side. As a result, the discharge of game balls from the discharge surface 846 can be stabilized.

The intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 form the side walls of the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 (the passage for guiding the game balls received from the receiving port 821b to the delivery port 821c), and are separated by a predetermined interval. They are arranged facing each other while being separated from each other. That is, the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 receive the game ball sent out along the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 52(a)) from the guide passage on the side of the front base 810 through the receiving opening 821b and The received game ball is directed toward the intermediate bottom wall 824 and guided along a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52(a)).

The intermediate bottom wall 824 forms the bottom wall of the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side, and is connected to the lower end sides of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, respectively. The intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed with a guide bottom surface 824a that slopes downward toward the delivery port 821c side (that is, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840). A game ball guided through the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, passes through the delivery port 821c, and reaches the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in a substantially horizontal direction (Fig. 52(a) in the lateral direction).

In this way, the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 is provided with an intermediate bottom wall 824 (a guide bottom surface 824a), and the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a is moved to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in a substantially horizontal direction. Since it is guided from the side, the game balls can be guided one by one to the receiving surface 844, and a plurality of game balls can be placed on the receiving surface 844 as in the case of the form in which the game balls are dropped from above the receiving surface 844. Avoid stacking balls. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage, the seesaw member 840 can be easily switched between the first state and the second state.

Here, the extension length of the guide passage that guides the game ball along the substantially horizontal direction toward the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 of the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 is twice the diameter of the game ball. It is preferable to set the following. In this embodiment, the horizontal distance dimension L (see FIG. 52(a)) from the extended end of the guide bottom surface 824a to the rear wall 831 of the rear base 830, which will be described later, is set to 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. be done. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

In addition, the facing interval between the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 is set to a size equivalent to the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, since the position of the game ball can be defined between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, the seesaw member 840 always keeps the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a and delivered from the delivery port 821c. can be received by the receiving surface 844 (guided to the same position on the receiving surface 844).

In this case, the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed so that, in the first state, the height position of the end of the downward slope is higher than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 ( See FIG. 53(a)). Thereby, as will be described later, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the transition to the second state can be quickly performed.

On the other hand, in the second state, the height position of the end of the downward slope is formed to be lower than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (see FIG. 53(b)). Thereby, as will be described later, a step formed between the guide bottom surface 824a and the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 can be used to easily lower the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, thereby forming the first state. can be made easier.

The rear base 830 mainly comprises a rear wall 831 , a discharge side wall 832 and a discharge ceiling wall 833 . The rear wall 831 abuts against the rear side end surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822, the intermediate second side wall 823, and the intermediate bottom wall 824 of the intermediate base body 820 (that is, covers the rear side open portion). It forms the back side wall (back wall) of the guide passage.

The discharge side wall 832 and the discharge ceiling wall 833 form the side wall and the ceiling wall of the guide passage for guiding the game ball from the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 to the discharge passage (not shown), and the discharge port 821d. along the outer edge of the That is, the cross-sectional shape of the guide passage taken in by the discharge bottom wall 825 of the intermediate base 820 and the discharge side wall 832 and discharge ceiling wall 833 of the rear base 830 is substantially the same as the shape of the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820. be. As a result, the width of the guide passage can be ensured, so that a plurality of game balls can be guided smoothly. Further, even when the later game ball collides with the previous game ball on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and bounces up, the latter game ball can be guided smoothly. Details will be described later.

The seesaw member 840 includes a bearing 841 formed at a substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction, a connecting pin 842 formed at one end side in the longitudinal direction, a decorative portion 843 formed at the other end side in the longitudinal direction, and a It mainly includes a receiving surface 844 , an inclined surface 845 and a discharge surface 846 that are formed, and a claw portion 847 erected on the discharge surface 846 .

As described above, the bearing 841 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 821e projecting from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820 is rotatably inserted. 840 is rotatably journalled between opposing surfaces of front base 810 and intermediate base 820 .

The connecting pin 842 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is slidably inserted into a connecting groove 852 (described later) of the driven member 850 . Thereby, the rotation of the seesaw member 840 can be transmitted to the driven member 850 . That is, when the seesaw member 840 rotates about the support shaft 821e, the connecting pin 842 acts on the connecting groove 852, so that the driven member 850 rotates about the rotating shaft 851. .

The other end decorative portion 843 is a portion with a decoration such as a pattern on the front, and is exposed to the player through the cutout portion 811b of the front base 810 so as to be visible to the player, as described above.

The receiving surface 844 is a flat surface portion that receives a game ball that rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a in the guide passage of the intermediate base 820 and is delivered from the delivery port 821c. It is a flat surface-like part for rolling the received game ball to the discharge surface 846 .

The receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 are not dependent on the rotational position of the seesaw member 840, i.e., in a no-load state where no game ball is placed on the seesaw member 840 (i.e., the first state, see FIG. 52(a)). ) is formed in a shape with a downward slope toward the discharge surface 846 . Therefore, in either the first state or the second state, the game ball received by the receiving surface 644 can roll toward the discharge surface 646 from the receiving surface 644 and the inclined surface 643 .

Here, in this embodiment, since the receiving surface 844 is located on the one longitudinal end side (the left side in FIG. 52(a)) of the seesaw member 840 relative to the axial center of the bearing 841, the receiving surface 844 is in the second state (the other end side is lowered). 52(b)), when the receiving surface 844 receives a game ball, the weight of the received game ball causes the one end in the longitudinal direction (receiving surface 844 side) to move. can be lowered. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

The discharge surface 846 is a flat surface-shaped part for sending out (discharging) the game ball from the seesaw member 840 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820, and is arranged from the front base 810 side to the intermediate base 820 side (FIG. 52(b)). It is formed so as to be inclined downward from the front side of the paper to the back side. Therefore, when the game ball rolls up to the discharge surface 846, the game ball can roll toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 due to the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846.

The pawl portion 847 switches the rolling direction of the game ball to the direction toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 when the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840. It is provided with a guide surface 847a formed as an inclined surface that guides the abutted game ball toward the discharge port 821d. This makes it easier for the game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 to flow into the discharge port 821d quickly. Therefore, as will be described later, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are formed. alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

In this case, the claw portion 847 is formed on the other end in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, and is biased toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d) in the width direction of the seesaw member 840. is set. As a result, as will be described later, when the position of the game ball rolling on the output surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, , the time during which the second state is formed) can be easily made constant, and as a result, alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

The driven member 850 has a rotating shaft 851 protruding from the rear surface of the driven member 850 at the other end in the longitudinal direction. and a connecting groove 852 formed in the front of the driven member 850 and a one-end decorative portion 853 exposed to the player through the cutout 811b of the front base 810 so as to be visible to the player. Prepare for.

The rotating shaft 851 is a shaft-shaped body rotatably inserted through the bearing 821f projecting from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820, as described above. are rotatably journalled between the facing surfaces of front base 810 and intermediate base 820 .

As described above, the connecting groove 852 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is slidably inserted. , the driven member 850 is rotated as the seesaw member 840 is rotated.

When the seesaw member 840 is shifted from the first state to the second state, the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 852 is pushed up by the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 rotates about the rotating shaft 851 as shown in FIG. (a) Rotating clockwise raises the linking driven member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) (see FIG. 52(b)). On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 transitions from the second state to the first state, the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 852 is pushed down by the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 rotates about the rotating shaft 851 as shown in FIG. (a) By rotating clockwise, the linking driven member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) is lowered (see FIG. 52(a)).

In this embodiment, the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is thus connected to the connecting groove 852 of the driven member 850, and a link mechanism is configured to rotate the driven member 850 as the seesaw member 840 rotates. A link ratio of the link mechanism is set to a ratio that amplifies the rotation angle of the driven member 850 with respect to the rotation angle of the seesaw member 840 . As a result, the movable range of the driven member 850 (one-end decorative portion 853) can be expanded, and the presentation effect associated with the displacement can be enhanced.

Here, since the seesaw member 840 can be rotated using the weight of the game ball, the transition from the first state to the second state can be easily performed at high speed and in a relatively short time. On the other hand, the transition from the second state to the first state requires rotation of the seesaw member 840 only by its own weight, so the operation becomes slow and takes a long time. In order to ensure that the seesaw member 840 alternately switches between the first state and the second state when a plurality of game balls pass through the guide passage continuously, the transition from the second state to the first state should be done promptly.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, the driven member 850 is connected to one longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840 , so the weight of the driven member 850 is applied to the one longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840 by an external force. (That is, it can be used as an assisting force for transitioning from the second state to the first state). As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required for the transition from the second state to the first state. Alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be facilitated.

Next, the operation of the winning device 65 will be described. When game balls flow into the guide passage on the side of the front base 810 from the winning opening 65a, the game balls are collected on the front second bottom wall 815 and roll on the guide bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815. 53(a) and 53(b)), and flows from the receiving port 821b of the intermediate base 820 into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side.

A game ball that has flowed into the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 travels between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 in a substantially vertical direction (downward direction in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b)). and reach the intermediate bottom wall 824 . The guiding direction of the game ball that reaches the intermediate bottom wall 824 is switched. That is, the game ball rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, is guided in a substantially horizontal direction (left direction in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b)), It is delivered to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the outlet 821c.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the seesaw member 840 forming the first state receives a game ball on its receiving surface 844, the game ball rolls on the receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 toward the discharge surface 846. The weight of the game ball causes the seesaw member 840 to rotate clockwise about the rotating shaft 841 in FIG. A second state is formed, as shown at 52(b). However, illustration of game balls is omitted in FIG. 52(b).

When the game ball is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 and a no-load state is formed in which the weight of the game ball is not applied to the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 rotates the rotating shaft 841 by its own weight. 52(b) about the center (the other end in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side) is raised), and as shown in FIG. 52(a), the first state is formed ( seesaw member 840 is returned to the first state).

In this case, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided to the seesaw member 840, the weight of the game balls causes the seesaw member 840 to descend to the second state (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the side of the other end decorative portion 843)). state), and it may not be possible to alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the seesaw member 840 has the receiving surface 844 located on the one longitudinal end side (the left side in FIG. As shown, even when the seesaw member 840 forming the second state receives the game ball on its receiving surface 844, the weight of the game ball supported by the receiving surface 844 allows the one end in the longitudinal direction to descend. That is, the seesaw member 840 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 52(b) about the rotating shaft 841 (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the side of the other end decorative portion 843) is raised), as shown in FIG. 52(b). A second state can be formed (made easier to form). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, since the guide passages for guiding the game balls are formed in the internal spaces of the front base 810, the intermediate base 820 and the rear base 830, a plurality of game balls can be delivered from the winning opening 65a. Even in the case of continuous inflow, it is possible to store a plurality of game balls using the guide passage and to guide the plurality of game balls to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in order. can.

However, even when a plurality of game balls are stored using the guide passage and the game balls are guided to the guide surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in order, the game balls are In the configuration where the game balls are guided by dropping from above, the plurality of game balls tend to pile up on the receiving surface 844, and the game balls are hindered from rolling from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845. Therefore, the seesaw member 840 cannot alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824 ) is formed, and the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the substantially horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIGS. 53(a) and 5(b)). can be done. As a result, the game balls can be guided one by one from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the receiving surface 844 can sequentially receive the game balls from the horizontal passage one by one). It is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from being vertically stacked on the receiving surface 844.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member 840 .

In this case, as described above, the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 guides the game ball along the substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52(a)) between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823. A horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is connected to the downstream side thereof, and the extension length of the horizontal passage is shorter than twice the diameter of the game ball. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

That is, by setting the extension length of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball (in this embodiment, the extension tip of the guide bottom surface 824a to the rear surface The horizontal distance L from the base 830 to the rear wall 831, which will be described later, is approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball), and only one game ball is present in the horizontal passage, and Since the direction in which the horizontal passage extends and the direction in which the upstream passage extends are different, when the ball flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction. It is possible to increase the time required for the flow into the horizontal passage by the change of direction.

Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball after the upstream passage (next game ball) is changed direction. While taking time, the game ball is flowed into the horizontal passage, and the subsequent game ball is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. - 特許庁That is, the later game ball is spaced apart from the previous game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 52(b) and 53(b), in the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is positioned above the downward inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). Therefore, a step in the height direction (vertical direction in FIG. 53(b)) can be formed between the receiving surface 844 and the guide bottom surface 824a. As a result, in the second state, when guiding the game ball to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 by rolling the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal path, the game ball is caused to ride on the receiving surface 844 (collide with the step). 53(b)), and this riding action (collision) can be used to facilitate lowering of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (moving downward in FIG. 53(b)). That is, the one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 can be easily lowered, and the first state can be easily formed. It is possible to facilitate switching between the state and the second state alternately.

On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 forms the first state (see FIGS. 52(a) and 53(a)), the seesaw member 840 is in an unloaded state and the guide bottom surface of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) The game ball guided from 824a and received by the receiving surface 844 is rapidly rolled toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the weight of the game ball acts on the other end of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction. It is required to descend (form the second state).

In this case, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIGS. Since the ball is also positioned downward, it is not necessary for the game ball to ride on the receiving surface 844 (collide with the step) as in the case of the second state described above, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, it is possible to quickly roll the game ball from the receiving surface 844 toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, thereby facilitating formation of the second state.

In the first state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is formed so as to be at the same height position (flat position) as the downward inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). preferably. When the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is positioned below the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal path, the game ball is dropped from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844, so that the game ball bounces, This is because a time lag and an increased load on the rotating shaft 841 of the seesaw member 840 due to the impact of the drop can be eliminated if the height is the same.

Next, the claw portion 847 of the seesaw member 840 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device 65 taken along line LIV-LIV in FIG. 52(b).

As shown in FIG. 54, the seesaw member 840 has a claw portion 847 erected from a discharge surface 846 thereof. The pawl portion 847 has a guide surface 847a which is formed to be inclined so as to approach the discharge port 821d as it goes from the inclined surface 825 side toward the other end decorative portion 843 side. As a result, when the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (left and right direction in FIG. 54) toward the other end decorative portion 843 (right side in FIG. 54), the game ball can be brought into contact with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847 to switch the rolling direction to the direction toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 (upward in FIG. 54). The time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened, and as a result, alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed. It can be done smoothly.

In this case, as described above, the claw portion 847 is located on the discharge surface 846 on the other longitudinal end side of the seesaw member 840 (the other end decorative portion 843 side, right side in FIG. 54) and in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 ( 54), it is biased toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the bottom side in FIG. 54). As a result, when the position of the game ball rolling on the output surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the second state is The formed time) can be easily made constant, and as a result, alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

That is, in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 (vertical direction in FIG. 54), the game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. A game ball that has a long distance to 821d and rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the intermediate base 820 (the side close to the discharge port 821d, the upper side in FIG. 54) has a short distance to the discharge port 821d.

Therefore, by arranging the claw portion 847 in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 so as to be closer to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. The former game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side (lower side in FIG. 54) collides with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847 at an early stage and is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d, while the intermediate base For the latter game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to 820 (upper side in FIG. 54), it is possible to delay or prevent the collision of the pawl portion 847 with the guide surface 847a. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the total time during which the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 can be brought close to the same. As a result, even if the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the weight of the game ball acts on the discharge surface 846 can be easily made constant.

Next, the outlet 821d of the intermediate base 820 will be described with reference to FIG. 55A and 55B are schematic rear views of the winning device 65, in which FIG. 55A shows the first state shown in FIG. 52A, and FIG. 55B shows the second state shown in FIG. 52B. , respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), the width dimension of the outlet 821d (horizontal dimension in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)) is more than twice the diameter of the game ball. It is set to a large size (approximately 2.5 times in this embodiment). As a result, in a state in which the previous game ball exists on the other longitudinal direction end side of the seesaw member 840 (the left side in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)), the next game ball further moves to the other longitudinal direction end side. Even when rolling toward, each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821d.

For example, the later game ball collides with the previous game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846, and the latter game ball bounces back in the opposite direction to the rolling direction (that is, the interval between the two game balls (Fig. 55 (a) and FIG. 55(b) are expanded in the width direction of the discharge port 821d), and even when these game balls are discharged to the discharge port 821d, the width dimension of the discharge port 821 is sufficient. Each of them can flow in smoothly by being secured in

Also, the height dimension of the discharge port 821d (vertical dimension in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)) is greater on the side of the inclined surface 845 than on the side of the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840. is set to the larger dimension. As a result, in a state in which the previous game ball exists on the other longitudinal direction end side of the seesaw member 840 (the left side in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)), the next game ball is further positioned on the other longitudinal direction end side. Even if it rolls toward , each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821d.

That is, the later game ball collided with the previous game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846, and the subsequent game ball was bounced upward, or bounced back in the opposite direction to the rolling direction and inclined surface Even if the game ball is bounced upward at 845, the height dimension of the discharge port 821d on the side of the inclined surface 845 can be used to allow the later game ball to flow into the discharge port 821 smoothly. On the other hand, even if the previous game ball collides with the next game ball, it is difficult to be bounced up. can be suppressed, and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

Next, the game area will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60. FIG. 56 and 57 are partially enlarged views of the game board 13, in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged. Note that FIG. 57 shows a state in which the center frame 86 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60, a nail, a pinwheel, an inner rail 61, an outer rail 62, various prize openings (see FIG. 2), a center frame 86, and the like. As described above, the front surface of the game board 13 and the area defined by the inner rail 12 is the game area (area where nails, winning holes, etc. are arranged and shot balls flow down). be.

An opening is formed in the center of the game board 13 so that a third symbol display device 81, which is a display device, can be visually recognized. In this case, conventionally, the opening of the game board 13 is made larger than the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81, and a production device arranged displaceably on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) by that amount. is secured in a visible area. However, there is a limit to enlarging the opening of the game board 13 because it is necessary to secure an area for the balls to flow down.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center frame 86 to be installed in the opening of the game board 13 (the opening 60a of the base plate 60) is made of a light-transmissive material, and a part of the center frame 86 (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as "area forming part R") forms part of the game area. As a result, the rendering device (the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 in this embodiment) can be visually recognized through the area forming portion R of the center frame 86 (see through). Therefore, the area in which the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 can be visually recognized can be enlarged while securing the area for the ball to flow down. However, in FIG. 56, in order to simplify the drawing, illustration of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 seen through the area forming portion R is omitted.

In this case, in this embodiment, the opening of the game board 13 (the opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed so that its inner edge reaches the outer edge of the game area (that is, the inner rail 61). Via the area forming part R of 86, the area in which the production device (counterclockwise rotation unit 700) can be visually recognized can be secured to the maximum.

On the other hand, the area forming portion R of the center frame 86 has a width dimension that allows only one game ball to pass through, so that the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, the area forming portion R Without the part R), it is possible to secure a maximum area in which the production device (counterclockwise rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized.

A detailed configuration of the area forming portion R in the center frame 86 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. FIG. 58 is a front perspective view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 59 is a front view of the area forming portion R. As shown in FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the region forming portion R taken along line LX-LX in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 60, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 is illustrated typically.

As shown in FIG. 58 , the center frame 86 includes a frame plate base portion 910 formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front, and an inner portion erected from the rear surface of the frame plate base portion 910 and fitted in an opening 60 a of the base plate 60 . It mainly comprises a fitting wall portion 920 and an inner edge defining wall portion 930 erected from the front surface of the frame base portion 910 opposite to the inner fitting wall portion 920 and defining the inner edge of the game area.

The frame plate base portion 910 is a portion superimposed on the front surface of the base plate 60, and the front side thereof is a region where game balls flow down. A plurality of insertion holes 911 for inserting tapping screws for fastening and fixing the center frame 86 to the base plate 60 are drilled in the frame plate base portion 910 . In addition, the outer edge of the frame plate base portion 910 is inclined downward so as to be smoothly connected to the front surface of the base plate 60 . This inclination allows smooth rolling of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60 , a columnar portion 940 , a side wall portion 950 and a downstream wall portion 960 are erected from the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 in the region forming portion R of the center frame 86 .

The columnar portion 940 is formed as a columnar body having a substantially rhombic cross section, and is arranged at an intermediate position between the inner rail 61 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (see FIG. 56). As a result, in the upstream portion of the region forming portion R, a first path M1 is defined between the columnar body 940 and the inner rail 61, and a second path M1 is defined between the columnar body 940 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. M2 is partitioned.

The side wall portion 950 is formed as a wall portion provided in parallel with the inner rail 61 on the downstream side of the columnar body 940 and partitions the third path M3 between itself and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 . In this case, the portion of the inner edge defining wall portion 930 facing the side wall portion 950 is closer to the inner rail 61 side than the portion facing the columnar body 940 .

As a result, the downstream side of the second path M2 is bent toward the inner rail 61 side (the side wall portion 450 side). On the other hand, since the first path M1 and the third path M3 are paths formed along the inner rail 61, they are connected substantially in a straight line. Further, the first path M1 and the third path M3 are formed as linear paths that allow the ball to flow down in an inclined direction when viewed from the front.

A concave groove 971 is provided in the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 . The recessed groove 971 is a portion for suppressing the flow speed of the game ball, and is formed as a recessed portion having an inverted triangular cross section, and while repeatedly bending left and right in a sawtooth shape when viewed from the front, the first path M1 and the second path M1 are formed. It extends along the route direction of the 3 routes M3.

Protrusions 972 are provided on opposing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930, respectively. The protrusion 972 is a part for suppressing the falling speed of the game ball, is formed in a substantially semicircular cross section, and extends along the erecting direction of the both wall portions 930 and 950 . Each of these protrusions 972 is disposed at a position out of phase with the curved portion of the recessed groove 971 along the direction of the third path M3.

The downstream wall portion 960 is formed as a wall portion connected to the downstream end portion of the side wall portion 950 and faces the downstream side of the third path M3. Specifically, it is formed as a wall portion substantially orthogonal to the flow direction of the third route M3. In this case, the inner edge defining wall portion 930 has a portion corresponding to the downstream wall portion 940 formed along the downstream wall portion 960 , thereby forming a fourth wall portion between the inner edge defining wall portion 930 and the downstream wall portion 940 . A route M4 is demarcated.

The width dimension of the first path M1 (interval between the inner rail 61 and the columnar body 640), the width dimension of the second path M2 (interval between the columnar body 640 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930), and the width of the third path M3 Only game balls with a dimension (opposing distance between the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930) and a width dimension of the fourth path M4 (opposing distance between the downstream wall portion 960 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930) can pass. Each is set to the width dimension. In this embodiment, it is set to be approximately 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball.

Next, the action of the area forming portion R formed in this manner on the falling game ball will be described. A game ball that is guided by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and flows down from the upper area of the game area bounces off a nail or rolls along the inner edge regulating wall portion 930, and then travels along the first path M1 or the first path. It flows into the region forming portion R from one of the two routes M2. A game ball passing through the first path M1 or the second path M2 and flowing down the third path M3 collides with the downstream wall portion 960 and flows down to the lower area of the game area via the fourth path M4.

Here, since the area forming portion R is a part of the center frame 86 and is made of a resin material, nails cannot be implanted therein. Therefore, the falling speed of the game ball cannot be reduced, and there is a possibility that the player may find it difficult to visually recognize the falling game ball.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the downstream wall portion 960 is erected on the downstream side of the third route M3 (at the confluence portion of the third route M3 and the fourth route M4) in the area forming portion R. By colliding with the downstream wall portion 960, the falling speed of the game ball can be reduced, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball.

In this case, the downstream wall portion 960 is erected from the frame plate substrate 910, that is, formed integrally with the center frame 86, so that the downstream wall portion 960 can be easily molded by resin molding using a mold. is formed as a separate part and fixed to the frame plate substrate 910 by fastening. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, the third path M3 is formed in a straight line, and the downstream wall portion 960 made of a resin material bears the portion where the game ball flows down relatively quickly, and the portion where the game ball repeatedly collides with the downstream wall portion 960 is formed. , there is a risk of damage. On the other hand, since the downstream wall portion 960 is connected to the downstream side of the side wall portion 950, the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be increased, and damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed.

In this case, an inclined surface 961 that inclines toward the fourth path M4 is formed at the connecting portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960 . As a result, the connecting portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960 can be triangular in front view as shown in FIG. 59, so that the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be increased accordingly.

Further, when the game ball that has flowed down the third path M3 collides with the inclined surface 961 and then with the downstream wall portion 960, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing in the direction in which the game ball flows backward along the third path M3. , it can be made to flow down toward the outlet of the third route M3 while reducing its flow rate. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth path M4, and the load on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed also from this point.

The side wall portion 950 is also formed integrally with the center frame 86, and can be easily formed by resin molding using a mold. There is no need to perform complicated operations such as fastening and fixing to the frame plate substrate 910, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. Further, the side wall portion 950, which serves to partition the third path M3, can also serve to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing the cost of parts accordingly. can be done.

Here, in the conventional game machine, the manner in which the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail 61 is that it collides with the nail and bounces, and then collides with the nail. Damage to the inner rail 61 was unlikely to occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the effect device (counterclockwise rotation unit 700) is directly visible through the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, without the area forming portion R). , the width of the area forming portion R is set to a narrow dimension (in this embodiment, the width dimension that allows only game balls with 1=1 to pass through the third path M3). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed by the area forming portion R. Therefore, on the upstream side of the area forming portion R, it is necessary to greatly change the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the game area (in this embodiment, it is necessary to form the second path M2). In such a form, some of the game balls (game balls flowing down the second path M2) collide with the inner rail 61 at a relatively high speed, which may cause damage (bending due to collision) of the inner rail 61. .

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 750 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61, the side wall portion 950 receives the game ball that has flowed down the second path M2, thereby preventing the game ball from colliding with the inner rail 61. can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inner rail 61 from being damaged (bending due to collision).

In other words, it is conceivable that the inner rail 61 also functions to partition the third path M3 without forming the side wall portion 750, but in this case, it is necessary to avoid collision of the game ball with the inner rail 61. Therefore, the width of the upstream side of the region forming portion R cannot be reduced, and the opening of the center frame 86 (the inner edge defining wall portion 930) must be arranged in the direction away from the inner rail 61. Therefore, the area in which the directing device (counterclockwise rotation unit 700) is directly visible is reduced accordingly. Therefore, the present embodiment in which the side wall portion 750 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61 results in maximizing the area in which the effect device (left rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized.

As described above, the side wall portion 750 is integrally formed as a part of the center frame 86 made of a light-transmitting material, so that light emitted from the light emitter on the back side of the center frame 86 (side wall portion 950, concave groove 971, etc.) It can function as a light guide that guides the emitted light P to the game area. For example, the light P emitted from the back side and introduced into the side wall portion 950 is guided to the upright end face (upper side in FIG. 60) of the side wall portion 950 and irradiated from the upright end face. Not only can the illuminated light P exert a dramatic effect, but the light P guided to the side surface of the side wall portion 950 (the surface facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930) is irradiated from the side surface of the side wall portion 950. can do. As a result, the light is guided to the front surface of the frame plate base 910 (upper surface in FIG. 60) and the side surface of the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (the surface facing the side wall portion 950), and together with the light P emitted from the upper surface or the side surface, the game The production effect by the light P that shines the area where the ball rolls (the game ball when the game ball rolls) can be exhibited.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the side wall portion 950 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61, the light P emitted from the rear side of the center frame 86 and introduced into the side wall portion 750 is directed toward the inner rail 61 side (the inner edge defining wall). The inner rail 61 can reduce leakage to the outside from the side surface of the portion 930 (opposite side of the portion 930). That is, the inner rail 61 can reflect the light P toward the standing end surface or the side surface (the side surface facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930). Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light that can be irradiated from the standing end surface or side surface of the side wall portion 950, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the guided light P.

The luminous body is arranged in the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 (not shown), and the retracted position of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 is the rear surface of the area forming portion R. FIG. Therefore, in a state in which the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 is arranged at the retracted position, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 can be visually recognized through the region forming portion R, and the light P emitted from the light emitter is guided through the side wall portion 950. It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the image. That is, the shape of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 visually recognized through the area forming portion R can be associated with the light P emitted from the standing end surface of the side wall portion 950, and the player can visually recognize the shape. The production effect by the light P can be heightened.

Here, as described above, projections 972 protrude from the facing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 . Therefore, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be made to collide with the projection 972 and its flow down can be inhibited. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball is slowed down in the region forming portion R where nails cannot be implanted, and the player can easily see the falling game ball.

In this case, the projection 972 projecting from the side wall portion 950 and the projection 972 projecting from the inner edge defining wall portion 930 are arranged out of phase with each other along the direction of the third path M3. That is, they are arranged in a zigzag pattern on the left and right facing surfaces. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball can alternately collide with the left and right projections 972 to cause the game ball to meander left and right. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be easily slowed down, and a displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the flowing direction (path direction of the third path M3) is imparted to the game ball to change the movement of the game ball. can be done.

Further, the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 is provided with the concave groove 971 formed in a sawtooth shape when viewed from the front, as described above. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball can be guided along the inner surface of the recessed groove 971 to meander left and right. Therefore, this also makes it easier to slow down the flow speed of the game ball, and also gives the game ball a displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the flow direction (path direction of the third path M3), thereby changing the movement of the game ball. can give

In addition, when the light emitted from the back side of the area forming portion R is guided toward the front surface of the game area, the recessed groove 971 recessed in the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 is used to diffuse or collect the light. Since it can be used as a lens that emits light, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the guided light.

In this case, the bent portion of the recessed groove 971 has a phase difference along the direction of the third route M3 with respect to the projection 972 projecting from the side wall portion 950 and the projection 972 projecting from the inner edge defining wall portion 930. are staggered. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball that is guided by the inner surface of the recessed groove 971 and meanders left and right can be made to collide alternately with the left and right projections 972 easily. A synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of 971 and the action of projection 972 . As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be easily made slower, and the change in movement of the game ball can be made greater.

In addition, since these protrusions 972 and grooves 971 slow down the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the third route M3, damage to the downstream wall portion 960 is suppressed and the game from the third route M3 to the fourth route M4 is suppressed. It contributes to the smooth guidance of the ball.

In addition, the terminal end side of the recessed groove 971 (the portion arranged side by side with the inclined surface 961) overlaps the downstream wall portion 960 in its extending direction and points to the exit of the third path M3. As a result, the game ball guided to the terminal end side of the recessed groove 971 can collide with the downstream wall portion 960 from an oblique direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing in the direction of flowing backward on the third route M3, and to reduce the flow speed of the game ball to flow down toward the exit of the third route M3. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth path M4, and the load on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 2013 of the second embodiment, the formation range of the area forming portion R is expanded to substantially the top of the game area, as compared with the game board 13 of the first embodiment. As a result, through the opening of the center frame 2086 (that is, not through the area forming part R), the production device (in this embodiment, the central rotation unit 400, the central rotation unit 500, and the left rotation unit 700) can be directly connected. The visible area can be further expanded than in the case of the first embodiment.

In the region forming member R, formation of the columnar body 940 (see FIG. 59) is omitted, and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 extends along the outer rail 62 . As a result, a fifth path M5 and a sixth path M6 are defined between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 in a region above the return ball prevention member 68 .

In addition, the facing interval between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 is set to a dimension larger than twice the diameter of the game ball and smaller than three times. In this embodiment, it is set to be approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. As a result, passages (fifth path M5 and sixth path M6) in which game balls can pass each other without colliding are formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930, and the center frame 2086 is formed. It is possible to maximize the above-described area where the production device can be directly visually recognized through the opening.

In addition, the windmill WM has its rotating shaft disposed substantially in the center between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 facing each other. Thereby, the game ball can pass between the outer rail 62 and the rotating shaft of the windmill WM and between the rotating shaft of the windmill WM and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930, respectively.

According to the area forming part R formed in this way, the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit and guided to the upper area of the game area by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 is guided along the outer rail 62. Thus, after passing the windmill WM, the vehicle moves along the fifth route M5. In this case, by setting the firing intensity to a value greater than the reference value, the game ball can flow down to the right side area beyond the upper top of the game area, while the firing intensity is set to a value smaller than the reference value. By doing so, the game ball can flow down along the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 (moving the sixth path M6) without passing over the upper top portion of the game area. The game ball that has moved on the sixth route M6 flows down to the third route M3 after passing through the windmill WM.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67. FIG. In the right rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, the case where two members, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642), can be displaced with the displacement of the transmission member 654 will be described. However, the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment displaces the three members of the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642), and the third displacement member 3660 as the transmission member 654 is displaced. is displaceable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 3600. FIG. 62 and 63 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 3600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, a right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment has a third displacement member 3660 slidably disposed in front of one end side (upper side in FIG. 62) of a first displacement member 3630. Prepare. As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3641d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is connected to the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 3630. , and by rotating the driven member 3641 relative to the first displacement member 3630, the third displacement member 3660 can be displaced (slid) relative to the first displacement member 3630. .

The through groove 3636 is a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc around the support shaft 632, and the width of the groove is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. be done. Therefore, the rotation of the driven member 3641 about the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630 is allowed by displacing the connecting pin 3641 d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636 .

The connecting pin 3641 d is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section and is inserted into the through groove 3636 , and its protrusion height is set to a dimension that allows it to protrude from the front surface of the first displacement member 3630 . That is, in the assembled state, the distal end side of the connecting pin 3641d can be inserted into a slide groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 described later via the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630. FIG.

A sliding groove 3661 is recessed in the rear surface of the third displacement member 3660, and a slide rail 3662 is arranged above the sliding groove 3661. As shown in FIG. As described above, the sliding groove 3661 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is slidably inserted. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641 .

The slide rail 3662 is an extendable linear guide mechanism interposed between the first displacement member 3630 and the third displacement member 3660. It consists of a front side rail connected to the front side of the rail so that relative displacement in the longitudinal direction is possible. The third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 by the extension and contraction of the slide rail 3662 due to the relative displacement of the rear side rail and the front side rail in the longitudinal direction.

When the third displacement member 3660 is arranged on the front side of the first displacement member 3630, only a part of the sliding groove 3661 overlaps with the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630 (the sliding groove 3661 and through groove 3636). Therefore, by rotating the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630 and displacing the connecting pin 3641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the connecting pin 3641d is moved to the third displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 of the 3660 (the connecting pin 3641 d presses the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 ), the third displacement member 3660 can be slid with respect to the first displacement member 3630 .

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 3600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. FIG. 64 and 65 are front views of the right rotation unit 3600 in each state during operation between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. Fig. 10 is a schematic back view of the right rotation unit 3600 in each state when rotating.

64(a) to 64(c) correspond to FIGS. 66(a) to 66(c), and FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c) correspond to FIGS. 67(a) to 67(c). c) and the same state respectively. In this case, FIG. 64(c) is the same as FIG. 65(a), and FIG. 66(c) is the same as FIG. 67(a).

Here, in the third embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 3630, so that the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement of the first displacement member 3630 and the second displacement member 3640 is the same as in the case of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a), at the retracted position, the slide rail 3662 of the third displacement member 3660 is shortened, and the connecting pin of the driven member 3641 of the second displacement member 3640 is 3641d is located on one end side of the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 (end far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, right side in FIG. 66(a)). In this case, the length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 is the dimension h1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 66(a)), the states shown in FIGS. As shown in 66(c), the first displacement member 3630 is rotated in the projecting direction with the rotating shaft 631 as the rotating shaft. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 and is displaced together with the first displacement member 3630 .

Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 does not displace relative to the third displacement member 3660 either. Therefore, since the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 does not slide in the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660, the third displacement member 3660 is integrated with the first displacement member 3630. displaced. 64(a) to 64(c) and 66(a) to 66(c), the length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 is remains at dimension h1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67(a)) from the state shown in FIGS. While the state (position) shown in FIG. After passing through, it is arranged in the extended position shown in FIGS. 65(c) and 67(c).

In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3641 moves the connecting pin 3641d to the other end side of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (support shaft 632 and the end closer to the shaft support hole 641a (left side in FIG. 67(a)).

Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the far side from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIG. 67(a)) is It is pushed up in the direction of extending the slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63). As a result, the third displacement member 3660 is slid relative to the first displacement member 3630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c) and FIGS. The length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 changes (increases) from dimension h1 to dimension h3 via dimension h2 (h1<h2<h3).

Contrary to the above case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 67(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 65(c) and 67(c), the first displacement While the member 3630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. After going through the states shown in b) and FIG. 67(b), it is placed in the states shown in FIGS. 65(a) and 67(a).

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 about the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 3641d to move toward one end of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the far end from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a). 67(c) to the right) (clockwise in FIG. 67(c)).

Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the side closer to the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the lower side in FIG. 67(c)) is Since the slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63) is pushed down in the direction of shortening, the third displacement member 3660 is slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and the third displacement member 3660 is displaced from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630. The length to the tip is shortened to dimension h1.

64(c) and 66(c), when the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 66(c)), the first displacement member 3630 rotates the rotating shaft 631. 64(a) and 66(a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, so that the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is aligned with the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660. , the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 3630 .

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, and the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640 and A configuration in which the third displacement member 3660 is displaced integrally (see FIGS. 64 and 66), and a configuration in which the first displacement member 3630 is maintained in a stopped state and the second displacement member 3640 and the second displacement member 3640 A form (see FIGS. 65 and 67) in which the third displacement members 3660 are relatively displaced individually can be formed.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 73. FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described. A third displacement member 4660 is rotatable with respect to the first displacement member 4630 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

68 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 69 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600. FIG. 68 and 69 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 4600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment includes a third displacement member 4660 rotatably pivotally supported in front of one end side (the upper side in FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630. . As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3641d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is connected to the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 4630. The third displacement member 4660 can be displaced (rotated) relative to the first displacement member 4630 by rotating the driven member 3641 relative to the first displacement member 4630 .

A slide groove 4661 is recessed in the rear surface of the third displacement member 4660, and a rotary shaft 4662 is projected above the slide groove 4661. As shown in FIG. As described above, the sliding groove 4661 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is slidably inserted. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641 .

The rotating shaft 4662 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted through a shaft support hole 4637 drilled at one end (upper side in FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630. Through the rotating shaft 4662 and the shaft support hole 4637, A third displacement member 4660 is rotatably journalled to the first displacement member 4630 . A retainer C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 4637 is fastened and fixed to the axial end face of the rotation shaft 4662 , thereby restricting the rotation shaft 4662 from slipping out of the shaft support hole 4637 .

When the third displacement member 4660 is arranged (pivotally supported) on the front side of the first displacement member 4630, only a part of the sliding groove 4661 overlaps the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 4630 (sliding). The moving groove 4661 and the through groove 3636 intersect). Therefore, by rotating the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 4630 and displacing the connecting pin 3641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the connecting pin 3641d is moved to the third displacement member. The third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 by acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 of the 4660 (the connecting pin 3641d presses the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661).

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 4600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 73. FIG. 70 and 71 are front views of the right rotation unit 4600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 10A and 10B are schematic rear views of the right rotation unit 4600 in each state when rotating.

FIGS. 70(a) to 70(c) correspond to FIGS. 72(a) to 72(c), and FIGS. 71(a) to 71(c) correspond to FIGS. 73(a) to 73(c). c) and the same state respectively. In this case, FIG. 70(c) is the same as FIG. 71(a), and FIG. 72(c) is the same as FIG. 73(a).

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 4630, thereby causing the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement of the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 3640 is the same as in the case of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 70(a) and 72(a), at the retracted position, an imaginary line L1 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotating shaft 4662) and along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 4630 , and an imaginary line L2 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotating shaft 4662) and extending along the longitudinal direction of the third displacement member 4660 is defined as a crossing angle θ1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 72(a)), the states shown in FIGS. As shown in 72(c), the first displacement member 4630 is rotated in the projecting direction with the rotating shaft 631 as the rotating shaft. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 and is displaced together with the first displacement member 4630 .

Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the third displacement member 4660, and the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 , the third displacement member 4660 is also displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630 . That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 70(a) to 70(c) and FIGS. 72(a) to 72(c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) is maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 73(a)) from the state shown in FIGS. While the state (position) shown in FIG. After passing through, it is arranged in the extended position shown in FIGS. 71(c) and 73(c).

In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3641 is caused by the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (the direction of movement of the connecting pin 3641d). The inner wall surface (upper side in FIG. 73(a)) is the direction in which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 pushes up.

As a result, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 71(a) to 71(c) and FIGS. , the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) changes (decreases) from the crossing angle θ1 to the crossing angle θ3 via the crossing angle θ2 (θ3< θ2<θ1).

Contrary to the case described above, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 73(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 71(c) and 73(c), the first displacement While the member 4630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. After going through the states shown in b) and FIG. 73(b), it is placed in the states shown in FIGS. 71(a) and 73(a).

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 is applied to the inner wall surface of the slide groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (the inner wall surface on the advancing direction side of the connecting pin 3641d, the lower side in FIG. 73(c)). ) is the direction in which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 pushes down. Therefore, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) becomes an intersection. is increased to the angle θ1.

70(c) and 72(c), when the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 72(c)), the first displacement member 4630 moves the rotating shaft 631. 70(a) and 72(a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630, so that the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is aligned with the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630 .

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640 and A configuration in which the third displacement member 4660 is displaced integrally (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and a configuration in which the first displacement member 4630 is maintained in a stopped state and the second displacement member 3640 and the second displacement member 3640 A form (see FIGS. 71 and 73) in which the third displacement members 4660 are relatively displaced individually can be formed.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 81. FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described. A third displacement member 5660 can protrude and disappear in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

74 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 75 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600. FIG. 74 and 75 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 5600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, in the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, a third displacement member 5660 extends forward and backward (for example, FIG. 76 ( a) It is arranged so that it can appear and disappear in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). As will be described later, the distal end of the connecting pin 5641d of the second displacement member 5640 (driven member 5641) is connected to the sliding inclined portion of the third displacement member 5660 through the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 5630. 5663, and when the driven member 5641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 5630, the third displacement member 5660 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630 (in the front-rear direction). haunting) can be made.

A pair of sliding holes 5638 are formed in the first displacement member 5630 . The sliding hole 5638 is a hole having a circular cross-section through which a sliding guide rod 5664 described later of the third displacement member 5660 is inserted. be. That is, the sliding guide rod 5664 is slidably supported along the drilling direction of the sliding hole 5638, thereby supporting the third displacement member 5660 so as to protrude and retract in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630. be done.

The connecting pin 5641 d is a shaft-like body having a circular cross-section that is inserted into the through groove 3636 , and is set to a protrusion height such that the tip thereof is positioned within the through groove 3636 . That is, in the assembled state, the distal end of the connecting pin 5641 d contacts the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 in the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 5630 .

A sliding inclined portion 5663 and a sliding guide rod 5664 are projected from the rear surface of the third displacement member 5660 . As described above, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is a plate-like portion on which the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 slides. It is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined upward toward the other end (left side in FIG. 75). That is, the projecting height of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from the third displacement member 5660 is gradually increased from one end to the other end. Therefore, when the connecting pin 5641d slides on the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from one end to the other end (or in the opposite direction) as the driven member 5641 rotates, the driven member The distance between 5641 and the third displacement member 5660 is enlarged (reduced).

Here, the plate thickness of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is set to be slightly smaller than the groove width of the through groove 3636 , and the rear view shape thereof is formed in a curved shape corresponding to the through groove 3636 . That is, in the assembled state, the protruding distal end side of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636 in a state of being slidable in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the third displacement member 5660 moves back and forth with respect to the first displacement member 5630, not only the sliding guide rod 5664 but also the sliding inclined portion 5663 causes the third displacement member 5660 to slide. Since the movement can be supported (that is, supported at three locations), the forward tilting of the third displacement member 5660 can be suppressed, and the retracting operation can be stabilized.

As described above, the sliding guide rod 5664 is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section slidably supported in the sliding hole 5638 of the first displacement member 5630. A retainer C having a larger diameter than the inner diameter of is fastened and fixed, thereby restricting the slide guide rod 5664 from coming out of the slide hole 5638 .

In this case, a biasing member S formed as a coil spring is interposed between the holding body C and the first displacement member 5630 in an elastically compressed state (a state in which the entire length is shortened). The elastic recovery force of the force member S acts in the direction of separating the holding body C from the back surface of the first displacement member 5630 . As a result, the third displacement member 5660 is biased toward the first displacement member 5630 , and the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted through the through groove 3636 .

Therefore, by rotating the driven member 5641 around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 5630 and displacing the connecting pin 5641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the tip of the connecting pin 5641d is moved to the second position. The third displacement member 5660 is moved back and forth with respect to the first displacement member 5630 by acting on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (the connecting pin 5641d is slid along the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663). You can spawn in any direction.

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. FIG. 76 and 77 are front views of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 56 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state when rotating. FIG. 80 and 81 are top views of right rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c) correspond to FIGS. 78(a) to 78(c), FIGS. 80(a) to 80(c), and FIGS. 77(a) to 77(c). ) are the same states as FIGS. 79(a) to 79(c) and FIGS. 81(a) to 81(c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 76(c) is the same as FIG. 77(a), FIG. 78(c) is the same as FIG. 79(a), and FIG. 80(c) is the same as FIG. 81(a). be.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 5630, thereby causing the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement of the first displacement member 5630 and the second displacement member 5640 is the same as in the case of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 76(a), 78(a), and 80(a), at the retracted position, the third displacement member 5660 is brought close to the first displacement member 5630, and the second displacement member 5640 78 (a ) and the right side of FIG. 80(a)). In this case, the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is the dimension J1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 78(a)), the states shown in FIGS. As shown in 76(c), FIG. 78(c) and FIG. 80(c), the first displacement member 5630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotating shaft 631 as the rotating shaft. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 5630 and is displaced together with the first displacement member 5630 .

Therefore, the second displacement member 5640 does not displace relative to the third displacement member 5660 either. Therefore, since the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 in the second displacement member 5640 does not slide on the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660, the third displacement member 5660 is also integrated with the first displacement member 5630. is displaced. 76(a) to 76(c), 78(a) to 78(c), and 80(a) to 80(c), the third displacement member 5660 It is maintained in the state closest to the 1-displacement member 5630 (state in which the amount of protrusion is the dimension J1).

77(a), 79(a), and 81(a), when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67(a)), the first displacement member 5630 is While maintaining the state (position) shown in FIG. After going through the states shown in b) and FIG. 81(b), it is placed in the extended position shown in FIGS. 77(c), 79(c) and 81(c).

In this case, when the driven member 5641 is rotated around the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 5641 causes the tip of the connecting pin 5641d to move to the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660. The direction of sliding toward the end side (the end of the side where the projection height from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660 is high, the upper left side in FIG. 79(a), the left side in FIG. 81(a)) ( ) counterclockwise) rotation.

Therefore, the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 is pushed forward (to the upper side in FIG. 81(a)) by the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 . As a result, the third displacement member 5660 protrudes forward with respect to the first displacement member 5630, and as shown in FIGS. 77(a) to 77(c), FIGS. ) to FIG. 81(c), the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 changes (increases) from the dimension J1 to the dimension J3 via the dimension J2 (J1 <J2<J3).

Contrary to the above case, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 79(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 77(c), 79(c) and 81(c). Then, while the first displacement member 5630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. After being displaced and passing through the states shown in FIGS. be.

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 5641 around the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 5641d to move toward one end of the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (projection from the rear surface of the third displacement member 5660). The rotation is in the direction (clockwise in FIG. 79(c)) of sliding to the lower end in FIG. 79(c), the right side in FIG. 81(c).

Therefore, by moving the connecting pin 5641d to one end side of the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 in the third displacement member 5660, the sliding inclined portion 5663 retreats (retracts) rearward (back side) accordingly. is allowed, the elastic recovery force of the biasing member S causes the third displacement member 5660 to approach the first displacement member 5630, and the distance from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is The amount of protrusion is shortened to dimension J1.

From the states shown in FIGS. 76(c), 78(c) and 80(c), when the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 78(c)), the first displacement member 5630 is rotated in the erecting direction about the rotating shaft 631, and placed in the retracted position shown in FIGS. 76(a), 78(a) and 80(a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 5630, so that the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 is positioned at the sliding inclined portion of the third displacement member 5660. Since the back surface of 5663 is not slid, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 5630 .

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, and the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640 and A mode in which the third displacement member 5660 is displaced integrally (see FIGS. 76, 78, and 81), and a second displacement with respect to the first displacement member 5630 while maintaining the first displacement member 5630 in a stopped state. A form (see FIGS. 77, 79 and 81) in which the member 5640 and the third displaceable member 5660 are separately displaced relative to each other can be formed. In particular, according to the fifth embodiment, since the displacement direction of the third displacement member 5660 is the front-rear direction, it is possible to avoid interference with the displacement of other adjacent units, and the movable range of such other units can be reduced. can be secured. In addition, the forward projection of the third displacement member 5660 allows the third displacement member 5660 to be brought closer to the player, and a powerful performance can be performed.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 88. FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the clockwise rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the period during which the second displacement member 3640 is displaced and the period during which the third displacement member 3660 is displaced has been described. In the right rotation unit 6600, the period during which the second displacement member 6640 is displaced differs from the period during which the third displacement member 4660 is displaced. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

82 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 6600. FIG. 82 and 83 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 6600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, a right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment has a third displacement member in front of one end side (upper side in FIG. 82) of a first displacement member 4630, as in the case of the fourth embodiment. 4660 is rotatably pivoted, and the driven member 6641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, so that the second displacement member 6640 (connection displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are moved to the first displacement position. Relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to member 4630 .

In this case, in the fourth embodiment, the connecting groove 641c of the driven member 3641 is formed linearly, whereas in the sixth embodiment, the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is formed in an action section 6641c1 as will be described later. and the non-interfering section 6641c2 are bent in a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front.

As a result, both the second displacement member 6640 (the connection displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while the connection pin 643 passes through the action section 6641c1. Only the third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while the second displacement member 6640 is stopped while the 643 passes through the non-interference section 6641c2.

The connecting groove 6641c is a groove-shaped opening through which the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is slidably inserted. Extending along the width direction of the driven member 6641 while curving in an arc shape concave on the shaft support hole 641a (supporting shaft 632) side (that is, a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape concentric with the rotating shaft 631) ) and a non-interference section 6641c2.

As will be described later, the action section 6641c1 is a section that acts on the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642, and the non-interfering section 6641c2 is a section that does not interfere with the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642.

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. FIG. 84 and 85 are front views of the right rotation unit 6600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 66 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 6600 in each state when rotating. FIG.

FIGS. 84(a) to 84(c) correspond to FIGS. 86(a) to 86(c), and FIGS. 85(a) to 85(c) correspond to FIGS. 87(a) to 87(c). c) and the same state respectively. In this case, FIG. 84(c) is the same as FIG. 85(a), and FIG. 86(c) is the same as FIG. 87(a).

Here, the right rotation unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment differs from the right rotation unit 4600 of the fourth embodiment in the shape of the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641, and other configurations are substantially Since they are formed identically, the explanation of the identical parts will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 86, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 86(a)) from the retracted position shown in FIGS. As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the action section 635a of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 6640 (the driven member 6641) is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630. , the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630 .

That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 84(a) to 84(c) and FIGS. 86(a) to 86(c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) are maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

85(a) and 87(a), the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is positioned at the starting end of the working section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 (the working section 6641c and non-interfering section 6641c2). It is located at the end opposite to the connection part, Fig. 87(a) right side). In this case, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is positioned at the connecting portion between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b of the first groove 635. As shown in FIG.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87(a)) from the state shown in FIGS. While being maintained in the state (position) shown, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed downward (downward in FIG. It is rotated around the center in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 87(b)) to raise the connecting groove 6641c.

Due to this rotation of the driven member 6641, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is pushed upward by the inner wall surface of the working section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 while sliding on the working section 6641c1. As a result, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 in a direction (clockwise in FIG. 87(a)) to lift the decorative portion 642b. As a result, the connecting pin 643 reaches the connecting portion of the working section 6641c1 and the non-interfering section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c, and the state shown in FIGS. state) is formed.

In this case, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is arranged on the same side (the left side in FIG. 87(b)) as the decorative portion 642b (that is, the center of gravity of the connecting displacement member 642) with respect to the shaft support hole 642a, The connection groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is formed so that the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 can support the connection pin 643 from below. That is, the non-interfering section 6641c2 is formed such that its inner wall surface intersects at a predetermined angle with the movement direction of the connecting pin 643 when the connecting displacement member 642 rotates around the shaft support hole 642a by its own weight. be done.

Therefore, in the state shown in FIGS. 85(b) and 87(b), the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 supports the connecting pin 643 from below (restricts movement of the connecting pin 643), thereby displacing the connecting displacement member. 642 can be restricted from rotating around the shaft support hole 642a by its own weight. That is, the connecting displacement member 642 can be maintained in a stopped state with respect to the first displacement member 4630 .

85(b) and 87(b), the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660 is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641, as described above. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) changes to the intersection angle θ2 ( decremented) (θ2<θ1).

85(b) and 87(b), when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87(b)), the inside of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 The wall surface is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641, and as shown in FIGS. L2) is changed (decreased) to the intersection angle θ3 (θ3<θ2<θ1).

In this case, the non-interfering section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c is curved in an arc around the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a). 87(b) about the center, the inner wall surface of the non-interfering section 6641c2 supports the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 from below, and the connecting displacement member 642 engages the shaft support hole 642a. Rotation by its own weight as the center is restricted, but the connecting pin 643 is not pushed upward, so that the connecting displacement member 642 is not rotated about the support shaft 633 in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b. That is, the connecting displacement member 642 can be maintained in a substantially stopped state, and the rotation of the third displacement member 4660 can be continued.

Contrary to the above case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 87(c)) from the state shown in FIGS. While the connecting pin 643 of 642 passes through the non-interference section 6641c2, the connecting displacement member 642 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIGS. and FIG. 87(b)), while the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 passes through the working section 6641c1, the connecting pin 643 is pushed down by the inner wall surface of the working section 6641c1, thereby lowering the decorative portion 642b. The connecting displacement member 642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 in the direction.

The operation mode of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment thus formed will be described in comparison with the operation mode of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment with reference to FIG.

FIGS. 88(a) to 88(c) are schematic front views of a right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIGS. 88(d) to 88(g) are right rotation units in the sixth embodiment. 6600 is a schematic front view of 6600, illustrating states when operating between retracted and extended positions, respectively; FIG.

In the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630 and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced. A configuration in which the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced together (a configuration between FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b)), and a configuration in which the first displacement member 4630 is maintained in a stopped state, A configuration in which the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 (a configuration between FIGS. 88(b) and 88(c)) can be formed. can. In this case, in the latter form, the period of displacement of the second displacement member 3640 (start and end) substantially coincides with the period of displacement of the third displacement member 4660 (start and end).

On the other hand, in the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are integrally displaced (FIGS. 88(d) and 88(e) ) and a mode in which the first displacement member 4630 is maintained in a stopped state and the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 (FIG. 88 88(f)) and the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640 in a stopped state. 88(f) and 88(g)) in which the third displacement member 4660 is relatively displaced.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, the period of displacement of the second displacement member 6640 (start and end) can be different from the period of displacement of the third displacement member 4660 (start and end). More specifically, the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 is started at the same time, and the timing of stopping the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 is staggered (the second displacement member 6640 can be stopped first, and then the displacement of the third displacement member 4660 can be stopped).

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94. FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the connecting displacement member 642 and the third displacement member 3660 are displaceably disposed on the first displacement member 3630 to form the right rotation unit 3600 has been described. In the right rotation unit 7600, the third displacement member 7660 is displaceably arranged on the first displacement member 7630, and the connecting displacement member 642 is arranged on the third displacement member 7660 so as to be displaceable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

89 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 90 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 7600. FIG. 89 and 90 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 7600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, in a right rotation unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment, a third displacement member 7660 is rotatably supported in front of one end of a first displacement member 7630 (upper side in FIG. 89). , the third displacement member 7660 of which the coupling displacement member 642 is rotatably supported. As will be described later, when the driven member 7641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is rotated with respect to the first displacement member 7630, the rotation of the third displacement member 7660 Along with this, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated while changing the position of its center of rotation along a curved trajectory.

The first displacement member 7630 has a cutout portion 7639 formed at the edge of one end side (upper side in FIG. 90), and the space created by the cutout portion 7639 serves as a support shaft 7665 for the third displacement member 7660, which will be described later. It is considered to be the installation space for A connecting groove 7641 c is formed in the driven member 7641 of the second displacement member 7640 . The connecting groove 7641c is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 7641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is slidably inserted.

The groove width of the connecting groove 7641 c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 643 . Also, the total length (groove length) of the connecting groove 7641c is made longer than the connecting groove 641c in the fourth embodiment. Thereby, the relative displacement amount (relative rotation angle) of the connecting displacement member 642 with respect to the driven member 7641 can be ensured.

A support shaft 7665 protrudes from the rear surface of the third displacement member 7660 . The support shaft 7665 is a shaft-like member having a circular cross section that is inserted through the shaft support hole 642a of the connection displacement member 642. rotatably pivoted on the back of the

A retainer C having a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the support shaft 7665, thereby restricting the indicator shaft 7665 from coming out of the support hole 642a. The support shaft 7665 has a large diameter portion on the base side and a small diameter portion smaller than the large diameter portion on the tip side, and the small diameter portion is inserted through the shaft support hole 642a. That is, the large-diameter portion is a portion for raising the connecting displacement member 642 from the back surface of the third displacement member 7660. By raising the large-diameter portion, the connecting displacement member 642 moves forward and backward relative to the driven member 7641 (for example, , and the vertical direction of the paper surface of FIG. 91A) are set to be the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment.

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 7600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 and 92 are front views of the right rotation unit 7600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 76A and 76B are schematic rear views of the right rotation unit 7600 in each state when rotating.

FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c) correspond to FIGS. 93(a) to 93(c), and FIGS. 92(a) to 92(c) correspond to FIGS. 94(a) to 94(c). c) and the same state respectively. In this case, FIG. 91(c) is the same as FIG. 92(a), and FIG. 93(c) is the same as FIG. 94(a).

Here, in the seventh embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 7630, thereby causing the first displacement member 7630, the second displacement member 7640 and the third displacement member 7660 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement of the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 93, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 93(a)) from the retracted position shown in FIGS. As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the action section 635a of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 7640 (the driven member 7641) is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 7630. , the second displacement member 7640 and the third displacement member 7660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 7630 .

That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c) and FIGS. 93(a) to 93(c), the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (imaginary line L2) are maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

92(a) and 94(a), when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 94(a)), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is pushed into the first groove 635. By passing through the non-interference section 635b, the first displacement member 7630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 94(a) in the direction of lifting the connecting groove 7641c and the connecting pin 3641d.

As a result, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 7660 is moved by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 7641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is moved by the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 7641c of the driven member 7641. , are pushed upward (upper side in FIG. 94(a)).

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 94, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630, the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (virtual line L1). line L2) changes (decreases) from the intersection angle θ1 to the intersection angle θ3 via the intersection angle θ2 (θ3<θ2<θ1), and the connecting displacement member 642 moves toward the support shaft 7665 (shaft support hole 642a ) as the center of rotation in the clockwise direction in FIG.

In this case, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated about the rotation shaft 4662 in the direction of lifting the support shaft 7665 upward. The connecting displacement member 642 itself pivotally supported by the support shaft 7665 can be lifted upward.

That is, according to the seventh embodiment, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated with respect to the third displacement member 7660 around the support shaft 7665, and is rotated with respect to the first displacement member 7630 in an arc-shaped trajectory. It can be displaced (lifted) upwards. As a result, the displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be interlocked with the displacement of the third displacement member 7660, making it possible to create a more complicated mode, and the amount of upward protrusion of the decorative portion 642b (the first Crossing angle θ4), which is an angle formed by an imaginary line L3 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 7665) and along the longitudinal direction of the connecting displacement member 64 with respect to the displacement member 4630 (imaginary line L1). can be expanded to assume a posture that protrudes further upward.

Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 105. FIG. In the first embodiment, the mode of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the same in the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. Although the case where the left rotation unit 700 is formed so as to different in In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

95 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 96 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 8700. FIG. 97 is a front view of the guide portion 8773. FIG. 95 and 96 show a state in which part of the left rotation unit 8700 (back base 710 and front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, a counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 according to the eighth embodiment has a guide portion 8773 recessed in front of one longitudinal end side (upper side in FIG. 95) of a second connecting member 8770 . As will be described later, the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circular path, and the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is guided along the guide portion 8773, thereby making the second displacement member 740 relative to the first displacement member 730. The form of displacement can be different in the outward and return paths.

The connecting pin 8744a is a shaft-like body with a circular cross section that protrudes from the back surface of the flange member 8744 and is arranged eccentrically from the axis of the rotating shaft 741. Its diameter is slightly larger than the groove width of the guide portion 8773. By setting the small size, it is possible to move along the guide portion 8773 . An elastic body (not shown) made of a coil spring is accommodated in the second connecting member 8770 in an elastically compressed state, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic body causes the connecting pin 8744a to move the second connecting member 8770. It is acted in the direction to protrude from the back of the Therefore, when the connecting pin 8744 a moves along the guide portion 8773 , the tip of the connecting pin 8744 a is maintained in contact with the bottom surface of the guide portion 8773 .

The guide portion 8773 is a recessed groove having a substantially U-shaped cross section for guiding the connecting pin 8744a. is formed with directionality (see FIG. 97).

More specifically, the guide portion 8773 extends substantially linearly in a front view along the width direction of the second connecting member 8770 (a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction, the left-right direction in FIG. 97) starting from the position P1. 1 groove 8773a and a first groove 8773a connected to the terminal end of the first groove 8773a and extending substantially linearly along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 8770 (vertical direction in FIG. 97) starting from position P2. A second groove 8773b is connected to the terminal end of the second groove 8773b, and is curved and extended in an arc shape (in this embodiment, a convex arc shape in the direction away from the position P2) with the position P3 as the starting end. and a third groove 8773c whose terminal end is connected to the starting end of the first groove 8773a.

A first step 8773h is formed at the connecting portion between the first groove 8773a and the second groove 8773b. The first step 8773h has a bottom surface on the starting end side (position P2) of the second groove 8773b that is lower than the bottom surface on the terminal end side of the first groove 8773a (located on the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 97). It is the vertical plane that connects them. As a result, movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the end of the first groove 8773a to the starting end of the second groove 8773b is permitted, while movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the starting end of the second groove 8773b to the end of the first groove 8773a is prohibited. It can be regulated by one step 8773h.

Similarly, a second step 8773i and a third step 8773j are formed at the connecting portion between the second groove 8773b and the third groove 8773c and the connecting portion between the third groove 8773c and the first groove 8773a. The bottom surface of the second step 8773i on the starting end side (position P3) of the third groove 8773c is lower than the bottom surface on the terminal end side of the second groove 8773b. The bottom surface of (position P1) is formed by making it lower than the bottom surface of the third groove 8773c on the terminal side.

This allows the connecting pin 8744a to move from the terminal end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) to the starting end of the third groove 8773c (first groove 8773a), while allowing the third groove 8773c (first groove 8773a) to move. The movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the starting end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) to the terminal end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) can be restricted by the second step 8773i (third step 8773j).

In other words, the connecting pin 8744a is only allowed to rotate the guide portion 8773 along the directions of the arrows L1, L2 and L3 in the first groove 8773a, the second groove 8773b and the third groove 8773c in order. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105, the operation of left rotation unit 8700 will be described.

Here, in the eighth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides in the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), so that the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 8770, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement between the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 8770 and the first displacement member 730 is similar to that of the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, its detailed description is omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 when moving forward from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

Figures 98 and 99 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 in each state during forward movement from the retracted position to the extended position. 87A and 87B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 in each state when the forward movement is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 98( a ) and 100 ( a ), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and arranged in front of the front base 720 .

In this case, an imaginary line M1 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotating shaft 741) and along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 and the axial center of the shaft supporting hole 732 (rotating shaft 741) The angle formed by the imaginary line M2 along the longitudinal direction of the second displacement member 740 is defined as the intersection angle α1. In addition, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is positioned at the position P1 of the guide portion 8773 (the starting end of the first groove 8773a) (see FIG. 97), and the second connecting member 8770 ).

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(a)), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the direction of extension (counterclockwise in FIG. 100(a)). 100(a)), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotation shaft 731 in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100(a)). As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the projecting direction as shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 8770 is pulled downward (lower side in FIG. 101(a)), and the guide portion 8773 (first The inner wall surface of the groove 8773a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P1 moves the guide portion 8773 along the first groove 8773a. is guided in the direction of arrow L1 (see FIG. 97).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b), the second displacement member 740 rotates about the rotation shaft 741 relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(a)). rotation), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α1 to the intersection angle α2. (α1<α2).

When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100(b)), so that the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the extending direction (see FIG. 100(b)). ) counterclockwise) and is further tilted in the extension direction as shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 101(a).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 8770 is further drawn downward (lower right in FIG. 101(b)), and the guide portion 8773 ( The inner wall surface of the first groove 8773a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a moves the guide portion 8773 along the first groove 8773a in the direction of the arrow L1. Further guidance is provided (see Figure 97).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 101(a), the second displacement member 740 rotates about the rotation shaft 741 with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(b)). ), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α2 to the intersection angle α3. ) (α1<α2<α3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted to the maximum and the first displacement A state is formed in which the second displacement member 740 is displaced (relatively rotated) to the maximum with respect to the member 730 . That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the extended position.

In this case, the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the first groove 8773a along the guide portion 8773 in the direction of the arrow L1, and after passing (jumping down) the first step 8773h, hits the inner wall surface of the second groove 8773b. , at position P2 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α3 to the intersection angle α4 (α1<α2<α3 <α4).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

Figures 102 and 103 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position to the retracted position, and Figures 104 and 105 are views from the extended position to the retracted position. 87A and 87B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating on the return path. FIG. 98(a) is the same as FIG. 103(b), and FIG. 99(b) is the same as FIG. 102(a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 101(a). The rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 105(a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b). .

102(a) and 104(a), in the extended position, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is positioned at the position P2 of the guide portion 8773 (the starting end of the second groove 8773b) ( 97), the second connecting member 8770 is pulled to the bottom (lower right side in FIG. 104(a)).

102(a) and 104(a), the transmission member 754 moves in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104(a)). ), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. It is rotated in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 104(a)) as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (raised) in the retraction direction, as shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b).

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 8770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 104(a)), and the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P2 is moved to the guide portion. 8773 is guided in the direction of arrow L2 along the second groove 8773b (see FIG. 97). In this case, as described above, the second groove 8773b extends along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 8770, and relative displacement of the second connecting member 8770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 A linear motion (slide displacement) in a direction along the direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b), in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8773b (see FIG. 97), the second displacement member relative to the first displacement member 730 No relative displacement (relative rotation) of 740 about rotation axis 741 is formed. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4.

When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104(b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b), the connection first When the member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104(b)), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104(b)). 103(a) and 105(a), and is further rotated (upright) in the retraction direction.

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 8770 is further pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 104(b)), so that the connecting pin 8744a moves the guide portion 8773 to the second position. It is further guided along the groove 8773b in the direction of arrow L2, passes through (jumps down) the second step 8773i, and hits the inner wall surface of the third groove 8773c to be positioned at position P3 (see FIG. 97).

As described above, in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8773b, relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 about the rotation axis 741 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 105(a), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. be done.

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. A state is created in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position.

In this case, the second connecting member 8770 is pushed up to the uppermost position, so that the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the third groove 8773c in the direction of the arrow L3 through the guide portion 8773 and passes through the third step 8773j ( After jumping down), it collides with the inner wall surface of the first groove 8773a to be positioned (returned) to the position P1 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) returns (decreases) from the intersection angle α4 to the intersection angle α1.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first displacement member 730 is displaced (rotated) with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 in the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. ) can be the same, but the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be different.

Specifically, in the outward path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is defined as the displacement of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720. While gradually increasing in proportion to the amount (amount of rotation), on the return path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. It is possible to form a mode in which the crossing angle α4 is reduced to the crossing angle α1 in a short period of time immediately before being arranged at the retracted position.

Further, since the connecting pin 8744a is guided along each of the grooves 8773a to 8773c of the guide portion 8773, even when the transmission member 754 (first displacement member 730) is rotationally driven (displaced) at a relatively high speed, Rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 115. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circular path in which grooves having a U-shaped cross section are endlessly connected has been described. It is formed as an opening that is loosely fitted. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

106 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 107 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 9700. FIG. 106 and 107 show a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 9700 (back base 710 and front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, a counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 according to the ninth embodiment has a guide portion 9773 formed at one longitudinal end of a second connecting member 9770 (upper side in FIG. 106). As will be described later, by displacing the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 in the guide portion 9773, the form of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is different between the outward path and the return path. can do.

The guide portion 9773 is connected to a first inner wall 9773a that extends substantially linearly in a front view along the width direction (a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction) of the second connecting member 9770, and the terminal end of the first inner wall 9773a. and a second inner wall 9773b extending substantially linearly in a front view along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 9770 (vertical direction in FIG. 106); (In this embodiment, the third inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b are curved and extend in a convex shape in a direction away from the connecting portion of the second inner wall 9773b), and the end thereof is connected to the starting end of the first inner wall 9773a. The inner wall 9773c is formed as an opening that serves as the inner wall surface.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 115, the operation of left rotation unit 9700 will be described.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides in the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), so that the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 9770, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement between the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 9770 and the first displacement member 730 is similar to that of the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, its detailed description is omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 when moving forward from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

108 and 109 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating in the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 97A and 7B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in each state when the forward movement is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108( a ) and 110 ( a ), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and arranged in front of the front base 720 .

In this case, an imaginary line M1 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotating shaft 741) and along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 and the axial center of the shaft supporting hole 732 (rotating shaft 741) The angle between the second displacement member 740 and the imaginary line M2 along the longitudinal direction is defined as a crossing angle β1. In addition, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is positioned at the connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9773a) of the first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c of the guide portion 9773, and the second connecting member 9770 is located at the uppermost position (Fig. 110(a) upward).

Further, the center of gravity G, which is the center of mass of the second displacement member 740 (the point of action of the resultant force of gravity acting on the second displacement member 740), is the center of rotation of the rotation shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) when viewed in the axial direction (that is, in the figure). 110(a)), the side opposite to the connecting pin 744a (the left side in FIG. 110(a)) across a vertical line Z that passes through the axis of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) and is parallel to the direction of gravity. ).

Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight about the rotating shaft 741 in a direction to lift the connecting pin 744a upward (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)). As the second displacement member 740 rotates due to its own weight, the connecting pin 744 a contacts (is pressed against) the first inner wall 9773 a of the guide portion 9773 .

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(a)), the first connecting member 760 extends in the direction of extension (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)) about the rotation shaft 761. 110(a)), the first displacement member 730 is rotated about the rotation shaft 731 in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)). As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the projecting direction as shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 9770 is drawn downward (lower side in FIG. 110(a)), and the inner wall surface of the guide portion 9773 of the second connection member 9770 The (first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a moves the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a toward the second inner wall 9773b. be guided in the direction.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b), the second displacement member 740 rotates about the rotation shaft 741 relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(a)). rotation), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β1 to the intersection angle β2. (β1<β2).

When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(b)), so that the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the extending direction (see FIG. 110(b)). ) counterclockwise) and is further tilted in the extension direction as shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 111(a).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 9770 is further drawn downward (lower right in FIG. 110(b)), and the guide portion 9773 of the second connection member 9770 The inner wall surface (first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a moves the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a to the second inner wall 9773b. You will be guided further in the direction of

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 111(a), the second displacement member 740 rotates about the rotation shaft 741 relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(b)). ), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β2 to the intersection angle β3. ) (β1<β2<β3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. A state is formed in which the second displacement member 740 is displaced (relatively rotated) to the maximum with respect to the member 730 . That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the extended position.

In this case, the connecting pin 744a is guided along the first inner wall 9773a in the guide portion 9773 and abuts against the inner wall surface of the second inner wall 9773b, so that the connecting portion (second inner wall) between the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b 9773b). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β3 to the intersection angle β4 (β1<β2<β3 <β4).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

Figures 112 and 113 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in each state during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position, and Figures 114 and 115 are views from the extended position to the retracted position. 97A and 97B are schematic rear views of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating on the return path. 112(a) is the same as FIG. 109(b), and FIG. 113(b) is the same as FIG. 108(a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 111(a). The rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 113(a) and 115(a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b). .

112(a) and 114(a), in the extended position, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is connected to the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773. 114(a), and the second connecting member 9770 is drawn downward (lower right side in FIG. 114(a)).

Further, the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is perpendicular to the vertical line Z when viewed in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) (that is, the state shown in FIG. 114(a)). They are located on the same side (the right side in FIG. 114(a)). Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight about the rotating shaft 741 in the direction of pushing down the connecting pin 744a (clockwise in FIG. 114(a)). As the second displacement member 740 rotates under its own weight, the connecting pin 744 a contacts (is pressed against) the second inner wall 9773 b of the guide portion 9773 .

112(a) and 114(a), the transmission member 754 moves in the opposite direction (Fig. 114 ( a) counterclockwise), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(a)), so that the first displacing member 730 It rotates in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(a)) with the rotating shaft 731 as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (raised) in the retraction direction, as shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b).

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 9770 is pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 114(a)). As described above, the connecting pin 744a is in contact with (pressed against) the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773 as the second displacement member 740 rotates under its own weight. It is guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9773c along the second inner wall 9773b.

In this case, the second inner wall 9773b extends along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 9770 as described above, and the relative displacement of the second connecting member 9770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 A linear motion (slide displacement) in a direction along the direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b), in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, the rotational axis 741 of the second displacement member 740 relative to the first displacement member 730 No relative displacement (relative rotation) about rotation is formed. As a result, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4.

112(b) and 114(b), when the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 114(b)), the connection first When the member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(b)), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(b)). 113(a) and 115(a), and is further rotated (upright) in the retraction direction.

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connection member 9770 is further pushed upward (upper left in FIG. It is further guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9773c along the inner wall 9773b, and hits the inner wall surface of the third inner wall 9773c, thereby reaching the connecting portion (starting end of the third inner wall 9773c) of the second inner wall 9773b and the third inner wall 9773c. be located.

As described above, in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 about the rotation axis 741 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 113(a) and 115(a), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4. be done.

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. A state is created in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position.

In this case, the connecting pin 744a is guided along the third inner wall 9773c in the direction toward the first inner wall 9773a by pushing up the second connecting member 9770 to the uppermost position. is positioned (returned) to the connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9773a) of the first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) returns (decreases) from the intersection angle β4 to the intersection angle β1.

115(a) to the state shown in FIG. 115(b), the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 crosses the vertical line Z. , can be rotated prior to being pushed up by the second connecting member 9770 .

Specifically, when the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is positioned on the same side of the vertical line Z as the connecting pin 744a (the right side in FIG. 115(a)), the second displacement member 740 Since the connection pin 744a is pressed against the third inner wall 9773c by rotation due to its own weight, it gradually rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 115(a), the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 crosses the vertical line Z and is positioned on the opposite side of the connecting pin 744a (left side in FIG. 115(a)). is rotated in a direction to lift the connecting pin 744a upward by its own weight. That is, it rotates prior to being pushed up by the second connecting member 9770 .

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 is reduced in the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. While the modes can be the same, the mode of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 to the first displacement member 730 can be changed. The angle formed with the member 740 (virtual line M2) is displaced toward the retracted position while maintaining the crossing angle β4, and the crossing angle β4 is changed from the crossing angle β4 to the crossing angle β1 at high speed (short time) immediately before being arranged at the retracted position. A reducing aspect can be formed.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Here, the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment differs from the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment only in that it is provided with a retainer 10746, and the rest of the configuration is the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

116 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 10700 according to the tenth embodiment, illustrating a state where the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is positioned on the vertical line Z. FIG. As shown in FIG. 116, a retainer 10746 is arranged on the back surface of the second displacement member 740 in the left rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment. The retainer 10746 will now be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 117(a) is a front view of the retainer 10746, FIG. 117(b) is a cross-sectional view of the retainer 10746 along line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. 117(a), and FIG. 117(a) is a cross-sectional view of the retainer 10746 along line CXVIIc-CXVIIc of FIG. 117(a). FIG.

As shown in FIG. 117, the retainer 10746 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an internal space with a circular cross section, and a predetermined heavy load is displaceably accommodated in the internal space. In this embodiment, the liquid LQ is a predetermined heavy object, and the liquid LQ fills about 1/3 of the volume of the internal space. Therefore, according to the inclination of the retainer 10746, the liquid LQ can be displaced to one end side or the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the retainer 10746 (right or left side in FIG. 117(c)) (see FIGS. 118 to 121).

Returning to FIG. 116, description will be made. The retainer 10746 has a posture (horizontal posture) in which its longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 116) is orthogonal to the vertical line Z when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) (that is, the state in FIG. 116). It is disposed on the back surface of the second displacement member 740 at a position where the longitudinal center thereof coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 .

Therefore, when the second displacing member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side about the rotation shaft 741, the retainer 10746 in the horizontal posture is tilted so that one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction is positioned downward. , the contained heavy object (liquid LQ) is displaced to one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction (that is, the same side as the moving direction of the center of gravity G).

As a result, when the second displacement member 740 rotates around the rotation shaft 741, the second displacement member 740 and the retainer 10746 are integrally formed as compared to the case where the retainer 10746 is not provided. , the amount of change in the position of the center of mass (center of gravity G′) can be increased.

Next, the operation of left rotation unit 10700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 121. FIG. Figures 118 and 119 are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 in each state during forward movement from the retracted position to the extended position, and Figures 120 and 121 from the extended position to the retracted position. 107A and 107B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 in each state when operating on the return path.

As shown in FIGS. 118 to 121, the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction to rotate the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720, and the first displacement member When the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to 730, the retainer 10746 is tilted according to the rotational position of the second displacement member 740, and the liquid LQ filled in the internal space thereof is displaced. The retainer 10746 can be displaced to one longitudinal end or the other.

As a result, the center of gravity G' of the second displacement member 740 and the retainer 10746 can be positioned farther from the vertical line Z than when the retainer 10746 is not provided.

Therefore, in the section in which the connecting pin 744a is displaced along the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c of the guide portion 9773, the second displacing member 740 using the center of gravity G′ is rotated by its own weight to ensure the rotation of the connecting pin 744a. can be easily maintained in contact with the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c. As a result, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed, and the relative displacement (rotation) thereof can be stabilized.

On the other hand, in the section in which the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight prior to the push-up by the second connecting member 9770, it is possible to ensure that the second displacement member 740 advances by using the center of gravity G'. As a result, the rotation from the crossing angle β4 to the crossing angle β1 can be performed at a higher speed (shorter time) immediately before being arranged at the retracted position.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 130. FIG. In the first embodiment, a case where relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed in both the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position will be described. However, in the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 according to the eleventh embodiment, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed only in the forward trip and not formed in the return trip. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 illustrates a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 11700 (the rear base 710 and the front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIG. 122, in a left rotation unit 11700 according to the eleventh embodiment, a second displacement member 740 and a second connecting member 11770 are connected by a rack and pinion mechanism consisting of a pinion gear 11747 and a rack gear 11774 . In this case, as will be described later, the pinion gear 11747 is configured as a one-way clutch. By restricting the conversion of the linear motion of the member 11770 into the rotational motion of the second displacement member 740, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be formed only in the outward path.

The pinion gear 11747 is formed as a cam-type one-way clutch with a roller and a spring interposed between the inner ring and the outer ring. A gear that meshes with is engraved. In this case, when the outer ring is rotated clockwise in the rear view of the second displacement member 740, the pinion gear 11747 transmits the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740), while the outer ring rotates counterclockwise. Then, the transmission of that rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740) is cut off.

The rack gear 11774 is a gear engraved on the side surface of the second connection member 11770 and meshes with the pinion gear 11747 . The engraving range of the rack gear 11774 is a range in which the engagement with the pinion gear 11747 is released when the second connecting member 11770 is drawn downward to the maximum (see FIGS. 126(b) and 129). ).

Between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740, a biasing spring SP formed as a torsion spring made of metal is interposed. The coil portion of the biasing spring SP is fitted around the rotation shaft 741 and is elastically torsionally deformed. An arm extending from the other end of the coil portion is engaged with the second displacement member 740, and its elastic recovery force is distributed between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2). , in the direction of maintaining the crossing angle γ1.

Next, the operation of left rotation unit 11700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 130. FIG.

Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides in the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), so that the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 11770, the first displacement member 730, and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement between the first connection member 760, the second connection member 11770, and the first displacement member 730 is similar to that of the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, its detailed description is omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126, the operation of left rotation unit 11700 when moving forward from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

Figures 123 and 124 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in each state during forward movement from the retracted position to the extended position, and Figures 125 and 126 are views from the retracted position to the extended position. 117A and 117B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in each state when the forward movement is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 125(a), at the retracted position, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is the intersection angle γ1. In this case, the second connection member 11770 is in a state of being pushed up most upward (the upper side in FIG. 125(a)).

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 125(a)), the first connecting member 760 extends in the direction of extension (counterclockwise in FIG. 125(a)) about the rotation shaft 761. 110(a)), the first displacement member 730 is rotated about the rotation shaft 731 in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)). 124(a) and 126(a), the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the projecting direction through the states shown in FIGS. 123(b) and 125(b).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 11770 is drawn downward (lower side in FIG. 125(a)), so that the rack gear 11774 of the second connection member 11770 becomes the pinion gear. 11747 (outer ring) is rotated clockwise in FIG. 125(a). Rotation of the outer ring in such a direction is rotation in a direction that transmits the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

123(b) and 125(b), and then as shown in FIGS. ) is further elastically deformed in the torsional direction and rotated relative to the first displacement member 730, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is The crossing angle γ1 is changed (increased) to the crossing angle γ3 via the crossing angle γ2 (γ1<γ2<γ3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 extends to the maximum as shown in FIGS. 730 and second displacement member 740 are positioned in the extended position.

In this case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 124(b) and 126(b), when the second connection member 11770 is pulled to the lowest position, the rack gear 11774 and the pinion gear 11747 are disengaged. As a result, the second displacement member 740 receives the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP (see FIG. 122) and returns to the initial position. That is, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) returns (decreases) from the intersection angle γ3 to the intersection angle γ1.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

Figures 127 and 128 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in each state during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position, and Figures 129 and 130 are views from the extended position to the retracted position. 117A and 117B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating on the return path. FIG. 127(a) is the same as FIG. 124(b), and FIG. 128(b) is the same as FIG. 123(a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 127(b) and 129(b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 124(a) and 126(a). 128(a) and 130(a) are the same as the rotational positions of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 123(b) and 125(b). .

123 to 126), the transmission member 754 moves in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in ), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. It rotates in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 129(a)) about the center of rotation. 128(b) and 130(b) through the states shown in FIGS. 127(b) and 128(a) and FIGS. ), it is placed (raised) at the retracted position.

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 11770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 129(a)), thereby turning into FIGS. 127(b) and 129(b). As shown, the rack gear 11774 meshes with the pinion gear 11747, and the second coupling member 11770 is further pushed upward, causing the rack gear 11774 to rotate the pinion gear 11747 (outer ring) counterclockwise in FIG. 129(b). Rotation of the outer ring in such a direction is rotation in a direction that cuts transmission of that rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 127(b) and 129(b), through the states shown in FIGS. 128(a) and 130(a), the retracted position shown in FIGS. , the second displacement member 740 is not relatively rotated with respect to the first displacement member 730, and the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) are separated from each other. is maintained at the intersection angle γ1.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the forward trip, as the first displacement member 730 rotates (tilts) with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 in the projecting direction, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (tilted). The second displacement member 740 is gradually relatively displaced, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is increased from the intersection angle γ1 to the intersection angle γ3, In the overhang position, a displacement mode is formed in which the crossing angle γ1 is changed, while in the return path, a relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed (that is, the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) while maintaining the crossing angle γ1), the first displacement member 730 rotates (stands up) in the retraction direction with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720. It is possible to form a displacement mode that

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the base-side engaging member 726 is fixed so as to protrude from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. It is arranged so that it can appear in front of the. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 131 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 12700 in the twelfth embodiment. 132(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 12720, and FIG. 132(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 12720 taken along line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in FIG. 132(a).

As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, a left rotation unit 12700 according to the twelfth embodiment accommodates a base-side engagement member 12726 and a transmission member 12728 in an internal space of a front base 12720, and a second displacement member. An insert member 12745 is disposed on the back of 12740 .

The base-side engaging member 12726 is a sliding portion that is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 132(a) and the vertical direction in FIG. 132(b)) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720. 12726c, and a base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface of the slide portion 12726c (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 132(a) and the lower side of FIG. 132(b)).

The sliding portion 12726c of the base-side engaging member 12726 slides toward the front along a guide groove (not shown), thereby moving the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b from the receiving recess 727 to the front side (Fig. 132(a) paper surface). 132c (b) lower side), and the sliding portion 12726c slides toward the back side (FIG. 132 (a) back side of the paper surface and FIG. 132 (b) upper side) along a guide groove (not shown). By being displaced, the base portion 726 a and the bent portion 726 b can be retracted into the receiving recess 727 .

In this case, between the front surface of the slide portion 12726c and the rear surface of the front base 12720, an urging spring SP1 made of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically compressed state, and the urging spring SP1 is elastically restored. The force maintains the base side engaging member 12726 in the retracted state (the state shown in FIG. 132(b)). In this immersed state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 12720 are flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the base-side engaging member 12726. FIG.

A side surface of the slide portion 12726c (left side in FIG. 132(b)) is formed as an inclined surface inclined in a direction away from the transmission member 12728 toward the rear side, and the inclined surface of the transmission member 12728 is formed on the inclined surface. abutted.

The transmission member 12728 is slidably displaceable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 132(a), left-right direction in FIG. 132(b)) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720. b) right side) is exposed from the insertion opening 12720a formed in the side surface of the front base 12720; In addition, on the other end side of the transmission member 12728 (left side in FIG. 132(b)), an inclined surface inclined in a direction away from the base-side engaging member 12726 toward the front side is formed. , the inclined surface of the base-side engaging member 12726 abuts thereon.

Therefore, the inclined surfaces of the base-side engaging member 12726 and the transmission member 12728 slidably displace the transmission member 12728 in a direction approaching the base-side engaging member 12726, thereby moving the base-side engaging member 12726 toward the front side. In addition, by slidingly displacing the transmission member 12728 in a direction away from the base-side engaging member 12726, the base-side engaging member 12726 can be slid to the rear side (inside the receiving recess 727). It can be displaced (immersed).

Between the transmission member 12728 and the front base 12720, an urging spring SP2 made of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically deformed state. 12728 is maintained at a position spaced apart from the base side engaging member 12726 (the position shown in FIG. 132(b), that is, the position where the base side engaging member 12726 is retracted).

The pressing member 12745 includes a base portion 12745a erected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 12740, and an insertion portion 12745b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 12745a. In the pressing member 12745, the standing height of the base portion 12745a is set higher than the standing height of the base portion of the displacement side engaging member 742 so that the insertion portion 12745b can be inserted into the insertion opening 12720a of the front base 12720. In addition, the extension direction of the insertion portion 12745b is the same direction (parallel) as the extension direction of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the engagement action by the base-side engagement member 12726 and displacement-side engagement member 742 will be described.

FIG. 133 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 12700 for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member 12726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742, in which the second displacement member 12740 is displaced toward the retracted position. Schematically, the transition state when the 133(a) to the state shown in FIG. 133(c), the second displacement member 12740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), when the second displacement member 12740 is displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 133(a)) with respect to the front base 12720, the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 is first displaced. The tip abuts on one end side of the transmission member 12728 via the insertion opening 12720a of the front base 12720 .

From the state shown in FIG. 133(a), when the second displacement member 12740 is further displaced toward the retreating direction (left side in FIG. 133(a)) with respect to the front base 12720, the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 is By inserting the transmission member 12728 into the front base 12720 through the insertion port 12720a against the biasing force of the biasing springs SP1 and SP2, the transmission member 12728 is pushed in a direction approaching the base-side engagement member 12726 (sliding displacement). is done).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 133(b) and 133(c), the base side engaging member 12726 is gradually protruded to the front of the front base 12720 and displaced toward the base side engaging member 12726. The side engaging member 742 is brought closer, and the mutual bent portions 726b, 742b enter the inner surfaces of the mating bent portions 726b, 742b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 133(d), when the second displacement member 12740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 from tilting away from the front base 12720 .

In particular, in this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 are extended to the extended position, the base-side engaging member 12726 is pushed into the receiving recess 727 by the elastic recovery force of the biasing springs SP1 and SP2. You can immerse yourself inside. That is, in the retracted state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 12726 can be arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 12720. As shown in FIG. As a result, even when the front surface of the front base 12720 is exposed, the base-side engaging member 12726 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance can be improved.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 136. FIG. In the first embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base-side engaging member 726 projecting from the front of the front base 720. However, the thirteenth embodiment The displacement side engaging member 13742 of the second displacement member 13740 in the form is engaged with the wall surface on the front side of the front base 13720 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 134 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 13700 in the thirteenth embodiment. 135(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 13720, and FIG. 135(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 13720 along line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in FIG. 135(a).

As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, a left rotation unit 13700 according to the thirteenth embodiment is attached to a front base 13720 on the front side (FIG. 135(a) front side, FIG. 135(b) bottom side) and side sides. 135(a) and 135(b) right side) is formed, and a rotating member 13726 is rotatably disposed in the space formed by the opening 13720a.

The rotating member 13726 is formed in a V shape in cross section from a side portion 13726a that closes the side surface of the front base 13720 in the opening 13720a and a front portion 13726b that closes the front side of the front base 13720. One side (opposite side of front portion 13726b) is rotatably supported.

That is, the rotating member 13726 is rotated to one side about the pivotal portion of the side surface portion 13726a, and is placed in the initial position (the position shown in FIGS. 134 and 135) to close the opening 13720a. It is retracted into the front base 13720 by rotating to the other side around the pivotal portion of the side surface portion 13726a.

In this case, between the front base 13720 and the rotating member 13726, an urging spring SP3 made of a torsion spring is disposed in an elastically torsionally deformed state. Rotating member 13726 is maintained in the initial position. In this initial position, the front of the front portion 13726b and the side of the side portion 13726a are flush with the front and side of the front base 13720, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the rotating member 13726.

The displacement-side engaging member 13742 includes a base portion 13742a erected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 13740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 13742a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface. The standing height of the base portion 13742a is set to such a height that the bent portion 742b can come into contact with the side portion 13726a of the rotating member 13726. As shown in FIG. As a result, when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b can rotate the rotating member 13726 in the retracting direction along with the displacement (see FIG. 136).

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the engagement action by the front base 13720 and displacement side engagement member 13742 will be described.

FIG. 136 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 13700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 13720 and the displacement-side engagement member 13742, when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retracted position. is schematically illustrated. 136(a) to the state shown in FIG. 136(b), the second displacement member 13740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 136(a), when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 136(a)) with respect to the front base 13720, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 , abuts on the side surface portion 13726 a of the rotating member 13726 .

From the state shown in FIG. 136(a), when the second displacement member 13740 is further displaced toward the retreating direction (left side in FIG. 136(a)) with respect to the front base 13720, the bent portion of the displacement-side engaging member 13742 742b pushes (rotates) the rotating member 13726 in the retraction direction against the biasing force of the biasing spring SP3.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 136(b), the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 is gradually advanced into the internal space of the front base 13720 through the opening 13720a, as shown in FIG. 136(c). Thus, when the second displacement member 13740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 13742 can face the rear surface of the front base 13720 in an engageable manner. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 from tilting away from the front base 13720 .

In particular, in this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 are extended to the extended position, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP3 places (returns) the rotating member 13726 to the initial position. can be made That is, in its initial position, the front surface of the front portion 13726b and the side surface of the side surface portion 13726a can be flush with the front surface and side surfaces of the front base 13720, respectively. As a result, even when the front and side surfaces of the front base 13720 are exposed, the opening 13720a and the rotating member 13726 are difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved.

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the base-side engaging member 726 is fixed so as to protrude from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. It is arranged so that it can appear in front of the. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 137 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit 14700 according to the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 138(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 with the second displacement member 740 arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 138(b) is the line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb of FIG. 138(a). is a partially enlarged cross-sectional schematic diagram of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 in FIG. 139(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 with the second displacement member 740 arranged at the extended position, and FIG. 139(b) is CXXXIXb of FIG. 139(a). 147 is a partially enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 taken along line -CXXXIXb; FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 137 to 139, a left rotation unit 14700 according to the fourteenth embodiment accommodates a base-side engagement member 14726 in the internal space of a front base 14720, and a rack member 14752 on one longitudinal end side ( A transmission portion 14752b is formed on the front surface of FIG. 137 (upper side).

The base-side engaging member 14726 includes a slide portion 14726c that is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 14720. , a base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface of the slide portion 14726c (the left side surface in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)).

The base-side engaging member 14726 slides and displaces the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b toward the front side (the left side in FIG. 138(b)) from the receiving recess 727 by sliding the sliding portion 14726c toward the front along a guide groove (not shown). ) (see FIG. 138), and the slide portion 14726c is slid along a guide groove (not shown) toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 139(b)) to receive the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b. It can be retracted into recess 727 (see FIG. 139).

In this case, between the rear surface of the slide portion 14726c and the front surface of the rear base 710, an urging spring SP4 made of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically deformed state. The force maintains the base-side engaging member 14726 in the retracted state (the state shown in FIG. 139(b)). In this immersed state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 14720 are flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the base-side engaging member 14726. FIG.

The rear surface of the slide portion 14726c (right side in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)) is inclined in a direction away from the rack member 14752 as it goes upward (upper side in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)). It is formed as an inclined surface, and the inclined surface (front surface) of the transmission portion 14752b of the rack member 14752 abuts against the inclined surface.

138(b) and 139(b)), the base side engaging member 14726 (slide portion 14726c) is formed, and the inclined surface of the slide portion 14726c abuts on the inclined surface.

Therefore, the base side engaging member 14726 slides toward the front side (in the direction in which it protrudes from the receiving recess 727) as the rack member 14752 is displaced downward by the action of the inclined surfaces of the base side engaging member 14726 and the transmission portion 14752b. In addition, as the rack member 14752 is displaced upward, the base-side engaging member 14726 can be slid to the rear side (into the receiving recess 727).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 138, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the lowest position and the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b are brought into contact with each other. The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be prevented from tilting away from the front base 14720 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 139, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the uppermost position and the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the extended position, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP4 causes the base side engagement. Member 14726 can be recessed into receiving recess 727 . That is, in the retracted state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 14726 can be arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 14720. As shown in FIG. As a result, even when the front surface of the front base 14720 is exposed, the base-side engaging member 14726 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance can be improved.

Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the base-side engaging member 726 is fixed so as to protrude from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. is slidably disposed in front of the . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 140 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 15700 in the fifteenth embodiment. 141(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 15720, and FIG. 134(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 15720 taken along line CXLIb-CXLIb in FIG. 141(a).

As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, a left rotation unit 15700 according to the fifteenth embodiment is attached to a front base 15720 on the front side (FIG. 141(a) front side, FIG. 141(b) bottom side) and side sides. (Fig. 141(a) and Fig. 141(b) right side) is formed, and the front side (Fig. 141(b) lower side) of the front base 15720 in the space formed by the opening 15720a is formed. A base-side engaging member 15726 is slidably disposed in the portion.

The base-side engaging member 15726 is formed in a flat plate shape having substantially the same shape as the front side of the front base 15720 in the opening 15720a (that is, a shape that closes the opening 15720a when viewed from the front). Along the first guide groove 15720b1 and the second guide groove 15720b2, it is disposed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(b)).

The first guide groove 15720b1 is formed to have a first inclination angle with respect to the left-right direction of the front base 15720 (left-right direction in FIG. 141(b)) when viewed from above in FIG. The guide groove 15720b2 is formed to have an angle of inclination (second angle of inclination) smaller than the angle of inclination of the first guide groove 15720b1 with respect to the left-right direction of the front base 15720 (the left-right direction in FIG. 141(b)). be. In this embodiment, the second tilt angle is 0°. That is, the second guide groove 15720b2 is formed parallel to the left-right direction of the front base 15720. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, the base-side engaging member 15726 is guided along the first guide groove 15720b1 from the initial position shown in FIG. left upper side), and then guided along the second guide groove 15720b2, so that the front base 15720 is slid sideways (left side in FIG. 141(b)), It is immersed inside the base 15720 .

In this case, between the front base 15720 and the base-side engaging member 15726, an urging spring (not shown) consisting of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically deformed state. The elastic recovery force maintains the base side engaging member 15726 in the initial position. In this initial position, the front surface of the base-side engaging member 15726 (the surface on the front side in FIG. 141(a) and the bottom surface in FIG. 141(b)) and the front surface of the front base 15720 are arranged flush with each other. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the side engaging member 15726 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the engagement action by the base-side engagement member 15726 and displacement-side engagement member 742 will be described.

FIG. 142 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 15700 for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member 15726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742, in which the second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the retracted position. Schematically, the transition state when the 142(a) to the state shown in FIG. 142(c), the second displacement member 740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 142(a) and 142(b), when the second displacement member 740 is displaced with respect to the front base 15720 toward the retreating direction (left side in FIG. 142(a)), displacement-side engagement occurs. The tip of the bent portion 742b of the member 742 is inserted through the opening 15720a into the front base 15720, and the base portion 742a of the displacement-side engaging member 742 is brought into contact with the side surface of the base-side engaging member 15726.

From the state shown in FIG. 142(b), when the second displacement member 740 is further displaced toward the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 142(b)) with respect to the front base 15720, as shown in FIG. 142(c). , the base portion 742a of the displacement-side engaging member 742 pushes (slides) the base-side engaging member 15726 in the retracting direction along the first guide groove 15720b1 against the biasing force of the biasing spring. When the second displacement member 740 is further displaced in the retreating direction from the state shown in FIG. is done).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 142(d), when the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742 faces the rear surface of the base-side engaging member 15726. , can be engagably opposed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 from tilting away from the front base 15720 (downward in FIG. 142(c)).

In particular, in this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are extended to the extended position, the base-side engaging member 15726 is arranged (returned) to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring. ). That is, in the initial position, the front surface of the base-side engaging member 15726 can be arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 15720 . As a result, even when the front of the front base 15720 is exposed, the opening 15720a and the base-side engaging member 15726 are made difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved.

Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. FIG. In the first embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base-side engaging member 726 projecting from the front of the front base 720. The displacement side engaging member 16742 of the second displacement member 16740 in the form is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 143 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 16700 in the sixteenth embodiment. 144(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 16720, and FIG. 144(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 16720 taken along line CXLIVb-CXLIVb in FIG. 144(a).

FIG. 145 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 16700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 16720 (opening 16720a) and the displacement side engagement member 16742, and the second displacement member 16740 moves to the retracted position. Schematically illustrated is the transition state as it is displaced towards. 145(a) to the state shown in FIG. 145(b), the second displacement member 16740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, the left rotation unit 16700 in the sixteenth embodiment has an opening 16720a formed in the side surface of the front base 16720 (the right side surface in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b)). .

The displacement-side engaging member 16742 includes a base portion 16742a erected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 16740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 16742a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface. The standing height of the base portion 16742a is set to a height that allows the bending portion 742b to be inserted into the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. As shown in FIG.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 16742 is moved through the opening 16720a along with the displacement to the front base. 16720, and when the second displacement member 16740 is placed at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 16742 is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. can face each other as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 16740 from tilting away from the front base 16720 .

In particular, in this embodiment, it is only necessary to open the opening 16720a in the front base 16720, and there is no need to provide a base-side engaging member, so the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, since the opening 16720a is arranged on the side surface of the front base 16720, the opening 16720a is visible to the player when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the projecting direction and the front of the front base 16720 is exposed. The appearance can be improved by making it difficult.

Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIG. In the first embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base-side engaging member 726 projecting from the front of the front base 720. The displacement side engaging member 17742 of the second displacement member 17740 in the form is engaged with the rear surface of the rear base 710 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 146 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 17700 in the seventeenth embodiment. 147 is a schematic top view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 17700 for explaining the engagement action by the rear base 710 and the displacement-side engagement member 17742, in which the second displacement member 17740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state at the moment is schematically illustrated.

147(a) to the state shown in FIG. 147(b), the second displacement member 17740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, in the left rotation unit 17700 of the seventeenth embodiment, the entire front and side surfaces of one longitudinal end side (upper side in FIG. 146) of the front base 17720 are formed as decorative surfaces. That is, the front base 17720 is formed in a shape in which the base-side engaging member 726 and the receiving recess 727 are omitted from the front base 720 in the first embodiment.

The displacement-side engaging member 17742 includes a base portion 17742a erected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 17740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 17742a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface. The standing height of the base portion 17742a is set to such a height that the inner surface of the bent portion 742b can face the rear surface of the rear base 710 with a predetermined gap therebetween.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 17740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 17742 is gradually moved toward the rear side of the rear base 710 along with the displacement. , and the second displacement member 17740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 17742 can face the rear surface of the rear base 710 in an engageable manner. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 17740 from tilting away from the front base 17720 .

In particular, in this embodiment, since it is not necessary to provide the front base 17720 with a base-side engaging member, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, since it is not necessary to form an opening on the side surface of the front base 17720, the appearance of the front base 17720 can be improved by avoiding the functional part unrelated to the decoration from being visually recognized by the player. can be done. In other words, there is no need to obscure the sides of the front base 17720 from the player by means of the second displacement member 17740 arranged at the overhanging position, so the amount of overhang of the second displacement member 17740 is increased to enhance the presentation effect. be able to.

Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. FIG. In the right rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, the operation of displacing (raising) the first displacement member 630 tilted in the overhanging direction toward the retracted position (raising operation of the first displacement member 630) is performed by the drive motor 650. Although the case where it is performed only by the rotational driving force has been described, the erecting operation of the first displacement member 630 in the right rotation unit 18600 of the eighteenth embodiment utilizes the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 and the action of the inertial force. is done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of a right rotation unit 18600 according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a front view of the clockwise rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 18600 is a rear view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section of FIG.

149(a) and 150(a) show the state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 are arranged in the extended position (that is, FIGS. 34(c) and 36(c)). corresponds to 149(b) and 150(b) correspond to FIGS. 34(b) and 36(b), and FIGS. 149(c) and 150(c) correspond to FIGS. 36(a).

FIG. 151 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when moving from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 151(c) corresponds to FIGS. 150(a), 150(b) and 150(c) respectively.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the right rotation unit 18600 according to the eighteenth embodiment, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped abutted portion 18629 from the front of the front base 18620 is attached to the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 18642 of the second displacement member 18640. Approximately cylindrical contact portions 18644 protrude from the rear surface. The contact portion 18644 is disposed at the end portion of the connecting displacement member 18642 in the longitudinal direction opposite to the pivot hole 642a (support shaft 633).

As shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, the abutted portion 18629 and the abutting portion 18644 are in the middle of displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 from the extended position to the retracted position. In a predetermined section, the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 18644 is formed so as to contact the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629 (upper surface in FIG. 148).

Specifically, from the extended position shown in FIGS. 149(a), 150(a) and 151(a), as shown in FIGS. 149(b), 150(b) and 151(b), 149(c), 150(c) and 151(c), the connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated about the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) in the direction of retreating to the rear surface of the first displacement member 630. ), when the connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated to the maximum around the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a), the contact portion 18644 is brought into contact with the upper surface of the contact portion 18629. As shown in FIG.

From the states shown in FIGS. 149(c), 150(c) and 151(c), the first displacement member 630 starts to rotate (stand up) toward the retracted position about the rotation shaft 631. 33(b), 35(b), and 37(b), the contact portion 18644 is separated from the upper surface of the contact portion 18629, and the contact portion 18629 and the contact portion 18644 are separated from each other. Abutment is released.

In this case, the drive motor 650 moves only the second displacement member 18640 in the interval until the contact portion 18644 contacts the contacted portion 18629 (that is, the interval shown in FIGS. 149, 150, and 151). Rotational driving is sufficient, and the driving load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section where the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 is rotationally driven. is assumed to be the load of In addition, since the displacement direction of the connecting displacement member 18642 is the downward direction of gravity, the load on the drive motor 650 is reduced in this respect as well.

On the other hand, when the contact portion 18644 is in contact with the contacted portion 18629 , the driving pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 reaches the working section 635 a of the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 . Therefore, from this state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 630 is added as the load of the rotational drive of the drive motor 650 . In particular, from this state, the first displacement member 630 is raised against gravity, so the load on the drive motor 650 is rapidly increased in this respect as well.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the contact portion 18644 is provided at the end of the connecting displacement member 18642 opposite to the shaft support hole 642 a (support shaft 633 ), and the connecting displacement member 18642 rotates the support shaft 633 . When rotated around the center, the abutting portion 18644 abuts on the abutted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 (see FIG. 151(c)).

That is, the rotation of the connecting displacement member 18642 about the support shaft 633 can be regulated by the abutment of the abutted portion 18629 and the abutting portion 18644, and the rotation of the connecting displacement member 18642 can be suddenly stopped. , the inertial force of the connecting displacement member 18642 generated by the sudden stop is the force in the direction (arrow F) can act on the first displacement member 630 .

As a result, the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, and the weight of the first displacement member 630 as well as the weight of the second displacement member 18640 is reached. Also, when added as a load for rotationally driving the drive motor 650 , the inertial force described above can be used as a force that assists the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive motor 650, stabilize the displacement of each of the displacement members 630 and 18640 from the extended position to the retracted position, and increase the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve the quality.

Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160. FIG. In the right rotation unit 18600 of the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the abutting portion 18644 of the connecting displacement member 18642 contacts the abutted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 has been described. The contact portion 19644 of the contact portion 19639 provided on the first displacement member 19630 contacts the contact portion 19639 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

152 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 19600 in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 153 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 19600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, in a right rotation unit 19600 according to the nineteenth embodiment, the connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 19641 of the second displacement member 19640 and the connecting displacement member 19642 is the first. It is set at a position different from that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 29 and 30).

Specifically, one end in the longitudinal direction of the driven member 19641 (the side opposite to the second groove 641b across the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIGS. 152 and 153) is curved in an arc, and the curved portion A connecting groove 641c is provided on the extended distal end side of the . This curved portion avoids interference between the driven member 19641 and the shaft support hole 642 a of the connecting displacement member 19642 . The connecting displacement member 19642 is formed by projecting a plate-like projecting portion 19642c outward from the shaft support hole 642a, and a connecting pin 643 projects from the front side of the projecting portion 19642c.

In this case, in the above-described first embodiment, the axis of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 641 is centered and the axis of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connecting displacement member 19642 is The connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 is positioned inside (on the center side) of the virtual circle passing through the center.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an imaginary shaft centered on the shaft center of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 19641 passes through the shaft center of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connecting displacement member 19642. The connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 19641 and the connecting displacement member 19642 is positioned outside the circle.

Therefore, the direction of relative rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 with respect to the first displacement member 19630 is opposite to that in the first embodiment. Here, the relative rotation in the opposite direction will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 157. FIG.

154 and 155 are front views of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state during operation between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 19600 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state when rotating. FIG.

154(a), 154(b) and 154(c) are the same states as FIGS. 156(a), 156(b) and 156(c) respectively, ), FIGS. 155(b) and 155(c) are the same states as FIGS. 157(a), 157(b) and 157(c), respectively. 154(c) is the same as FIG. 155(a), and FIG. 156(c) is the same as FIG. 157(a).

Here, in the right rotation unit 19600 in the nineteenth embodiment, relative rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 with respect to the first displacement member 19630 is caused by the difference in the positions of the connecting portions (the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643) described above. , is opposite to that of the first embodiment, the other operation modes are formed substantially in the same manner, so description of the same portions will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 154 and 156, at the retracted position, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. By pushing down the inner wall surfaces of the section 635a) and the second groove 641b in the projecting direction, the first displacement member 19630 is rotated (tilted) in the projecting direction integrally with the second displacement member 19640. FIG.

155(a) and 157(a), when the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. The inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the driven member 19641 is pushed downward (lower side in FIG. 157(a)) while passing through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of .

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 155(b) and 157(b), the driven member 19641 rotates around the support shaft 632 in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 157(b)) to raise the connecting groove 641c. , the rotation of the driven member 19641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 19642 through the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 19642 lowers the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the rotation center. direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 108(b)).

That is, while the first displacement member 19630 is stopped, the connecting displacement portion 19642 is displaced (rotated) relative to the first displacement member 19630 in the direction opposite to that in the first embodiment. After that, as shown in FIGS. 155(c) and 157(c), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640. By reaching the end of the second groove 641b, the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are arranged at the overhang position.

Returning to FIGS. 152 and 153, description will be made. In this embodiment, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped contacted portion 19639 projects from the back surface of the first displacement member 19630, and a substantially cylindrical contact portion 19644 projects from the front surface of the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 19642. . The contacted portion 19639 is arranged between the rotation shaft 631 and the support shaft 632 in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 19630 .

The contacted portion 19639 and the contact portion 19644 are arranged in a predetermined section in the middle of the displacement of the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 from the extended position to the retracted position. The outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 19644 is formed so as to be able to contact with the side surface of (the right side surface in FIG. 153). 158 to 160, the effect of the abutment of the abutted portion 19639 and the abutting portion 19644 will be described.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 19600 is a rear view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section of FIG.

158(a) and 159(a) show the state in which the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are arranged in the extended position (that is, FIGS. 155(c) and 157(c)). corresponds to 158(b) and 159(b) correspond to FIGS. 155(b) and 157(b), and FIGS. 158(c) and 159(c) correspond to FIGS. 157(a).

FIG. 160 is a schematic back view of the clockwise rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when it operates from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 160(a), FIG. 160(c) corresponds to FIGS. 159(a), 159(b) and 159(c) respectively.

From the extended position shown in FIGS. 158(a), 159(a) and 160(a), as shown in FIGS. 158(b), 159(b) and 160(b), the connecting displacement member 19642 158(c), 159(c), and 160(c) are rotated in the direction of retracting to the rear surface of the first displacement member 19630 with the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) as the center of rotation. Further, when the connecting displacement member 19642 is rotated to the maximum around the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a), the contact portion 19644 is brought into contact with the lower surface of the contacted portion 19639 .

In this case, the drive motor 650 moves only the second displacement member 19640 in the interval until the contact portion 19644 contacts the contacted portion 19639 (that is, the interval shown in FIGS. 158, 159 and 160). Rotational driving is sufficient, and the driving load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section where the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interfering section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 is rotationally driven. is assumed to be the load of

On the other hand, when the contact portion 19644 is in contact with the contacted portion 19639 , the drive pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 reaches the working section 635 a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630 . Therefore, in such a state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 19630 is added as a load for rotationally driving the drive motor 650 . In particular, from this state, the load on the drive motor 650 is abruptly increased because the first displacement member 19630 is erected against gravity.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 19642 is provided with the abutting portion 19644, and the connecting displacement member 19642 is rotated around the support shaft 633, thereby rotating the connecting displacement member 19642. The abutting portion 19644 lifted upward along with this abuts against the lower surface of the abutted portion 19639 of the first displacement member 19630 (see FIG. 160(c)).

That is, the rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 about the support shaft 633 can be restricted by the abutment of the abutted portion 19639 and the abutting portion 19644, and the rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 can be suddenly stopped. , the inertial force of the connecting displacement member 19642 generated by the sudden stop is the force in the direction (arrow F) can act on the first displacement member 19630 .

As a result, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, and the weight of the first displacement member 19630 as well as the weight of the second displacement member 19640 is reached. Also, when added as a load for rotationally driving the drive motor 650 , the inertial force described above can be used as a force that assists the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive motor 650, stabilize the displacement of the displacement members 19630 and 19640 from the extended position to the retracted position, and increase the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve the quality.

Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. FIG. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, the game ball is delivered from the delivery port 821c to the seesaw member 840 (receiving surface 844) regardless of the state of the seesaw member 840 (that is, either the first state or the second state). state), but the winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment restricts the delivery of game balls from the delivery port 821c to the seesaw member 20840 (receiving surface 844) at least in the second state. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 161 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment. Also, FIG. 162(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 20065 with the seesaw member 20840 forming the first state, and FIG. 162(b) is a winning device with the seesaw member 20840 forming the second state. 20065 is a cross-sectional view of device 20065. FIG. 162(a) and 162(b) correspond to FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 161, in the prize winning device 20065 of the twentieth embodiment, a seesaw member 20840 is formed with a restricting portion 20848 . The restricting portion 20848 is formed as a substantially triangular portion in front view that stands upward (upper side in FIG. 161) from the edge portion of the receiving surface 844 opposite to the inclined surface 845 .

As shown in FIG. 162(a), when the seesaw member 20840 is in the first state, the restricting portion 20848 is positioned outside the opening area of the delivery port 821c. (Fig. 162(a) left-right dimension) is maintained at a dimension W1 larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is allowed.

On the other hand, when the seesaw member 20840 is in the second state, as shown in FIG. A portion is located inside the opening region of the delivery port 821c (that is, a portion of the restricting portion 20848 overlaps the opening region of the delivery port 821c). As a result, the opening width of the delivery port 821c is reduced to the dimension W2 which is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (W2<W1). Therefore, the delivery of game balls from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is restricted (prohibited).

Thus, according to this embodiment, the delivery of the game ball from the guide passage (delivery port 821c) of the intermediate base 820 to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 20840 is controlled (allowed) according to the state of the seesaw member 20840. or regulation).

That is, in the first state, the game ball is delivered from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844, and the game ball is rolled from the receiving surface 844 toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846, thereby rotating the seesaw member 20840. , the second state can be formed quickly.

Here, even after the seesaw member 20840 starts rotating toward the second state, when the game balls are sent out in a row from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844, they were sent out first (the receiving surface 844 received ) A state in which the game ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 is formed, and the seesaw member 20840 is likely to be maintained in the second state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the seesaw member 20840 starts to rotate toward the second state, the restricting portion 20848 narrows the opening width of the delivery port 821c to the dimension W2, so that the receiving surface is separated from the delivery port 821c. By restricting (prohibiting) the delivery of game balls to 844, it is possible to secure time for discharging the game balls rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d.

That is, until game balls are completely discharged from the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d and there are no more game balls on the seesaw member 20840, the delivery of the game balls from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is on standby. can be made As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

The dimension W2 may be larger than the diameter of the game ball as long as it is smaller than the dimension W1. That is, the dimension W2 may be a dimension that allows the game ball to be delivered from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844. Even in this case, the width of the opening of the delivery port 821c is narrowed by the restricting portion 20848, making it difficult for the game ball to pass through. (delay the passage of the game ball). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, a twenty-first embodiment will be described. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, by rolling along the downward slope of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball is discharged to the discharge port 821d. The winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment comprises a rotating member 21870 for pushing out game balls and discharging them to the discharge port 821d. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

163(a) and 163(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment, corresponding to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 163, the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment comprises a rotating member 21870 above the seesaw member 840. As shown in FIG. The rotating member 21870 does not interfere with the seesaw member 840 and does not contact the game ball on the seesaw member 840 even if the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or the second state. placed at the height possible.

The rotating member 21870 includes a shaft support portion 21871 through which a shaft support pin (not shown) is inserted so as to be rotatably supported on the rear surface of the front base 810, and a delivery port 821c that protrudes from the shaft support portion 21871 to one side. A plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 facing the receiving plate 21872, and a plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 and a push plate projected from the shaft support portion 21871 to the other side opposite to the receiving plate 21872 and facing the discharge port 821d 21873.

The shaft support portion 21871 is disposed in a posture in which the axial direction thereof is along the direction of gravity (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 163(a)) (that is, perpendicular to the rotation shaft (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840). The receiving plate 21872 and the ejecting plate 21873 are connected with a predetermined crossing angle with the shaft support portion 21871 as the crossing center. Therefore, the rotating member 21870 is bent in a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the direction of the pivot 21871 (gravitational force).

163(a), the rotating member 21870 is such that when the pushing plate 21873 rotates along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (horizontal direction in FIG. 163(a)), the receiving plate 21872 can 163(a), and when the receiving plate 21872 rotates along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIG. 163(b), The pushing plate 21873 is in a posture protruding above the inclined surface 845 and/or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 .

163(a), the rotating member 21870 is such that when the push plate 21873 is retracted to the side opposite to the discharge port 821d (lower side in FIG. 163(a)), the receiving plate 21872 is positioned at the discharge port 163(b), the receiving plate 21872 is advanced toward the side close to 821c, and the receiving plate 21872 is retracted to the side opposite to the delivery port 821c (lower side in FIG. 163(b)), as shown in FIG. 163(b). The pushing plate 21873 is advanced toward the outlet 821d.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. When the game ball is delivered to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball delivered to the receiving surface 844 from the delivery port 821c is received by the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870, and the rotating member 21870 pushes the pushing plate 21873. is rotated in a direction to protrude above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 . By this rotation, as shown in FIG. 163(b), the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be pushed out by the pushing plate 21873 and discharged to the discharge port 821d.

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are changed. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

In addition, the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870 receives the game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c, and the rotating member 21870 is in a posture in which the ejecting plate 21873 protrudes above the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846 (that is, , posture shown in FIG. 163(b)), the game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side of FIG. Since it rolls along the discharge surface 846, the rotating member 21870 can be returned to the posture in which the receiving plate 21872 protrudes above the receiving surface 844 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 163(a)).

In this way, the rotating member 21870 uses the rolling motion of the game ball to move to the initial position (the position where the game ball can be received by the receiving plate 21872 and the game ball can be pushed out by the pushing plate 21873, that is, FIG. position shown in (a)). Therefore, since driving by the driving means and detection by the sensor device can be eliminated, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Next, a twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

164(a) and 164(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 22065 in the twenty-second embodiment, corresponding to FIG. 165(a) and 165(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device 22065, corresponding to FIG.

Here, the prize winning device 22065 of the twenty-second embodiment differs from the prize winning device 21065 of the twenty-first embodiment by having an opening 22849 formed in the seesaw member 22840 and a projecting piece 22874 projecting from the rotating member 22870. Furthermore, since only the provision is different and the other configurations are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the rotating member 22870 has a plurality of (three in this embodiment) projecting pieces 22874 protruding from the lower side of the pushing plate 21873 (on the side of the seesaw member 22840, on the lower side in FIG. 165). is set. On the other hand, a plurality of (three in this embodiment) openings 22849 for receiving the projecting pieces 22874 are formed in the plate-like portion where the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 are formed.

The protruding piece 22874 is curved in an arc around the rotation axis of the seesaw member 22840 when viewed from the front (when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 22840, i.e., the state shown in FIG. 165). be. On the other hand, the opening 22849 is curved in an arc shape around the rotation axis of the rotation member 22870 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (shaft support portion 21871) of the rotation member 22870, that is, the state shown in FIG. 164). It is formed.

Therefore, the seesaw member 22840 rotates between the first state and the second state around the support shaft 821e (bearing 841), and the rotating member 22870 rotates through its movable range around the shaft support 21871. In either state, interference of the projecting piece 22874 with the inner edge of the opening 22849 can be suppressed. As a result, the seesaw member 22840 and the rotating member 22870 can be made independent of each other and smoothly rotated.

Here, when the pushing plate 21873 of the rotating member 21870 does not have a projecting piece as in the case of the twenty-first embodiment, the seesaw member 840 is in the second state (or in a state similar thereto). , When the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the push plate 21873, the distance between the push plate 21873 and the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 is large, the lower part of the ejector plate 21873 is brought into contact with the upper part of the game ball (the front part of the paper surface in FIG. 163(a)). Therefore, the time required for the pushing plate 21873 to contact the upper part of the game ball increases, and it becomes difficult to discharge the game ball to the discharge port 821d quickly. In addition, it becomes difficult to sufficiently apply the energy of the rotation of the rotating member 21870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 to the game ball via the pushing plate 21873 .

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the projecting piece 22874 projects downward (the seesaw member 22840) from the ejector plate 21873 of the rotating member 22870. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. In addition, when the seesaw member 22840 forms the second state, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 can be pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the projecting piece 22874.

Therefore, in this case, the projecting piece 22874 can be brought into contact with the side portion of the game ball (lower portion in FIG. 164(a)). Therefore, the time until the projecting piece 22874 comes into contact with the side portion of the game ball can be shortened, and the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d accordingly. Also, the energy of the rotation of the rotating member 22870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently applied to the game ball via the projecting piece 22874 .

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are changed. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

Next, a twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. FIG. In the twenty-first embodiment, the rotating member 21870 is arranged (rotatably supported) on the front base 810, but the rotating member 23870 of the twenty-third embodiment is arranged (rotatably supported) on the seesaw member 840. pivoted on). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 166 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 23065 in the twenty-third embodiment. 167(a) and 167(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device 23065, corresponding to FIG. 168(a) and 168(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device 23065, corresponding to FIG.

Here, the prize winning device 23065 of the twenty-third embodiment differs from the prize winning device 21065 of the twenty-first embodiment in the position where the rotating member 23870 is arranged and the presence or absence of the stopper portion 23875, and the rest of the configuration is the same. Therefore, its description is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 166 to 168 , the rotating member 23870 in the twenty-third embodiment is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the seesaw member 840 by a shaft support pin 23876 inserted through the shaft support portion 21871 . In this case, in this embodiment, the rotating member 23870 is disposed in such a manner that the axial direction of the shaft support portion 21871 is orthogonal to the rotating shaft (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840, The side surfaces face the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 substantially in parallel.

As described above, according to this embodiment, since the rotating member 23870 is disposed on the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or the first state as shown in FIGS. 168(a) and 168(b). In any of the two states, the pushing plate 21873 can face the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 .

Therefore, unlike the case of the twenty-first embodiment described above (that is, the form in which the lower part of the ejector plate 21873 abuts against the upper part of the game ball (the part on the near side of the paper in FIG. 163(a)), the ejector plate 21873 can be brought into contact with the side portion of the game ball (lower portion in FIG. 167(a)). Therefore, the time required for the pushing plate 21873 to come into contact with the side portion of the game ball can be shortened, and the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d accordingly. Also, the energy of the rotation of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently applied to the game ball via the pushing plate 21873 .

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are changed. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

Here, the rotating member 23870 of this embodiment has a stopper portion 23875 projecting from the back surface of the pushing plate 21873 (the surface opposite to the side that pushes out the game ball), and the stopper portion 23875 hits the back surface of the front base 810. be accessible. When the stopper portion 23875 is in contact with the rear surface of the front base 810 (see FIG. 167(a)), the rotating member 23870 moves the pushing plate 21873 in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (horizontal direction in FIG. 167(a)). It is arranged in a rotational position along.

Therefore, compared to the case where the stopper portion 23875 is omitted and the push plate 21873 is retracted to the position where it abuts against the back surface of the front base 810, the push plate is closer to the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846. 21873 can be made to stand by, and the time until the pushing plate 21873 comes into contact with the game ball can be shortened. As a result, the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d.

Here, as described above, even if the rotary member 23870 is arranged in a posture in which the ejector plate 21873 protrudes above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167(b)), The game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side in FIG. 167(b)) rolls along the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 while retracting the ejecting plate 21873. The rotating member 23870 can be returned to the posture in which it protrudes upward from the receiving surface 844 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167(a)).

In this case, since the rotating member 23870 is arranged on the seesaw member 840 in this embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the pushing plate 21873 and the front base 810 . Therefore, when the push-out plate 21873 is retracted to a position where it abuts against the rear surface of the front base 810, the game ball rolls away from the discharge port 821d, and the rolling trajectory of the game ball increases. Therefore, the discharge to the discharge port 821d is delayed.

On the other hand, by protruding the stopper portion 23875 from the back surface of the pushing plate 21873, the game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side in FIG. It is possible to prevent the ejector plate 21873 from being excessively retreated to the rear side of the front base 810 when rolling along (see FIG. 167(a)). That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling in a direction away from the discharge port 821d, and to easily discharge the game ball to the discharge port 821d.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since no stopper portion is formed on the rear surface of the receiving plate 21872, the receiving plate 21872 can be retracted to a position where it contacts the rear surface of the front base 810 (FIG. 167(b)). )reference). That is, by utilizing the gap between the rotating member 23870 and the front base 810 formed by disposing the rotating member 23870 on the seesaw member 840, the receiving plate 21872 receives the game ball and the rotating member 23870 rotates. The rotation angle of the rotating member 23870 (the rotation angle from the rotation position shown in FIG. 167(a) to the rotation position shown in FIG. 167(b)) can be increased.

As a result, the time during which the game ball delivered from the delivery port 821c is in contact with the receiving plate 21872 can be lengthened (that is, the impulse received by the rotating member 23870 from the game ball can be increased). Therefore, the energy of the rotation of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 can be increased, and even when a plurality of game balls roll on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846, they A plurality of game balls can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d by pushing out the push-out plate 21873. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the transition between the first state and the second state is made. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal posture has been described. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

169 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 24065 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 170 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 24065. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, a winning device 24065 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment has bearings 24816 and 24826 protruding from the rear surface of a front base 24810 and the front surface of an intermediate base 24820, respectively. The bearing portions 24816 and 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 24877 on their inner peripheral surfaces, and have substantially U-shaped projections with an open upper side (the upper side in FIGS. 169 and 170). formed as a part.

In this embodiment, the bearing portion 24816 of the front base 24810 has a larger inner radius than the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 24820 . As will be described later, this permits the rotation of one axial end of the rotary shaft 24877 (the end on which the cam portion 24877b is formed).

The rotating shaft 24877 is a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 24810 and the intermediate base 24820 . Here, referring to FIG. 171, the rotating shaft 24877 will be described.

Fig. 171(a) is a front view of the rotating shaft 24877, and Fig. 171(b) is a side view of the rotating shaft 24877 viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXIb in Fig. 171(a).

As shown in FIG. 171, the rotary shaft 24877 includes a body portion 24877a formed as a shaft-like body having a circular cross section, and a cam portion 24877b formed at an axial end of the body portion 24877a. The cam portion 24877b is formed to protrude radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 24877a (that is, the distance from the axis of the main body portion 24877a to the outer peripheral surface of the cam portion 24877b varies depending on the rotation angle). ) is formed as a so-called disc cam.

Returning to FIGS. 170 and 171, description will be made. The rotating shaft 24877 is set such that the axial length of the body portion 24877 a is larger than the axial length of the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 . Therefore, the main body portion 24877a of the rotary shaft 24877 is fitted in the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the cam portion 24877b and the main body portion 24877a projecting from both axial ends of the bearing 841 are connected to the bearing portion 24816 of the front base 24810 and the intermediate base. 24820 are pivotally supported by bearings 24826 (see FIG. 173). The rotating shaft 24877 is fixed to the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 after being positioned at a predetermined phase (rotational position).

Next, the action of the cam portion 24877b on the rotating shaft 24877 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

FIG. 172(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 with the seesaw member 840 forming the first state, and FIG. 172(b) is the winning device 24065 with the seesaw member 840 forming the second state. is a cross-sectional view of. 173(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 along the line CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa in FIG. 172(a), and FIG. 173(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 along the line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 172(b). is a cross-sectional view of. 172(a) and 172(b) correspond to FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 172(a) and 173(a), in the first state, the axis of the rotating shaft 24877 is parallel to the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 173(a)). Both ends in the axial direction are pivotally supported by the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at the first inclination angle.

When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 172(a) and 173(a) toward the second state, the cam portion 24877b at one end of the rotating shaft 24877 in the axial direction increases as the rotation angle increases. gradually acts on the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810 to gradually increase the height position of the one axial end side of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side where the cam portion 24877b is formed).

As shown in FIGS. 172(b) and 173(b), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, the height position of the one axial end side of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side on which the cam portion 24877b is formed) reaches the maximum. , and the axis of the rotating shaft 24877 is tilted downward from the front base 24810 toward the intermediate base 24820 . As a result, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at a second tilt angle larger than the first tilt angle described above.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, as the seesaw member 840 rotates from the first state toward the second state, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be increased.

Here, as in the first embodiment described above, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal position (that is, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is maintained at a predetermined angle). case), if the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the ejection surface 846 is strong (large), the ejection of the game ball from the ejection surface 846 is hasty, and the second state cannot be reliably formed, while the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the ejection surface 846 is If is loose (small), the discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 is slowed down, and the residence time becomes long, so that the alternating switching between the first state and the second state is not performed smoothly.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is relatively loose (small) at the initial stage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rapid discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 (that is, to make the game ball stay on the discharge surface 846), and to make it easier to reliably form the second state. can.

On the other hand, in the final stage, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is relatively strong (large), and the game ball can be discharged quickly from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d. By shortening the time during which the ball is placed (that is, the time during which the second state is formed), the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in the horizontal posture has been described. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

174 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 25065 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 175 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 25065. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, a winning device 25065 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment has bearings 25816 and 24826 protruding from the rear surface of a front base 25810 and the front surface of an intermediate base 24820, respectively. These bearing portions 25816 and 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 25877 on their inner peripheral surfaces, and are formed in the same shape as each other.

The rotating shaft 25877 is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 25810 and the intermediate base 24820, and its axial length is the length of the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. Set to a dimension greater than the axial length. Therefore, the rotating shaft 25877 is fitted in the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the portions protruding from both ends of the bearing 841 in the axial direction are supported by the bearing portion 25816 of the front base 25810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 25820, respectively. (See FIG. 177).

Also, on the rear surface of the front base 25810, a push-up portion 25817 is provided to protrude on the side of the bearing portion 25816. As shown in FIG. The push-up portion 25817 is positioned on the locus of movement of the discharge surface 846 forming portion when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, and is discharged when the seesaw member 840 approaches the second state. It abuts against the lower surface of the surface 846 forming portion. Due to this contact, as will be described later, one side of the seesaw member 840 is pushed up by the push-up portion 25817, and the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is increased.

Next, the action of the push-up portion 25817 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

FIG. 176(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 with the seesaw member 840 forming the first state, and FIG. 176(b) is the winning device 25065 with the seesaw member 840 forming the second state. is a cross-sectional view of.

177(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 along the line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176(a), and FIG. 177(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 176(a). 177(c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 taken along line CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc in FIG. 176(b), and FIG. 177(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId in FIG. 176(b) is a sectional view of the winning device 25065 in FIG. 176(a) and 176(b) correspond to FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 176(a), 177(a), and 177(b), in the first state, since there is a gap between the seesaw member 840 and the push-up portion 25817, the rotating shaft 25877 177(a) left-right direction), both axial ends of the rotating shaft 25877 are supported by the bearing portion 25816 of the front cover 25810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively. be. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at the first inclination angle.

When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 176(a), 177(a), and 177(b) toward the second state, and the discharge surface 846 formation portion of the seesaw member 840 is lowered. , the lower surface of the portion forming the discharge surface 846 is brought into contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (not shown).

From this state, when the seesaw member 840 is further rotated toward the second state, the lower surface of the portion forming the discharge surface 846 is in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817, so that the seesaw member 840 rotates toward the rotation shaft 25877. 174 (left front side in FIG. 174, left side in FIG. 177(a)), and the discharge surface 846 forming portion is not in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (right rear side in FIG. 174). , right side of FIG. 177(b)).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176(b), 27(c), and 177(d), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, the one axial end side of the rotation shaft 25877 moves toward the inner periphery of the bearing portion 25816. It is lifted from the bottom surface, and the axis of the rotating shaft 25877 is tilted downward from the front base 25810 toward the intermediate base 24820 . As a result, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at a second tilt angle larger than the first tilt angle described above.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the initial stage (until the lower surface of the discharge surface 846 formation portion comes into contact with the push-up portion 25817). section), the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is maintained at the first inclination angle (that is, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is not changed), and the final stage (the part where the discharge surface 846 is formed 25817), the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be rapidly increased to the second inclination angle.

As a result, in the initial stage, it is possible to easily suppress the rapid discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 (that is, the game ball can be easily retained on the discharge surface 846), so that the second state can be formed more reliably. . On the other hand, in the final stage, the game ball can be quickly discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d easily, so the time when the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 (that is, the second state is formed) time) can be shortened, so that alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be performed more smoothly.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the groove 971 is recessed in the front surface of the frame plate substrate 910 in the third path M3 has been described. It is also possible to provide a protruding strip that is provided and extends in a substantially sawtooth shape when viewed from the front. In this case, as in the case of the recessed groove 971, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be guided along the outer surface of the ridge to meander left and right. Therefore, the falling speed of the game ball can be slowed down, and the movement of the game ball can be varied. Also, the ridges can be used as lenses for diffusing or condensing light.

In each of the embodiments described above, in the second state, the case where the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is positioned above the downward inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. However, in the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is aligned in the height direction with the downwardly inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 or positioned below the downwardly inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a. You may form so that it may carry out.

In the above-described third embodiment, the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 3662 is used to slide the third displacement member 3660 relative to the first displacement member 3630, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, a groove is provided in one of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660, a pin that slides along the groove is provided in the other of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660, and the pin for the groove may be used to slide the third displacement member 3660 relative to the first displacement member 3630.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed by the weight of the second displacement member 740 (action of gravity) has been described. Instead, the elastic force of an elastic spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring or an elastic body such as rubber or urethane is used to move the second displacement member 740 in either one direction or the other direction with respect to the first displacement member 730 . may be energized. Thereby, the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be stabilized.

In the tenth embodiment, the case of using the liquid LQ as the predetermined heavy object has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Other heavy objects may be those that can be displaced (for example, rolling or sliding) in the internal space of the retainer 10746 along the longitudinal direction as the posture of the retainer 10746 changes. Examples include spheres and cylindrical bodies made of metal. In that case, the internal space of retainer 10746 need not be sealed.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where a predetermined heavy load is held in the internal space of the retainer 10746 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The second displacement member 740 may be suspended from any position on the vertical line Z passing through G. Thus, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated about the rotation shaft 741 to one side or the other side, it is possible to displace a predetermined heavy object to the same side as the movement direction of the center of gravity G.

In the tenth embodiment described above, the retainer 10746 is arranged at a position where the center in the longitudinal direction thereof coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740, but this is not necessarily the case. However, it is preferable to position the center of the retainer 10746 in the longitudinal direction on the vertical line Z passing through the center of gravity G.

In the eleventh embodiment, the return operation of the second displacement member 740 to the crossing angle γ1 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed using the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP, but this is not necessarily the case. However, the biasing spring SP may be omitted and the movement may be performed by the weight of the second displacement member 740 (action of gravity).

In the twenty-fourth and twenty-fifth embodiments, in the first state, the rotating shaft 24877 is pivotally supported in a posture in which the axis is parallel to the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 173(a)). , but not necessarily limited to this, in the first state, the height position of one axial end of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side on which the cam portion 24877b is formed) is higher (or lower) than the other axial end. position may be set. That is, the above-described first tilt angle (the tilt angle at which the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the first state is tilted downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820) is the above-described second tilt angle (the second tilt angle). It suffices if the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the two states is formed to be able to increase to a greater inclination angle than the inclination angle downwardly inclined toward the ejection port 821d of the intermediate base 24820).

In the 21st and 22nd embodiments, a case where a sufficient gap is not formed between the rotating members 21870, 22870 and the front base 810 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A predetermined gap may be provided between the receiving plate 21872 and the pushing plate 21873 and the front base 810 . In this case, it is preferable to provide a predetermined gap only on the receiving plate 21872 side. This provides the same effect as in the twenty-third embodiment.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Right Rotation Unit 600 as an Example>
a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably formed with respect to the base member, a transmission member for transmitting driving force to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the transmission member In the game machine, the transmission member includes a drive pin, the first displacement member and the second displacement member include a first groove and a second groove, respectively, and the second displacement member includes a first groove and a second groove. The first groove includes an action section that receives action from the drive pin and a non-interference section that does not interfere with the drive pin. The second groove includes at least an action section that receives action from the drive pin. The first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on the base member in a posture in which the groove and the second groove are superimposed and the drive pin is inserted through the first groove and the second groove. Gaming machine A1 to play.

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A performance member having a transmission member that transmits and a driving means that imparts a driving force to the transmission member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are provided via the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, JP-A-2009-100994).

According to this game machine, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmitting member, the effecting member transmits the driving force from the transmitting member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member through the first groove and the second groove. is transmitted, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced with respect to the base member.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the first groove and the second groove are arranged side by side, the space required for arranging the first groove and the second groove is large, and the front view of the effect member is correspondingly increased. There was a problem that the outer shape in the case became large. In particular, in recent years, there has been a demand for larger liquid crystal display devices, and an increase in the outer shape of the effect member when viewed from the front hinders an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device, which is not preferable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on the base member in a posture in which the first groove and the second groove are superimposed (superimposed). Compared to the conventional product in which the grooves and the second grooves are arranged side by side, the space required for disposing the first grooves and the second grooves can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the outer size in a front view. In this case, even if the liquid crystal display device is required to be enlarged, the space in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) is relatively large. With the structure in which the two layers are superimposed, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape in a front view by using a relatively large space in the thickness direction, which is particularly effective for increasing the size of the liquid crystal display device.

Further, according to the gaming machine A1, since the drive pin is inserted through the superimposed first groove and the second groove, the driving force from the transmission member is transferred to the first displacement member and the second displacement member by one drive pin. , making it unnecessary to provide a drive pin for each of the first groove and the second groove. That is, the parts can be used in common, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

According to the game machine A1, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmission member, the driving force is transmitted from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member A member is displaced relative to the base member. In this case, in a state in which the action sections of the first groove and the second groove are acted upon by the transmission member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced, while only the action section of the second groove is affected by the transmission member. In a state of being acted upon (the transmission member does not interfere with the first groove due to the non-interference section), the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced.

In the gaming machine A1, the second displacement member is connected to a driven member displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and formed with the second groove, and to a driven portion thereof. A gaming machine A2 comprising a connecting displacement member displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and having a decorative portion.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the second displacement member includes a driven member displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and having the second groove formed thereon; A link structure can be formed by the driven member and the connecting displacement member, since the connecting displacement member is connected to the driven portion and displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member. Accordingly, when the driven member is driven by the transmission member, the decorative portion of the connecting displacement member can be largely displaced relative to the first displacement member.

A gaming machine A3 in the gaming machine A2, wherein the second displacement member can form a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are superimposed.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the second displacement member can form a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are overlapped. It is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape of the displacement member when viewed from the front.

In the game machine A3, the first displacement member is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an overhanging position, and the second displacement member has a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are superimposed. A gaming machine A4, characterized in that it is formed so as to be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member in the retracted position.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the second displacement member can be arranged behind the first displacement member in the retracted position in a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are superimposed. Since it is formed, it is possible to reduce the outer size of the first displacement member and the second displacement member arranged at the retracted position in a front view by the amount corresponding to the overlap.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A4, the connecting displacement member has an overhanging portion formed so as to overhang in the opposite direction to the decorative portion across a portion displaceably arranged to the first displacement member. A gaming machine A5 characterized by:

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A4, the connecting displacement member protrudes to the side opposite to the decorative portion across the portion displaceably arranged to the first displacement member. With the overhang formed, the overhang can act as a weight.

For example, when the driven portion is driven to lift the decorative portion of the connecting displacement member upward, the weight of the overhanging portion is used because the overhanging portion is formed on the side opposite to the decorative portion. , the decorative portion can be easily lifted upward. Therefore, the overhanging portion can be lifted quickly and the driving force required for lifting can be suppressed. In addition, after the decorative portion is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion and the weight of the overhanging portion can be hung together. The lifted posture can be stabilized and the driving force required to maintain the posture can be suppressed.

A game machine A6 in the game machine A5, wherein the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the protruding portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member. When displacing the displacement member, the projecting portion is brought into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member, so that rattling of the connecting displacement member (decorative portion) can be suppressed. In addition, the protruding portion serving as a weight can also play a role of suppressing rattling by coming into contact with the first displacement member, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing the parts cost accordingly. can be achieved.

A game machine A7, wherein in the game machine A6, the projecting portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, the protruding portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape, so that the weight and rigidity can be ensured while reducing the outer shape. can. Therefore, in a state where the projecting portion is hidden behind the back surface of the first displacement member (that is, in a state in which it is not visible from the front), the connecting displacement member can be displaced, and the function as a weight and the back surface of the first displacement member It is possible to reliably exhibit the function of suppressing rattling by coming into contact with.

In any one of game machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and a projecting portion that projects from an outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion. The first displacement member has a contact portion formed to be able to come into contact with the protrusion, the bearing portion pivotally supports the first displacement member in a raised state from the base member, and the protrusion is provided with the first displacement member. A game machine A8 characterized in that the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member is restricted within a predetermined range by the abutment of the abutment portion.

According to game machine A8, in the game machine according to any one of game machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the bearing portion supports the first displacement member. Since it is pivotally supported in a raised state from the base member, such raising makes it possible to form a space for disposing the second displacement member between the base member and the first displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to dispose the first displacement member and the second displacement member in an overlapping posture.

In this case, according to the game machine A8, the base member further includes a projecting portion formed to project from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, and the first displacement member is a contact portion formed to be able to contact the projecting portion. and the contact portion is brought into contact with the projection portion, whereby the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, in order to dispose the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a superimposed posture, the bearing portion that raises the first displacement member from the base member has a relatively high rigidity, and the outer peripheral side of the bearing portion has a A projecting portion is provided from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion where the dead space is formed, and the abutting portion is brought into contact with the projecting portion, thereby preventing the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member. The rigidity of the portion to be regulated can be ensured to improve the durability, and the dead space can be effectively used, so that the size can be reduced accordingly.

A game machine A9 in the game machine A8, wherein the projecting portion of the base member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the projecting portion of the base member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member, so when the first displacement member is displaced, , the projecting portion of the base member is brought into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member, thereby suppressing rattling of the first displacement member. In addition, the projecting portion, which serves to restrict the relative displacement of the first displacement member with respect to the base member, can also serve to suppress rattling by coming into contact with the first displacement member, thereby simplifying the structure. Therefore, the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

In particular, in the game machine A9 subordinate to the game machine A2, the second displacement member (the driven member and the connecting displacement member) is disposed on the first displacement member, so the first displacement member is the weight of the second displacement member. It is necessary to rotate with respect to the base member while supporting the base member, and rattling is likely to occur. Therefore, it is effective to have the protruding portion of the base member contact the rear surface of the first displacement member to suppress rattling of the first displacement member.

In the game machine A9, the first displacement member has its longitudinal one end side pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the protrusion of the base member is located at the edge portion of the longitudinal direction one end side of the first displacement member. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with its back surface.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of the game machine A9, one longitudinal end of the first displacement member is pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the projecting portion of the base member corresponds to one longitudinal end of the first displacement member. Since it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the side edge, when the first displacement member tilts due to its own weight, the projection can be arranged at a position where the tilting can be suppressed. As a result, rattling of the first displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

A game machine A11 in the game machine A10, wherein the projecting portion projects from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion and is connected to the front surface of the base member.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, the protrusion protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing and is connected to the front surface of the base member, so that the rigidity of the protrusion can be increased. can be done. In particular, when the first displacement member is tilted by its own weight, it is possible to increase the rigidity in the direction in which the tilting is supported (that is, the direction in which the projecting portion is pressed against the front surface of the base member). Sticking can be effectively suppressed.

A game machine A12 according to any one of the game machines A2 to A11, wherein the base member has an inclined surface formed by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side surface and the front surface thereof.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A11, the base member has an inclined surface formed by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side surface and the front surface. It is possible to prevent the second displacement member from being locked by the side surface of the base member and becoming unable to be displaced. In this case, in the present invention, the connecting displacement member of the second displacement member is displaceably arranged in a cantilevered state on the back surface of the first displacement member, so that the first displacement member and/or the second displacement member When displacing, the connecting displacement member of the second displacement member tends to swing in the direction of approaching and separating from the base member, and the connecting displacement member tends to be locked to the side surface of the base member. Therefore, the configuration in which the base member is provided with the inclined surface is particularly effective.

In the gaming machine A12, the second displacement member is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the base member protrudes from the front surface thereof and extends along the displacement direction of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A13 characterized by having a ridge.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effects of the game machine A12, the base member has a ridge projecting from the front surface and extending along the displacement direction of the second displacement member. can be brought into contact with the second displacement member. Therefore, compared to the case where the entire front surface of the base member comes into surface contact with the second displacement member, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed.

Here, since the second displacement member is made of a light-transmitting material, when displacing the connection displacement member and making it visible to the player, the second displacement member transmits the irradiated light to produce an effect. can increase In this case, when the second displacement member is displaced, if the entire front surface of the base member comes into contact with the connecting displacement member, the friction between the front surface of the base member and the front surface of the base member causes clouding of the connecting displacement member. The performance effect of transmitting light of the connecting displacement member is impaired. On the other hand, according to the game machine A12, a ridge is formed on the front surface of the base member, and only the tip of the ridge can be brought into contact with the connection displacement member, so that the connection displacement member rubs. can be partially cloudy due to As a result, it is possible to exhibit a performance effect by allowing light to pass through the connecting displacement portion.

In the gaming machine A13, the second displacement member includes a connection pin that connects the driven member and the connection displacement member and is formed of a metal material, and the ridge of the base member is configured so that the second displacement member A gaming machine A14, characterized in that it extends along the trajectory of the connecting pin when it is displaced.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effects of the game machine A13, the second displacement member includes a connection pin that connects the driven member and the connection displacement member and is formed of a metal material, is extended along the trajectory of the connecting pin when the second displacement member is displaced, so that the connecting pin can be brought into contact with the projecting tip of the ridge. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of cloudiness on the portion of the light-transmissive material of the connecting displacement member due to friction with the ridges, and to exhibit the presentation effect by allowing light to pass through the connecting displacement member. can be done.

In the game machine A13 or A14, a gear interposed between the drive means and the transmission member is provided, and the base member includes a gear receiving portion for supporting the gear in its internal space, and A gaming machine A15, wherein a gear receiving portion projects from the front surface of the base member, and the ridge extends to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion.

According to the game machine A15, in addition to the effects of the game machine A13 or A14, the ridge is extended to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion projecting from the front surface of the base member, so that the second displacement member It is possible to prevent the member from being locked by the gear receiving portion projecting from the side surface of the member and becoming unable to be displaced or hindered from displacing it. In other words, by providing a ridge on the front surface of the base member and extending the ridge to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion, the gear receiving portion can be projected from the front surface of the base member. can be done. As a result, the gear can be rotatably accommodated in the inner space of the base member while reducing the thickness dimension of the base member. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to fix the drive shaft of the drive means to the gear (that is, the gear is held in the gear receiving portion of the base member, so the drive shaft of the drive means only needs to be inserted through the gear). ), the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the first displacement member is positioned in front of the base member at a retracted position. It is formed so as to be displaceable between an overhanging position that overhangs in a direction away from the base member, and the rotating shaft of the first displacement member is disposed closer to the overhanging position than the rotating shaft of the transmission member. A gaming machine A16 characterized by:

According to the game machine A16, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the rotation shaft of the first displacement member is connected to the transmission member. , the area of the first displacement member protruding to the protruding position can be increased, while the first displacement member can be positioned at any position between the retracted position and the protruding position. Even in the case of , the transmission member can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member to make it easier to make it invisible to the player.

In the game machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member is arranged to rotate the second displacement member when the second displacement member is extended to the extended position. A gaming machine A17 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the bearing.

According to the game machine A17, in addition to the effects of the game machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member has the second displacement member that extends to the projecting position. In this case, the second displacement member is formed so as to abut against the bearing portion of the base member, so that the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member, which serves to transmit the driving force of the driving means, can also serve as a stopper that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member within a predetermined range. It is possible to simplify and reduce the part cost accordingly.

Further, the bearing portion is a portion for raising the first displacement member from the base member and arranging the first displacement member and the second displacement member in an overlapping posture, and has relatively high rigidity. Since a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side of the transmission member, the rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be ensured by adopting a configuration in which the transmission member abuts against the bearing portion. As a result, durability can be improved, dead space can be effectively used, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine A17, the transmission member is provided with a recess corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing, and when the second displacement member projects to the projecting position, the bearing is received in the recess. A gaming machine A18 characterized in that it is formed in such a way that:

According to the game machine A18, in addition to the effects of the game machine A17, the transmission member is provided with a concave portion corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion, and when the second displacement member is overhanging to the overhanging position, the bearing Since the portion is formed receivably in the recess, the movable range of the transmission member can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the displacement amounts of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be secured. In other words, the position of the rotating shaft of the transmission member can be brought close to the bearing portion while ensuring the movable range of the transmission member. It is possible to easily form a state in which the transmission member is hidden behind the first displacement member (that is, a state in which it is not visible from the front) while being displaced between the position and the extended position.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the action sections of the first groove and the second groove are acted upon by the transmission member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are operated. After each displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the action section of the second groove is acted upon by the transmission member, and the non-interference section causes the transmission member to be non-interfering with the first groove, A game machine A19 characterized in that the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in a second direction, and the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions. .

According to the game machine A19, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced in the first direction, and then the second One displacement member is stopped and a second displacement member is displaced in a second direction. In this case, since the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A18, the inertia accompanying the stop of the first displacement member displaced in the first direction The force can be canceled by the inertia force when the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the parts due to the action of the inertial force and improve the durability.

In the game machine A19, one or more gears are provided between the driving means and the transmission member to transmit the driving force, and the weight of the first displacement member is made heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A20 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A19, the weight of the first displacement member is made heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. The heavy first displacement member can be stopped first, and the light weight second displacement member can be stopped last. Thereby, the load on the gear can be reduced.

That is, from a state in which the transmission member is driven in the forward direction and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are each displaced in the first direction, the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. Since the transition to the state of being displaced in the direction is performed by the transmission member moving from the transmission section of the first groove to the non-interference section, the rotation of the driving means and the gear is continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member is stopped, no load is applied to the gear. On the other hand, the transition from the state in which the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction to the state in which the second displacement member is also stopped depends on the rotation of the driving means and the gear. In this case, the only member that is stopped is the light weight second displacement member, so the load on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A20, a third displacement member disposed displaceably on the first displacement member is provided, and the third displacement member is displaced under the action of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A21 characterized by:

According to the game machine A21, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A20, the third displacement member is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member, and the third displacement member is the second displacement member. Since it is displaced by the action of the member, the third displacement member can also be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member.

In the gaming machine A21, one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member includes a drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member and the third displacement member includes a third groove, and the third groove is , a game machine A22 comprising an action section receiving action from the drive pin and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere.

According to the game machine A22, in addition to the effects of the game machine A21, one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member has a drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member and the third displacement member has the third groove. Since the third groove has an action section that receives action from the drive pin and a non-interference section that does not interfere with the drive pin, both the second displacement member and the third displacement member are displaced with respect to the first displacement member. and a mode in which only one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member is displaced with respect to the first displacement member.

A gaming machine A23 characterized in that in the gaming machine A21, the second displacement member is displaceably disposed on the third displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A23, since the second displacement member is displaceably disposed on the third displacement member, when the third displacement member is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member, The relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be superimposed on the relative displacement of the third displacement member with respect to the first displacement member, and as a result, the first It is possible to increase the amount of relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the displacement member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention, Taking the Counterclockwise Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
a base member, a first displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the first displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member and a connecting member connecting between the base member and the second displacement member, wherein the second displacement member is displaced along with the displacement of the first displacement member. In a game machine that is relatively displaced with respect to a first displacement member, the connection member includes a first connection member having one end connected to the base member and the other end connected to the other end of the first connection member. and a connection second member having one end connected to the second displacement member, and a connection portion between the other ends of the connection first member and the connection second member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member A gaming machine B1 characterized by:

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member arranged displaceably on the base member, a second displacement member arranged displaceably on the first displacement member, There is a game machine provided with driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and a connecting member for connecting between the base member and the second displacement member (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013). -17886).

According to this game machine, when the first displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the connection member acts between the base member and the second displacement member, thereby displacing the first displacement member. , the second displacement member can be displaced relative to the first displacement member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the first displacement member is displaced in a direction away from the base member, the connection member connecting between the base member and the second displacement member is exposed. There is a problem that it becomes visible to people, and the appearance is spoiled.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the connecting member includes a connecting first member having one end connected to the base member, and the other end connected to the other end of the connecting first member and to the second displacement member. and a connecting second member to which one end is connected, and the connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member and the connecting second member is connected to the first displacement member so as to be displaceable, so that the first displacement member is the base. Even when displaced in a direction away from the member, the connecting member (the first connecting member and the second connecting member) can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connection member from being exposed and the appearance from being spoiled.

In the gaming machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably arranged on the base member, and the second connecting member of the connecting member is slidably arranged on the first displacement member. Gaming machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member, and the second member connected to the connection member is slidably displaceable to the first displacement member. Therefore, when the first displacement member is rotated with respect to the base member, when the amount of rotation is large (that is, the amount of displacement of the first connecting member and the second connecting member needs to be increased) Even so, it is possible to avoid being viewed by the player by maintaining the state in which the second connecting member of the connecting member is disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second connecting member of the connecting member from being exposed and impairing the appearance.

Further, even when an electrical connection line is wired to the first displacement member, the second connection member of the connection member is slidably disposed on the first displacement member so that the connection line and the second connection member interference with can be easily suppressed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure a large space for wiring the connection lines in order to avoid interference, it is possible to reduce the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member accordingly.

In the game machine B1 or B2, a driving body driven by the driving means is provided, the driving body is connected to the first connecting member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is transferred from the driving body to the first connecting member. A game machine B3 characterized in that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by being transmitted to the member.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the driving body driven by the driving means is provided, the driving body is connected to the connecting first member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is Since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by transmission from the driving body to the connecting first member, it is possible to reduce the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member.

That is, the connection member is positioned between the first displacement member and the base member because the connection portion between the other ends of the first connection member and the second connection member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member. When the driving body is connected to the first displacement member, the driving body and the connecting member may interfere with each other. Therefore, it is necessary to connect the driving body to the first displacement member at a position that does not overlap the displacement trajectory of the connecting member. There is Therefore, the front view shape of the first displacement member needs to have a size that includes the displacement trajectory of the connection member and the connection portion to which the driving body is connected. do. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B3, it is not necessary to avoid interference between the driving body and the connecting member, and the front view shape of the first displacement member only needs to have a size corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the connecting member. Since it is not necessary to include a connecting portion to which the driving body is connected, the front view shape of the first displacement member can be reduced accordingly.

In game machines B1 to B3, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member and is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, and the base member serves as a base-side engagement member. and a displacement-side engaging member formed to be engageable with the base-side engaging member in a state in which the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, of the first displacement member or the second displacement member. A game machine B4 characterized in that one side is provided with the game machine B4.

Here, in the above-described conventional game machine, the connecting member connects the base member and the second displacement member in an erected state, and in the retracted position, at a position relatively distant from the rotation axis of the first displacement member, A connecting member connects the base member and the second displacement member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member tries to tilt the portion on the opposite side of the rotation shaft (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, there will be a gap between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

However, in the game machine B4, since the connection portion between the other ends of the connection first member and the connection second member is connected to the first displacement member so as to be displaceable, the first displacement member is displaceable at the retracted position. With the rotating shaft as the base end, the portion opposite to the rotating shaft (that is, the second displacement member side) is the free end. Therefore, due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member, the portion of the first displacement member opposite to the rotating shaft (second displacement member side) tends to tilt away from the base member.

In this case, according to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B3, the base member includes the base-side engagement member, and one of the first displacement member and the second displacement member is the displacement-side engagement member. When the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are formed so as to be able to engage with each other. It is possible to suppress tilting of the portion (on the side of the second displacement member) in a direction away from the base member.

A gaming machine B5, wherein the second displacement member comprises the displacement side engaging member in the gaming machine B4.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, since the second displacement member includes the displacement side engagement member, the engagement position between the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member is set to the first position. It can be located relatively far from the axis of rotation of the displacement member. Therefore, by utilizing the engagement of the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, the portion of the first displacement member opposite to the rotation shaft (second displacement member side) tilts in a direction away from the base member. can be effectively suppressed.

In the gaming machine B5, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are formed by bending a base portion erected from the front surface of the base member or the rear surface of the second displacement member and bending the tip of the base portion. and a bent portion having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface, and the engaging surfaces of the bent portions are engaged with each other by displacing the first displacement member from the extended position to the retracted position. , the engagement surface of the bent portion of the base-side engaging member is inclined in a direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engaging tip side thereof, or (and) engagement of the bent portion of the displacement-side engaging member. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that the surface is inclined in a direction away from the back surface of the second displacement member toward the engaging tip side thereof.

Here, when the second displacement member includes a displacement-side engagement member as in the game machine B5, the engagement position between the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member is shifted from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. Since the positions are relatively distant, it becomes difficult to engage the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member due to the shaking of the first displacement member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, the engagement surface of the bent portion of the base-side engagement member is inclined in a direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engagement tip side, or (and) displacement-side engagement. The engagement surface of the bent portion of the member is inclined in a direction away from the rear surface of the second displacement member toward the engaging tip side, that is, the engagement surface of the bent portion and the front surface of the base member or the rear surface of the second displacement member. Since the distance between is widened toward the engagement tip side, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, even if the first displacement member shakes, the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member can be easily engaged.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine B6, the engagement surface of the bent portion of at least one of the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member is inclined as described above, so that the first displacement member moves toward the retracted position. When displaced by the second displacement member, the second displacement member can be brought closer to the base member along with the inclination of the engagement surface of the bent portion. As a result, at the retracted position, the projection dimension of the second displacement member from the base member can be suppressed, and rattling of the second displacement member can be absorbed to maintain its posture.

In the gaming machine B5 or B6, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member comprise a base erected from the front surface of the base member or the rear surface of the second displacement member, and a tip of the base that is bent to bent portions having inner surfaces serving as engagement surfaces, and the engagement surfaces of the bent portions are engaged with each other by displacing the first displacement member from the extended position to the retracted position. A gaming machine B7 characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving a bent portion of an opponent is formed on the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5 or B6, the front surface of the base member and the rear surface of the second displacement member are formed with a receiving portion for receiving the bent portion of the opponent. In a state in which the displacement member is arranged at the retracted position (a state in which the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are engaged), the bent portion is received by the receiving portion and approaches the base member of the second displacement member. Directional displacement can be allowed. Therefore, the standing dimensions of the base portions of the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are increased to make it easier to engage the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, while at the retracted position, the second Damage due to collision can be prevented by allowing displacement of the displacement member in a direction approaching the base member.

In any one of game machines B3 to B7, the displacement-side engagement member is engaged with the first displacement member in a state where the first displacement member is arranged at the extended position. Gaming machine B8.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B3 to B7, in the state where the first displacement member is arranged at the projecting position, the displacement side engaging member is the first displacement member. Engaged, that is, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be coupled via the displacement-side engaging member. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress rattling of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member at the overhang position. At the retracted position, the displacement-side engaging member engages with the base-side engaging member to couple the second displacement member to the base member. Since the member can also play the role of connecting the member to the first displacement member, the structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B8, an interposing means interposed between the second displacement member and one end of the second connection member is provided, and the interposing means is adapted to the base member. Different modes of action occurring between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or in the second direction. A game machine B9 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the interposing means interposed between the second displacement member and the one end of the connecting second member, and the interposing means is the action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and in the second direction with respect to the base member. Since the modes are different, depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or in the second direction with respect to the base member, the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member is changed. can be different.

In the gaming machine B9, the interposing means includes a guided portion provided at one end of the first displacement member or the second connection member, and one end of the first displacement member or the second connection member. a guide portion disposed on the other side for guiding the guided portion, and when the first displacement member is displaced in a first direction and in a second direction with respect to the base member, A gaming machine B10 characterized in that by guiding the guide portion along different paths of the guide portion, the mode of action occurring between the second displacement member and the one end of the second connecting member is differentiated.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B9, the intervening means displaces the first displacement member in the first direction and in the second direction with respect to the base member. By guiding the guiding portion along different paths of the guided portion, the mode of action generated between the second displacement member and the one end of the second connecting member is made different. It is possible to easily change the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to one displacement member. That is, the degree of freedom in designing can be increased.

In the gaming machine B9, the interposition means acts between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member. is generated, and when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is released. Gaming machine B11.

According to the game machine B11, when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member, the interposition means causes the action between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member. On the other hand, when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and the one end of the connecting second member is released. It is possible to make the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member largely different between when the member is displaced in the first direction and when the member is displaced in the second direction.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Center Frame 86 as an Example>
Formed so as to be displaceable between a game board having a game area on the front and an opening formed in the center, a retracted position on the back side of the game board, and an overhanging position visible through the opening. and a displacement member, comprising a center frame made of a light-transmitting material and fitted in the opening of the game board, the center frame forming part of the game area. A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising an area forming section.

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a game board having a game area on the front and an opening formed in the center, a retracted position on the back side of the game board, and a tension that can be visually recognized through the opening. There is a game machine provided with a displacement member formed to be displaceable between out positions (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176580).

According to this game machine, the opening of the game board is made larger than the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device to secure an area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since it is necessary to secure an area for the balls to flow down in the game area, there is a limit to enlarging the opening of the game board, and the area where the displacement member can be visually recognized is limited. There was a problem that it could not be sufficiently secured.

On the other hand, the game machine C1 is provided with a center frame made of a light-transmitting material and fitted inside the opening of the game board, and the center frame is provided with an area forming portion that forms a part of the game area. Therefore, the displacement member can be visually recognized through the region forming portion. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure an area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized while securing an area for the ball to flow down in the game area.

In the game machine C1, the area forming part of the center frame forms a continuous area from the inner edge of the opening of the game board to the outer edge of the game area as part of the game area. C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the area forming part of the center frame forms a continuous area from the inner edge of the opening of the game board to the outer edge of the game area as part of the game area. Therefore, it is possible to secure a maximum area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized.

In the gaming machine C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame is set to have a width allowing only one game ball to pass through.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows only one game ball to pass through, so that the opening of the game board ( That is, it is possible to ensure the maximum possible area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized (without passing through the center frame).

In the game machine C2 or C3, the game machine C4 is characterized in that the region forming portion of the center frame comprises a downstream wall portion erected on the downstream side of the region and formed integrally with the center frame.

Here, if the center frame is made of a resin material and nails cannot be implanted, the speed of the game ball flowing down increases, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C4, since the area forming part of the center frame is provided with a downstream wall part erected on the downstream side of the area, the game ball flowing down the area forming part hits the downstream wall part. can be brought into contact. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2 or C3, the falling speed of the game ball can be reduced to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball. In addition, since the downstream wall portion is integrally formed with the center frame, it can be easily molded by molding, and the fastening and fixing of separate parts can be eliminated, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. .

In the game machine C4, the region forming portion of the center frame has a side wall portion which is erected in the region and defines a passage through which game balls flow down, and which is integrally formed with the center frame. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being connected to a wall.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the area forming part of the center frame is provided with a side wall part which is erected in the area and defines a passage through which game balls flow down, and the side wall part is located downstream. Since it is connected to the wall, it is possible to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall that receives the game ball flowing down. This can prevent the downstream wall from being damaged. In addition, since the connecting wall portion is integrally formed with the center frame, it can be easily formed by molding, and the fastening and fixing of separate parts can be eliminated, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. . Furthermore, since the side wall portion which plays the role of partitioning the passage through which the game balls flow down can also play the role of increasing the rigidity of the downstream wall portion, the structure can be simplified and the part cost can be reduced accordingly. be able to.

In the game machine C5, an inner rail is provided to guide a game ball launched from the front surface of the game board to the game area, and the side wall portion is arranged in parallel with the inner rail. Machine C6.

Here, in the conventional game machine, the mode in which the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail after colliding with the nail and bouncing, and the speed is relatively slow, and this causes damage to the inner rail. There was no problem such as inviting On the other hand, in the present invention, in order to maximize the area where the displacement member can be visually recognized, the width of the area forming portion forming a part of the game area is narrow (for example, only one game ball is allowed to pass through). width). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed by the area forming section. Therefore, on the upstream side of the area forming section, it is necessary to guide the game balls flowing down the game area toward the area forming section. , and the inner rail may bend.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C6, since the side wall portion is arranged side by side with the inner rail, the game ball flowing down the game area is guided toward the area forming portion, and as a result, the game ball is directed toward the inner rail. Even if the game ball falls down, the side wall catches the game ball and prevents it from colliding with the inner rail. As a result, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5, it is possible to suppress the bending of the inner rail.

In the gaming machine C5 or C6, a light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the area forming portion of the center frame and formed to emit light, and the side wall portion emits light emitted from the light emitting means. A game machine C7 characterized in that it is formed to function as a light guide leading to the front side of the game area.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5 or C6, the side wall portion is formed to function as a light guide that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front side of the game area. It is possible to demonstrate the effect of directing by. In particular, in the game machine C7 subordinate to the game machine C6, the side wall portion is arranged side by side with the inner rail, so that the inner rail can reduce the leakage of light, and the amount of light that can be guided can be increased accordingly. . As a result, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the light.

In the game machine C7, the light emitting means is arranged on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is the rear surface of the region forming portion of the center frame.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machine C7, the light emitting means is arranged on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is the rear surface of the region forming portion of the center frame. is placed at the retracted position, the displacement member is visible through the region forming portion of the center frame, and the light emitted from the light emitting means of the displacement member is guided through the side wall portion. can be visualized. As a result, the effect of lighting can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C8, the area forming portion of the center frame defines a passage which is erected in the area and through which game balls flow down, and which is formed integrally with the center frame. A game machine C9 characterized in that one or a plurality of protrusions are protruded from the opposing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions.

Here, when the center frame is made of a resin material and nails cannot be implanted in the region forming portion, the speed of the game ball flowing down the passage partitioned by the pair of side wall portions increases, and the falling game ball is played. difficult for people to see.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C9, since one or a plurality of protrusions are protrudingly provided on the facing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions, when the game ball flows down the passage partitioned by the pair of side wall portions In addition, the game ball can be made to collide with the protrusions to hinder its flow. As a result, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C8, the falling speed of the game balls can be slowed down, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game balls.

A gaming machine C10 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C9, the projections on one facing surface and the projections on the other facing surface of the pair of side wall portions are arranged in a zigzag pattern.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9, the projections on one facing surface of the pair of side wall portions and the projections on the other facing surface are arranged in a zigzag manner, so that the pair of side wall portions are partitioned. When the game ball flows down the passage, the game ball is caused to alternately collide with left and right projections, thereby making the flowing down game ball meander. As a result, in addition to the effects of the game machine C9, the falling speed of the game ball can be made slower so that the player can easily see the falling game ball, and the flowing game ball can be seen in the direction perpendicular to the flowing direction. It can be displaced to change the movement of the game ball.

In the game machine C10, the game machine C11 is characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a concave groove that is concavely formed in the front surface thereof and extends in a substantially sawtooth shape.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is recessed in the front surface thereof and has a concave groove extending in a substantially sawtooth shape, so that the area forming portion can be used as a game. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the inner surface of the concave groove to meander. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be slowed down, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball. In addition, according to the game machine C11 subordinate to the game machine C7, the recessed groove can be used as a lens to guide the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front of the game area, so that the effect of the light can be exhibited. can do.

In the game machine C11, the game machine C12 is characterized in that the concave groove is arranged such that the bent portion thereof is displaced from the protrusion in the flowing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effects of the game machine C11, the bent portion of the recessed groove is displaced from the projection in the direction in which the game ball flows, so the game ball flows down the area forming portion. In this case, the meandering game ball guided by the inner surface of the groove can easily collide alternately with the protrusions. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of the concave groove and the action of the projection. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be made slower, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball. In addition, it is possible to increase the change in the motion of the game ball.

In the game machine C10, the game machine C13 is characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a ridge projecting from the front surface thereof and extending in a substantially sawtooth shape.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a ridge projecting from the front surface and extending in a substantially sawtooth shape, so that the area forming portion can be used as a game. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the outer surface of the ridge to meander. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be slowed down, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball. Further, according to the game machine C13 subordinate to the game machine C7, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be guided to the front of the game area by using the ridge as a lens, and the effect of the light can be exhibited. can do.

In the game machine C13, the game machine C14 is characterized in that the bent portion of the protruding line is aligned with the projection in a flowing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine C14, in addition to the effects of the game machine C13, the bent portion of the ridge is aligned with the protrusion in the flowing direction of the game ball, so the game ball flows down the area forming portion. In this case, the meandering game ball guided by the outer surface of the ridge can easily collide alternately with the protrusions. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of the ridges and the action of the protrusions. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be made slower, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball. In addition, it is possible to increase the change in the motion of the game ball.

In any one of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the terminal end side of the groove or the ridge is arranged so that its extending direction overlaps with the downstream wall portion and faces the exit of the passage partitioned by the pair of side wall portions. Characterized game machine C15.

According to the game machine C15, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C11 to C14, the terminal end side of the recessed groove or the ridge overlaps the downstream wall portion in the extending direction and is partitioned by the pair of side wall portions. Since the outlet of the passage is oriented, the game ball guided to the end side of the concave groove or the ridge can collide with the downstream wall from an oblique direction, thereby suppressing the bouncing of the game ball. The game ball can be made to flow down toward the exit of the passage while reducing the flow speed. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly discharged from the outlet of the passage.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Winning Device 65 as an Example>
A first seesaw member having one end side and the other end side rotatably supported by a rotating shaft is provided, and the seesaw member is lowered at one end side and raised at the other end side in an unloaded state. The seesaw member in a gaming machine that forms a state and forms a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered by placing a game ball on the other end side of the rotating shaft. The seesaw member has a receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided by the guiding means, and the receiving surface is positioned closer to the one end than the rotating shaft. Gaming machine D1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side. While forming a first state in which the other end side is raised while the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft, the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered A second state There is a gaming machine that forms a (for example, JP-A-2007-283136).

According to this gaming machine, when a game ball is dropped onto the seesaw member in the first state and placed between the rotating shaft and the other end, the weight of the game ball causes The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form the second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is ejected, the other end side is raised and the one end side is lowered to return to the first state. In other words, the weight of the dropped game ball can be used to alternately appear the first state and the second state, and an effect is produced by an action in which one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member are displaced up and down. It can be carried out.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the second state is maintained in which the other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised, and the first state and the second state are maintained. There was a problem that it was not possible to alternately switch between

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since the receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided from the guide means is located on the one end side of the rotating shaft, the other end side of the seesaw member is lowered and the one end side is raised. Even in the second state, the one end side can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving surface. That is, it is possible to form the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is formed so as to be able to deliver the game ball to the other end side when receiving the game ball guided from the guide means in the first state. Game machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is formed so as to be able to deliver the game ball to the other end when receiving the game ball guided from the guiding means in the first state. Therefore, switching from the first state to the second state can be reliably performed.

Examples of a configuration in which the game ball can be delivered to the other end include a configuration in which the receiving surface is inclined downward from one end to the other end even in the first state, a projection formed on the receiving surface, For example, the protrusion is formed in a shape that bounces the game ball guided from the guide means toward the other end side.

The game machine D1 or D2 includes a rotatably pivotally supported decorative member, one end of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the decorative member rotates around the rotation axis of the seesaw member. is displaced.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, it is provided with a rotatably pivotally supported decorative member, one end of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the rotation axis of the seesaw member is the center. Since a link mechanism is formed in which the decorative member is displaced in accordance with the rotation, the movable range of the decorative member can be expanded according to the link ratio, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Here, in order to reliably alternately switch the seesaw member between the first state and the second state, the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised when the no-load state is established. It is preferable to be able to return the seesaw member early. In this case, according to the gaming machine D3, since the decorative member is connected to one end of the seesaw member, the weight of the decorative member is applied to the one end of the seesaw member to lower the one end. be able to. Therefore, in the no-load state, the seesaw member can be quickly returned to the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. Alternate switching between states can be facilitated.

The weight of the decorative member prevents one end of the seesaw member from rising (forming the second state). is placed on the other end side, it is possible to form a second state in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the guide means includes a passage through which the game balls pass, and on the terminal end side of the passage, a rolling roller that extends in a substantially horizontal direction and on which the game balls roll. A game machine D4 is characterized in that a horizontal passage having a guide surface is formed, and a game ball rolling on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is guided substantially horizontally to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machines D1 to D3, the guide means has a passage through which the game balls pass, so a plurality of game balls can be stored using the passage. , the plurality of game balls can be sequentially guided from the passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

However, even in this case, in the form in which the game balls are guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member by falling from above, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, the plurality of game balls will fall on the receiving surface. The seesaw member cannot be alternately switched between the first state and the second state.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D4, a horizontal passage extending substantially horizontally and having a rolling guide surface on which game balls roll is formed on the end side of the passage, and the horizontal passage rolls. Since game balls rolling on the dynamic guide surface are guided substantially horizontally to the receiving surface of the seesaw member, they can be guided one by one from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member (that is, the receiving surface is horizontal). One ball at a time can be received from the passage in order), and it is possible to avoid stacking a plurality of game balls on the receiving surface. Therefore, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member.

In the gaming machine D4, the guide means includes an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extending in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, and the length of extension of the horizontal passage is is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4, the guide means includes an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extending in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, Since the extension length of the horizontal passage is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the passage, the game balls are placed one by one on the receiving surface of the seesaw member. It is possible to provide guidance while keeping an interval.

That is, since the extension length of the horizontal passage is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, the horizontal passage can be in a state in which only one game ball exists, and the extension of the horizontal passage can be reduced. Since the installation direction and the extension direction of the upstream passage are different directions, when the ball flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction, It is possible to lengthen the time required to flow into the horizontal passage. Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member, the game ball behind the upstream passage flows into the horizontal passage while taking time to change direction, and after that, is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, the later game ball is spaced from the previous game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member one by one while being spaced apart.

In the game machine D4 or D5, the game machine D6 is characterized in that, at least in the second state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned above the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4 or D5, at least in the second state (state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered), the receiving surface of the seesaw member rolls in the horizontal path. Since a step is formed between the receiving surface and the rolling guide surface located above the guide surface, the game ball rolling on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. When it is played, the game ball can be run on the receiving surface (collision with the step), and the receiving surface of the seesaw member can be easily lowered by using this running operation (collision). As a result, it is possible to easily form the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised.

In the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path or positioned below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path. Characterized game machine D7.

Here, the fact that the seesaw member is in the first state means that the seesaw member is in an unloaded state, and the game ball received by the receiving surface after being guided from the horizontal passage is quickly sent out to the other end side. It means that the weight of the game ball is required to act on the other end side of the rotating shaft to lower the other end side (to form the second state).

In this case, according to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path or the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path. Since it is positioned below the dynamic guide surface, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, unlike the case of the second state, the game ball does not need to ride on the receiving surface (collide with the step), and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly sent out to the other end side, and as a result, it is possible to easily form the second state in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

In addition, in the first state, it is preferable that the receiving surface of the seesaw member is flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. When the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage, the game ball guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage falls onto the receiving surface of the seesaw member. This is because the ball bounces, resulting in a time lag and an increased load on the rotating shaft of the seesaw member due to the impact of the drop.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member is formed such that the other end side thereof is bent upward in a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft. Machine D8.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member has the other end bent upward in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotation shaft. Since it is formed, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

That is, the seesaw member, if the downward inclination of the other end side of the rotating shaft is insufficient, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side (that is, the other end side is lowered and the second state is formation time) is lengthened, and alternating switching between the first state and the second state is hindered. However, if the entire area on the other end side of the rotating shaft is inclined downward, the other end side protrudes from the space allowed for disposing the seesaw member (that is, the space required for disposing the seesaw member increases. ). On the other hand, if the length from the rotating shaft to the other end is shortened so as to fit within the space allowed for the arrangement of the seesaw member, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end (that is, Since the other end side is lowered and the time during which the second state is formed is shortened and the formation of the second state becomes uncertain, alternating switching between the first state and the second state is hindered. In addition, in order to fit the seesaw member in the space allowed for disposing the seesaw member while ensuring the length from the rotating shaft to the other end side, the downward inclination of the other end side from the rotating shaft is insufficient. .

On the other hand, by forming the other end side of the seesaw member in a shape that bends upward in a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft, the problems described above can be resolved, and as a result, It is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D8, the seesaw member is provided with an inlet into which game balls rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side are introduced, and the other end side of the seesaw member is provided with the above-mentioned A game machine D9, characterized in that a pawl portion is protrudingly formed so as to be capable of switching a rolling direction of a game ball rolled from a rotating shaft toward the other end side to a direction toward the inflow port.

According to the game machine D9, in any one of the game machines D1 to D8, the other end side of the seesaw member has a rolling direction of the game ball rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side toward the inlet. Since the pawl is formed to be switchable in direction, the game ball can be quickly introduced into the inlet. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the seesaw member (that is, the time during which the other end side is lowered and the second state is formed) becomes too long, resulting in the first state and the second state. It is possible to suppress the inhibition of alternating switching between and.

In the game machine D9, the game machine D10 is characterized in that the pawl portion is biased toward the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effects of the game machine D9, the pawl portion is disposed on the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, so that the rolling position of the game ball is aligned with the seesaw member. Even if there is variation in the width direction, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member (that is, the time during which the other end side is lowered and the second state is formed). It can be easily made constant.

That is, the pawl portion is biased toward the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, so that the game ball that rolls on the back side in the width direction of the seesaw member (opposite side to the inflow port) is Since the distance to the inlet in the width direction of the seesaw member is long, it is made to collide with the claw at an early stage and roll to the inlet, while the front of the seesaw member in the width direction (closer to the inlet) rolls. Since the ball has a short distance to the inlet in the width direction of the seesaw member, it is possible to delay the collision with the claw. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member can be made to be equally close.

As a result, even if the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member (that is, the other end side is time during which the second state is formed) can be easily made constant.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inlet into which the game ball rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side is introduced, and the width of the inlet is equal to the diameter of the game ball. A game machine D11 characterized in that it is set to a dimension larger than double.

According to the game machine D11, in any of the game machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inlet into which game balls rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side are introduced, and the width of the inlet is is set to a dimension larger than twice the diameter of the game ball, so that the next game ball rolls further toward the other end side while the previous game ball exists on the other end side of the seesaw member. In this case, each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the inlet. For example, even if a later game ball collides with a previous game ball and these game balls roll into the inlet at the same time, they can be made to flow in smoothly.

In the game machine D11, the game machine D12 is characterized in that the height of the inflow port is set to be larger on the rotating shaft side than on the other end side of the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D11, the height of the inlet is set to be larger on the rotating shaft side than on the other end of the seesaw member. Even when the next game ball rolls further toward the other end side and collides with the previous game ball existing on the other end side of the seesaw member, each of these game balls is smoothly moved to the inflow port. can flow in. That is, even if the game ball bounces up after colliding with the previous game ball, the height of the inlet is increased on the side of the rotating shaft, so that the height of the game ball can be used to catch the subsequent game ball. It can be ejected smoothly. On the other hand, even if the previous game ball collides with the next game ball, it is difficult to bounce up, so by reducing the height dimension on the other end side, the previous game ball smoothly flows into the inlet. In addition, the space required for the inlet can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D12 is characterized by comprising suppressing means for suppressing guidance of a game ball from the guiding means to the seesaw member when the seesaw member is arranged at least in the second state. Game machine D13.

According to the game machine D13, in any one of the game machines D1 to D12, when the seesaw member is arranged at least in the second state, the game machine D13 is provided with the suppressing means for suppressing the guidance of the game ball from the guide means to the seesaw member. , the time for the game ball on the other end side of the seesaw member to be kicked can be secured. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine D13, the guide means includes a delivery port for delivering game balls to the seesaw member, and the suppressing means includes a restricting portion disposed closer to one end of the seesaw member than the rotating shaft, When the seesaw member is rotated to at least a second state, at least a portion of the restricting portion projects to the delivery port, thereby suppressing delivery of the game ball from the delivery port to the seesaw member. Gaming machine D14.

According to the game machine D14, in addition to the effects of the game machine D13, the suppressing means includes a regulating portion arranged on the one end side of the seesaw member relative to the rotation shaft, and the seesaw member is rotated at least to the second state. By projecting at least a part of the regulating portion to the delivery port, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port to the seesaw member is suppressed, so that the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. That is, the seesaw member can also serve as a mechanism for projecting the restricting portion into the delivery port, and a driving mechanism for displacing the restricting portion and a control means for controlling the displacement timing thereof can be eliminated.

The state in which the restricting portion protrudes into the delivery port and the delivery of the game ball is suppressed means that the game machine cannot pass through the delivery port and the game ball can pass through the delivery port. Including both. Even in the latter case (passable), the regulation portion protrudes into the delivery port and narrows the passage width of the delivery port so that the game ball collides with the inner wall of the delivery port and the outer wall of the regulation portion. Since the game ball is delivered from the delivery port, throwing of the game ball is suppressed. That is, the game balls in a continuous state can be separated.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Winning Device 65 as an Example>
A first seesaw member having one end side and the other end side rotatably supported by a rotating shaft is provided, and the seesaw member is lowered at one end side and raised at the other end side in an unloaded state. A gaming machine that forms a second state in which a game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft so that one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered, wherein the rotating shaft A game machine E1 characterized by comprising a discharge means for easily discharging a game ball placed on the other end side of the game machine E1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side. While forming a first state in which the other end side is raised while the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft, the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered A second state There is a gaming machine that forms a (for example, JP-A-2007-283136).

According to this gaming machine, when a game ball is dropped onto the seesaw member in the first state and placed between the rotating shaft and the other end, the weight of the game ball causes The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form the second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is ejected, the other end side is raised and the one end side is lowered to return to the first state. In other words, the weight of the dropped game ball can be used to alternately appear the first state and the second state, and an effect is produced by an action in which one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member are displaced up and down. It can be carried out.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the second state is maintained in which the other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised, and the first state and the second state are maintained. There was a problem that it was not possible to alternately switch between

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the seesaw member is provided with a discharge means for easily discharging the game ball placed on the other end side, so that the other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised. Even in this state, the game ball can be discharged from the other end by the discharge means, the weight of the game ball on the other end can be removed, and the one end can be easily lowered. That is, the state in which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft (that is, the state in which the second state is formed) is terminated early, and the one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. a first state can be formed. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine E1, the discharging means includes a rotatably supported shaft support portion, a receiving portion disposed on one side of the shaft supporting portion and receiving the game ball guided from the guide means, and a receiving portion. and a push-out portion arranged to sandwich the shaft support portion with respect to the portion, and when the receiving portion receives the game ball guided from the guide means, the push-out portion is rotated around the shaft support portion. A game machine E2 characterized in that a portion protrudes to the other end side of the seesaw member.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, when the receiving part receives the game ball guided from the guide means, the ejecting part rotates about the shaft supporting part so that the pushing part moves to the seesaw member. Since it protrudes to the other end side, the game ball placed on the other end side of the seesaw member can be pushed out by the pushing portion and discharged from the seesaw member. As a result, the other end side of the seesaw member can be raised by discharging the game ball by the pushing portion, and the one end side of the seesaw member can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving portion. Early termination can facilitate switching between the first state and the second state. In addition, the operation of receiving the game ball by the receiving portion is used to rotate the ejecting means (protruding the push-out portion).

In the game machine E2, the game machine E3 is characterized in that the shaft supporting portion of the discharge means is rotatably supported by the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the ejecting means is rotatably supported by the seesaw member at the shaft supporting portion, so that the relative position of the ejecting means to the seesaw member can be kept constant. . Therefore, the game ball guided from the guide means can be easily received by the receiving part, and the rotation around the shaft support part can be surely formed, and the pushing part projected to the other end side of the seesaw member by the rotation can be played. The game ball can be reliably pushed out (discharged) from the seesaw member by facilitating contact with the ball. As a result, it is possible to facilitate switching between the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the receiving portion of the discharging means has a larger retractable amount than the pushing portion with respect to a virtual plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the seesaw member and the pivotal support portion of the discharging means. A gaming machine E4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the ejection means has a larger retractable amount of the receiving portion than the push-out portion. , and the energy received from the received game ball can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to ensure the pushing force of the game ball by the pushing portion accompanying the retreat of the receiving portion. That is, the game ball can be quickly discharged easily.

On the other hand, by making the retraction amount of the pushing portion smaller than that of the receiving portion, when the game ball rolling toward the other end of the seesaw member causes the pushing portion to retreat, the rolling trajectory of the game ball increases. can be suppressed, and such game balls can be quickly discharged easily.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the discharging means is mounted on the other end side of the rotating shaft by relatively raising one of the rotating shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction with respect to the other in the axial direction. The game machine E5 is characterized by making it easy to discharge placed game balls.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E4, one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction by the ejecting means, By increasing the downward inclination angle of the seesaw member from one axial direction to the other axial direction of the rotating shaft, a game ball placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft can be ejected from the seesaw member. This makes it easier to alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

It should be noted that the fact that one of the rotating shafts in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction means that it is sufficient if the amount of rise in one of the axial directions is greater than the amount of rise in the other axial direction. Therefore, after being raised, one axial direction may be arranged at a lower position than the other axial direction.

In the game machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, the discharging means moves one axial direction of the rotation shaft of the seesaw member in the first section. In the second section which is not raised relative to the other and which is closer to the second state than the first section, one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is relative to the other in the axial direction. The game machine E6 is characterized by being raised in a positive manner.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state toward the second state, the ejection means rotates the rotation axis of the seesaw member in the first section. in the second section, which is closer to the second state than the first section, the one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is shifted to the other axial direction. , it is possible to reliably form the second state and smoothly alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

That is, when the operation of relatively raising one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction is performed from the first section, the discharge of the game ball is accelerated, and the second state is surely formed. Can not. On the other hand, if the operation to raise one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction is not performed, the ejection of the game ball is slowed down (residence time is lengthened), resulting in the second state. easier to maintain.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, in the first section, one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is rotated to the other axial direction. On the other hand, since it does not rise relatively, it is possible to suppress the ejection of the game ball from being hastened (that is, to make the game ball stay), and to make it easier to reliably form the second state. On the other hand, in the second section, since one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction, the game ball can be discharged quickly, and the game ball is placed. The time (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened. As a result, alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly while the second state can be reliably formed.

In the gaming machine E5 or E6, the seesaw member is formed with a cam on at least one side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and along with the rotation of the rotating shaft, from the axis of the rotating shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam. A game machine E7 characterized in that one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction by increasing the distance of the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5 or E6, a cam is formed in at least one axial direction of the rotating shaft, and along with the rotation of the rotating shaft, from the axis of the rotating shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam By increasing the distance of the seesaw member, one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction, so control for controlling the drive mechanism and its drive timing for operating such a rotating shaft No means required. Moreover, the first section and the second section can be reliably formed, and the degree of freedom in designing the ratio of the first and second sections can be increased.

In any one of game machines E5 to E7, a push-up portion is provided on a moving locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, and the push-up portion hits the seesaw member. A game machine E8 characterized in that one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction by being brought into contact with each other.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E5 to E7, the seesaw member is provided on the movement locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, When the push-up portion is brought into contact with the seesaw member, one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction. Control means for controlling timing can be made unnecessary. In addition, the first section and the second section can be reliably formed, and the degree of freedom in designing the ratio of each section can be increased.

<Regarding the concept of the invention as an example of the base side engaging member 12726>
A game machine comprising a base member and a displacement member rotatably disposed on the base member at its base end side and rotated between a retracted position and an extended position, wherein the base member comprises a base-side engagement member. In addition, the displacement member includes a displacement-side engagement member formed to be engageable with the base-side engagement member at the retracted position, and in a state in which the first displacement member is arranged at the extended position, the base The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the base-side engaging member is formed such that it is difficult for a player to visually recognize the member when viewed from the front.

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A performance member having a transmission member that transmits and a driving means that imparts a driving force to the transmission member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are provided via the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, JP-A-2009-100994).

In this conventional game machine, the connecting member connects the base member and the second displacement member in an erected state, and in the retracted position, the base member and the second displacement member are positioned relatively apart from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. 2 displacement members are connected by a connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member tries to tilt the portion on the opposite side of the rotation shaft (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, there will be a gap between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

However, in the game machine F1, the base end side of the displacement member is rotatably supported, while the side opposite to the base end side (tip end side) is a free end. Therefore, at the retracted position, the side opposite to the proximal side (tip side) tends to tilt (forward) in a direction away from the base member due to its own weight and the weight of the decorative portion provided on the front side.

In this case, according to the gaming machine F1, the base member includes the base-side engagement member, the displacement member includes the displacement-side engagement member, and in a state in which the displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base-side engagement Since the member and the displacement-side engaging member are formed to be engageable, it is possible to suppress tilting of the side opposite to the base end side of the displacement member (the distal end side) in a direction away from the base member.

On the other hand, in the case where the base member is provided with the base-side engaging member and the displacement member is provided with the displacement-side engaging member as described above, when the displacement member is extended to the projecting position, the front surface of the base member is exposed, the base-side engagement member is visually recognized by the player, and the appearance is spoiled. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is formed so as to be difficult for the player to visually recognize when the base member is viewed from the front.

In the game machine F1, the base-side engaging member is disposed in front of the base member so as to be retractable, and when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member moves in front of the base member. and when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base-side engagement member is retracted toward the back side of the base member.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the base-side engaging member is disposed in front of the base member so as to be retractable, and when the displacement member is rotated to the projecting position, the base-side engaging member is engaged. Since the joining member is retracted toward the back side of the base member, the base-side engaging member can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize when the base member is viewed from the front, and the deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed.

Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member protrudes from the front surface of the base member. be able to. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the displacement-side engaging member from interfering with other members when the displacement member is rotated. In other words, since the protrusion height of the displacement-side engaging member can be reduced, a space for displacing other members can be secured.

In the game machine F2, a drive means is provided for rotating the displacement member with respect to the base member, and the base-side engagement member is projected from the front surface of the base member by the action of the driving force of the drive means. A game machine F3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the driving means for rotating the displacement member with respect to the base member is provided, and the driving force of the driving means causes the base-side engagement member to move to the base member. Since it protrudes from the front, it can also be used as a driving means, and the product cost can be reduced. That is, the driving force for rotationally driving the displacement member can also be used as the driving force for protruding the base-side engaging member, making it unnecessary to separately provide a driving means for such projection.

As a form of projecting the base-side engaging member by the action of the driving force of the driving means, when the displacement member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the base-side engaging member is directly or indirectly engaged by the displacement member. When the member is displaced in the projecting direction, or when the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the displacing member is displaced, the displacing member directly or indirectly displaces the base-side engaging member in the projecting direction. and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine F3 is provided with biasing means for biasing the base-side engaging member in the retraction direction, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, the action of the biasing force of the biasing means The game machine F4 is characterized in that the base-side engaging member is returned to the retracted position.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the biasing means for biasing the base-side engaging member in the direction of insertion is provided, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, the biasing means is activated. Since the base-side engaging member is returned to the retracted position by the action of the biasing force of the biasing means, it is not necessary to interlock both the projecting direction and the retracting direction with the action of the driving force of the driving means, and only the projecting direction is interlocked. The structure can be simplified accordingly.

In the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is arranged so as to be retractable from the front surface of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member moves to the front surface of the base member. a gaming machine F5, wherein the base-side engaging member is advanced toward the front side of the base member when the displacement member is retracted from the base member and the displacement member is rotated to the extended position.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base side engagement member is retracted from the front of the base member. By engaging the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, it is possible not only to suppress tilting of the base end side and the opposite side (distal end side) of the displacement member in a direction away from the base member, but also to prevent the base-side engaging member from tilting. By narrowing the distance between the engaging surfaces (inner surfaces) of the member and the displacement-side engaging member, it is possible to suppress back-and-forth rattling on the distal end side of the displacement member.

Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base-side engaging member is advanced toward the front of the base member, so that the base-side engaging member is visually recognized by the player when the base member is viewed from the front. It can be made difficult, and it can be suppressed that the appearance is spoiled.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the right rotation unit 18600 as an example>
a base member, a first displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the first displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member , wherein the first displacement member is formed to be displaceable in at least a first direction, and the second displacement member is capable of coming into contact with the first displacement member or the base member The inertial force generated by contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member acts as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. Characteristic game machine G1.

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. There is a game machine provided with driving means for giving (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-100994). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to form a mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced and a mode in which only one of the first displacement member or the second displacement member is displaced.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, for example, in a mode in which only the second displacement member is displaced, the load on the drive means is relatively small, while in a mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, Since the load on the driving means is relatively large, the load on the driving means changes (increases) abruptly when the mode is switched. As a result, there is a problem that the durability of the driving means is lowered, and the displacement speed is lowered when the mode is switched, making stable (constant) displacement difficult.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the second displacement member is formed to be able to contact the first displacement member or the base member, and the second displacement member is generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member. Since the inertial force applied acts as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction, the first mode of displacing the second displacement member is switched to the second mode of displacing the first displacement member. In this case, the action of the inertial force can be used as an auxiliary force, and a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the driving means, suppress a decrease in displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode, and facilitate stable (constant) displacement. .

As the first mode and the second mode, for example, the first mode displaces only the second displacement member, and the second mode displaces both the first displacement member and the second displacement member. Alternatively, a mode is exemplified in which the first mode displaces only the second displacement member and the second mode displaces only the first displacement member. The latter aspect is particularly useful when the load required for displacement of the first displacement member is sufficiently greater than the load required for displacement of the second displacement member (for example, the weight of the first displacement member relative to the weight of the second displacement member). is sufficient).

In the gaming machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. and the rotation axes of the second displacement member are parallel to each other.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. Since the directions of the rotation axes of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are parallel to each other, the inertial force generated by the contact of the second displacement member with the first displacement member or the base member is reduced to , can be efficiently acted on the first displacement member as a force for displacing the first displacement member in the first direction.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member is brought into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is a direction including a downward component in the direction of gravity. A game machine G3 characterized by.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member abuts against the first displacement member or the base member is downward in the direction of gravity. Since it is a direction including a facing component, it is possible to easily secure the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member.

A game machine G4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines G1 to G3, the first direction is a direction including an upward component in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, since the first direction is a direction including an upward component in the gravity direction, the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base It is particularly effective to use the inertial force generated by the contact with the member as an assisting force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the first displacement member has one end rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member has one end supported by the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side, and the other end side of the second displacement member approaches the one end side of the first displacement member from the direction opposite to the first direction, the second displacement member a gaming machine G5, wherein the other end side of the is abutted against the base member.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is the first displacement member. When the other end of the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the other end of the member and the other end of the second displacement member approaches the one end of the first displacement member from the direction opposite to the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the first displacement member abuts against the base member, the inertial force generated by the abutment between the second displacement member and the base member can be efficiently acted as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. can be done. That is, when switching from the first mode in which the second displacement member is displaced to the second mode in which the first displacement member is displaced, the action of the inertial force is used as an auxiliary force for displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. Power can be used effectively.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means, improve the durability of the driving means, and reduce the displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode. It can be restrained to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the first displacement member has one end rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member has one end supported by the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side and approaches the one end side of the first displacement member from the same direction as the first direction, the second displacement member is abutted against the first displacement member.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably pivotally supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is the first displacement member. When the other end of the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the other end of the member and the other end of the second displacement member approaches the one end of the first displacement member in the same direction as the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the first displacement member contacts the first displacement member, the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member is effectively used as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. can act on That is, when switching from the first mode in which the second displacement member is displaced to the second mode in which the first displacement member is displaced, the action of the inertial force is used as an auxiliary force for displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. Power can be used effectively.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means, improve the durability of the driving means, and reduce the displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode. It can be restrained to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

In any one of game machines G1 to G7, a transmission member having a drive pin for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, the first displacement member includes the drive pin and a non-interfering section connected to the working section and not interfering with the drive pin, wherein the second displacement member has a working section that receives the action from the drive pin. and a second groove having at least Gaming machine G8.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effects of the game machines G1 to G7, the first groove of the first displacement member is connected to the action section that receives the action from the drive pin and the action section, and the drive pin interferes with the action section. and the second groove of the second displacement member has at least an action section that is acted upon by the drive pin, so that the drive pin intervenes between the non-interference section of the first groove and the action section of the second groove. A first mode in which the second displacement member is displaced while the first displacement member is maintained in a stopped state by being displaced, and a drive pin is displaced in the action section of the first groove and the action section of the second groove. By doing so, it is possible to form a second mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, and to smoothly transition from the first mode to the second mode.

A gaming machine K1 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A23, B1 to B11, C1 to C15, D1 to D14, E1 to E8, F1 to F5 and G1 to G8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of game machines A1 to A23, B1 to B11, C1 to C15, D1 to D14, E1 to E8, F1 to F5 and G1 to G8, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. K2. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of game machines A1 to A23, B1 to B11, C1 to C15, D1 to D14, E1 to E8, F1 to F5 and G1 to G8, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine K3 characterized by: Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board 61 Inner rail 86, 2086 Center frame 600, 3600, 4600, 5600, 6600, 7600, 18600, 19680 Left rotation unit (displacement member)
610 back base (base body)
620, 18620 front base (base body)
620a Inclined surface 621 Bearing concave portion (gear receiving portion)
623 protruding part (gear receiving part)
626 Projection 627 Bearing 628 Projection 630, 3630, 4630, 5630, 19630 First displacement member 631 Rotating shaft 634 Contact part 635 First groove 635a Action section 635b Non-interference section 640, 3640, 5640, 6640, 7640, 18640, 19640 Second displacement member 641, 3641, 5641, 6641, 7641, 1961 Driven member 641b Second groove 6641c, 7641c Connection groove (third groove)
6641c1 Action section 6641c2 Non-interference section 3641d, 5641d Connection pin (drive pin)
642, 18642, 19642 connecting displacement member 642b decorative portion 642c projecting portion 643 connecting pin 650 drive motor (driving means)
651 1st pinion (gear)
652 rack member (gear)
653 2nd pinion (gear)
654 Transmission member 654a Rotating shaft 654b Drive pin 654c Recessed portion (recessed portion)
660, 3660, 4660, 5660, 7660 Third displacement member 700, 8700, 9700, 10700, 11700, 12700, 13700, 14700, 15700, 16700, 17700 Right rotation unit (displacement member)
710 rear base (base body)
720, 12720, 13720, 14720, 15720, 16720, 17720 Front base (base body)
726, 12726, 14726, 15726 Base-side engaging member 726a Base portion 726b Bent portion 727 Receiving concave portion (receiving portion)
730 First displacement members 740, 12740, 16740, 17740 Second displacement members 742, 13742, 16742, 17742 Displacement-side engagement members 742a, 13742a, 16742a, 17742a Base portion 742b Bending portion 743 Receiving concave portion 8744a Connecting pin (interposing means, Guided part)
11747 pinion gear (interposed means)
750 drive motor (driving means)
754 transmission member (driving body)
760 connection first member (connection member)
770, 8770, 9770 Connection second member (connection member)
8773, 9773 guide portion (interposing means)
11774 rack gear (interposing means)
25817 push-up part (ejection means)
821c Outlet 821d Outlet (inlet)
821e Support shaft (rotating shaft)
824 intermediate bottom wall (guide means)
824a Guide bottom surface (guide means, rolling guide surface)
840, 20840 Seesaw member 844 Receiving surface 847 Claw portion 20848 Regulating portion (restraining means)
850 driven member (decorative member)
21870, 22870, 23870 Rotating member (ejection means)
21871 Shaft 21872 Receiving plate (receiving portion)
21873 Ejector Plate (Ejector)
24877b cam part (cam, ejection means)
950 Side wall portion 960 Downstream wall portion 971 Groove 972 Projection R Area forming portion L Extension length of horizontal passage SP1 to SP4 Biasing spring (biasing means)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotary shaft between one end side and the other end side thereof, and in an unloaded state, a first state is exerted by the weight of a game ball. There is a game machine that respectively forms a second state (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-283136

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is impossible to alternately switch between the first state and the second state when a plurality of game balls are consecutive.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that can easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

In order to achieve this object, a game machine according to claim 1 comprises a seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side, wherein the seesaw member is in an unloaded state. Then, a first state is formed in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised, and the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft, so that the one end side is raised and the other end side is raised. It forms a lowered second state, and has a discharging means for easily discharging the game ball placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to facilitate switching between the first state and the second state alternately.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; It is a front view of a rotary body raising/lowering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit; It is an exploded back perspective view of a rotary body raising/lowering unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a container. (a) is a side view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and (b) is a front view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a first rotating body. It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body. It is a side view schematic diagram of the first rotating body and the second rotating body showing a transition state when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. It is a side view schematic diagram of the first rotating body and the second rotating body showing a transition state when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. It is a front view of a light-emitting decoration unit. Fig. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the light-emitting decoration unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the luminous decoration unit. (a) is a front view of the central rotary unit in a retracted position, and (b) is a front view of the central rotary unit in an extended position. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the central rotating unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central rotating unit; It is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. (a) is a front view of a connecting displacement member, (b) is a side view of the connecting displacement member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32(a), and (c) is a diagram of FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the connecting displacement member taken along line XXXIIa-XXXIIa; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; 39(a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base and the connecting displacement member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base and the connecting displacement member taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39(a). It is a diagram. 40(a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base and the first displacement member, and (b) is a view of the front base and the first displacement member as viewed in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40(a). FIG. 40(c) is a schematic side view, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base and the first displacement member taken along line XLc-XLc of FIG. 40(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a counterclockwise rotation unit. It is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member; (a) is a partial enlarged view of the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the XLVIII part of FIG. 47(c), and (b) is the first displacement member viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVIIIb in FIG. 48(a). and a side view of a second displacement member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device. (a) is a front view of the winning device, (b) is a rear view of the winning device, and (c) is a top view of the winning device. 51(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning device taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 52(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the prize winning device along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52(a), and FIG. 52(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the prize winning device along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52(b). FIG. 52(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line LIV-LIV. It is a back schematic diagram of a winning device. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged; FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged; FIG. It is a front perspective view of a center frame. 4 is a front view of an area forming section; FIG. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the region forming portion taken along line LX-LX in FIG. 59; It is a front view of the game board in the second embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a 4th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a 5th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a top view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a top view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a 6th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; (a) to (c) are schematic front views of a right rotation unit according to a fourth embodiment, and (d) to (g) are schematic front views of a right rotation unit according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a seventh embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a left rotation unit in an eighth embodiment. It is an exploded back perspective view of a counterclockwise rotation unit. It is a front view of a guide part. FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a left rotation unit in a ninth embodiment. It is an exploded back perspective view of a counterclockwise rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; It is a back schematic diagram of the counterclockwise rotation unit in 10th Embodiment. (a) is a front view of the cage, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the cage taken along line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of (a), and (c) is taken along line CXVIIc-CXVIIc of (a). It is a sectional view of a retainer. FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left rotation unit in an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 32 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a twelfth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base taken along line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in (a). FIG. 5 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member; FIG. 31 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a thirteenth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a sectional view of the front base taken along line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in (a). FIG. 5 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the front base and the displacement-side engagement member; FIG. 32 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a fourteenth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit with the second displacement member disposed at the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross section of the counterclockwise rotation unit taken along line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb of (a). It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in a state in which the second displacement member is arranged at the extended position, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the counterclockwise rotation unit taken along line CXXXIXb-CXXXIXb of (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. FIG. 31 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit according to a fifteenth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base taken along line CXLIb-CXLIb in (a). FIG. 5 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member; FIG. 32 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a sixteenth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base taken along line CXLIVb-CXLIVb in (a). FIG. 4 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the front base (opening) and the displacement-side engagement member; FIG. 32 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 5 is a schematic top view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the rear base and the displacement-side engagement member; FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of a right rotation unit in an eighteenth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a nineteenth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of a winning device in a twentieth embodiment; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the second state. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device in the twenty-first embodiment. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of a prize winning device according to a twenty-second embodiment. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device. FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning device in a twenty-third embodiment; (a) and (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device. FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device in the twenty-fourth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device. (a) is a front view of the rotating shaft, and (b) is a side view of the rotating shaft as viewed in the direction of an arrow CLXXIb in (a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the second state. 172(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along line CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa in FIG. 172(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 172(b). FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device in the twenty-fifth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the second state. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 176(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along the line CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along the line CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId in FIG. 176(b).

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 60. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 16a is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. A mouth 63, a first winning mouth 64, a second winning mouth 640, a third winning mouth 82, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a second through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. The peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the third winning opening 82, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when any one of the first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 wins. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased, and the balls are likely to enter the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 and a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the third winning hole 82. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. The amount of time that the When the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in an open state (open state), the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are closed (closed state). A ball is more likely to enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 than in the case of . Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the balls are likely to enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or during the time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, or the opening In addition to changing the time, a change may be made to increase the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened per hit. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. At least one of the opening time and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened per time may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened, The number of times the electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82 are released may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second symbol may be changed to be higher than in the normal state.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displayed with variable display triggered by winning (starting winning) of any one of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the third winning port 82. A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing, and the spheres of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided, which is composed of an LED that variably displays the second pattern with passage as a trigger.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 . Further, when the rotating body elevating unit 300, the central floating unit 400 and the left/right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 thereof protrude into the opening of the center frame 86, and the opening is opened. visible through the part.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)). and are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time to perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the second symbol attached to the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 The first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are configured to be in an operating state (released) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, the player is given more opportunities to open the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a of the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82.例文帳に追加be able to. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a for one hit, etc. When the state is such that the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole during time saving, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the first electric role product 640a and the second electric role product 82a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first thru gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the left side of the variable display unit 80 , and the second thru gate 67 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 . The first thru gate 66 and the second thru gate 67 are configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls launched to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is held up to four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B and the second pattern is displayed. A holding lamp (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). can be set to Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. A third prize winning port 82 is arranged on the right side of the first prize winning port 64 when viewed from the front. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning hole switch is turned on. As a result, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a lottery for a big win, and the first symbol display device 37B displays the result of the lottery.

Also, the first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 640, and the third prize winning port 82 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 are the same, but the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 are changed. A different number, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 is 3, and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82. may be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning hole 640. - 特許庁The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 640a is displayed. It will be in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball will easily enter the second winning port 640 .

In addition, the third prize winning port 82 is accompanied by a second electric accessory 82a. The second electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the second electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the third winning opening 82. ing. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the second through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the second electric accessory 82a is displayed. It becomes an open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the third winning port 82 .

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ , and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened becomes longer than during the normal time during the variable probability or the time saving. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to enter the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 during the variable probability or the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 and when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82, the probability of winning the jackpot is high even in a low probability state. state is the same. However, the probability of winning the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82, and the ball enters the first prize winning port 64. It is set higher than if you win a prize. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a like the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82, and the ball can always win a prize. state.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessories associated with the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 are often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82. A ball is shot toward the first prize winning port 64 with no electric accessory so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left hitting”), and by winning the first prize winning port 64 It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of the big win lottery and to aim for the big win.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning port 82 is likely to be in an open state, and the third winning port 82 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the third prize winning opening 82 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hit"), and is passed through the second through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to set the second electric accessory 82a in an open state and to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the third prize winning opening 82.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

It should be noted that any of the first thru gate 66 and the second thru gate 67 may draw a winning lottery for a symbol other than the second symbol when the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67. , the second electric accessory 82a associated with the third winning opening 82 or the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 may be displaced to the open state. In this case, as the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the symbols to be drawn are different, so the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. will be selected one by one.

As a result, for example, when the second symbol is selected to win, the second electric accessory 82a is opened. When a win is selected in the lottery of two symbols, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and when the ball is hit to the left and passed through the first through gate 66, a symbol different from the second symbol is drawn and the second symbol is selected. A game state in which the first electric accessory 640a is opened when winning is selected in a pattern different from the pattern can be set.

Therefore, if the game state is such that it is easy to win the lottery of the second symbol during the variable probability, and the game state is such that the symbol different from the second symbol is easy to win during the time saving, during the variable probability, the second through gate 67 is hit to the right. A game state in which the second electric accessory 82a is passed to open the second electric accessory 82a to easily win the ball, and during the time saving, the first electric accessory is released to open the first electric accessory to pass the first through gate 66 and win the ball. It is possible to make a game state that is easy to play. Therefore, since the game states during normal, during shortening of time, and during variable probability can be set to different game states, the player can enjoy each game state.

In addition, if the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a hit is selected for the second symbol, hitting the ball to the right to pass through the second through gate 67 will result in a different result from the second symbol. A pattern is drawn, and when a win is selected in the drawing of a pattern different from the second pattern, the first electric accessory 640a is opened, and when the ball is struck left and passed through the first through gate 66, the second pattern is obtained. is drawn and a game state in which the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a win is selected in the second symbol can be made.

In this case, when the ball passes through the second through gate 67 by striking to the right, the first electric accessory is opened and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640 regardless of whether the probability is variable or the time is shortened. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 by striking to the left, the second electric accessory 82a is opened to make the game state in which the ball easily enters the third prize winning port 82.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player needs to change the way of hitting from right to left or from left to right. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting can be changed at any time.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of any one of the first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 64 and the third prize winning port 82 becomes a big win, a predetermined time (fluctuation time) is set. After the lapse of time, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is lit so as to become the stop symbol of the big win, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, thereby winning the big win. Occurrence is indicated. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. , the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out hole 71. be. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, MPU 201 performs main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result in second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420 , 530 , 630 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the action unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the action unit 200. FIG. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

7 shows a state in which the rotating body lifting unit 300 is at the lowered position, and the central rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 are at the extended positions. The drawing shows a state in which the body lifting unit 300 is at the raised position, and the center rotation unit 500, the right rotation unit 600, and the left rotation unit 700 are at the retracted positions.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a box-shaped back case 210. In the inner space of the back case 210, there is a rotator elevating unit 300 below the back case 210, which emits light upward. A decoration unit 400 and a center rotation unit 500 are arranged, and a right rotation unit 600 and a left rotation unit 700 are arranged on the left and right sides, respectively.

The rear case 210 has a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. The box is opened on one side (left front side of FIG. 6) by these wall portions 211 and 212. formed into a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, and the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the external shape of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, in which the third pattern display device 81 can be arranged).

The rotating body elevating units 300 are composed of box-shaped housing bodies 330 in which a plurality (three in this embodiment) are arranged side by side in the width direction, and a plurality (two in this embodiment) to be housed in each of the housing bodies 330. ) (first rotating body 340a and second rotating body 340b).

The plurality of containers 330 are formed so as to be vertically movable (vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8) independently of each other. In this case, in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and are invisible to the player. On the other hand, in the raised position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can visually recognize through the opening. be done.

The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotatably supported by the housing body 330, and the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b sequentially allow the player to visually recognize a plurality of figures (three in this embodiment) drawn on the outer peripheral surface. Let The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed as columnar bodies having a triangular cross section, and different figures are drawn on the three surfaces of the outer periphery.

In the present embodiment, one driving motor 350 is shared as the drive source for the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, thereby making it possible to reduce the cost of the parts while reducing the cost of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. The combinations of figures 340b can be changed, and a total of nine combinations can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 20). Details will be described later.

The light-emitting decoration unit 400 mainly includes a base body 410 and a light-emitting device 420 arranged in the central portion of the base body 410, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs 421 arranged inside the light-emitting device 420. By changing the aspect (for example, the number of LEDs 421 to irradiate), effects by light emission are performed. Details will be described later.

The central rotating unit 500 includes a rear base 510 and a pair of displacement members 530 rotatably supported on the rear base 510 at their base ends, and is arranged on the rear side of the light emitting decoration unit 400 . The pair of displacement members 530 are located at a protruding position (see FIG. 7) protruding into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and retracted to the rear side of the light-emitting decoration unit 400 to be invisible to the player. It is rotated between the retracted position (see FIG. 8). Details will be described later.

The right rotation unit 600 includes a base body (rear base 610 and front base 620) disposed on the front surface of the front base 315 of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and a base body rotatably supported by the base body. and members (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640). On the other hand, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 has a base body (rear base 610 and front base 620) arranged in front of the front base 317 of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and its proximal end is rotatably supported by the base body. and a displacement member (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640). Each displacement member has a projecting position (see FIG. 7) that projects into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and a retracted position (see FIG. 7) that retracts to the back side of the game board 13 and is invisible to the player ( (see FIG. 8). Details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 60, detailed configurations of the rotating body elevating unit 300, the light emitting decoration unit 400, the center rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 will be described. First, the detailed configuration of the rotating body lifting unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22 .

FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body lifting unit 300. FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotating body elevating unit 300 includes a central unit 300C for raising and lowering the central container 330, and left and right units 300L and 300R for respectively raising and lowering the left and right containers 330. It is formed from three units of The left unit 300L is superimposed on the front side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, thereby arranging the three containers 330 side by side in the width direction.

Here, detailed configurations of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. FIG. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300C includes a rear base 311 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front, a front base 312 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 311, and a front base 312 on the front side of the front base 312. A drive motor 320 provided, an accommodation body 330 that moves up and down with respect to the rear base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, a first rotating body 340a and a first rotation body 340a accommodated in the accommodation body 330 It mainly includes a second rotating body 340b and a transmission mechanism that is housed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 311 and the front base 312 and transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing body 330. As shown in FIG.

The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322, A rack gear 324 which is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and which is formed as a rack having tooth cuts on the side surface of a flat member, and the rack gear 324 is arranged on one side and a container 330 is arranged on the other side. and a connecting member 325 provided.

A pair of shafts protrude from the front surface of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported on each of these shafts. Slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged parallel to each other on the front surface of the rear base 311 so that the guiding direction is the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 12). ) and the container 330 are guided vertically. That is, the movement directions of the connecting member 325 and the container 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324. , along with the linear motion of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is vertically displaced (lifted) together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically elongated portion where the rack gear 324 is arranged and the vertically elongated portion where the container 330 is arranged, with the horizontally elongated portion connecting the lower ends thereof. , and is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front. As a result, even when the central container 330 is positioned at the raised position while the left container 330 is positioned at the lowered position, the horizontally elongated portion of the connecting member 325 can be positioned on the rear surface of the front base 312. , it is possible to avoid being viewed by the player.

The slide guide 351 is a linear guide made up of a guide groove formed on the front surface of the rear base 311 and a sliding body slidably formed along the guide groove and fixed to the rear surface of the connecting member 325. Formed as a mechanism. The same applies to the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, which will be described later. The slide guide 352 includes a first rail fixed to the rear base 311, a second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the container 330, and a slide guide 352 interposed between the first rail and the second rail. It is formed as a telescopic linear guide mechanism with an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

Here, since the left container 330 is arranged side by side (left side in FIG. 12) of the central container 330 (see FIG. 9), the width of the connecting member 325 (left and right direction in FIG. 12) ) dimension is longer. Furthermore, as described above, since the oblong portion is interposed to avoid being viewed by the player, the connecting member 325 is formed in a U shape when viewed from the front, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the center container 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction tends to occur).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since an extendable linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is arranged on the back side of the central container 330, the state where the central container 330 is arranged at the raised position However, the elongated slide guide 352 can restrict the swinging in the horizontal direction and stabilize the posture of the center container 330 . On the other hand, in a state in which the central containing body 330 is arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being viewed by the player.

Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300L includes a rear base 313 which is vertically long in front view and arranged in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C, and the rear base 313. An intermediate base 314 superimposed on the front side, a front base 315 superimposed on the front side of the intermediate base 314, a drive motor 320 arranged on the rear side of the intermediate base 314, and a driving force of the drive motor 320. A housing body 330 that moves up and down with respect to each of the bases 313 to 315 by means of a and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330 .

The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321, and a pinion gear 323 coaxially fixed to the transmission gear 322b. , a rack gear 324 which is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and is formed as a rack formed by tooth cutting on the side surface of a flat member, and a connecting member 326 which connects the rack gear 324 to the container 330 .

A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the intermediate base 314, and a transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on this shaft. A shaft support hole is formed in the intermediate base 314, and a transmission gear 322b and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported in the shaft support hole while being coaxially fixed.

A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 313 so that the guiding direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided vertically by the slide guide 351. . A guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300 . The guide plate 353 has a guide groove 353a, which is an elongated opening, extending in the vertical direction. Interpolated. Accordingly, the container 330 is guided vertically along the guide groove 353 a of the guide plate 353 . That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 326 and the container 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b. With the linear motion of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is vertically displaced (lifted) together with the connecting member 326 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L includes a rear base 316 that is formed in a substantially L-shaped front surface and is connected to the right end of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C. A front base 317 superimposed on the front side of the back base 313 , a drive motor 320 arranged on the front side of the front base 317 , and the driving force of the drive motor 320 moves up and down with respect to the back base 316 and the front base 317 . a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b housed in the housing body 330; and a transmission mechanism that transmits to the body 330 .

The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321, and a plate-shaped member meshed with the pinion gear 323. A rack gear 324 formed as a rack with toothed sides and a connecting member 327 connecting the rack gear 324 to the container 330 are provided.

A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the rear base 316, and a pinion gear 323 is rotatably supported on this shaft. A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 316 so that the guiding direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is guided vertically by the slide guide 351. . Further, the front base 316 has a guide groove 316a, which is an elongated opening, extending in the vertical direction. (not shown). Accordingly, the container 330 is guided vertically along the guide groove 316a of the rear base 316. As shown in FIG. That is, the movement directions of the connecting member 327 and the container 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the z of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324, and the rack gear 324 is rotated. Along with the linear motion, the container 330 is vertically displaced (lifted) together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

As described above, in the central unit 300C, the width dimension of the connecting member 325 is long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central container 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the horizontal direction is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, since the rack gear 323 is provided at a position adjacent to the side surface of the left container 330 and the right container 330, the width of the connecting members 326 and 327 (Figs. The left-right direction) dimension can be shortened to increase its rigidity. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the attitude of the left and right containers 330 (to make it difficult to swing in the left-right direction).

Accompanying this, there is no need to dispose a telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the rear side of the left and right housing bodies 330, and the guide plates 353 or the guide grooves 353a and 316a of the rear base 316 are used for guidance. It can stabilize the posture sufficiently. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Next, the housing 330 and the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19. FIG.

17 is an exploded front perspective view of container 330. FIG. 18(a) is a side view of container 330 viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 18(b) is a front view of container 330 viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18(a). is. 18(a) and 18(b) illustrate a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334 and the decorative body 335 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the container 330 includes a base 331, left and right side walls 332 and 333 provided on the left and right sides of the base 331, and inner surfaces of the left side wall 332. and a decorative body 335 disposed on the front surface of the base 331. These parts 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening to form a box shape.

The base 331 is a member that forms the rear surface (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 18B), the upper surface and the lower surface (the upper side and the lower side of FIG. 18B) of the container 330, and is a combination of three plate-like members. formed integrally. A reflecting part RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the front side of the portion forming the rear side of the container 330 .

The reflector RF is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that extends at least vertically beyond the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b when viewed from the front. (see FIG. 18(b)).

The side walls 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-shaped members forming the left and right side surfaces of the container 330, and are provided with holding holes 332a and 333a at two locations, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which fixed shafts 341 (described later) of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are inserted, and hold the fixed shafts 341 so as not to rotate. The holding holes 332a and 333a have a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis of the inner peripheral surface thereof, which is formed by removing one of the two points on the circumference of the circle and dividing the circle by a straight line.

The partition body 334 is a rectangular plate-shaped member having substantially the same outer shape as the side wall body 332 , and rotatably supports the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 between the surfaces facing the side wall body 332 . In addition, the partition body 334 is provided with two insertion holes 334 a for inserting the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 .

The decoration body 335 is a member that decorates the front surface of the housing body 330, and is formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually recognize the manner of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

The storage body 330 formed in this manner includes a drive motor 350 arranged in the partition body 334, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 350, and a driving motor. A transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the motor 350 to the first rotor 340a and the second rotor 340b and a detection mechanism for detecting the rotational position of the first rotor 340a are mainly housed.

The transmission mechanism in the container 330 includes a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, a transmission gear 352 meshed with the drive gear 351 in order, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354 and a second gear 355. and a gear train consisting of The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are connected to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. They are fixed to the axial end faces, respectively.

Here, with reference to FIG. 19, detailed configurations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotor 340a.

Note that since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have substantially the same configuration except that the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are different, the first rotating body 340a will be used as a representative example below. , and description of the second rotating body 340b is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end plates 342 rotatably supported on both axial ends (shaft portions 341a) of the fixed shaft 341, and a pair of It mainly includes three display boards (first display board 343A, second display board 343B, and third display board 343C) that are installed between the end plates 342 .

The fixed shaft 341 includes a trunk portion 341b and shaft portions 341a connected to both axial ends of the trunk portion 341b. The fixed shaft 341 is a portion that is non-rotatably held by the side walls 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) of the container 330, and connects a pair of shaft portions 341a located at both ends in the axial direction. and a trunk portion 341b.

The axial cross-sectional shape of the shaft portion 341a is a shape obtained by removing one of the sections from a circular shape by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line (a shape obtained by chamfering a portion of the outer peripheral surface of a cylinder). , and is similar in shape to the holding holes 332a and 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side walls 332 and 333, respectively. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333, the fixed shaft 341 can be non-rotatably held in the container 330 (side wall bodies 332 and 333).

A plurality of (four in this embodiment) LEDs 344 are attached to the body portion 341b, and light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be irradiated to the inner surfaces of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C.

In this case, when the shaft portion 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall members 332 and 333 and held so as not to rotate, the body portion 341b is arranged so that the irradiation direction of the LED 344 is directed to the front surface of the housing member 330 (decorative member 335). The opening 335a of FIG. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 344 can be irradiated to the inner surface of one of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C, which is arranged in front of the container 330 (“viewing position” described later). can.

The fixed shaft 341 (shaft portion 341a, body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with both ends in the axial direction open. It can be pulled out of the container 330 through the opening at the direction end. In addition, since the fixed shaft 341 is not rotatable with respect to the container 330, as described above, even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, the wiring of the LED 344 is not subjected to external force such as twisting or pulling. can be avoided.

The end plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a shaft support hole 342a having a circular cross-section perpendicular to the axis. The inner diameter dimension of the shaft support hole 342 a is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the shaft portion 341 a of the fixed shaft 341 . Therefore, the end plate 342 is rotatably supported with respect to the fixed shaft 341 by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a. Thereby, the end plate 342 is rotatably held inside the container 330 via the fixed shaft 341 .

Here, since the fixed shaft 341 has a trunk portion 341b larger in diameter than the shaft portion 341a, the end plate 342 is formed between the side walls 332 and 333 of the container 330 and the trunk portion 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The axial position can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side walls 332 and 333 via the end plate 342 .

A first gear 353 of the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end plates 342, and a base gear 361 of the detection mechanism, which will be described later, is fixed to the other. A second gear 355 of the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end plates 342 of the second rotating body 340b, but the attachment of the base gear 361 to the other is omitted (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

Each of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is a substantially rectangular plate-shaped member when viewed from the front. It is bridged between the end plates 342 and together with the end plates 342 forms a triangular prism.

A figure is drawn on the outer surface of each of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C. Therefore, when the triangular prism body is rotated, the figures drawn on the outer surfaces of the respective display plates 343A to 343C are sequentially visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decoration body 335. FIG.

At least a part of the outer surface of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C is curved in an outwardly convex arc shape when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341 . As a result, as will be described later, even when there is a deviation of a predetermined rotational angle (for example, 12 degrees) between the rotational positions of the first rotor 340a and the second rotor 340b, each display plate 343A It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the figure drawn on the outer surface of 343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

In this embodiment, when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341, the widthwise ends of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C are curved in an arcuate shape that protrudes outward. A width direction central portion is formed in a substantially flat surface shape. Accordingly, it is possible to achieve both ensuring the visibility of the graphic and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. In addition, the arc radius of the curved arc-shaped portion is a value larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each of the display plates 343A to 343C (for example, 2 times or more and 4 times below).

Here, in the following description, the positions of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular columnar body is rotated are assumed to be the front surface of the container 330 (the surface on the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 18B). The position at which the figure drawn on the outer surface can be viewed by the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is called a "visible position", and the outer surface is directed to the inner surface of the container 330 (base 331). A position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is invisible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a "shielding position".

Therefore, for example, when the first display panel 343A is arranged at the visible position, the second display panel 343B and the third display panel 343C are arranged at the shielding position (see FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)). . From this state, when the triangular prism body is rotated by 120 degrees in the forward direction or the reverse direction, either the second display panel 343B or the third display panel 343C is arranged at the viewing position, and the second display panel 343B or the third display panel is positioned. The other of the plates 343C and the first display plate 343A are arranged at the shielding position.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display panel 343A is formed in a shape that does not allow light to pass through, while the second display panel 343B and the third display panel 343C have a transparent portion PN through which light can pass. in part. In addition, a reflecting portion RF formed as a mirror for reflecting visible light is disposed on the inner surface of the first display panel 343A.

As described above, the LED 344 is arranged at a position capable of illuminating the inner surface of the display board arranged at the visible position among the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C. Therefore, in a state where the second display panel 343B or the third display panel 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is transmitted through the transparent portions PN of the respective display panels 343B and 343C and directly viewed by the player. can be made

On the other hand, in the state where the first display panel 343A is placed at the viewing position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected by the reflecting portion RF on the inner surface of the first display panel 343A. and transmitted through the transmission portion PN of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C, and then reflected by the reflection portion RF of the base 331 of the container 330, and the reflected light from the reflection portion RF of the base 331 can be visually visually recognized by the player indirectly.

For example, by stopping the first rotating body 340a at the rotational position where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position and causing the LED 344 to emit light, the reflected light reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the base 331 of the container 330 is visually recognized. The player can be reminded of the figure of the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C arranged at a position (shielding position) invisible to the player. This makes it possible for the player to expect or suggest that the first rotating body 340a will be rotated to a position where the graphics on the second display panel 343B or the third display panel 343C can be visually recognized.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed to have triangular cross-sections, when the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the reflector plate The distance between RF and the outer surface of each rotor 340a, 340b (display plates 343A to 343C), the distance between the outer surfaces of each rotor 340a, 340b (vertical distance in FIG. 18(b)), or The apparent diameter (vertical dimension in FIG. 18(b)) of each rotating body 340a, 340b can be increased or decreased, and the outer surface of each rotating body 340a, 340b (each display plate 343A to 343C) can be opposed to the reflector RF. You can change the angle. That is, as the rotating bodies 340a and 340b rotate, the light emitted from the LED 344 and emitted from the transmission portion PN is displayed as reflected light from the reflection portion RF of the substrate 331. The aspect (eg, the size of the area in which the light is visible) can be changed periodically.

Returning to FIGS. 17 and 18, description will be made. The detection mechanism includes a base gear 361 fixed to the end face plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362. A terminal gear 363 having a detection target plate 363a projecting outward, and a sensor device 364 for detecting the detection target plate 363a of the terminal gear 363 are provided.

The intermediate gear 362 and the terminal gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall 333, and the sensor device 364 is arranged on the base 331 with the detection area arranged on the movement locus of the plate 363a to be detected. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detection state of the detected plate 363a. That is, based on the detection result of the sensor device 364, the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position).

Next, rotation operations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 rotates, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b via the transmission mechanism, and these rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

Specifically, when the drive motor 350 rotates, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 rotates. Thereby, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. Also, when the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. As a result, the second rotating body 340b rotates in the same direction as the first rotating body 340a. Also, when the rotation direction of the driving motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite direction.

As a result, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body 340a and the figure of the second rotating body 340b visually recognized by the player is changed in order. In this case, the number of combinations of figures of both rotors 340a and 340b is limited to three in the conventional product.

That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are synchronously driven to rotate by one driving motor, a combination that can be formed is, for example, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. A first combination in which the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b is placed at the display position, and the second display plate 343B of the first rotating body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotating body 340b are placed in the display position. There were only three second combinations, that is, a third combination in which the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are placed at the display positions.

On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are independently rotationally driven by different drive motors, a maximum of nine combinations can be formed. It can appear arbitrarily. However, in this case, the parts cost increases due to the need for two drive motors.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of drive motors 350 is limited to one, and nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed. It can appear arbitrarily. In addition, in the present embodiment, by allowing a predetermined amount of deviation of the rotational positions without requiring the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to be perfectly matched, the nine combinations can be quickly realized. can let you out. A combination of the figures of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. FIG.

FIG. 20 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are schematic side views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing transition states when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated. (a) to FIG. 21(e) are No. in FIG. 22(a) to 22(e) are shown in FIG. These correspond to the states shown as 6-10, respectively.

In FIG. 20, as a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the state in which the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visible position is indicated by the symbol "A" or "A'". The state in which the second display panel 343B is arranged in the visible position is indicated by the code "B" or "B'", and the state in which the third display panel 343C is arranged in the visible position is indicated by the code "C" or "C'". be done.

For example, No. in FIG. In the state represented by 10 "A, C'", the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visible positions, and the first rotating body A figure drawn on the first display panel 343A from 340a and a figure drawn on the third display panel 343C from the second rotator 340b correspond to a state visually recognized by the player.

Also, in FIG. 21, to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotor 340a are denoted by reference numerals "A to C". The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the rotator 340b are illustrated using reference numerals "A' to C'", respectively.

Here, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 fixed to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are set to different values. In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 is 14, and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 is 20. When the first rotor 340a is rotated by 120 degrees, the second rotor 340b is rotated by 108 degrees. is formed to

No. in FIG. 1 and FIG. 21(a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are placed at their respective viewing positions (No. 1 "A', A", first combination), the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees, and the second display plate 343B is placed at the viewing position. 2 and FIG. 21(b), the second rotating body 340b places the second display panel 343B at the viewing position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 "B', B" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In this case, the second rotating body 340b rotates 108 degrees while the first rotating body 340a rotates 120 degrees. , 340b from the direction perpendicular to the axis, it is difficult for the player to recognize the difference in rotation angle of 12 degrees. It can be recognized that the figures drawn on the outer surface of 343B are arranged at respective viewing positions (the second combination is formed).

In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C are curved in an outwardly convex arc shape when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. (that is, the surface on which the figure is drawn is curved along the direction of rotation of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b). , the difference (deviation) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be made difficult to recognize.

No. in FIG. 2 and FIG. 21(b), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is positioned at the visible position. 3 and FIG. 21(c), the second rotating body 340b is arranged at a position shifted from the first rotating body 340a. That is, in this state, a difference in rotation angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, so that the player is made to recognize the deviation of the figure (no combination, No. 3 "-, C" in FIG. 20). be able to.

Similarly, No. in FIG. 4 and FIG. 21(d) to No. 4 in FIG. 9 and the state shown in FIG. 340b is arranged at a position where its rotational position is displaced from the first rotating body 340a. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize the deviation of the graphics (no combination, No. 4 "-, A" to No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20).

No. in FIG. 9 and FIG. 22(d) (No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is positioned at the visible position. 20 No. 10 and FIG. 22(e), the second rotor 340b places the third display panel 343C at the viewing position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 10 “C′, A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

Note that, according to the present embodiment, the second rotation is also performed in the section where the figure deviation (the combination is not established, No. 3 "-, C" to No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20) is formed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the graphics visually recognized by the player can be switched continuously, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which graphics will be combined in the third combination.

After that, substantially the same as the above-described aspect (rotation in the section from the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 (a) to the state shown in No. 9 of FIG. 20 and FIG. 22 (e)) The aspect is repeated two more times to complete one cycle (the table is cycled from start to end).

In this case, No. in FIG. 11 to No. 20, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. B”), a fifth combination (No. 12 “B′, C” in FIG. 20) and a sixth combination (No. 20 “C′, B” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

Moreover, No. in FIG. 21 to No. 30, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. C”), the eighth combination (No. 22 “B′, A” in FIG. 20) and the ninth combination (No. 30 “C′, C” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to the first rotor 340a and the second rotor 340b includes a plurality of gears (the drive gear 351 to the second gear 355 ), and is formed to be capable of transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at different rotation ratios.

Thereby, the rotation period of the first rotor 340a and the rotation period of the second rotor 340b can be made different. As a result, even with only one drive motor 350, it is possible to form nine sets of combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (desired Any combination can appear).

In addition, by forming the transmission mechanism as a gear train, not only is it possible to simplify the structure, reduce the cost of parts, and improve durability and reliability, but also the gears are always meshed. Therefore, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between normal and reverse, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched.

Therefore, for example, proceeding in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) in the table of FIG. After or just before the third combination (No. 10 “C′, A” in FIG. 20) appears, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, and the table in FIG. 20 is reversed. A series of actions of returning to the direction (the upward direction in FIG. 20) can be repeated, thereby providing an effect that the player expects the appearance of the third combination.

Alternatively, for example, from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 "A', A" in FIG. 20) is formed, the ninth combination (No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20) appears. 20 in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) to reveal the ninth combination, and in addition, reverse the table in FIG. 20 (upward in FIG. 20). to reveal a ninth combination. That is, in the former case, it is necessary to rotate the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees 30 times, whereas in the latter case, it is necessary to rotate the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees once. Since it is sufficient to do so, a desired combination of figures can be made to appear quickly.

Here, when the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 60 degrees with respect to the rotation of the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees (that is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is equivalent to the rotation of the first rotating body 340a). , when set to "1/integer" times), a plurality of combinations of figures can be formed without causing a difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. can be done. However, in this case, the maximum number of graphics that can be combined is three.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 "A', A", No. 11 "A', B" and No. 11 "A', B" in FIG. 20). 21 "A', C"), in the remaining six combinations (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth and ninth combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body A difference (deviation) of a predetermined rotation angle is allowed to occur in the rotation position of 340b. As a result, the number of figures that can be combined can be nine.

That is, in the structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated by one driving motor 350, setting the number of possible combinations of figures to nine sets means that the rotation of the driving motor 350 is controlled by the first rotating body 340a. and the second rotating body 340b. This is possible only by allowing the occurrence of a difference (deviation) in the predetermined rotation angle. As a result, the required number of drive motors 350 can be suppressed, and the product cost can be reduced, while improving the presentation effect by increasing the number of combinations of graphics.

In this case, a combination of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth combinations) in which the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are different (shifted) by a predetermined rotation angle. combination), the stop positions at which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are stopped may be corrected.

For example, in the second, fifth and eighth combinations (No. 2 "B', B", No. 12 "B', C" and No. 22 "B', A" in Fig. 20), Fig. 21 As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is delayed, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotational position where the phase is advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. , for example, is stopped at a rotational position rotated by 126 degrees. This makes it possible to disperse the positional deviation from the reference plane to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and make it inconspicuous.

Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth and ninth combinations (No. 10 “C′, A”, No. 20 “C′, B” and No. 30 “C′, C” in FIG. 20) 22(e), the phase of the second rotating body 340b is advanced, so the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotational position delayed in phase by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. , for example, is stopped at a rotational position rotated by 114 degrees. This makes it possible to disperse the positional deviation from the reference plane to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and make it inconspicuous.

As described above, the rotating body elevating unit 300 is formed such that each containing body 300 can move up and down. , so that it is invisible to the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the figure of the first body of rotation 340a and the figure of the second body of rotation 340b can be displayed promptly at the required timing.

That is, in the present embodiment, nine combinations of figures can be formed, so the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to rotate the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b relatively many times, which increases the time.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by arranging each containing body 300 in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are retracted to a position invisible to the player. can be done. As a result, the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be rotated in advance to a predetermined rotating position without being recognized by the player. When the timing arrives, each container 300 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 8), and the remaining rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are executed to rapidly achieve the desired combination. can be made to appear in

It should be noted that the placement of each containing body 300 in the lowered position may be performed only when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in a specific variation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively short, each container 300 is not placed in the lowered position, and each While the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b is started and stopped at a position visible to the player, the time from the start of rotation of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, each rotating body 340a, 340b may be rotated in advance at a position invisible to the player.

In this case, in this embodiment, the preliminary rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the lowered position is performed when a predetermined operating means is operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

That is, when rotating the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, a relatively loud sound is generated. The generated sound may make the player aware that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have been rotated in advance.

On the other hand, by performing the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b during the operation of the predetermined operating means, it is possible to blend them into the operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

Incidentally, examples of the operating means include the payout device 133, the audio output device 226, or the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 3 or 4). When these operation means are operated, for example, a relatively loud sound is generated with the delivery of the ball, the output of sound, or the shooting of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

Alternatively, or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b may be rotated in advance. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the player's attention can be focused on the predetermined effect. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the body 340b.

Next, the light emitting decoration unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG. FIG. 23 is a front view of the luminous decoration unit 400. FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the luminous decoration unit 400 includes a horizontally long rectangular base body 410 in a front view, which is disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210, and a width of the base body 410. A light-emitting device 420 arranged in front in the center of the direction, a light-shielding member 430 covering the front surface of the light-emitting device 420, and a cover member 440 covering the front surface of the light-shielding member 430 and made of a light-transmitting material. , and ring-shaped peripheral decorations 450 and 460 surrounding the light emitting device 420 , the light shielding member 430 and the cover member 440 when viewed from the front.

On the front side of the light emitting device 420, a plurality of (15 in this embodiment) light emitters (LEDs 421) are arranged in a dispersed state over the entire surface, and are formed so as to be able to irradiate the back surface of the light shielding member 430 with light. . Here, the light shielding member 430 includes a main body portion 431 made of a light shielding material (non-light-transmitting material), and partition walls 432 erected from the front and rear surfaces of the main body portion 431 .

A main body portion 431 of the light shielding member 430 is provided with circular openings 431a in a front view at a plurality of locations (15 locations in the present embodiment). The plurality of openings 431a are arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 421 of the light emitting device 420 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 421 can reach the rear surface of the cover 440 through the opening 431a of the light shielding member 430 .

The partition wall 432 is formed in an annular shape with a diameter smaller than that of the body portion 431 when viewed from the front, and is arranged at a position eccentric from the center of the body portion 431 . As a result, the space between the light emitting device 420 and the cover body 440 is divided into a circular first space surrounded by the partition wall 432 and a substantially crescent-shaped first space positioned on the outer peripheral side of the partition wall 431 when viewed from the front. 2 spaces.

In this way, the division by the division wall 431 makes it possible to clarify the outline of the light visually recognized from the cover member 440 . That is, when only the LEDs 421 in the first space emit light, a circle can be seen, and when only the LEDs 421 in the second space emit light, a crescent shape can be seen.

Next, the central rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. FIG. FIG. 26(a) is a front view of central rotation unit 500 in the retracted position, and FIG. 26(b) is a front view of central rotation unit 500 in the extended position. . 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the center rotation unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center rotation unit 500. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 26 to 28, the central rotating unit 500 includes a rear base 510 disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210, and a front base 510 superimposed on the front of the rear base 510. a base 520, a pair of displacement members 530 whose base ends are rotatably supported by the rear base 510 and the front base 520, a driving motor 540 for generating a driving force for rotating the displacement members 530, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530 .

A front surface of the rear base 510 and a rear surface of the front base 520 are respectively recessed with shaft support holes 511 and 521 for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotating shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 . A support shaft 512 for rotatably supporting a crank gear 542 in the transmission mechanism projects from the front surface of the rear base 510 .

The displacement member 530 is a member whose front end side is decorated, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 531 , a connecting gear 532 , and a crank groove 533 . As described above, the rotating shaft 531 is a shaft supported by the support holes 511 and 521 of the rear base 510 and the front base 520, and protrudes from the front and rear surfaces of the displacement member 530 on the proximal end side.

The connection gear 532 is a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the displacement member 530 on the base end side with the rotation axis 531 as the center of rotation. When one of the displacement members 530 is rotated about the rotating shaft 531, the connecting gear 532 transmits the rotation to the other connecting gear 532 to rotate it. As a result, the other displacement member 530 is rotated around the rotating shaft 531 .

The crank groove 533 is a linear groove in a front view into which a connecting pin 542a of a crank gear 542 of the transmission mechanism, which will be described later, is slidably inserted. It is recessed in the rear surface of the displacement member 530 on the right side). As will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 542 is transmitted to the crank groove 533 via the connecting pin 542a, so that one displacement member 530 rotates about the rotation shaft 531. As shown in FIG.

As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530, and includes a pinion 541 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 and a pinion 541 meshed with the pinion 541. and a crank gear 542. The crank gear 542 has a connecting pin 542 a protruding from a position eccentric from its rotation center (support shaft 512 ) and inserted into the crank groove 533 of the displacement member 530 .

According to the central rotation unit 500 configured in this way, the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 is transmitted to the crank gear 542 via the pinion 541, and when the crank gear 542 is rotated, the crank gear 542 is rotated. Along with the rotation, the connecting pin 542a is displaced while drawing an arc-shaped trajectory, and the displacement of the connecting pin 542a acts on the inner wall surface of the crank groove 533, thereby displacing one side (the left side in FIG. 27 and the right side in FIG. 28). A member 530 is rotated around a rotating shaft 531 . In this case, the other displacement member 530 is also synchronously rotated via the connecting gear 532 . As a result, the pair of displacement members 530 are retracted to the projecting position (see FIGS. 7 and 26(a)) projecting into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and the rear surface of the luminous decoration unit 400. It is rotatable between the retracted position (see FIGS. 8 and 26(b)).

Next, the right rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 40. FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 600, and FIGS. 30 and 31 are exploded rear perspective views of the right rotation unit 600. FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 31 illustrates a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 600 is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the right rotation unit 600 includes a base body composed of a rear base 610 and a front base 620, and a first displacement unit displaceably disposed on the front side of the front base 620 of the base body. The member 630 and the second displacement member 640, a driving motor 650 that generates a driving force for displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 and is arranged on the rear surface of the rear base 610, and its driving and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 650 .

A part of the transmission mechanism (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653) is housed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 610 and the front base 620. As shown in FIG. A bearing recess 621 for rotatably supporting the first pinion 651 is recessed on the rear surface of the front base 620, and a sliding groove of the rack member 652 is formed to define the moving direction of the rack member 652. A pair of insertion pins 622 are provided to be inserted through 652a.

Further, the front base 620 has circular shaft support holes 624 and 625 penetrating therethrough for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 and the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654, respectively. They are arranged side by side in the width direction (transverse direction) of the front base 620 at predetermined intervals.

It should be noted that the shaft support hole 624 that supports the first displacement member 630 is closer to the opening side of the game board 13 than the shaft support hole 625 that supports the transmission member 654 (the overhang position side of the first displacement member 630, FIG. 29). left side), as will be described later, at the overhang position, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can secure the overhang area for overhanging the opening side of the game board 13, while at the retracted position and the extended position, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden behind the first displacement member 630 .

A ridge 626 and a bearing 627 protrude from the front surface of the front base 620 . The ridge 626 is a laterally elongated protrusion extending along the width direction of the front base 620 and has a substantially triangular cross section. The ridge 626 is formed such that its top is curved in an arc centered on the shaft support hole 624 when viewed from the front. When the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) is displaced, the apex of the ridge 626 can be brought into contact, and as will be described later, compared to the case where the front surface of the front base 620 is in full face contact. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the contact area and suppress the sliding resistance, and it is possible to suppress the formation of cloudiness due to rubbing on the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light transmissive material.

On the left side of the front base 620 in front view (the left side in FIG. 29, i.e., the opening side of the game board 13), an inclined surface 620a is provided by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side surface and the front surface. . Therefore, as will be described later, when retracting to the retracted position, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and unable to be displaced (see FIG. 33).

The bearing portion 627 is formed as a cylindrical body concentric with the shaft support hole 624 , and rotatably supports the rotating shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 with the shaft support hole 624 on its inner peripheral surface. A protruding portion 628 is formed to protrude radially outward and downward from the front base 620 from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627 . The protruding portion 628 can restrict the rotation of the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range and prevent the first displacement member 630 from tilting forward. Details thereof will be described later (see FIG. 40).

In the present embodiment, the bearing recess 621 is recessed in the rear surface of the front base 620 , so that the bearing recess 621 is used to move the first pinion 651 between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 610 and the front base 620 . It can be held rotatably. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to fasten and fix the first pinion 651 to the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing the parts cost and assembly cost.

On the other hand, when the bearing recess 621 is recessed in the rear surface of the front base 620 , a projecting portion 623 protrudes from the front of the front base 620 along with the recess. In this embodiment, since a part of the second displacement member 640 is pivotally supported on the distal end side of the first displacement member 630, when the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced, the front-rear direction sway is likely to occur, and there is a risk that the second displacement member 640 will interfere with the protruding portion 623, but such interference can be suppressed by the ridge 626. As shown in FIG. The details will be described later (see FIG. 39).

The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 651 attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, a second pinion 653 fastened and fixed to the rotating shaft 654a of the transmission member 654, and the first pinion 651 and the second pinion 653 having teeth. and a rack member 652 formed as a rack in which a rack gear to be combined is tooth-cut on the side surface of a flat member.

The rack member 652 is provided with two sliding grooves 652a extending along its longitudinal direction and having an elongated hole shape when viewed from the front. By doing so, the moving direction is held in a specified state. That is, the rack member 652 is held between the facing surfaces of the rear base 610 and the front base 620 so as to be linearly movable.

The transmission member 654 includes a rotating shaft 654a protruding from the back surface of one end, a drive pin 654b protruding from the front surface of the other end opposite to the rotating shaft 654a, and the rotating shaft 654a and the drive pin. A recessed portion 654c formed by recessing an arcuate portion between 654b when viewed from the front. Supported.

The drive pin 654b is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a first groove 635 and a second groove 641b of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, which will be described later. The arcuate shape of the recessed portion 654c in front view is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 (that is, in a shape capable of receiving the bearing portion 627 on its inner peripheral side).

Therefore, while the arrangement position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 is brought close to the arrangement position of the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630, interference with the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 is suppressed, and the transmission member The rotatable range of 654 can be increased. Therefore, as will be described later, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be further displaced while miniaturizing the entire right rotation unit 600 (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 651 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 , the rotation of the first pinion 651 is transmitted to the second pinion 653 via the linear motion of the rack member 652 . As the second pinion 653 is rotated, the transmission member 654 is rotated around the shaft support hole 625 of the front base 620 . As will be described later, by rotating the transmission member 654 and causing the drive pin 654b to act on the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b, the displacement corresponding to the shape of the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b can be changed to the second groove. Each of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be operated independently (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

A rotation shaft 631, support shafts 632 and 633, and a contact portion 634 are provided on the rear surface of the first displacement member 630, and a first groove 635 is provided thereon. As described above, the rotating shaft 631 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted through the shaft support hole 624 of the front base 620 . rotatably supported on the A retainer C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 624 is fastened and fixed to the axial end face of the rotation shaft 631 , thereby restricting the rotation shaft 631 from slipping out of the shaft support hole 624 .

The support shafts 632 and 633 are shaft-shaped bodies having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640, respectively. That is, the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 are rotatably held on the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 via support shafts 632 and 633, respectively.

A pair of abutting portions 634 are arranged around the rotating shaft 631 at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. A protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is disposed between the pair of contact portions 634 when the first displacement member 630 is assembled to the front base 620 . Therefore, as will be described later, when the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 with respect to the front base 620, the contact portion 634 is brought into contact with the side surface of the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620. Thus, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be restricted within a predetermined range.

The first groove 635 is a concave groove through which the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and is formed by bending in a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first groove 635 includes an action section 635a that extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, and a first displacement member 635 that is curved in an arc shape concave on the rotating shaft 631 side. A non-interfering section 635b extending along the width direction of the member 630 (that is, formed into a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape concentric with the rotating shaft 631) is provided. As will be described later, the action section 635a is a section that receives action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, and the non-interference section 635b is a section that the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 does not interfere with.

The second displacement member 640 is formed by being divided into two members, a driven member 641 and a connecting displacement member 642 . A shaft support hole 641a is formed through the driven member 641 at the center in the longitudinal direction, and a second groove 641b and a connecting groove 641c are formed at one end and the other end of the driven member 641, respectively. Note that the connecting displacement member 642 is made of a light-transmitting resin material.

As described above, the shaft support hole 641a is a circular hole through which the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted. It is rotatably journalled on the rear surface of member 630 . A screw having a head portion larger in diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 641a is fastened to the axial end surface of the support shaft 632, thereby restricting the support shaft 632 from coming out of the shaft support hole 641a. .

The second groove 641 b is a groove-shaped opening through which the drive pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641 . The second groove 641 b overlaps the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 when the driven member 641 is supported on the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 . Therefore, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 can be inserted through the first groove 635 via the second groove 641b. In addition, the second groove 641b is formed as an action section that receives action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, as will be described later.

The connecting groove 641c is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641, and a connecting pin 643 of a connecting displacement member 642, which will be described later, is slidably inserted. That is, the second displacement member 640 is formed to be able to transmit the rotation of the driven member 641 to the connection displacement member 642 via the connection groove 641 c and the connection pin 643 .

A shaft support hole 642a is formed through the connecting displacement member 642, and a decorative portion 642b and a protruding portion 642c are formed to protrude outward across the shaft support hole 642a. A connecting pin 643 projecting toward the front side is arranged on the connecting displacement member 642 .

As described above, the shaft support hole 642a is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 633 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted. It is rotatably journalled on the rear surface of member 630 . A retainer C having a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the axial end face of the support shaft 633, thereby restricting the rotation shaft 633 from slipping out of the shaft support hole 642a.

The connecting pin 643 is inserted through the connecting groove 641 c of the driven member 641 as described above, so that the rotation of the driven member 641 can be transmitted to the connecting displacement member 642 . That is, by rotating the driven member 641 with the support shaft 632 as the rotation center, it is possible to rotate the coupling displacement member 642 with the support shaft 633 as the rotation center.

In this way, the second displacement member 640 is divided into two parts, the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642, and the driving member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are connected by the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643 to form the second displacement member. Since the link mechanism is configured by being rotatably supported by the displacement member 640, the amplifying effect of the link mechanism is used to perform the first displacement of the connection displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b), as will be described later. The amount of relative displacement with respect to member 630 can be increased (see FIG. 37). As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, the detailed configuration of the connecting displacement member 642 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 . 32(a) is a front view of the connecting displacement member 642, FIG. 32(b) is a side view of the connecting displacement member 642 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32(a), and FIG. 32(c). 32(a) is a cross-sectional view of the connecting displacement member 642 taken along the line XXXIIa-XXXIIa of FIG. 32(a).

As shown in FIG. 32, the connecting displacement member 642 is formed with an overhanging portion 642c on the opposite side of the decorative portion 642b across the pivot hole 642a. The protruding portion 642c can serve as a weight for balancing when and after being lifted.

In this case, the overhanging portion 642c is formed so as to protrude from the decorative portion 642b on the front side (lower side in FIG. 32(b)) and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member 630, which will be described later. Thus, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), rattling of the connecting displacement member 642 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be suppressed. In addition, since the overhanging portion 642c serves both as a weight and as a contacting portion with respect to the first displacement member 630, the structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

Further, the overhanging portion 642c is formed by four side walls erected on the rear side from the four sides of the bottom wall forming the front side of the connecting displacement member 642 (the side facing the rear surface of the first displacement member 630). , is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. Therefore, weight and rigidity can be ensured while reducing the outer shape. Therefore, as will be described later, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), a state in which the projecting portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, a state in which it is not visible from the front) is ensured. At the same time, the function as a weight and the function of contacting the first displacement member 630 to suppress rattling can be reliably exhibited.

The overhanging portion 642c is formed with a ridge 642c1 that protrudes from the bottom wall and extends along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 642a. It is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of 630 . Therefore, compared with the case where the entire surface of the bottom wall of the projecting portion 642c contacts the rear surface of the first displacement member 630, sliding resistance can be suppressed.

The connecting pin 643 is made of a metal material (brass material in this embodiment) and has a higher hardness than a resin material. , the surface facing the front base 620 ), and is embedded (insert-molded) in the connecting displacement member 642 .

In this case, the top of the ridge 626 of the front base 620 extends along the displacement trajectory of the connecting pin 643 when the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced. The rear end surface of the connecting pin 643 can be mainly brought into contact with the . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of cloudiness due to rubbing between the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light-transmitting resin material and the ridges 626 of the front base 620 . Therefore, it is possible to continuously exhibit the presentation effect by allowing light to pass through the connecting displacement member 642 .

Next, operations of the right rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39. FIG. 33 and 34 are front views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state during operation between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 10A and 10B are rear views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when rotating. 37 and 38 are schematic rear views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

33(a) shows FIGS. 35(a) and 37(a), FIG. 33(b) shows FIGS. 35(b) and 37(b), and FIG. 35(c) and FIG. 37(c) are in the same state, respectively, and FIG. 34(a) is FIG. ), FIG. 38(b), and FIG. 34(c) are the same states as FIG. 36(c) and FIG. 38(c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 33(c) is the same as FIG. 34(a), FIG. 35(c) is the same as FIG. 36(a), and FIG. 37(c) is the same as FIG. be.

As shown in FIGS. 33(a), 35(a), and 37(a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 630 is in an upright state, and the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are facing forward. It is arranged in front of the base 620 .

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 37A), the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second 33(b), 35(b), and 37(b) by pushing the inner wall surface of the groove 641b in the projecting direction (the right side in FIG. 37(a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654. As shown, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the projecting direction with the rotating shaft 631 as the rotating shaft. In this case, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 because the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the action section 635b of the first groove 635, and the first displacement member 640 It is displaced integrally with member 630 .

33(b), 35(b), and 37(b), the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in Fig. 37(b)), the same as in the case described above. In addition, the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 are extended by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 (Fig. 37(b) right), thereby rotating the first displacement member 630 about the rotation shaft 631 in the projecting direction, and displacing the second displacement member 640 integrally with the first displacement member 630 .

Through the states shown in FIGS. 33(b), 35(b) and 37(b), the states shown in FIGS. 33(c), 35(c) and 37(c) ), and the states shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 38(a)), the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. is reached at the connection part of the

33(c), 35(c) and 37(c) (that is, FIG. 34(a), FIG. 36(a) and FIG. 38(a)), the first displacement member 630 One contact portion 634 of the pair of contact portions 634 is brought into contact with one side surface of the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620, so that the rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the projecting direction is prevented. Regulated.

34(a), 36(a) and 38(a), when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 38(a)), the transmission member 654 The driving pin 654b moves along the non-interfering section 635b without interfering with the inner wall surface of the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 . As a result, the first displacement member 630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 38(a).

On the other hand, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 is pushed downward (downward in FIG. 38(a)) by the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654, thereby 36(b) and 38(b), the driven member 641 is rotated about the support shaft 632 in a direction to raise the connecting groove 641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(b)). The rotation of the driven member 641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 642 via the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 642 rotates about the support shaft 633 in the direction in which the decorative portion 642b is lifted ( 38(b) clockwise). That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630. FIG.

34(b), 36(b), and 38(b), the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in Fig. 38(b)), the same as in the case described above. Then, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630. As shown in FIG. After that, when the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the end of the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, FIG. ), and as shown in FIGS. 36(c) and 38(c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are arranged at the overhang position.

Contrary to the case described above, the transmission member 654 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(c)) from the extended position shown in FIGS. 34(c), 36(c), and 38(c). When driven, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves along the non-interfering section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, so that the first displacement member 630 is shown in FIG. maintained in the indicated state (position).

On the other hand, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 is pushed upward (the upper side in FIG. 38(c)) by the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654, thereby As shown in FIGS. 36(b) and 38(b), the driven member 641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 in a direction (clockwise in FIG. 642 is rotated around support shaft 633 in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(b)) in which decorative portion 642b is swung down. That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630. FIG.

34(b), 36(b), and 38(b), the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(b)). Similarly, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 in the direction of swinging down the decorative portion 642b.

Through the states shown in FIGS. 34(b), 36(b) and 38(b), the states shown in FIGS. 34(a), 36(a) and 38(a) ), and the states shown in FIGS. 35(c) and 37(c)), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. is reached at the connection part of the

Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 37(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 33(c), 35(c) and 37(c), the first displacement The inner wall surfaces of the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 are pushed in the standing direction (left side in FIG. 37(c)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654. Then, as shown in FIGS. 33(b), 35(b) and 37(b), the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 in the upright direction. In this case, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 because the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the action section 635b of the first groove 635, and the first displacement member 640 It is displaced integrally with member 630 .

33(b), 35(b), and 37(b), the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the reverse direction (clockwise in Fig. 37(b)), the same as in the case described above. Then, the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 in the upright direction, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630 . After that, when the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the starting end of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, FIG. 35(a) and 37(a), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are arranged at the retracted position.

33(a), 35(a), and 37(a), the other contact portion 634 of the pair of contact portions 634 of the first displacement member 630 is positioned at the front base. The rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the upright direction is restricted by contacting the other side surface of the projecting portion 628 of 620 .

In this way, the right rotation unit 600 rotates the first displacement member 630 in a posture in which the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are superimposed (superimposed) in the thickness direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIGS. 33 and 34). And since the second displacement member 640 is disposed on the front side of the front base 620, compared with the conventional product in which the first and second grooves are arranged side by side in the same plane, the first groove 635 Also, the planar space required for disposing the second groove 641b (that is, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the outer shape (planar space) in a front view.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an increase in size of the display device (third symbol display device 81) is required. However, even in this case, the space in the thickness direction (the front-rear direction, for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIGS. 10 and 11) is relatively large. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, if the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped and a relatively large space in the thickness direction is used, the outer shape of the right rotation unit 600 when viewed from the front is small. This is particularly effective for increasing the size of the display device.

Further, if the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped, one drive pin 654b transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission member 654 to the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, respectively. This eliminates the need for separate drive pins (transmission members) for the first and second grooves, unlike conventional products. That is, the parts can be used in common, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

As described above, the second displacement member 640 is divided into the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642, and the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are connected by the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643. Since the link mechanism is configured by being rotatably supported by the support shafts 632 and 633 of the first displacement member 630, the amplifying effect of the link mechanism can be utilized. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, the amount of relative displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this case, in this embodiment, the second displacement member 640 is divided into a driven member 641 and a connecting displacement member 642 to form a link mechanism, and a support shaft that pivotally supports the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642. By disposing 632 and 633 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, as shown in FIGS. A posture in which the member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are superimposed can be formed.

This makes it easier to hide the second displacement member 640 behind the first displacement member 630 (make it easier to make invisible to the player). Therefore, when the first displacement member 630 is tilted from the upright posture to the overhanging posture, it is possible to reduce the outer size of the right rotation unit 600 in the front view at the retracted position (see FIG. 33(a)). (see FIGS. 33(a) to 33(c)), while hiding the presence of the second displacement member 640 (decorative portion 642b) from the player, after the first displacement member 630 is tilted to the overhanging posture, The second displacement member 640 can be protruded from the back surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 34(a) to 34(c)), making it easier to perform effects that give impact to the player.

As described above, the movement of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 from the retracted position shown in FIG. 33(a) to the extended position shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 33(c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced (rotated) in the overhanging direction (that is, the falling direction, referred to as the “first direction”) while being integrated. 33(c) and 34(a), after the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 630 is stopped, as shown in FIGS. 34(a) to 34(c), the second displacement member 630 The connecting displacement member 642 of the member 640 displaces (rotates) the decorative portion 642b in a lifting direction (referred to as a “second direction”). That is, the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.

As a result, the inertial force associated with the stopping of the first displacement member 630 displaced in the first direction can be canceled by the inertial force when the second displacement member 640 starts displacing in the second direction. As a result, a series of movements from the retracted position to the extended position can be performed smoothly, which not only enhances the performance effect, but also reduces the load on the parts due to the action of inertial force and improves durability. can be achieved.

In this case, in this embodiment, since the weight of the first displacement member 630 is made heavier than the weight of the second displacement member 640, the retracted position shown in FIG. In the operation of displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 to , the heavy first displacement member 630 may be stopped first, and the light weight second displacement member 640 may be stopped last. As a result, the load on the driving motor 650 and the gears (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653, see FIGS. 29 and 30) in the transmission mechanism can be reduced.

That is, from the state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are integrally displaced in the overhanging direction (first direction) (see FIGS. 33(a) to 33(c)), the The displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33(c) and 34(a)), and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts its decorative portion 642b (second direction). The transition to the displaced state (see FIG. 34(a) to FIG. 34(c)) is made by the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moving from the action section 635a of the first groove 635 to the non-interference section 635b. Therefore, the rotation of the drive motor 650 and the gears (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653) in the transmission mechanism can be continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member 630 is stopped in the middle of such state transition, it is possible to avoid the load on the gear of the drive motor 650 transmission mechanism due to the stop.

On the other hand, the displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33(c) and 34(a)), and the direction in which the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts its decorative portion 642b (the second 34(a) to 34(c)) to a state in which the second displacement member 640 is stopped (see FIG. 34(c)), the drive motor 650 and the gears of the transmission mechanism (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653) must be stopped. However, in this case, the only member that is stopped is the second displacement member 640, which is light in weight, so the load on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

Here, as described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 extends outward on the opposite side of the decorative portion 642b across the portion (shaft support hole 642a) that is pivotally supported by the first displacement member 630. A protruding portion 642c is provided (see FIG. 32), and the protruding portion 642c can serve as a weight.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36, and 38, when the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated to lift the decorative portion 642b upward, the projecting portion 642c is formed on the opposite side of the decorative portion 642b. As a result, the weight of the overhanging portion 642c can be used to facilitate upward lifting of the decorative portion 642b. Therefore, it is possible to quickly lift the decorative portion 642b, thereby enhancing the presentation effect and suppressing the driving force of the driving motor 650 required for the lifting operation.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 34(c), 36(c) and 38(c), after the decorative portion 642b is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion 642b and the weight of the overhanging portion 642c are suspended. Therefore, compared to the cantilevered state in which only the decorative portion 642b is formed, the posture in which the decorative portion 642b is lifted can be stabilized, and at the same time, it is necessary to maintain the posture. Therefore, the driving force of the driving motor 650 can be suppressed.

In this case, as described above, the projecting portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed so that its bottom wall (projection 642c1, see FIG. 32) can contact the rear surface of the first displacement member 630. As shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, when displacing (rotating) the connecting displacement member 642, the projecting portion 642c is brought into contact with the rear surface of the first displacing member 630, thereby displacing the connecting displacement. Rattling of the member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the decorative portion 642b when it is displaced, thereby enhancing the presentation effect and suppressing wear and damage to the pivot portion due to looseness.

In addition to the role of the weight, the protruding portion 642c also plays the role of suppressing rattling by coming into contact with the first displacement member 630. Therefore, it is preferable to separately provide portions for these two roles. It can be made unnecessary, and the structure of the connecting displacement member 642 can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Furthermore, the projecting portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed in a substantially box shape as described above (see FIG. 32). As a result, weight and rigidity can be ensured while reducing the outer shape of the projecting portion 642c. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, in a state in which the overhanging portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, in a state in which it is invisible to the player in front), the connection displacement While ensuring that the member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be displaced, the projecting portion 642c reliably exhibits the function of a weight and the function of suppressing rattling by contacting the back surface of the first displacement member 630. can be made

Here, in the front base 620, as described above, the shaft support hole 624 that supports the first displacement member 630 is located closer to the opening of the game board 13 than the shaft support hole 625 that supports the transmission member 654. 29 to 31), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 630 are arranged at the overhang position (see FIGS. 33 to 38). While the projecting area for projecting the 640 to the opening side of the game board 13 can be ensured, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden behind the first displacement member 630 while it is displaced from the retracted position to the projecting position.

In this case, as described above, the front base 620 includes the bearing 627 that supports the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 (see FIG. 29), and the transmission member 654 is configured as shown in FIGS. As shown in (c), when the second displacement member 640 is displaced to the overhanging position, it is formed so as to be able to abut against the bearing portion 627 , so that the second displacement member 640 is positioned relative to the first displacement member 630 . Rotation can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member 654, which serves to transmit the driving force of the drive motor 650, can also serve as a stopper that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range. Therefore, the structure can be simplified, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

Moreover, since the bearing portion 627 is a portion for raising the first displacement member 630 from the front base 620 and arranging the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 in an overlapping posture (Fig. 29), the rigidity is relatively high, and a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be ensured, and the durability can be improved. can be improved.

Furthermore, as described above, the transmission member 654 is provided with a recess 654c corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing 627 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), and as shown in FIG. When the displacement member 640 is extended to the extended position, the bearing portion 627 is formed to be received in the recessed cutout portion 654c, so that the movable range of the transmission member 654 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the amount of displacement of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be secured accordingly. In other words, while ensuring the movable range of the transmission member 654, the position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 can be brought close to the bearing portion 627. 38, while the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position, the transmission member 654 is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, , invisible to the player in front).

As described above, the front base 620 is formed to be inclined on the left side of the front view (the opening side of the game board 13, for example, the left side of FIG. 33(c)) by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side and front surfaces. An inclined surface 620a is provided. 34(c), the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced (rotated) in the direction in which the decorative portion 642b is lowered, through the state shown in FIG. 34(b), and then to the state shown in FIG. 34(a). When formed, the inclined surface 620a can prevent the connecting displacement member 642 from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and unable to be displaced. Similarly, from the state shown in FIG. 33(c), the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) is displaced (rotated) toward the retracted position integrally with the first displacement member 630, and the state shown in FIG. 33(a) through the state shown in FIG. 33(a), the inclined surface 620a can prevent the coupling displacement member 642 from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and unable to be displaced.

In particular, in this embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is arranged in a cantilevered state with the rotation shaft 631 as a fulcrum, and the second displacement member 640 is arranged on the first displacement member 630, and the weight is reduced. As a result, the first displacement member 630 is likely to sway in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 33) (that is, sway in the direction in which the connecting displacement member 642 approaches and separates from the front base 620), and the connecting displacement member 642 The side surface of the front base 620 is easily locked. Therefore, the configuration in which the front base 620 is provided with the inclined surface 620a is particularly effective.

Further, the front base 620 is provided with the ridge 626 that protrudes from the front surface and extends along the displacement direction (rotational direction) of the first displacement member 630, as described above. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 33, 35 and 37, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, only the top portion of the ridge 626 is displaced to the second displacement member 640. can be contacted. Therefore, compared to the case where the entire front surface of the front base 620 contacts the second displacement member 640, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed. As a result, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be smoothly displaced, and the driving force required for the drive motor 650 can be suppressed.

Here, the relationship between the ridge 626 of the front base 620 and the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39(a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the connecting displacement member 642, and FIG. and a schematic cross-sectional view of a connecting displacement member 642. FIG.

As described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 is made of a light transmissive resin material. Therefore, the decorative effect can be enhanced by transmitting light emitted from the light-emitting body or the display device. On the other hand, since the connecting displacement member 642 is a member arranged to face the front base 620 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), shaking and rattling occur when the second displacement member 640 is displaced. As a result, it abuts on the front surface of the front base 620 . In this case, when the front surface of the front base 620 comes into contact with the front surface of the front base 620, the friction between the front surface of the front base 620 and the front surface of the front base 620 forms fogging on the front surface of the front base 620, which impairs light transmission.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, the front surface of the front base 620 is provided with the ridge 626, and only the top of the ridge 626 can be brought into contact with the connecting displacement member 642. It is possible to partially suppress fogging (a portion where light transmittance is impaired) formed on the connecting displacement member 642 due to rubbing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the second displacement member 640 is provided with a metal connection pin 643 for connecting the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642. The ridge 626 of the front base 620 is integrated with the first displacement member 630 along the trajectory of the connecting pin 643 when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (see FIGS. 33, 35 and 37). extended.

As a result, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, the rear end surface of the connecting pin 642 (the right surface in FIG. can be brought into contact. Therefore, the surface pressure acting on the connecting displacement member 642 from the top of the ridge 626 can be borne by the rear end surface of the connecting pin 642, and the surface pressure acting on other portions of the connecting displacement member 642 can be weakened accordingly. can. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of fogging on other portions of the connecting displacement member 642 due to friction with the ridges 626, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the function of transmitting light.

Next, referring to FIG. 40, the function of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 will be described. FIG. 40(a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630, and FIG. 40(b) is a front base viewed in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630 along line XLc-XLc in FIG. 40(a).

As shown in FIG. 40 , the front base 620 includes a bearing portion 627 that rotatably supports the first displacement member 630 . A space for disposing the second displacement member 640 can be formed between the front surface of the front base 620 and the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 because the base 620 is pivotally supported in a raised state. That is, as described above, the second displacement member 640 can be superimposed on the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 29 to 31).

As described above, the front base 620 includes the protruding portion 628 that protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, and the first displacement member 630 protrudes from the rear surface thereof. The contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the projection 628 of the front base 620, so that the first displacement member 630 can rotate relative to the front base 620 within a predetermined range. can be regulated within

In this case, the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 is erected from the front of the front base 620 as a large-diameter cylindrical body to increase its rigidity and form a dead space on the outer peripheral side. A projecting portion 628 is projected radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, and the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the projecting portion 628. The rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be ensured, and durability can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the outer shape of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 40(a)) of the first displacement member 630 is set to a size that includes the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620 when viewed from the front. That is, the front surface of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 40(a)) is formed so as to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 . As a result, rattling when the first displacement member 630 is displaced and tilting of the first displacement member 630 forward (in the direction of arrow Fr in FIG. 40(c)) can be suppressed.

In addition, the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620 receives the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 on its side surface and serves as a stopper for restricting relative displacement. Since it is possible to share the role of receiving and suppressing rattling and tilting, it is not necessary to separately provide parts for these two roles, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is arranged in a cantilevered state with the rotating shaft 631 (bearing portion 627 of the front base 620) as a fulcrum. Since the displacement member 640 is provided and the weight increases, the first displacement member 630 is likely to sway in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 40(a)). The swinging of the first displacement member 630 in the direction of approaching the front base 620 (the direction opposite to the arrow X in FIG. 40(c)), but the swinging in the direction in which the first displacement member 630 separates from the front base 620 (the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40(c)) cannot be regulated. Since it is bulky, damage near the fulcrum is likely to occur. Therefore, a configuration in which the front surface of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 to suppress forward swinging (tilting) of the first displacement member 630 is particularly effective.

In this case, the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620 protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627 and is connected to the front surface of the front base 620, so that the rigidity of the projecting portion 628 can be increased. In particular, when the first displacement member 630 tilts forward (direction of arrow Fr in FIG. 40(c)), the direction in which the tilting is supported (that is, the projection 628 is positioned between the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 and the front base 620). Since the rigidity in the direction sandwiched between the first displacement member 630 and the front surface can be increased, the forward tilting of the first displacement member 630 can be effectively suppressed.

Next, the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 48. FIG. 41 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 700, and FIG. 42 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG. 43 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 41 to 43, the left rotation unit 700 has a base body composed of a rear base 710 and a front base 720, and a base body disposed on the front side of the front base 720 so that the base end thereof can be displaced. A first displacement member 730, a second displacement member 740 displaceably disposed on the distal end side of the first displacement member 730, and a driving force for displacing the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. and a drive motor 750 disposed on the rear surface of the rear base 710, a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 750, and a connecting member ( A first connecting member 760 and a second connecting member 770 ), and a cover body 780 covering the front surface of the front base 720 on the lower end side.

A part of the transmission mechanism (the first pinion 751, the rack member 752 and the second pinion 753) is accommodated between the facing surfaces of the rear base 710 and the front base 720. As shown in FIG. A pair of insertion pins 722 that are inserted into the sliding grooves 752a of the rack member 752 are projected from the rear surface of the front base 720 to define the movement direction of the rack member 752 .

Circular shaft support holes 723 , 724 , 725 are formed through the front base 720 in a front view. The rotating shaft 754a and the rotating shaft 761 of the first connection member 760 are rotatably supported. Similarly, a circular shaft support hole 781 is formed through the cover body 780 when viewed from the front, and the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is rotatably supported in this shaft support hole 781 .

A base-side engaging member 726 is projected from the front surface of the front base 720, and a receiving concave portion 727 is formed. The base-side engaging member 726 includes a base portion 726a erected from the front of the front base 720, and a bent portion 726b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 726a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface. , the engagement surfaces of the second displacement member 740 and a displacement-side engagement member 742, which will be described later, can be engaged with each other. Thereby, as will be described later, it is possible to suppress forward tilting of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 with respect to the front base 720 (see FIG. 47).

The receiving recess 727 is a substantially rectangular recess in front view that is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 726. By forming with an opening area larger than the outer shape, it is formed so as to be able to receive the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742 . Thereby, as will be described later, at the retracted position, relative displacement of the second displacement member 730 in the approaching direction with respect to the front base 720 is permitted, and damage due to collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47(c)).

The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 751 attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 750, a second pinion 753 fastened and fixed to the rotating shaft 754a of the transmission member 754, and the first pinion 751 and the second pinion 753 having teeth. and a rack member 752 formed as a rack in which a rack gear to be combined is tooth-cut on the side surface of a flat member.

The rack member 752 has two sliding grooves 752a extending along its longitudinal direction and having the shape of an oblong hole when viewed from the front. By doing so, the moving direction is held in a specified state. That is, the rack member 752 is held between the facing surfaces of the rear base 710 and the front base 720 so as to be linearly movable.

The transmission member 754 includes a rotating shaft 754a protruding from the rear surface of one end side, and a drive pin 754b protruding from the front surface of the other end opposite to the rotating shaft 754a. It is rotatably supported on the front side of the front base 720 by being inserted through the shaft support hole 724 . The drive pin 754b is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted through a drive groove 762 of the first connecting member 760, which will be described later.

According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 751 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 750 , the rotation of the first pinion 751 is transmitted to the second pinion 753 via the linear motion of the rack member 752 . As the second pinion 753 is rotated, the transmission member 754 is rotated around the shaft support hole 724 of the front base 720 .

When the transmission member 754 is rotated, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 acts on the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 to drive the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770, as will be described later. . As a result, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 via the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770 . can be displaced with respect to the front base 720 (see FIG. 46).

The first displacement member 730 has a rotating shaft 731 projecting from one longitudinal end thereof (lower side in FIG. 42), and a shaft at the other longitudinal end side opposite to the rotating shaft 731 (upper side in FIG. 42). A support hole 732 is formed through the first displacement member 730, and a slide groove 733 having an oval shape in a front view is recessed in the rear surface of the first displacement member 730, and a connecting pin 734 is protruded. An engaged portion 735 is formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 on the other longitudinal end side and on the side of the shaft support hole 732 .

The rotating shaft 731 is, as described above, a shaft-like body inserted through the shaft supporting hole 723 of the front base 720 and the shaft supporting hole 781 of the cover body 780. It is rotatably pivotally supported on the front side of the front base 720 by being inserted through the support holes 723 and 781 . That is, the first displacement member 730 is rotatably pivotally supported on the base end side between the facing surfaces of the front base 720 and the cover body 780 .

The shaft support hole 732 is a circular hole in front view, and rotatably supports the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 . The sliding groove 733 is a concave groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and the end of the connecting shaft 790 is slidably inserted therethrough. The connecting shaft 790 pivotally supports the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 so as to be relatively rotatable. As will be described later, when the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 are driven, the connecting shaft 790 acts on the sliding groove 733 with respect to the first displacement member 730, so that the first displacement member 730 moves forward. It is displaced (rotated) with respect to the base 720 (see FIG. 45).

The connecting pin 734 is a shaft-like member having a circular cross section and is inserted into a slide groove 772 of the second connecting member 770, which will be described later. placed in Therefore, the direction in which the connecting shaft 790 slides along the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 should coincide with the direction in which the connecting pin 734 slides along the sliding groove 772 of the second connecting member 770. can be done. That is, as will be described later, when the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are driven, the form of relative displacement of the second connecting member 770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is linear motion (sliding displacement). (See FIG. 45).

The engaged portion 735 is a portion formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 extending to a position overlapping the second displacement member 740 in a rear view. The side engaging member 742 (the engaging surface of the bent portion 742b) is formed to be engageable (see FIG. 48). Thereby, as will be described later, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed at the extended position (see FIG. 48).

The second displacement member 740 includes a rotating shaft 741 and a displacement-side engaging portion 742 protruding from its back surface, a receiving recess 743 recessed from its back surface, and a flange member fastened and fixed to the end surface of the rotating shaft 741. 744 and.

As described above, the rotating shaft 741 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted through the shaft support hole 732 of the first displacement member 730. By inserting the rotating shaft 741 through the shaft support hole 732, the first displacement member A second displacement member 740 is rotatably supported on the distal end side of 730 in the longitudinal direction. The flange member 744 has a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 732 at the base end side that is fastened and fixed to the rotation shaft 741 , thereby restricting the rotation shaft 741 from slipping out of the shaft support hole 732 .

A connecting pin 744a is projected from the rear surface of the flange member 744 at a position eccentric from the axis of the rotating shaft 741 . The connecting pin 744a is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted through a connecting groove 772 of the second connecting member 770, which will be described later. As will be described later, when the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are driven, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 receives action from the connecting groove 772 of the second connecting member 770, thereby causing the second displacement. The member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 730 (see FIG. 46).

The displacement side engaging member 742 includes a base portion 742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 742a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface, As described above, in the retracted position, the engagement surfaces are formed to be engaged with the displacement-side engagement member 726 of the front base 720, and in the overhang position, the first displacement member 730 is engaged. The joint portion 735 is formed to be engageable with an engaging surface.

The receiving recess 743 is a substantially rectangular recess in a front view that is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742. The base-side engagement member 726 is formed so as to receive the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 726 by forming it with a large opening area. Thereby, as will be described later, at the retracted position, relative displacement of the second displacement member 730 in the approaching direction with respect to the front base 720 is permitted, and damage due to collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47(c)).

The connecting first member 760 has a rotary shaft 761 protruding from the rear surface of one longitudinal end side (lower side in FIG. 42) and a sliding groove 762 opened in the substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction. A connecting groove 771 and a sliding groove 772 are opened at one longitudinal end side (the upper side in FIG. 42) and at the longitudinal central portion, respectively.

The rotating shaft 761 of the first connecting member 760 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 725 of the front base 720 , and the connecting groove 771 of the second connecting member 770 is connected to the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740 . A pin 744a is inserted. Further, the other longitudinal ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are rotatably supported by a connecting shaft 790 inserted through the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 .

That is, one longitudinal end of the first connecting member 760 is displaceably connected to the front base 720, and one longitudinal end of the second connecting member 770 is displaceably connected to the second displacement member 740. A connecting portion (connecting pin 790) between the other ends in the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 770 is connected to the first displacement member 730 so as to be displaceable.

As will be described later, this allows the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 to be displaced relative to each other and relative to the front base 720, while allowing the first coupling member 760 and the second coupling member 770 to move to the first position. It can be hidden behind the displacement member 730 to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 from being exposed at the overhang position and impairing the appearance (see FIGS. 44(c) and 45c(c)).

As described above, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is inserted through the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760, and the sliding groove 772 of the second connection member 770 is provided with the first displacement member 730. connecting pin 734 is inserted.

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG. 44 is a front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIG. 45 is a front view of each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. 7 is a rear view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG. 46A and 46B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

Note that FIG. 44 illustrates a state in which the cover body 780 is omitted. 44(a) shows FIGS. 45(a) and 46(a), FIG. 44(b) shows FIGS. 45(b) and 46(b), and FIG. 45(c) and FIG. 46(c), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 44(a), 45(a), and 46(a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and arranged in front of the front base 720. is set.

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(a)), the inner wall surface of the driving groove 762 of the first connecting member 760 is protruded by the driving pin 754b of the transmission member 754. By being pushed in the direction (left side in FIG. 46(a)), the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(a)) about the rotation axis 761 thereof.

When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 moves to the connecting shaft that connects the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 . 46(a) to the left), the first displacement member 730 is pushed toward its rotation axis as shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b) and 6(b). 731 as the center of rotation, and rotates in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(a)).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770 connected to each other by the connection shaft 790 move downward (lower side in FIG. 46(a)). ), and the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 771 of the second connecting member 770 pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, thereby As shown in FIG. 46(b), the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (rotated relative to the first displacement member 730) in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(a)) about the rotation axis 741 thereof. ) is done.

In this case, the second connecting member 770 is arranged along the extending direction of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the sliding groove 772 of the second connecting member 770 so that the connecting shaft 790 and the first displacement member 730 The connecting pins 734 of the first displacement member 730 are linearly moved (slide displaced) along the longitudinal direction.

From the states shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b) and 46(b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(b)), and the first connecting member 760 When rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(b)) about the rotating shaft 761, the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the overhanging direction as described above. (Fig. 46(b) counterclockwise), and the second displacement member 740 rotates about its rotation axis 741 with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (Fig. 46(b) clockwise). relative displacement (relative rotation) to

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted as shown in FIGS. A state is formed in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhang position, and the second displacement member 740 is displaced (relatively rotated) to the maximum relative to the first displacement member 730 .

44(c), 45(c) and 46(c), the transmission member 754 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(c)). When driven, the driving pin 754b of the transmission member 754 pushes the inner wall surface of the driving groove 762 of the first connecting member 760 in the retracting direction (the right side in FIG. 46(c)), so that the first connecting member 760 It rotates in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(c)) about the rotating shaft 761 as the center of rotation.

When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 moves to the connecting shaft 790 that connects the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770. 46(c) right side), the first displacement member 730 rotates its rotating shaft 731 as shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b) and 6(b). It is rotated in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(c)) as the center of rotation.

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 770, in which the first connecting member 760 and the other end are connected to each other by the connecting shaft 790, moves upward (upward in FIG. 46(c)). 44(b), 45(b) and FIG. 44(b), 45(b) and FIG. 6(b), the second displacement member 740 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. ) is done.

From the states shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b) and 46(b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(b)), and the first connecting member 760 is When the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 46B), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the retracting direction (see FIG. 46B). 46(b) clockwise), and the second displacement member 740 rotates relative to the first displacement member 730 about its rotation axis 741 in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(b)). Displaced (relatively rotated).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the starting end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is erected as shown in FIGS. A state is formed in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position, and the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is minimized.

Thus, according to the counterclockwise rotation unit 700, since the connection member (connection first member 760 and connection second member 770) that connects between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740 is provided, such a connection member is provided. By acting between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 causes relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 730 with respect to the first displacement member 730. ).

In this case, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is installed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the first displacement member 730 protrudes from the front base 720 and is displaced in the direction in which it is spaced apart (projection direction). Then, the connecting member is exposed between the front base 720 and the second displacing member 740 and can be visually recognized by the player, thereby spoiling the appearance.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the connecting member is divided into two members, the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770, and one longitudinal end of the first connecting member 760 is connected to the front base 720, The other longitudinal end of the second connection member 770 is connected to the second displacement member 740, the other longitudinal ends of the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770 are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, and the connection Since the portion (connecting shaft 790) is displaceably connected to the first displacement member 730, even when the first displacement member 730 projects from the front base 720 and is displaced in a direction (protruding direction) in which the connecting member (The first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770) can be hidden behind the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connection member from being exposed and the appearance from being spoiled.

In this case, as described above, the second connecting member 770 is held by the first displacement member 730 in a form of linear movement (sliding displacement) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730. 730 is displaced (rotated) in the direction in which 730 protrudes from the front base 720 and is separated from the front base 720 (projection direction). Even in such a case, the second connecting member 770 can be kept hidden behind the first displacing member 730 to avoid being seen by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connection member from being exposed and the appearance from being spoiled.

Here, in this embodiment, the second displacement member 740 includes a light emitter (not shown), and an electrical connection line W for supplying power to the light emitter is wired on the back surface of the first displacement member 730. (See Figure 45). In this case, the connection line W is introduced from an opening formed in the rear surface of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740 and connected to the light emitter. Therefore, the connection line W is wired along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 on the rear surface of the first displacement member 730 . Therefore, when the connecting member is displaced on the back surface of the first displacement member 730, the connecting member may interfere and damage the connection line W.

In this case, the connecting member (second connecting member 770) is disposed on the first displacement member 730 so as to linearly move (sliding) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, as described above. , the second connection member 770 can be prevented from interfering with the connection line W. Therefore, it is possible to avoid interference with the connecting second member 770 without securing a large space for wiring the connection line W (that is, the dimension in the width direction of the first displacement member 730). The space for arranging the wire W can be reduced, and the shape of the first displacement member 730 when viewed from the front (especially, the size in the width direction) can be reduced accordingly.

Here, if the above-described connection members (the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770) are provided, the driving force of the drive motor 750 is applied to the first displacement member 730 (that is, the first displacement member 730 Even in a configuration in which a drive groove is provided and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be made to perform the same operation as described above. can.

However, in the case of this configuration, the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 is increased. That is, it is necessary for the connecting member to displaceably connect the connecting portion between the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 to the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730. It is arranged between the facing surfaces of the displacement member 730 and the front base 720 . Therefore, when a drive groove is provided in the first displacement member 730 and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove, the transmission member 754 and the connection member (connection first member 760 and connection second member 770) In order to avoid interference with the first displacement member 730, it is necessary to provide a drive groove in the first displacement member 730 at a position that does not overlap with the displacement trajectory of the connecting member. Therefore, the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 needs to have a size (area) that includes both the displacement trajectory of the connecting member and the drive groove. Make larger.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive groove 762 is provided in the first connection member 760, and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760, so that the driving force of the drive motor 750 is reduced. is given to the connecting first member 760, the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced.

That is, there is no need to avoid interference between the transmission member 754 and the connecting members (the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770), and the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 corresponds only to the displacement trajectory of the connecting members. The size (area) is sufficient, and the size (area) does not need to include the driving groove, so the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced accordingly.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48, the engagement action by the base-side engaging member 726 and displacement-side engaging member 742 will be described.

FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member 726 and displacement-side engaging member 742, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. 45(a). do.

47(a) shows the state immediately before the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted positions, and FIG. 47(b) shows the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. A state in which the displacement member 740 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated. 47(c) shows a state in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in the direction of approaching the front base 720 in FIG. 47(b).

As described above, the base-side engaging member 726 is projected from the front surface of the front base 720, and the displacement-side engaging member 742 is projected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 740. The engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 are disposed with their open sides (the distal end side of the bent portion 726b) facing each other (see FIGS. 41 to 43).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47(a), when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in the retracting direction (upper side in FIG. 47) with respect to the front base 720, the bending portions 726b of each other , 742b can enter the inner surfaces of the mating bent portions 726b, 742b, and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position as shown in FIG. , the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other.

Here, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is installed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740 are positioned relatively apart from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. The member 740 is connected by a connecting member. Therefore, in the retracted position, even if the first displacement member 730 tilts the tip portion (that is, the second displacement member 740) on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 731 in the direction (forward) away from the front base 720, By the action of the connecting member interposed between the base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the tilting can be suppressed.

However, in this embodiment, one longitudinal end of the second coupling member 770 is coupled to the second displacement member 740 , while one longitudinal end of the first coupling member 760 is relative to the rotation axis 731 of the first displacement member 730 . It is connected to the front base 720 at a proximal position. Therefore, at the retracted position, the rotating shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 becomes the proximal end (fulcrum), and the distal end portion on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 731 (that is, the second displacement member 740 side) becomes the free end of the cantilever. In this state, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in the standing posture. Therefore, the first displacement member 730 has a free end due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member 740. ) away from the front base 720 (forward, right in FIG. 47(b)).

On the other hand, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position, the second displacement member is engaged with the base-side engagement member 726 of the front base 720 as shown in FIG. 47(b). Since the displacement-side engaging member 742 of 740 can be engaged, the tip portion (second displacement member 740) of the first displacement member 730 opposite to the rotating shaft 731 moves away from the front base 720 (forward, It is possible to suppress tilting to the right in FIG. 47(b).

The displacement-side engaging member 742 may protrude from the rear surface of the first displacement member 730, but in this embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 protrudes from the rear surface of the second displacement member 740. be done. Therefore, the engagement position between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 can be set at a position away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 . As a result, the tip portion (second displacement member 740) of the first displacement member 730 on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 731 is effectively tilted in the direction away from the front base 720 (forward, right side in FIG. 47(b)). can be suppressed to

On the other hand, when the displacement-side engaging member 742 is formed on the second displacement member 740, the displacement-side engaging member 742 is located away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730, so the first displacement member 730 becomes susceptible to swinging in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 47), and the positional relationship between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 becomes unstable. Therefore, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted positions, it becomes difficult to engage the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 has an engaging surface on the inner surface of the bent portion 742b that is arranged in the second direction from the distal end side of the bent portion 742b toward the base end side (base portion 742a side). The displacement member 740 is slanted toward the back surface thereof. As a result, the distance between the engagement surface and the rear surface of the second displacement member 740 can be widened on the receiving side of the displacement-side engagement member 742 (the tip side of the bent portion 742b, the upper side in FIG. 47(a)). Even if shaking occurs when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, the engagement between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 can be facilitated. .

In this manner, the engagement between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 is facilitated, and when these engagements are started, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are moved to the retracted position. As the second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the front base 720 (left side in FIG. 47(b)), the second displacement member 740 is brought closer to the front base 720 side (left side in FIG. 47(b)) along with the inclination of the engagement surface of the base side engagement member 742 (bent portion 742b). be able to.

As a result, at the retracted position, the tip portions (on the second displacement member 740 side) of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are separated from the front base 720 with the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum. Not only is it possible to suppress tilting in the direction (forward, right in FIG. 47(b)), but also the projection dimension of the second displacement member 740 from the front base 720 can be suppressed, , the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are slightly elastically deformed as a whole. 720 can be suppressed to stably maintain its posture in a stopped state.

On the other hand, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 have the tip portion (second displacement member 740 side) of the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum toward the front base 720 (forward , left side of FIG. 47(b)) is allowed. In this case, the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 are plate-like bodies bent into a substantially V-shaped cross section, and when tilted, the rear or front base of the second displacement member 740 is bent. If it collides with the front of 720, it will be deformed in a bending direction, so there is a high possibility of breakage.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the receiving recesses 727 and 743 for receiving the mating bent portions 726b and 742b are recessed on the front surface of the front base 720 and the back surface of the second displacement member 740. 47(c), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are tilted toward the front base 720 (forward, leftward in FIG. 47(b)). When receiving, the corresponding bent portions 726b, 742b can be received in the receiving concave portions 727, 743. As shown in FIG. As a result, breakage due to collision between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 can be suppressed.

When tilting, the rear surface of the second connecting member 770 facing parallel to the front surface of the front base 720 collides with the front surface of the front base 720 in a face contact manner over the entire surface, so the surface pressure at the time of collision is reduced. (dispersion) can be Therefore, damage can be suppressed.

FIG. 48(a) is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 in the XLVIIIa section of FIG. 45(c), and FIG. 48(b) is an arrow XLVIIIb direction of FIG. 48(a). Fig. 11 is a side view of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 in perspective;

As described above, when the left rotation unit 700 is shifted from the retracted position to the extended position, the first displacement member 730 is extended and the second displacement member 740 is moved relative to the first displacement member 730 . is relatively displaced (rotated) around its rotation axis 741 (see FIGS. 45(a) to 45(c)).

As shown in FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b), according to this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhang position (FIG. 45(c) ), the engaging surface of the displacement-side engaging member 742 (bent portion 742b) is engaged with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacing member 730, whereby the first displacing member 730 and the second displacing member 740 are engaged. can be combined with Therefore, it is possible to suppress rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 at the extended position.

In particular, since the engagement surface of the displacement-side engagement member 742 is inclined as described above, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are slightly elastically deformed by the inclination. They can be displaced toward each other. Therefore, at the retracted position, rattling between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be suppressed, and the posture can be stably maintained in the stopped state.

In addition, the displacement-side engaging member 742 engages with the base-side engaging member 726 of the front base 720 at the retracted position to connect the second displacement member 740 to the front base 720. Since the engagement with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacement member 730 can also be used to couple the second displacement member 740 to the first displacement member 730, the portions for these two roles are separately provided. The provision can be made unnecessary, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Next, the winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 55. FIG. 49 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 50 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 65. FIG. 51(a) is a front view of the winning device 65, FIG. 51(b) is a rear view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 51(c) is a top view of the winning device 65. FIG.

52(a) and 52(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning device 65 taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 51, and FIGS. and FIG. 52(b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the winning device 65 along the LIIIa-LIIIa line and the LIIIb-LIIIb line.

It should be noted that illustration of the opening/closing plate 860 is omitted in FIG. 51, and illustration of the guide rib 813a is omitted in FIG. Further, FIG. 52(a) shows the state in which the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 52(b) shows the state in which the seesaw member 840 forms the second state.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the winning device 65 includes a front base 810, an intermediate base 820 superimposed on the rear side of the front base 810, and a rear base 830 superimposed on the rear side of the intermediate base 820. , a seesaw member 840 and a follower member 850 disposed between the facing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820, and an opening/closing plate 860 for opening/closing the winning opening 65a.

The prize winning device 65 is formed in a box shape having an internal space by a front base 810, a front base 820 and a rear base 830. In the internal space, there is a guide passage through which balls winning from the prize winning port 65a are guided. The weight of the game ball acts on the seesaw member 840 when the game ball passes through the guide passage.

The seesaw member 840 forms a first state in which one end side (one end decoration portion 853) is lowered and the other end side (other end decoration portion 843) is raised when the weight of the game ball is not applied (Fig. 52(a)), when the weight of the game ball is applied to the other end side, a second state is formed in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered (see FIG. 52(b)).

That is, the prize winning device 65 utilizes the weight of the game ball passing through the guide passage to cause the seesaw member 840 to alternately appear in the first state and the second state, and one end side (one end decoration) of the seesaw member 840 is displayed. 853) and the other end side (the other end side decoration body 843) are formed to be capable of performing an effect of vertically displacing them.

Here, as will be described later, the seesaw member 840 has a length dimension of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 larger than the length dimension of the receiving surface 844 in the direction connecting the one end side and the other end side. be. Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass continuously, the game balls stay on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the second state is likely to be maintained. In contrast, in this embodiment, even when a plurality of game balls pass continuously, the weight of the game balls prevents the seesaw member 840 from remaining in the second state. and alternately appearing can be reliably executed. The configuration of the winning device 65 for performing such effects will be described below.

The front base 810 includes a front substrate 811 forming its front surface, and a front first side wall 812, a front second side wall 813, a front first bottom wall 814, and a front second bottom wall 815 projecting from the rear side of the front substrate 811. and are mainly provided.

In the front base 810, recessed portions 811a and 811b formed by recessing the lower edge of the front base 810 are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval in the width direction. And part of the driven member 850 (the one end side decorative portion 853 and the other end side decorative portion 843) is exposed so as to be visible to the player.

The front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 are portions forming side walls of a guide passage for guiding game balls, and are arranged to face each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. The front first bottom wall 814 and the front second bottom wall 815 are parts that form the bottom walls of the guide passages, and are connected to the lower end sides of the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813, respectively.

Between the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 facing each other, an open portion on the upper end side thereof serves as a prize winning port 65a, and game balls flow into the guide passage through this open portion (winning prize port 65a). In this case, the front second side wall 813 is formed substantially vertically, while the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814 are inclined downward toward the front second bottom wall 815 and The front second bottom wall 815 is arranged at a position lower than the wall 814 . Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the guide passage from the winning opening 65a can be guided to the second front bottom wall 815 by the downward inclination of the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814 .

The front second bottom wall 815 is formed with a guide bottom surface 815a that slopes downward toward the side away from the front substrate 811 (that is, the intermediate base 830 side). Therefore, the game ball guided by the front second bottom wall 815 rolls along the downward slope of the guide bottom surface 815a and is guided to the guide passage (receiving port 821b) of the intermediate base 830. As shown in FIG.

In addition, guide ribs 813a are erected at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) on the second front side wall 813 . The guide rib 813a is formed in such a shape that the erected height from the second front side wall 813 becomes lower as it is separated from the front base 811, so that the erected end face is an inclined surface. As a result, for example, as a result of colliding with the front first side wall 812 and rebounding when flowing (dropping) into the guide passage from the winning opening 65a, the game ball advances to the front second side wall 813 at a relatively high speed. Even in such a case, the game ball can be smoothly guided toward the guide passage of the intermediate base 830 by the inclined surface of the standing tip of the guide rib 813a.

The intermediate base 820 has an intermediate substrate 821 facing the front substrate 811 of the front base 810 with a predetermined gap therebetween, an intermediate first sidewall 822, an intermediate second sidewall 823, and an intermediate bottom wall protruding from the rear surface of the intermediate substrate 821. 824 and .

The intermediate substrate 821 is formed with an opening/closing plate advance/retreat port 821a, a receiving port 821b, a delivery port 821c, and a discharge port 821d. , stopper portions 821g and 821h are protrudingly provided.

The opening/closing plate entrance/exit 821a of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for allowing the opening/closing plate 860 to move forward/backward. When the opening 65a is closed and the opening/closing plate 860 is retracted (retracted) to the opening/closing plate advance/retreat opening 821a, the winning opening 65a is opened.

The receiving port 821b of the intermediate substrate 821 is an opening for receiving the game ball guided from the front second bottom wall 815 (guide bottom surface 815a) of the front base 810 into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side. (Receiving bottom surface 821b1) is formed continuously with the guide bottom surface 815a of the second front bottom wall 815. As shown in FIG.

The delivery port 821c of the intermediate substrate 821 is an opening for delivering game balls from the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. Formed by That is, the game ball that has passed through the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 and is delivered to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the delivery port 821c.

The discharge port 821 d of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for receiving the game ball discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 , and the bottom surface of the opening is formed by the discharge bottom wall 825 . A game ball ejected from the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and received in the ejection port 821d rolls on the ejection bottom wall 825 and enters an ejection passage (not shown) connected to the rear side of the rear base 830. sent out.

The support shaft 821 e of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 and is inserted through the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 . The bearing 821f of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft hole for rotatably supporting the driven member 850, and the rotating shaft 851 of the driven member 850 is inserted therethrough.

The stopper portions 821g and 821h of the intermediate substrate 821 are portions for contacting the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 to restrict the rotation of the seesaw member 840. The stopper portion 821g is located at the other longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840. The stopper portion 821h is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface (surface opposite to the discharging surface 846), and the stopper portion 821h is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface (surface opposite to the receiving surface 844) on one longitudinal end side of the seesaw member 840. be done.

The first state of the seesaw member 840 is formed by restricting the rotation of the seesaw member 840 by the stopper portion 821h (see FIG. 52(a)). It is formed by being restricted by the portion 821g (see FIG. 52(b)).

Here, as described above, the stopper portion 821g is formed at a position where it can come into contact with the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 opposite to the ejection surface 846, so that the ejection of the game ball can be stabilized. That is, when a game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and the second state is formed by the weight thereof, the stopper portion 821g supports the lower surface opposite to the discharge surface 846. Therefore, for example, the stopper portion 821h is supported. As compared with the case where the stopper portion 821g supports a position near the support shaft 821e (for example, the lower surface on the side opposite to the inclined surface 845), the seesaw member 840 can be prevented from swinging on the discharge surface 846 side. As a result, the discharge of game balls from the discharge surface 846 can be stabilized.

The intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 form the side walls of the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 (the passage for guiding the game balls received from the receiving port 821b to the delivery port 821c), and are separated by a predetermined interval. They are arranged facing each other while being separated from each other. That is, the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 receive the game ball sent out along the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 52(a)) from the guide passage on the side of the front base 810 through the receiving opening 821b and The received game ball is directed toward the intermediate bottom wall 824 and guided along a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52(a)).

The intermediate bottom wall 824 forms the bottom wall of the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side, and is connected to the lower end sides of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, respectively. The intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed with a guide bottom surface 824a that slopes downward toward the delivery port 821c side (that is, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840). A game ball guided through the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, passes through the delivery port 821c, and reaches the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in a substantially horizontal direction (Fig. 52(a) in the lateral direction).

In this way, the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 is provided with an intermediate bottom wall 824 (a guide bottom surface 824a), and the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a is moved to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in a substantially horizontal direction. Since it is guided from the side, the game balls can be guided one by one to the receiving surface 844, and a plurality of game balls can be placed on the receiving surface 844 as in the case of the form in which the game balls are dropped from above the receiving surface 844. Avoid stacking balls. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage, the seesaw member 840 can be easily switched between the first state and the second state.

Here, the extension length of the guide passage that guides the game ball along the substantially horizontal direction toward the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 of the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 is twice the diameter of the game ball. It is preferable to set the following. In this embodiment, the horizontal distance dimension L (see FIG. 52(a)) from the extended end of the guide bottom surface 824a to the rear wall 831 of the rear base 830, which will be described later, is set to 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. be done. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

In addition, the facing interval between the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 is set to a size equivalent to the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, since the position of the game ball can be defined between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, the seesaw member 840 always keeps the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a and delivered from the delivery port 821c. can be received by the receiving surface 844 (guided to the same position on the receiving surface 844).

In this case, the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed so that, in the first state, the height position of the end of the downward slope is higher than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 ( See FIG. 53(a)). Thereby, as will be described later, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the transition to the second state can be quickly performed.

On the other hand, in the second state, the height position of the end of the downward slope is formed to be lower than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (see FIG. 53(b)). Thereby, as will be described later, a step formed between the guide bottom surface 824a and the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 can be used to easily lower the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, thereby forming the first state. can be made easier.

The rear base 830 mainly comprises a rear wall 831 , a discharge side wall 832 and a discharge ceiling wall 833 . The rear wall 831 abuts against the rear side end surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822, the intermediate second side wall 823, and the intermediate bottom wall 824 of the intermediate base body 820 (that is, covers the rear side open portion). It forms the back side wall (back wall) of the guide passage.

The discharge side wall 832 and the discharge ceiling wall 833 form the side wall and the ceiling wall of the guide passage for guiding the game ball from the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 to the discharge passage (not shown), and the discharge port 821d. along the outer edge of the That is, the cross-sectional shape of the guide passage taken in by the discharge bottom wall 825 of the intermediate base 820 and the discharge side wall 832 and discharge ceiling wall 833 of the rear base 830 is substantially the same as the shape of the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820. be. As a result, the width of the guide passage can be ensured, so that a plurality of game balls can be guided smoothly. Further, even when the later game ball collides with the previous game ball on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and bounces up, the latter game ball can be guided smoothly. Details will be described later.

The seesaw member 840 includes a bearing 841 formed at a substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction, a connecting pin 842 formed at one end side in the longitudinal direction, a decorative portion 843 formed at the other end side in the longitudinal direction, and a It mainly includes a receiving surface 844 , an inclined surface 845 and a discharge surface 846 that are formed, and a claw portion 847 erected on the discharge surface 846 .

As described above, the bearing 841 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 821e projecting from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820 is rotatably inserted. 840 is rotatably journalled between opposing surfaces of front base 810 and intermediate base 820 .

The connecting pin 842 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is slidably inserted into a connecting groove 852 (described later) of the driven member 850 . Thereby, the rotation of the seesaw member 840 can be transmitted to the driven member 850 . That is, when the seesaw member 840 rotates about the support shaft 821e, the connecting pin 842 acts on the connecting groove 852, so that the driven member 850 rotates about the rotating shaft 851. .

The other end decorative portion 843 is a portion with a decoration such as a pattern on the front, and is exposed to the player through the cutout portion 811b of the front base 810 so as to be visible to the player, as described above.

The receiving surface 844 is a flat surface portion that receives a game ball that rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a in the guide passage of the intermediate base 820 and is delivered from the delivery port 821c. It is a flat surface-like part for rolling the received game ball to the discharge surface 846 .

The receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 are not dependent on the rotational position of the seesaw member 840, i.e., in a no-load state where no game ball is placed on the seesaw member 840 (i.e., the first state, see FIG. 52(a)). ) is formed in a shape with a downward slope toward the discharge surface 846 . Therefore, in either the first state or the second state, the game ball received by the receiving surface 644 can roll toward the discharge surface 646 from the receiving surface 644 and the inclined surface 643 .

Here, in this embodiment, since the receiving surface 844 is located on the one longitudinal end side (the left side in FIG. 52(a)) of the seesaw member 840 relative to the axial center of the bearing 841, the receiving surface 844 is in the second state (the other end side is lowered). 52(b)), when the receiving surface 844 receives a game ball, the weight of the received game ball causes the one end in the longitudinal direction (receiving surface 844 side) to move. can be lowered. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

The discharge surface 846 is a flat surface-shaped part for sending out (discharging) the game ball from the seesaw member 840 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820, and is arranged from the front base 810 side to the intermediate base 820 side (FIG. 52(b)). It is formed so as to be inclined downward from the front side of the paper to the back side. Therefore, when the game ball rolls up to the discharge surface 846, the game ball can roll toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 due to the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846.

The pawl portion 847 switches the rolling direction of the game ball to the direction toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 when the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840. It is provided with a guide surface 847a formed as an inclined surface that guides the abutted game ball toward the discharge port 821d. This makes it easier for the game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 to flow into the discharge port 821d quickly. Therefore, as will be described later, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are formed. alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

In this case, the claw portion 847 is formed on the other end in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, and is biased toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d) in the width direction of the seesaw member 840. is set. As a result, as will be described later, when the position of the game ball rolling on the output surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, , the time during which the second state is formed) can be easily made constant, and as a result, alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

The driven member 850 has a rotating shaft 851 protruding from the rear surface of the driven member 850 at the other end in the longitudinal direction. and a connecting groove 852 formed in the front of the driven member 850 and a one-end decorative portion 853 exposed to the player through the cutout 811b of the front base 810 so as to be visible to the player. Prepare for.

The rotating shaft 851 is a shaft-shaped body rotatably inserted through the bearing 821f projecting from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820, as described above. are rotatably journalled between the facing surfaces of front base 810 and intermediate base 820 .

As described above, the connecting groove 852 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is slidably inserted. , the driven member 850 is rotated as the seesaw member 840 is rotated.

When the seesaw member 840 is shifted from the first state to the second state, the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 852 is pushed up by the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 rotates about the rotating shaft 851 as shown in FIG. (a) Rotating clockwise raises the linking driven member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) (see FIG. 52(b)). On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 transitions from the second state to the first state, the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 852 is pushed down by the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 rotates about the rotating shaft 851 as shown in FIG. (a) By rotating clockwise, the linking driven member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) is lowered (see FIG. 52(a)).

In this embodiment, the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is thus connected to the connecting groove 852 of the driven member 850, and a link mechanism is configured to rotate the driven member 850 as the seesaw member 840 rotates. A link ratio of the link mechanism is set to a ratio that amplifies the rotation angle of the driven member 850 with respect to the rotation angle of the seesaw member 840 . As a result, the movable range of the driven member 850 (one-end decorative portion 853) can be expanded, and the presentation effect associated with the displacement can be enhanced.

Here, since the seesaw member 840 can be rotated using the weight of the game ball, the transition from the first state to the second state can be easily performed at high speed and in a relatively short time. On the other hand, the transition from the second state to the first state requires rotation of the seesaw member 840 only by its own weight, so the operation becomes slow and takes a long time. In order to ensure that the seesaw member 840 alternately switches between the first state and the second state when a plurality of game balls pass through the guide passage continuously, the transition from the second state to the first state should be done promptly.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, the driven member 850 is connected to one longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840 , so the weight of the driven member 850 is applied to the one longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840 by an external force. (That is, it can be used as an assisting force for transitioning from the second state to the first state). As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required for the transition from the second state to the first state. Alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be facilitated.

Next, the operation of the winning device 65 will be described. When game balls flow into the guide passage on the side of the front base 810 from the winning opening 65a, the game balls are collected on the front second bottom wall 815 and roll on the guide bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815. 53(a) and 53(b)), and flows from the receiving port 821b of the intermediate base 820 into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side.

A game ball that has flowed into the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 travels between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 in a substantially vertical direction (downward direction in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b)). and reach the intermediate bottom wall 824 . The guiding direction of the game ball that reaches the intermediate bottom wall 824 is switched. That is, the game ball rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, is guided in a substantially horizontal direction (left direction in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b)), It is delivered to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the outlet 821c.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the seesaw member 840 forming the first state receives a game ball on its receiving surface 844, the game ball rolls on the receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 toward the discharge surface 846. The weight of the game ball causes the seesaw member 840 to rotate clockwise about the rotating shaft 841 in FIG. A second state is formed, as shown at 52(b). However, illustration of game balls is omitted in FIG. 52(b).

When the game ball is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 and a no-load state is formed in which the weight of the game ball is not applied to the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 rotates the rotating shaft 841 by its own weight. 52(b) about the center (the other end in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side) is raised), and as shown in FIG. 52(a), the first state is formed ( seesaw member 840 is returned to the first state).

In this case, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided to the seesaw member 840, the weight of the game balls causes the seesaw member 840 to descend to the second state (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the side of the other end decorative portion 843)). state), and it may not be possible to alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the seesaw member 840 has the receiving surface 844 located on the one longitudinal end side (the left side in FIG. As shown, even when the seesaw member 840 forming the second state receives the game ball on its receiving surface 844, the weight of the game ball supported by the receiving surface 844 allows the one end in the longitudinal direction to descend. That is, the seesaw member 840 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 52(b) about the rotating shaft 841 (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the side of the other end decorative portion 843) is raised), as shown in FIG. 52(b). A second state can be formed (made easier to form). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, since the guide passages for guiding the game balls are formed in the internal spaces of the front base 810, the intermediate base 820 and the rear base 830, a plurality of game balls can be delivered from the winning opening 65a. Even in the case of continuous inflow, it is possible to store a plurality of game balls using the guide passage and to guide the plurality of game balls to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in order. can.

However, even when a plurality of game balls are stored using the guide passage and the game balls are guided to the guide surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in order, the game balls are In the configuration where the game balls are guided by dropping from above, the plurality of game balls tend to pile up on the receiving surface 844, and the game balls are hindered from rolling from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845. Therefore, the seesaw member 840 cannot alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824 ) is formed, and the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the substantially horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIGS. 53(a) and 5(b)). can be done. As a result, the game balls can be guided one by one from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the receiving surface 844 can sequentially receive the game balls from the horizontal passage one by one). It is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from being vertically stacked on the receiving surface 844.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member 840 .

In this case, as described above, the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 guides the game ball along the substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52(a)) between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823. A horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is connected to the downstream side thereof, and the extension length of the horizontal passage is shorter than twice the diameter of the game ball. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

That is, by setting the extension length of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball (in this embodiment, the extension tip of the guide bottom surface 824a to the rear surface The horizontal distance L from the base 830 to the rear wall 831, which will be described later, is approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball), and only one game ball is present in the horizontal passage, and Since the direction in which the horizontal passage extends and the direction in which the upstream passage extends are different, when the ball flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction. It is possible to increase the time required for the flow into the horizontal passage by the change of direction.

Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball after the upstream passage (next game ball) is changed direction. While taking time, the game ball is flowed into the horizontal passage, and the subsequent game ball is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. - 特許庁That is, the later game ball is spaced apart from the previous game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 52(b) and 53(b), in the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is positioned above the downward inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). Therefore, a step in the height direction (vertical direction in FIG. 53(b)) can be formed between the receiving surface 844 and the guide bottom surface 824a. As a result, in the second state, when guiding the game ball to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 by rolling the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal path, the game ball is caused to ride on the receiving surface 844 (collide with the step). 53(b)), and this riding action (collision) can be used to facilitate lowering of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (moving downward in FIG. 53(b)). That is, the one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 can be easily lowered, and the first state can be easily formed. It is possible to facilitate switching between the state and the second state alternately.

On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 forms the first state (see FIGS. 52(a) and 53(a)), the seesaw member 840 is in an unloaded state and the guide bottom surface of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) The game ball guided from 824a and received by the receiving surface 844 is rapidly rolled toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the weight of the game ball acts on the other end of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction. It is required to descend (form the second state).

In this case, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIGS. Since the ball is also positioned downward, it is not necessary for the game ball to ride on the receiving surface 844 (collide with the step) as in the case of the second state described above, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, it is possible to quickly roll the game ball from the receiving surface 844 toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, thereby facilitating formation of the second state.

In the first state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is formed so as to be at the same height position (flat position) as the downward inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). preferably. When the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is positioned below the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal path, the game ball is dropped from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844, so that the game ball bounces, This is because a time lag and an increased load on the rotating shaft 841 of the seesaw member 840 due to the impact of the drop can be eliminated if the height is the same.

Next, the claw portion 847 of the seesaw member 840 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device 65 taken along line LIV-LIV in FIG. 52(b).

As shown in FIG. 54, the seesaw member 840 has a claw portion 847 erected from a discharge surface 846 thereof. The pawl portion 847 has a guide surface 847a which is formed to be inclined so as to approach the discharge port 821d as it goes from the inclined surface 825 side toward the other end decorative portion 843 side. As a result, when the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (left and right direction in FIG. 54) toward the other end decorative portion 843 (right side in FIG. 54), the game ball can be brought into contact with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847 to switch the rolling direction to the direction toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 (upward in FIG. 54). The time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened, and as a result, alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed. It can be done smoothly.

In this case, as described above, the claw portion 847 is located on the discharge surface 846 on the other longitudinal end side of the seesaw member 840 (the other end decorative portion 843 side, right side in FIG. 54) and in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 ( 54), it is biased toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the bottom side in FIG. 54). As a result, when the position of the game ball rolling on the output surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the second state is The formed time) can be easily made constant, and as a result, alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

That is, in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 (vertical direction in FIG. 54), the game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. A game ball that has a long distance to 821d and rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the intermediate base 820 (the side close to the discharge port 821d, the upper side in FIG. 54) has a short distance to the discharge port 821d.

Therefore, by arranging the claw portion 847 in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 so as to be closer to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. The former game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side (lower side in FIG. 54) collides with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847 at an early stage and is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d, while the intermediate base For the latter game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to 820 (upper side in FIG. 54), it is possible to delay or prevent the collision of the pawl portion 847 with the guide surface 847a. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the total time during which the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 can be brought close to the same. As a result, even if the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the weight of the game ball acts on the discharge surface 846 can be easily made constant.

Next, the outlet 821d of the intermediate base 820 will be described with reference to FIG. 55A and 55B are schematic rear views of the winning device 65, in which FIG. 55A shows the first state shown in FIG. 52A, and FIG. 55B shows the second state shown in FIG. 52B. , respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), the width dimension of the outlet 821d (horizontal dimension in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)) is more than twice the diameter of the game ball. It is set to a large size (approximately 2.5 times in this embodiment). As a result, in a state in which the previous game ball exists on the other longitudinal direction end side of the seesaw member 840 (the left side in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)), the next game ball further moves to the other longitudinal direction end side. Even when rolling toward, each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821d.

For example, the later game ball collides with the previous game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846, and the latter game ball bounces back in the opposite direction to the rolling direction (that is, the interval between the two game balls (Fig. 55 (a) and FIG. 55(b) are expanded in the width direction of the discharge port 821d), and even when these game balls are discharged to the discharge port 821d, the width dimension of the discharge port 821 is sufficient. Each of them can flow in smoothly by being secured in

Also, the height dimension of the discharge port 821d (vertical dimension in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)) is greater on the side of the inclined surface 845 than on the side of the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840. is set to the larger dimension. As a result, in a state in which the previous game ball exists on the other longitudinal direction end side of the seesaw member 840 (the left side in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)), the next game ball is further positioned on the other longitudinal direction end side. Even if it rolls toward , each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821d.

That is, the later game ball collided with the previous game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846, and the subsequent game ball was bounced upward, or bounced back in the opposite direction to the rolling direction and inclined surface Even if the game ball is bounced upward at 845, the height dimension of the discharge port 821d on the side of the inclined surface 845 can be used to allow the later game ball to flow into the discharge port 821 smoothly. On the other hand, even if the previous game ball collides with the next game ball, it is difficult to be bounced up. can be suppressed, and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

Next, the game area will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60. FIG. 56 and 57 are partially enlarged views of the game board 13, in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged. Note that FIG. 57 shows a state in which the center frame 86 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60, a nail, a pinwheel, an inner rail 61, an outer rail 62, various prize openings (see FIG. 2), a center frame 86, and the like. As described above, the front surface of the game board 13 and the area defined by the inner rail 12 is the game area (area where nails, winning holes, etc. are arranged and shot balls flow down). be.

An opening is formed in the center of the game board 13 so that a third symbol display device 81, which is a display device, can be visually recognized. In this case, conventionally, the opening of the game board 13 is made larger than the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81, and a production device arranged displaceably on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) by that amount. is secured in a visible area. However, there is a limit to enlarging the opening of the game board 13 because it is necessary to secure an area for the balls to flow down.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center frame 86 to be installed in the opening of the game board 13 (the opening 60a of the base plate 60) is made of a light-transmissive material, and a part of the center frame 86 (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as "area forming part R") forms part of the game area. As a result, the rendering device (the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 in this embodiment) can be visually recognized through the area forming portion R of the center frame 86 (see through). Therefore, the area in which the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 can be visually recognized can be enlarged while securing the area for the ball to flow down. However, in FIG. 56, in order to simplify the drawing, illustration of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 seen through the area forming portion R is omitted.

In this case, in this embodiment, the opening of the game board 13 (the opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed so that its inner edge reaches the outer edge of the game area (that is, the inner rail 61). Via the area forming part R of 86, the area in which the production device (counterclockwise rotation unit 700) can be visually recognized can be secured to the maximum.

On the other hand, the area forming portion R of the center frame 86 has a width dimension that allows only one game ball to pass through, so that the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, the area forming portion R Without the part R), it is possible to secure a maximum area in which the production device (counterclockwise rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized.

A detailed configuration of the area forming portion R in the center frame 86 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. FIG. 58 is a front perspective view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 59 is a front view of the area forming portion R. As shown in FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the region forming portion R taken along line LX-LX in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 60, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 is illustrated typically.

As shown in FIG. 58 , the center frame 86 includes a frame plate base portion 910 formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front, and an inner portion erected from the rear surface of the frame plate base portion 910 and fitted in an opening 60 a of the base plate 60 . It mainly comprises a fitting wall portion 920 and an inner edge defining wall portion 930 erected from the front surface of the frame base portion 910 opposite to the inner fitting wall portion 920 and defining the inner edge of the game area.

The frame plate base portion 910 is a portion superimposed on the front surface of the base plate 60, and the front side thereof is a region where game balls flow down. A plurality of insertion holes 911 for inserting tapping screws for fastening and fixing the center frame 86 to the base plate 60 are drilled in the frame plate base portion 910 . In addition, the outer edge of the frame plate base portion 910 is inclined downward so as to be smoothly connected to the front surface of the base plate 60 . This inclination allows smooth rolling of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60 , a columnar portion 940 , a side wall portion 950 and a downstream wall portion 960 are erected from the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 in the region forming portion R of the center frame 86 .

The columnar portion 940 is formed as a columnar body having a substantially rhombic cross section, and is arranged at an intermediate position between the inner rail 61 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (see FIG. 56). As a result, in the upstream portion of the region forming portion R, a first path M1 is defined between the columnar body 940 and the inner rail 61, and a second path M1 is defined between the columnar body 940 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. M2 is partitioned.

The side wall portion 950 is formed as a wall portion provided in parallel with the inner rail 61 on the downstream side of the columnar body 940 and partitions the third path M3 between itself and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 . In this case, the portion of the inner edge defining wall portion 930 facing the side wall portion 950 is closer to the inner rail 61 side than the portion facing the columnar body 940 .

As a result, the downstream side of the second path M2 is bent toward the inner rail 61 side (the side wall portion 450 side). On the other hand, since the first path M1 and the third path M3 are paths formed along the inner rail 61, they are connected substantially in a straight line. Further, the first path M1 and the third path M3 are formed as linear paths that allow the ball to flow down in an inclined direction when viewed from the front.

A concave groove 971 is provided in the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 . The recessed groove 971 is a portion for suppressing the flow speed of the game ball, and is formed as a recessed portion having an inverted triangular cross section, and while repeatedly bending left and right in a sawtooth shape when viewed from the front, the first path M1 and the second path M1 are formed. It extends along the route direction of the 3 routes M3.

Protrusions 972 are provided on opposing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930, respectively. The protrusion 972 is a part for suppressing the falling speed of the game ball, is formed in a substantially semicircular cross section, and extends along the erecting direction of the both wall portions 930 and 950 . Each of these protrusions 972 is disposed at a position out of phase with the curved portion of the recessed groove 971 along the direction of the third path M3.

The downstream wall portion 960 is formed as a wall portion connected to the downstream end portion of the side wall portion 950 and faces the downstream side of the third path M3. Specifically, it is formed as a wall portion substantially orthogonal to the flow direction of the third route M3. In this case, the inner edge defining wall portion 930 has a portion corresponding to the downstream wall portion 940 formed along the downstream wall portion 960 , thereby forming a fourth wall portion between the inner edge defining wall portion 930 and the downstream wall portion 940 . A route M4 is demarcated.

The width dimension of the first path M1 (interval between the inner rail 61 and the columnar body 640), the width dimension of the second path M2 (interval between the columnar body 640 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930), and the width of the third path M3 Only game balls with a dimension (opposing distance between the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930) and a width dimension of the fourth path M4 (opposing distance between the downstream wall portion 960 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930) can pass. Each is set to the width dimension. In this embodiment, it is set to be approximately 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball.

Next, the action of the area forming portion R formed in this manner on the falling game ball will be described. A game ball that is guided by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and flows down from the upper area of the game area bounces off a nail or rolls along the inner edge regulating wall portion 930, and then travels along the first path M1 or the first path. It flows into the region forming portion R from one of the two paths M2. A game ball passing through the first path M1 or the second path M2 and flowing down the third path M3 collides with the downstream wall portion 960 and flows down to the lower area of the game area via the fourth path M4.

Here, since the area forming portion R is a part of the center frame 86 and is made of a resin material, nails cannot be implanted therein. Therefore, the falling speed of the game ball cannot be reduced, and there is a possibility that the player may find it difficult to visually recognize the falling game ball.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the downstream wall portion 960 is erected on the downstream side of the third route M3 (at the confluence portion of the third route M3 and the fourth route M4) in the area forming portion R. By colliding with the downstream wall portion 960, the falling speed of the game ball can be reduced, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball.

In this case, the downstream wall portion 960 is erected from the frame plate substrate 910, that is, formed integrally with the center frame 86, so that the downstream wall portion 960 can be easily molded by resin molding using a mold. is formed as a separate part and fixed to the frame plate substrate 910 by fastening. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, the third path M3 is formed in a straight line, and the downstream wall portion 960 made of a resin material bears the portion where the game ball flows down relatively quickly, and the portion where the game ball repeatedly collides with the downstream wall portion 960 is formed. , there is a risk of damage. On the other hand, since the downstream wall portion 960 is connected to the downstream side of the side wall portion 950, the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be increased, and damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed.

In this case, an inclined surface 961 that inclines toward the fourth path M4 is formed at the connecting portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960 . As a result, the connecting portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960 can be triangular in front view as shown in FIG. 59, so that the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be increased accordingly.

Further, when the game ball that has flowed down the third path M3 collides with the inclined surface 961 and then with the downstream wall portion 960, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing in the direction in which the game ball flows backward along the third path M3. , it can be made to flow down toward the outlet of the third route M3 while reducing its flow rate. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth path M4, and the load on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed also from this point.

The side wall portion 950 is also formed integrally with the center frame 86, and can be easily formed by resin molding using a mold. There is no need to perform complicated operations such as fastening and fixing to the frame plate substrate 910, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. Further, the side wall portion 950, which serves to partition the third path M3, can also serve to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing the cost of parts accordingly. can be done.

Here, in the conventional game machine, the manner in which the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail 61 is that it collides with the nail and bounces, and then collides with the nail. Damage to the inner rail 61 was unlikely to occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the effect device (counterclockwise rotation unit 700) is directly visible through the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, without the area forming portion R). , the width of the area forming portion R is set to a narrow dimension (in this embodiment, the width dimension that allows only game balls with 1=1 to pass through the third path M3). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed by the area forming portion R. Therefore, on the upstream side of the area forming portion R, it is necessary to greatly change the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the game area (in this embodiment, it is necessary to form the second path M2). In such a form, some of the game balls (game balls flowing down the second path M2) collide with the inner rail 61 at a relatively high speed, which may cause damage (bending due to collision) of the inner rail 61. .

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 750 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61, the side wall portion 950 receives the game ball that has flowed down the second path M2, thereby preventing the game ball from colliding with the inner rail 61. can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inner rail 61 from being damaged (bending due to collision).

In other words, it is conceivable that the inner rail 61 also functions to partition the third path M3 without forming the side wall portion 750, but in this case, it is necessary to avoid collision of the game ball with the inner rail 61. Therefore, the width of the upstream side of the region forming portion R cannot be reduced, and the opening of the center frame 86 (the inner edge defining wall portion 930) must be arranged in the direction away from the inner rail 61. Therefore, the area in which the directing device (counterclockwise rotation unit 700) is directly visible is reduced accordingly. Therefore, the present embodiment in which the side wall portion 750 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61 results in maximizing the area in which the effect device (left rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized.

As described above, the side wall portion 750 is integrally formed as a part of the center frame 86 made of a light-transmitting material, so that light emitted from the light emitter on the back side of the center frame 86 (side wall portion 950, concave groove 971, etc.) It can function as a light guide that guides the emitted light P to the game area. For example, the light P emitted from the back side and introduced into the side wall portion 950 is guided to the upright end face (upper side in FIG. 60) of the side wall portion 950 and irradiated from the upright end face. Not only can the illuminated light P exert a dramatic effect, but the light P guided to the side surface of the side wall portion 950 (the surface facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930) is irradiated from the side surface of the side wall portion 950. can do. As a result, the light is guided to the front surface of the frame plate base 910 (upper surface in FIG. 60) and the side surface of the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (the surface facing the side wall portion 950), and together with the light P emitted from the upper surface or the side surface, the game The production effect by the light P that shines the area where the ball rolls (the game ball when the game ball rolls) can be exhibited.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the side wall portion 950 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61, the light P emitted from the rear side of the center frame 86 and introduced into the side wall portion 750 is directed toward the inner rail 61 side (the inner edge defining wall). The inner rail 61 can reduce leakage to the outside from the side surface of the portion 930 (opposite side of the portion 930). That is, the inner rail 61 can reflect the light P toward the standing end surface or the side surface (the side surface facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930). Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light that can be irradiated from the standing end surface or side surface of the side wall portion 950, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the guided light P.

The luminous body is arranged in the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 (not shown), and the retracted position of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 is the rear surface of the area forming portion R. FIG. Therefore, in a state in which the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 is arranged at the retracted position, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 can be visually recognized through the region forming portion R, and the light P emitted from the light emitter is guided through the side wall portion 950. It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the image. That is, the shape of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 visually recognized through the area forming portion R can be associated with the light P emitted from the standing end surface of the side wall portion 950, and the player can visually recognize the shape. The production effect by the light P can be heightened.

Here, as described above, projections 972 protrude from the facing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 . Therefore, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be made to collide with the projection 972 and its flow down can be inhibited. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball is slowed down in the region forming portion R where nails cannot be implanted, and the player can easily see the falling game ball.

In this case, the projection 972 projecting from the side wall portion 950 and the projection 972 projecting from the inner edge defining wall portion 930 are arranged out of phase with each other along the direction of the third path M3. That is, they are arranged in a zigzag pattern on the left and right facing surfaces. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball can alternately collide with the left and right projections 972 to cause the game ball to meander left and right. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be easily slowed down, and a displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the flowing direction (path direction of the third path M3) is imparted to the game ball to change the movement of the game ball. can be done.

Further, the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 is provided with the concave groove 971 formed in a sawtooth shape when viewed from the front, as described above. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball can be guided along the inner surface of the recessed groove 971 to meander left and right. Therefore, this also makes it easier to slow down the flow speed of the game ball, and also gives the game ball a displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the flow direction (path direction of the third path M3), thereby changing the movement of the game ball. can give

In addition, when the light emitted from the back side of the area forming portion R is guided toward the front surface of the game area, the recessed groove 971 recessed in the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 is used to diffuse or collect the light. Since it can be used as a lens that emits light, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the guided light.

In this case, the bent portion of the recessed groove 971 has a phase difference along the direction of the third route M3 with respect to the projection 972 projecting from the side wall portion 950 and the projection 972 projecting from the inner edge defining wall portion 930. are staggered. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball that is guided by the inner surface of the recessed groove 971 and meanders left and right can be made to collide alternately with the left and right projections 972 easily. A synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of 971 and the action of projection 972 . As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be easily made slower, and the change in movement of the game ball can be made greater.

In addition, since these protrusions 972 and grooves 971 slow down the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the third route M3, damage to the downstream wall portion 960 is suppressed and the game from the third route M3 to the fourth route M4 is suppressed. It contributes to the smooth guidance of the ball.

In addition, the terminal end side of the recessed groove 971 (the portion arranged side by side with the inclined surface 961) overlaps the downstream wall portion 960 in its extending direction and points to the exit of the third path M3. As a result, the game ball guided to the terminal end side of the recessed groove 971 can collide with the downstream wall portion 960 from an oblique direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing in the direction of flowing backward on the third route M3, and to reduce the flow speed of the game ball to flow down toward the exit of the third route M3. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth path M4, and the load on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 2013 of the second embodiment, the formation range of the area forming portion R is expanded to substantially the top of the game area, as compared with the game board 13 of the first embodiment. As a result, through the opening of the center frame 2086 (that is, not through the area forming part R), the production device (in this embodiment, the central rotation unit 400, the central rotation unit 500, and the left rotation unit 700) can be directly connected. The visible area can be further expanded than in the case of the first embodiment.

In the region forming member R, formation of the columnar body 940 (see FIG. 59) is omitted, and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 extends along the outer rail 62 . As a result, a fifth path M5 and a sixth path M6 are defined between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 in a region above the return ball prevention member 68 .

In addition, the facing interval between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 is set to a dimension larger than twice the diameter of the game ball and smaller than three times. In this embodiment, it is set to be approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. As a result, passages (fifth path M5 and sixth path M6) in which game balls can pass each other without colliding are formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930, and the center frame 2086 is formed. It is possible to maximize the above-described area where the production device can be directly visually recognized through the opening.

In addition, the windmill WM has its rotating shaft disposed substantially in the center between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 facing each other. Thereby, the game ball can pass between the outer rail 62 and the rotating shaft of the windmill WM and between the rotating shaft of the windmill WM and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930, respectively.

According to the area forming part R formed in this way, the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit and guided to the upper area of the game area by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 is guided along the outer rail 62. Thus, after passing the windmill WM, the vehicle moves along the fifth route M5. In this case, by setting the firing intensity to a value greater than the reference value, the game ball can flow down to the right side area beyond the upper top of the game area, while the firing intensity is set to a value smaller than the reference value. By doing so, the game ball can flow down along the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 (moving the sixth path M6) without passing over the upper top portion of the game area. The game ball that has moved on the sixth route M6 flows down to the third route M3 after passing through the windmill WM.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67. FIG. In the right rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, the case where two members, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642), can be displaced with the displacement of the transmission member 654 will be described. However, the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment displaces the three members of the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642), and the third displacement member 3660 as the transmission member 654 is displaced. is displaceable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 3600. FIG. 62 and 63 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 3600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, a right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment has a third displacement member 3660 slidably disposed in front of one end side (upper side in FIG. 62) of a first displacement member 3630. Prepare. As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3641d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is connected to the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 3630. , and by rotating the driven member 3641 relative to the first displacement member 3630, the third displacement member 3660 can be displaced (slid) relative to the first displacement member 3630. .

The through groove 3636 is a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc around the support shaft 632, and the width of the groove is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. be done. Therefore, the rotation of the driven member 3641 about the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630 is allowed by displacing the connecting pin 3641 d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636 .

The connecting pin 3641 d is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section and is inserted into the through groove 3636 , and its protrusion height is set to a dimension that allows it to protrude from the front surface of the first displacement member 3630 . That is, in the assembled state, the distal end side of the connecting pin 3641d can be inserted into a slide groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 described later via the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630. FIG.

A sliding groove 3661 is recessed in the rear surface of the third displacement member 3660, and a slide rail 3662 is arranged above the sliding groove 3661. As shown in FIG. As described above, the sliding groove 3661 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is slidably inserted. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641 .

The slide rail 3662 is an extendable linear guide mechanism interposed between the first displacement member 3630 and the third displacement member 3660. It consists of a front side rail connected to the front side of the rail so that relative displacement in the longitudinal direction is possible. The third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 by the extension and contraction of the slide rail 3662 due to the relative displacement of the rear side rail and the front side rail in the longitudinal direction.

When the third displacement member 3660 is arranged on the front side of the first displacement member 3630, only a part of the sliding groove 3661 overlaps with the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630 (the sliding groove 3661 and through groove 3636). Therefore, by rotating the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630 and displacing the connecting pin 3641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the connecting pin 3641d is moved to the third displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 of the 3660 (the connecting pin 3641 d presses the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 ), the third displacement member 3660 can be slid with respect to the first displacement member 3630 .

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 3600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. FIG. 64 and 65 are front views of the right rotation unit 3600 in each state during operation between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. Fig. 10 is a schematic back view of the right rotation unit 3600 in each state when rotating.

64(a) to 64(c) correspond to FIGS. 66(a) to 66(c), and FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c) correspond to FIGS. 67(a) to 67(c). c) and the same state respectively. In this case, FIG. 64(c) is the same as FIG. 65(a), and FIG. 66(c) is the same as FIG. 67(a).

Here, in the third embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 3630, so that the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement of the first displacement member 3630 and the second displacement member 3640 is the same as in the case of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a), at the retracted position, the slide rail 3662 of the third displacement member 3660 is shortened, and the connecting pin of the driven member 3641 of the second displacement member 3640 is 3641d is located on one end side of the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 (end far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, right side in FIG. 66(a)). In this case, the length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 is the dimension h1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 66(a)), the states shown in FIGS. As shown in 66(c), the first displacement member 3630 is rotated in the projecting direction with the rotating shaft 631 as the rotating shaft. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 and is displaced together with the first displacement member 3630 .

Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 does not displace relative to the third displacement member 3660 either. Therefore, since the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 does not slide in the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660, the third displacement member 3660 is integrated with the first displacement member 3630. displaced. 64(a) to 64(c) and 66(a) to 66(c), the length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 is remains at dimension h1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67(a)) from the state shown in FIGS. While the state (position) shown in FIG. After passing through, it is arranged in the extended position shown in FIGS. 65(c) and 67(c).

In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3641 moves the connecting pin 3641d to the other end side of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (support shaft 632 and the end closer to the shaft support hole 641a (left side in FIG. 67(a)).

Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the far side from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIG. 67(a)) is It is pushed up in the direction of extending the slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63). As a result, the third displacement member 3660 is slid relative to the first displacement member 3630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c) and FIGS. The length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 changes (increases) from dimension h1 to dimension h3 via dimension h2 (h1<h2<h3).

Contrary to the above case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 67(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 65(c) and 67(c), the first displacement While the member 3630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. After going through the states shown in b) and FIG. 67(b), it is placed in the states shown in FIGS. 65(a) and 67(a).

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 about the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 3641d to move toward one end of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the far end from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a). 67(c) to the right) (clockwise in FIG. 67(c)).

Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the side closer to the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the lower side in FIG. 67(c)) is Since the slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63) is pushed down in the direction of shortening, the third displacement member 3660 is slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and the third displacement member 3660 is displaced from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630. The length to the tip is shortened to dimension h1.

64(c) and 66(c), when the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 66(c)), the first displacement member 3630 rotates the rotating shaft 631. 64(a) and 66(a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, so that the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is aligned with the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660. , the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 3630 .

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, and the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640 and A configuration in which the third displacement member 3660 is displaced integrally (see FIGS. 64 and 66), and a configuration in which the first displacement member 3630 is maintained in a stopped state and the second displacement member 3640 and the second displacement member 3640 A form (see FIGS. 65 and 67) in which the third displacement members 3660 are relatively displaced individually can be formed.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 73. FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described. A third displacement member 4660 is rotatable with respect to the first displacement member 4630 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

68 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 69 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600. FIG. 68 and 69 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 4600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment includes a third displacement member 4660 rotatably pivotally supported in front of one end side (the upper side in FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630. . As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3641d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is connected to the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 4630. The third displacement member 4660 can be displaced (rotated) relative to the first displacement member 4630 by rotating the driven member 3641 relative to the first displacement member 4630 .

A slide groove 4661 is recessed in the rear surface of the third displacement member 4660, and a rotary shaft 4662 is projected above the slide groove 4661. As shown in FIG. As described above, the sliding groove 4661 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is slidably inserted. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641 .

The rotating shaft 4662 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted through a shaft support hole 4637 drilled at one end (upper side in FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630. Through the rotating shaft 4662 and the shaft support hole 4637, A third displacement member 4660 is rotatably journalled to the first displacement member 4630 . A retainer C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 4637 is fastened and fixed to the axial end face of the rotation shaft 4662 , thereby restricting the rotation shaft 4662 from slipping out of the shaft support hole 4637 .

When the third displacement member 4660 is arranged (pivotally supported) on the front side of the first displacement member 4630, only a part of the sliding groove 4661 overlaps the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 4630 (sliding). The moving groove 4661 and the through groove 3636 intersect). Therefore, by rotating the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 4630 and displacing the connecting pin 3641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the connecting pin 3641d is moved to the third displacement member. The third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 by acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 of the 4660 (the connecting pin 3641d presses the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661).

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 4600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 73. FIG. 70 and 71 are front views of the right rotation unit 4600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 10A and 10B are schematic rear views of the right rotation unit 4600 in each state when rotating.

FIGS. 70(a) to 70(c) correspond to FIGS. 72(a) to 72(c), and FIGS. 71(a) to 71(c) correspond to FIGS. 73(a) to 73(c). c) and the same state respectively. In this case, FIG. 70(c) is the same as FIG. 71(a), and FIG. 72(c) is the same as FIG. 73(a).

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 4630, thereby causing the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement of the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 3640 is the same as in the case of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 70(a) and 72(a), at the retracted position, an imaginary line L1 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotating shaft 4662) and along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 4630 , and an imaginary line L2 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotating shaft 4662) and extending along the longitudinal direction of the third displacement member 4660 is defined as a crossing angle θ1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 72(a)), the states shown in FIGS. As shown in 72(c), the first displacement member 4630 is rotated in the projecting direction with the rotating shaft 631 as the rotating shaft. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 and is displaced together with the first displacement member 4630 .

Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the third displacement member 4660, and the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 , the third displacement member 4660 is also displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630 . That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 70(a) to 70(c) and FIGS. 72(a) to 72(c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) is maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 73(a)) from the state shown in FIGS. While the state (position) shown in FIG. After passing through, it is arranged in the extended position shown in FIGS. 71(c) and 73(c).

In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3641 is caused by the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (the direction of movement of the connecting pin 3641d). The inner wall surface (upper side in FIG. 73(a)) is the direction in which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 pushes up.

As a result, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 71(a) to 71(c) and FIGS. , the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) changes (decreases) from the crossing angle θ1 to the crossing angle θ3 via the crossing angle θ2 (θ3< θ2<θ1).

Contrary to the case described above, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 73(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 71(c) and 73(c), the first displacement While the member 4630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. After going through the states shown in b) and FIG. 73(b), it is placed in the states shown in FIGS. 71(a) and 73(a).

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 is applied to the inner wall surface of the slide groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (the inner wall surface on the advancing direction side of the connecting pin 3641d, the lower side in FIG. 73(c)). ) is the direction in which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 pushes down. Therefore, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) becomes an intersection. is increased to the angle θ1.

70(c) and 72(c), when the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 72(c)), the first displacement member 4630 moves the rotating shaft 631. 70(a) and 72(a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630, so that the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is aligned with the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630 .

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640 and A configuration in which the third displacement member 4660 is displaced integrally (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and a configuration in which the first displacement member 4630 is maintained in a stopped state and the second displacement member 3640 and the second displacement member 3640 A form (see FIGS. 71 and 73) in which the third displacement members 4660 are relatively displaced individually can be formed.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 81. FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described. A third displacement member 5660 can protrude and disappear in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

74 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 75 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600. FIG. 74 and 75 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 5600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, in the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, a third displacement member 5660 extends forward and backward (for example, FIG. 76 ( a) It is arranged so that it can appear and disappear in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). As will be described later, the distal end of the connecting pin 5641d of the second displacement member 5640 (driven member 5641) is connected to the sliding inclined portion of the third displacement member 5660 through the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 5630. 5663, and when the driven member 5641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 5630, the third displacement member 5660 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630 (in the front-rear direction). haunting) can be made.

A pair of sliding holes 5638 are formed in the first displacement member 5630 . The sliding hole 5638 is a hole having a circular cross-section through which a sliding guide rod 5664 described later of the third displacement member 5660 is inserted. be. That is, the sliding guide rod 5664 is slidably supported along the drilling direction of the sliding hole 5638, thereby supporting the third displacement member 5660 so as to protrude and retract in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630. be done.

The connecting pin 5641 d is a shaft-like body having a circular cross-section that is inserted into the through groove 3636 , and is set to a protrusion height such that the tip thereof is positioned within the through groove 3636 . That is, in the assembled state, the distal end of the connecting pin 5641 d contacts the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 in the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 5630 .

A sliding inclined portion 5663 and a sliding guide rod 5664 are projected from the rear surface of the third displacement member 5660 . As described above, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is a plate-like portion on which the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 slides. It is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined upward toward the other end (left side in FIG. 75). That is, the projecting height of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from the third displacement member 5660 is gradually increased from one end to the other end. Therefore, when the connecting pin 5641d slides on the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from one end to the other end (or in the opposite direction) as the driven member 5641 rotates, the driven member The distance between 5641 and the third displacement member 5660 is enlarged (reduced).

Here, the plate thickness of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is set to be slightly smaller than the groove width of the through groove 3636 , and the rear view shape thereof is formed in a curved shape corresponding to the through groove 3636 . That is, in the assembled state, the protruding distal end side of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636 in a state of being slidable in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the third displacement member 5660 moves back and forth with respect to the first displacement member 5630, not only the sliding guide rod 5664 but also the sliding inclined portion 5663 causes the third displacement member 5660 to slide. Since the movement can be supported (that is, supported at three locations), the forward tilting of the third displacement member 5660 can be suppressed, and the retracting operation can be stabilized.

As described above, the sliding guide rod 5664 is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section slidably supported in the sliding hole 5638 of the first displacement member 5630. A retainer C having a larger diameter than the inner diameter of is fastened and fixed, thereby restricting the slide guide rod 5664 from coming out of the slide hole 5638 .

In this case, a biasing member S formed as a coil spring is interposed between the holding body C and the first displacement member 5630 in an elastically compressed state (a state in which the entire length is shortened). The elastic recovery force of the force member S acts in the direction of separating the holding body C from the back surface of the first displacement member 5630 . As a result, the third displacement member 5660 is biased toward the first displacement member 5630 , and the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted through the through groove 3636 .

Therefore, by rotating the driven member 5641 around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 5630 and displacing the connecting pin 5641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the tip of the connecting pin 5641d is moved to the second position. The third displacement member 5660 is moved back and forth with respect to the first displacement member 5630 by acting on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (the connecting pin 5641d is slid along the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663). You can spawn in any direction.

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. FIG. 76 and 77 are front views of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 56 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state when rotating. FIG. 80 and 81 are top views of right rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c) correspond to FIGS. 78(a) to 78(c), FIGS. 80(a) to 80(c), and FIGS. 77(a) to 77(c). ) are the same states as FIGS. 79(a) to 79(c) and FIGS. 81(a) to 81(c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 76(c) is the same as FIG. 77(a), FIG. 78(c) is the same as FIG. 79(a), and FIG. 80(c) is the same as FIG. 81(a). be.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 5630, thereby causing the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement of the first displacement member 5630 and the second displacement member 5640 is the same as in the case of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 76(a), 78(a), and 80(a), at the retracted position, the third displacement member 5660 is brought close to the first displacement member 5630, and the second displacement member 5640 78 (a ) and the right side of FIG. 80(a)). In this case, the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is the dimension J1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 78(a)), the states shown in FIGS. As shown in 76(c), FIG. 78(c) and FIG. 80(c), the first displacement member 5630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotating shaft 631 as the rotating shaft. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 5630 and is displaced together with the first displacement member 5630 .

Therefore, the second displacement member 5640 does not displace relative to the third displacement member 5660 either. Therefore, since the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 in the second displacement member 5640 does not slide on the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660, the third displacement member 5660 is also integrated with the first displacement member 5630. is displaced. 76(a) to 76(c), 78(a) to 78(c), and 80(a) to 80(c), the third displacement member 5660 It is maintained in the state closest to the 1-displacement member 5630 (state in which the amount of protrusion is the dimension J1).

77(a), 79(a), and 81(a), when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67(a)), the first displacement member 5630 is While maintaining the state (position) shown in FIG. After going through the states shown in b) and FIG. 81(b), it is placed in the extended position shown in FIGS. 77(c), 79(c) and 81(c).

In this case, when the driven member 5641 is rotated around the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 5641 causes the tip of the connecting pin 5641d to move to the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660. The direction of sliding toward the end side (the end of the side where the projection height from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660 is high, the upper left side in FIG. 79(a), the left side in FIG. 81(a)) ( ) counterclockwise) rotation.

Therefore, the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 is pushed forward (to the upper side in FIG. 81(a)) by the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 . As a result, the third displacement member 5660 protrudes forward with respect to the first displacement member 5630, and as shown in FIGS. 77(a) to 77(c), FIGS. ) to FIG. 81(c), the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 changes (increases) from the dimension J1 to the dimension J3 via the dimension J2 (J1 <J2<J3).

Contrary to the above case, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 79(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 77(c), 79(c) and 81(c). Then, while the first displacement member 5630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. After being displaced and passing through the states shown in FIGS. be.

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 5641 around the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 5641d to move toward one end of the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (projection from the rear surface of the third displacement member 5660). The rotation is in the direction (clockwise in FIG. 79(c)) of sliding to the lower end in FIG. 79(c), the right side in FIG. 81(c).

Therefore, by moving the connecting pin 5641d to one end side of the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 in the third displacement member 5660, the sliding inclined portion 5663 retreats (retracts) rearward (back side) accordingly. is allowed, the elastic recovery force of the biasing member S causes the third displacement member 5660 to approach the first displacement member 5630, and the distance from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is The amount of protrusion is shortened to dimension J1.

From the states shown in FIGS. 76(c), 78(c) and 80(c), when the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 78(c)), the first displacement member 5630 is rotated in the erecting direction about the rotating shaft 631, and placed in the retracted position shown in FIGS. 76(a), 78(a) and 80(a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 5630, so that the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 is positioned at the sliding inclined portion of the third displacement member 5660. Since the back surface of 5663 is not slid, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 5630 .

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, and the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640 and A mode in which the third displacement member 5660 is displaced integrally (see FIGS. 76, 78, and 81), and a second displacement with respect to the first displacement member 5630 while maintaining the first displacement member 5630 in a stopped state. A form (see FIGS. 77, 79 and 81) in which the member 5640 and the third displaceable member 5660 are separately displaced relative to each other can be formed. In particular, according to the fifth embodiment, since the displacement direction of the third displacement member 5660 is the front-rear direction, it is possible to avoid interference with the displacement of other adjacent units, and the movable range of such other units can be reduced. can be secured. In addition, the forward projection of the third displacement member 5660 allows the third displacement member 5660 to be brought closer to the player, and a powerful performance can be performed.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 88. FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the clockwise rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the period during which the second displacement member 3640 is displaced and the period during which the third displacement member 3660 is displaced has been described. In the right rotation unit 6600, the period during which the second displacement member 6640 is displaced differs from the period during which the third displacement member 4660 is displaced. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

82 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 6600. FIG. 82 and 83 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 6600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, a right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment has a third displacement member in front of one end side (upper side in FIG. 82) of a first displacement member 4630, as in the case of the fourth embodiment. 4660 is rotatably pivoted, and the driven member 6641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, so that the second displacement member 6640 (connection displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are moved to the first displacement position. Relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to member 4630 .

In this case, in the fourth embodiment, the connecting groove 641c of the driven member 3641 is formed linearly, whereas in the sixth embodiment, the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is formed in an action section 6641c1 as will be described later. and the non-interfering section 6641c2 are bent in a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front.

As a result, both the second displacement member 6640 (the connection displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while the connection pin 643 passes through the action section 6641c1. Only the third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while the second displacement member 6640 is stopped while the 643 passes through the non-interference section 6641c2.

The connecting groove 6641c is a groove-shaped opening through which the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is slidably inserted. Extending along the width direction of the driven member 6641 while curving in an arc shape concave on the shaft support hole 641a (supporting shaft 632) side (that is, a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape concentric with the rotating shaft 631) ) and a non-interference section 6641c2.

As will be described later, the action section 6641c1 is a section that acts on the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642, and the non-interfering section 6641c2 is a section that does not interfere with the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642.

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. FIG. 84 and 85 are front views of the right rotation unit 6600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 66 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 6600 in each state when rotating. FIG.

FIGS. 84(a) to 84(c) correspond to FIGS. 86(a) to 86(c), and FIGS. 85(a) to 85(c) correspond to FIGS. 87(a) to 87(c). c) and the same state respectively. In this case, FIG. 84(c) is the same as FIG. 85(a), and FIG. 86(c) is the same as FIG. 87(a).

Here, the right rotation unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment differs from the right rotation unit 4600 of the fourth embodiment in the shape of the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641, and other configurations are substantially Since they are formed identically, the explanation of the identical parts will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 86, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 86(a)) from the retracted position shown in FIGS. As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the action section 635a of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 6640 (the driven member 6641) is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630. , the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630 .

That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 84(a) to 84(c) and FIGS. 86(a) to 86(c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) are maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

85(a) and 87(a), the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is positioned at the starting end of the working section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 (the working section 6641c and non-interfering section 6641c2). It is located at the end opposite to the connection part, Fig. 87(a) right side). In this case, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is positioned at the connecting portion between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b of the first groove 635. As shown in FIG.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87(a)) from the state shown in FIGS. While being maintained in the state (position) shown, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed downward (downward in FIG. It is rotated around the center in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 87(b)) to raise the connecting groove 6641c.

Due to this rotation of the driven member 6641, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is pushed upward by the inner wall surface of the working section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 while sliding on the working section 6641c1. As a result, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 in a direction (clockwise in FIG. 87(a)) to lift the decorative portion 642b. As a result, the connecting pin 643 reaches the connecting portion of the working section 6641c1 and the non-interfering section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c, and the state shown in FIGS. state) is formed.

In this case, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is arranged on the same side (the left side in FIG. 87(b)) as the decorative portion 642b (that is, the center of gravity of the connecting displacement member 642) with respect to the shaft support hole 642a, The connection groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is formed so that the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 can support the connection pin 643 from below. That is, the non-interfering section 6641c2 is formed such that its inner wall surface intersects at a predetermined angle with the movement direction of the connecting pin 643 when the connecting displacement member 642 rotates around the shaft support hole 642a by its own weight. be done.

Therefore, in the state shown in FIGS. 85(b) and 87(b), the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 supports the connecting pin 643 from below (restricts movement of the connecting pin 643), thereby displacing the connecting displacement member. 642 can be restricted from rotating around the shaft support hole 642a by its own weight. That is, the connecting displacement member 642 can be maintained in a stopped state with respect to the first displacement member 4630 .

85(b) and 87(b), the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660 is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641, as described above. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) changes to the intersection angle θ2 ( decremented) (θ2<θ1).

85(b) and 87(b), when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87(b)), the inside of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 The wall surface is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641, and as shown in FIGS. L2) is changed (decreased) to the intersection angle θ3 (θ3<θ2<θ1).

In this case, the non-interfering section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c is curved in an arc around the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a). 87(b) about the center, the inner wall surface of the non-interfering section 6641c2 supports the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 from below, and the connecting displacement member 642 engages the shaft support hole 642a. Rotation by its own weight as the center is restricted, but the connecting pin 643 is not pushed upward, so that the connecting displacement member 642 is not rotated about the support shaft 633 in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b. That is, the connecting displacement member 642 can be maintained in a substantially stopped state, and the rotation of the third displacement member 4660 can be continued.

Contrary to the above case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 87(c)) from the state shown in FIGS. While the connecting pin 643 of 642 passes through the non-interference section 6641c2, the connecting displacement member 642 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIGS. and FIG. 87(b)), while the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 passes through the working section 6641c1, the connecting pin 643 is pushed down by the inner wall surface of the working section 6641c1, thereby lowering the decorative portion 642b. The connecting displacement member 642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 in the direction.

The operation mode of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment thus formed will be described in comparison with the operation mode of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment with reference to FIG.

FIGS. 88(a) to 88(c) are schematic front views of a right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIGS. 88(d) to 88(g) are right rotation units in the sixth embodiment. 6600 is a schematic front view of 6600, illustrating states when operating between retracted and extended positions, respectively; FIG.

In the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630 and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced. A configuration in which the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced together (a configuration between FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b)), and a configuration in which the first displacement member 4630 is maintained in a stopped state, A configuration in which the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 (a configuration between FIGS. 88(b) and 88(c)) can be formed. can. In this case, in the latter form, the period of displacement of the second displacement member 3640 (start and end) substantially coincides with the period of displacement of the third displacement member 4660 (start and end).

On the other hand, in the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are integrally displaced (FIGS. 88(d) and 88(e) ) and a mode in which the first displacement member 4630 is maintained in a stopped state and the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 (FIG. 88 88(f)) and the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640 in a stopped state. 88(f) and 88(g)) in which the third displacement member 4660 is relatively displaced.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, the period of displacement of the second displacement member 6640 (start and end) can be different from the period of displacement of the third displacement member 4660 (start and end). More specifically, the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 is started at the same time, and the timing of stopping the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 is staggered (the second displacement member 6640 can be stopped first, and then the displacement of the third displacement member 4660 can be stopped).

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94. FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the connecting displacement member 642 and the third displacement member 3660 are displaceably disposed on the first displacement member 3630 to form the right rotation unit 3600 has been described. In the right rotation unit 7600, the third displacement member 7660 is displaceably arranged on the first displacement member 7630, and the connecting displacement member 642 is arranged on the third displacement member 7660 so as to be displaceable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

89 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 90 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 7600. FIG. 89 and 90 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 7600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, in a right rotation unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment, a third displacement member 7660 is rotatably supported in front of one end of a first displacement member 7630 (upper side in FIG. 89). , the third displacement member 7660 of which the coupling displacement member 642 is rotatably supported. As will be described later, when the driven member 7641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is rotated with respect to the first displacement member 7630, the rotation of the third displacement member 7660 Along with this, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated while changing the position of its center of rotation along a curved trajectory.

The first displacement member 7630 has a cutout portion 7639 formed at the edge of one end side (upper side in FIG. 90), and the space created by the cutout portion 7639 serves as a support shaft 7665 for the third displacement member 7660, which will be described later. It is considered to be the installation space for A connecting groove 7641 c is formed in the driven member 7641 of the second displacement member 7640 . The connecting groove 7641c is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 7641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is slidably inserted.

The groove width of the connecting groove 7641 c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 643 . Also, the total length (groove length) of the connecting groove 7641c is made longer than the connecting groove 641c in the fourth embodiment. Thereby, the relative displacement amount (relative rotation angle) of the connecting displacement member 642 with respect to the driven member 7641 can be ensured.

A support shaft 7665 protrudes from the rear surface of the third displacement member 7660 . The support shaft 7665 is a shaft-like member having a circular cross section that is inserted through the shaft support hole 642a of the connection displacement member 642. rotatably pivoted on the back of the

A retainer C having a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the support shaft 7665, thereby restricting the indicator shaft 7665 from coming out of the support hole 642a. The support shaft 7665 has a large diameter portion on the base side and a small diameter portion smaller than the large diameter portion on the tip side, and the small diameter portion is inserted through the shaft support hole 642a. That is, the large-diameter portion is a portion for raising the connecting displacement member 642 from the back surface of the third displacement member 7660. By raising the large-diameter portion, the connecting displacement member 642 moves forward and backward relative to the driven member 7641 (for example, , and the vertical direction of the paper surface of FIG. 91A) are set to be the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment.

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 7600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 and 92 are front views of the right rotation unit 7600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 76A and 76B are schematic rear views of the right rotation unit 7600 in each state when rotating.

FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c) correspond to FIGS. 93(a) to 93(c), and FIGS. 92(a) to 92(c) correspond to FIGS. 94(a) to 94(c). c) and the same state respectively. In this case, FIG. 91(c) is the same as FIG. 92(a), and FIG. 93(c) is the same as FIG. 94(a).

Here, in the seventh embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 7630, thereby causing the first displacement member 7630, the second displacement member 7640 and the third displacement member 7660 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement of the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 93, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 93(a)) from the retracted position shown in FIGS. As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the action section 635a of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 7640 (the driven member 7641) is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 7630. , the second displacement member 7640 and the third displacement member 7660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 7630 .

That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c) and FIGS. 93(a) to 93(c), the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (imaginary line L2) are maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

92(a) and 94(a), when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 94(a)), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is pushed into the first groove 635. By passing through the non-interference section 635b, the first displacement member 7630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 94(a) in the direction of lifting the connecting groove 7641c and the connecting pin 3641d.

As a result, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 7660 is moved by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 7641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is moved by the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 7641c of the driven member 7641. , are pushed upward (upper side in FIG. 94(a)).

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 94, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630, the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (virtual line L1). line L2) changes (decreases) from the intersection angle θ1 to the intersection angle θ3 via the intersection angle θ2 (θ3<θ2<θ1), and the connecting displacement member 642 moves toward the support shaft 7665 (shaft support hole 642a ) as the center of rotation in the clockwise direction in FIG.

In this case, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated about the rotation shaft 4662 in the direction of lifting the support shaft 7665 upward. The connecting displacement member 642 itself pivotally supported by the support shaft 7665 can be lifted upward.

That is, according to the seventh embodiment, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated with respect to the third displacement member 7660 around the support shaft 7665, and is rotated with respect to the first displacement member 7630 in an arc-shaped trajectory. It can be displaced (lifted) upwards. As a result, the displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be interlocked with the displacement of the third displacement member 7660, making it possible to create a more complicated mode, and the amount of upward protrusion of the decorative portion 642b (the first Crossing angle θ4), which is an angle formed by an imaginary line L3 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 7665) and along the longitudinal direction of the connecting displacement member 64 with respect to the displacement member 4630 (imaginary line L1). can be expanded to assume a posture that protrudes further upward.

Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 105. FIG. In the first embodiment, the mode of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the same in the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. Although the case where the left rotation unit 700 is formed so as to different in In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

95 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 96 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 8700. FIG. 97 is a front view of the guide portion 8773. FIG. 95 and 96 show a state in which part of the left rotation unit 8700 (back base 710 and front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, a counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 according to the eighth embodiment has a guide portion 8773 recessed in front of one longitudinal end side (upper side in FIG. 95) of a second connecting member 8770 . As will be described later, the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circular path, and the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is guided along the guide portion 8773, thereby making the second displacement member 740 relative to the first displacement member 730. The form of displacement can be different in the outward and return paths.

The connecting pin 8744a is a shaft-like body with a circular cross section that protrudes from the back surface of the flange member 8744 and is arranged eccentrically from the axis of the rotating shaft 741. Its diameter is slightly larger than the groove width of the guide portion 8773. By setting the small size, it is possible to move along the guide portion 8773 . An elastic body (not shown) made of a coil spring is accommodated in the second connecting member 8770 in an elastically compressed state, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic body causes the connecting pin 8744a to move the second connecting member 8770. It is acted in the direction to protrude from the back of the Therefore, when the connecting pin 8744 a moves along the guide portion 8773 , the tip of the connecting pin 8744 a is maintained in contact with the bottom surface of the guide portion 8773 .

The guide portion 8773 is a recessed groove having a substantially U-shaped cross section for guiding the connecting pin 8744a. is formed with directionality (see FIG. 97).

More specifically, the guide portion 8773 extends substantially linearly in a front view along the width direction of the second connecting member 8770 (a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction, the left-right direction in FIG. 97) starting from the position P1. 1 groove 8773a and a first groove 8773a connected to the terminal end of the first groove 8773a and extending substantially linearly along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 8770 (vertical direction in FIG. 97) starting from position P2. A second groove 8773b is connected to the terminal end of the second groove 8773b, and is curved and extended in an arc shape (in this embodiment, a convex arc shape in the direction away from the position P2) with the position P3 as the starting end. and a third groove 8773c whose terminal end is connected to the starting end of the first groove 8773a.

A first step 8773h is formed at the connecting portion between the first groove 8773a and the second groove 8773b. The first step 8773h has a bottom surface on the starting end side (position P2) of the second groove 8773b that is lower than the bottom surface on the terminal end side of the first groove 8773a (located on the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 97). It is the vertical plane that connects them. As a result, movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the end of the first groove 8773a to the starting end of the second groove 8773b is permitted, while movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the starting end of the second groove 8773b to the end of the first groove 8773a is prohibited. It can be regulated by one step 8773h.

Similarly, a second step 8773i and a third step 8773j are formed at the connecting portion between the second groove 8773b and the third groove 8773c and the connecting portion between the third groove 8773c and the first groove 8773a. The bottom surface of the second step 8773i on the starting end side (position P3) of the third groove 8773c is lower than the bottom surface on the terminal end side of the second groove 8773b. The bottom surface of (position P1) is formed by making it lower than the bottom surface of the third groove 8773c on the terminal side.

This allows the connecting pin 8744a to move from the terminal end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) to the starting end of the third groove 8773c (first groove 8773a), while allowing the third groove 8773c (first groove 8773a) to move. The movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the starting end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) to the terminal end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) can be restricted by the second step 8773i (third step 8773j).

In other words, the connecting pin 8744a is only allowed to rotate the guide portion 8773 along the directions of the arrows L1, L2 and L3 in the first groove 8773a, the second groove 8773b and the third groove 8773c in order. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105, the operation of left rotation unit 8700 will be described.

Here, in the eighth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides in the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), so that the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 8770, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement between the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 8770 and the first displacement member 730 is similar to that of the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, its detailed description is omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 when moving forward from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

Figures 98 and 99 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 in each state during forward movement from the retracted position to the extended position. 87A and 87B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 in each state when the forward movement is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 98( a ) and 100 ( a ), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and arranged in front of the front base 720 .

In this case, an imaginary line M1 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotating shaft 741) and along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 and the axial center of the shaft supporting hole 732 (rotating shaft 741) The angle formed by the imaginary line M2 along the longitudinal direction of the second displacement member 740 is defined as the intersection angle α1. In addition, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is positioned at the position P1 of the guide portion 8773 (the starting end of the first groove 8773a) (see FIG. 97), and the second connecting member 8770 ).

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(a)), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the direction of extension (counterclockwise in FIG. 100(a)). 100(a)), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotation shaft 731 in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100(a)). As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the projecting direction as shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 8770 is pulled downward (lower side in FIG. 101(a)), and the guide portion 8773 (first The inner wall surface of the groove 8773a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P1 moves the guide portion 8773 along the first groove 8773a. is guided in the direction of arrow L1 (see FIG. 97).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b), the second displacement member 740 rotates about the rotation shaft 741 relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(a)). rotation), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α1 to the intersection angle α2. (α1<α2).

When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100(b)), so that the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the extending direction (see FIG. 100(b)). ) counterclockwise) and is further tilted in the extension direction as shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 101(a).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 8770 is further drawn downward (lower right in FIG. 101(b)), and the guide portion 8773 ( The inner wall surface of the first groove 8773a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a moves the guide portion 8773 along the first groove 8773a in the direction of the arrow L1. Further guidance is provided (see Figure 97).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 101(a), the second displacement member 740 rotates about the rotation shaft 741 with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(b)). ), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α2 to the intersection angle α3. ) (α1<α2<α3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted to the maximum and the first displacement A state is formed in which the second displacement member 740 is displaced (relatively rotated) to the maximum with respect to the member 730 . That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the extended position.

In this case, the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the first groove 8773a along the guide portion 8773 in the direction of the arrow L1, and after passing (jumping down) the first step 8773h, hits the inner wall surface of the second groove 8773b. , at position P2 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α3 to the intersection angle α4 (α1<α2<α3 <α4).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

Figures 102 and 103 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position to the retracted position, and Figures 104 and 105 are views from the extended position to the retracted position. 87A and 87B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating on the return path. FIG. 98(a) is the same as FIG. 103(b), and FIG. 99(b) is the same as FIG. 102(a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 101(a). The rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 105(a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b). .

102(a) and 104(a), in the extended position, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is positioned at the position P2 of the guide portion 8773 (the starting end of the second groove 8773b) ( 97), the second connecting member 8770 is pulled to the bottom (lower right side in FIG. 104(a)).

102(a) and 104(a), the transmission member 754 moves in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104(a)). ), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. It is rotated in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 104(a)) as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (raised) in the retraction direction, as shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b).

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 8770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 104(a)), and the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P2 is moved to the guide portion. 8773 is guided in the direction of arrow L2 along the second groove 8773b (see FIG. 97). In this case, as described above, the second groove 8773b extends along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 8770, and relative displacement of the second connecting member 8770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 A linear motion (slide displacement) in a direction along the direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b), in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8773b (see FIG. 97), the second displacement member relative to the first displacement member 730 No relative displacement (relative rotation) of 740 about rotation axis 741 is formed. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4.

When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104(b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b), the connection first When the member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104(b)), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104(b)). 103(a) and 105(a), and is further rotated (upright) in the retraction direction.

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 8770 is further pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 104(b)), so that the connecting pin 8744a moves the guide portion 8773 to the second position. It is further guided along the groove 8773b in the direction of arrow L2, passes through (jumps down) the second step 8773i, and hits the inner wall surface of the third groove 8773c to be positioned at position P3 (see FIG. 97).

As described above, in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8773b, relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 about the rotation axis 741 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 105(a), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. be done.

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. A state is created in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position.

In this case, the second connecting member 8770 is pushed up to the uppermost position, so that the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the third groove 8773c in the direction of the arrow L3 through the guide portion 8773 and passes through the third step 8773j ( After jumping down), it collides with the inner wall surface of the first groove 8773a to be positioned (returned) to the position P1 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) returns (decreases) from the intersection angle α4 to the intersection angle α1.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first displacement member 730 is displaced (rotated) with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 in the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. ) can be the same, but the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be different.

Specifically, in the outward path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is defined as the displacement of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720. While gradually increasing in proportion to the amount (amount of rotation), on the return path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. It is possible to form a mode in which the crossing angle α4 is reduced to the crossing angle α1 in a short period of time immediately before being arranged at the retracted position.

Further, since the connecting pin 8744a is guided along each of the grooves 8773a to 8773c of the guide portion 8773, even when the transmission member 754 (first displacement member 730) is rotationally driven (displaced) at a relatively high speed, Rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 115. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circular path in which grooves having a U-shaped cross section are endlessly connected has been described. It is formed as an opening that is loosely fitted. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

106 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 107 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 9700. FIG. 106 and 107 show a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 9700 (back base 710 and front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, a counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 according to the ninth embodiment has a guide portion 9773 formed at one longitudinal end of a second connecting member 9770 (upper side in FIG. 106). As will be described later, by displacing the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 in the guide portion 9773, the form of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is different between the outward path and the return path. can do.

The guide portion 9773 is connected to a first inner wall 9773a that extends substantially linearly in a front view along the width direction (a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction) of the second connecting member 9770, and the terminal end of the first inner wall 9773a. and a second inner wall 9773b extending substantially linearly in a front view along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 9770 (vertical direction in FIG. 106); (In this embodiment, the third inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b are curved and extend in a convex shape in a direction away from the connecting portion of the second inner wall 9773b), and the end thereof is connected to the starting end of the first inner wall 9773a. The inner wall 9773c is formed as an opening that serves as the inner wall surface.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 115, the operation of left rotation unit 9700 will be described.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides in the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), so that the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 9770, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement between the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 9770 and the first displacement member 730 is similar to that of the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, its detailed description is omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 when moving forward from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

108 and 109 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating in the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 97A and 7B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in each state when the forward movement is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108( a ) and 110 ( a ), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and arranged in front of the front base 720 .

In this case, an imaginary line M1 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotating shaft 741) and along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 and the axial center of the shaft supporting hole 732 (rotating shaft 741) The angle between the second displacement member 740 and the imaginary line M2 along the longitudinal direction is defined as a crossing angle β1. In addition, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is positioned at the connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9773a) of the first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c of the guide portion 9773, and the second connecting member 9770 is located at the uppermost position (Fig. 110(a) upward).

Further, the center of gravity G, which is the center of mass of the second displacement member 740 (the point of action of the resultant force of gravity acting on the second displacement member 740), is the center of rotation of the rotation shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) when viewed in the axial direction (that is, in the figure). 110(a)), the side opposite to the connecting pin 744a (the left side in FIG. 110(a)) across a vertical line Z that passes through the axis of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) and is parallel to the direction of gravity. ).

Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight about the rotating shaft 741 in a direction to lift the connecting pin 744a upward (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)). As the second displacement member 740 rotates due to its own weight, the connecting pin 744 a contacts (is pressed against) the first inner wall 9773 a of the guide portion 9773 .

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(a)), the first connecting member 760 extends in the direction of extension (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)) about the rotation shaft 761. 110(a)), the first displacement member 730 is rotated about the rotation shaft 731 in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)). As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the projecting direction as shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 9770 is drawn downward (lower side in FIG. 110(a)), and the inner wall surface of the guide portion 9773 of the second connection member 9770 The (first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a moves the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a toward the second inner wall 9773b. be guided in the direction.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b), the second displacement member 740 rotates about the rotation shaft 741 relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(a)). rotation), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β1 to the intersection angle β2. (β1<β2).

When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(b)), so that the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the extending direction (see FIG. 110(b)). ) counterclockwise) and is further tilted in the extension direction as shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 111(a).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 9770 is further drawn downward (lower right in FIG. 110(b)), and the guide portion 9773 of the second connection member 9770 The inner wall surface (first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a moves the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a to the second inner wall 9773b. You will be guided further in the direction of

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 111(a), the second displacement member 740 rotates about the rotation shaft 741 relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(b)). ), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β2 to the intersection angle β3. ) (β1<β2<β3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. A state is formed in which the second displacement member 740 is displaced (relatively rotated) to the maximum with respect to the member 730 . That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the extended position.

In this case, the connecting pin 744a is guided along the first inner wall 9773a in the guide portion 9773 and abuts against the inner wall surface of the second inner wall 9773b, so that the connecting portion (second inner wall) between the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b 9773b). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β3 to the intersection angle β4 (β1<β2<β3 <β4).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

Figures 112 and 113 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in each state during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position, and Figures 114 and 115 are views from the extended position to the retracted position. 97A and 97B are schematic rear views of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating on the return path. 112(a) is the same as FIG. 109(b), and FIG. 113(b) is the same as FIG. 108(a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 111(a). The rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 113(a) and 115(a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b). .

112(a) and 114(a), in the extended position, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is connected to the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773. 114(a), and the second connecting member 9770 is drawn downward (lower right side in FIG. 114(a)).

Further, the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is perpendicular to the vertical line Z when viewed in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) (that is, the state shown in FIG. 114(a)). They are located on the same side (the right side in FIG. 114(a)). Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight about the rotating shaft 741 in the direction of pushing down the connecting pin 744a (clockwise in FIG. 114(a)). As the second displacement member 740 rotates under its own weight, the connecting pin 744 a contacts (is pressed against) the second inner wall 9773 b of the guide portion 9773 .

112(a) and 114(a), the transmission member 754 moves in the opposite direction (Fig. 114 ( a) counterclockwise), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(a)), so that the first displacing member 730 It rotates in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(a)) with the rotating shaft 731 as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (raised) in the retraction direction, as shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b).

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 9770 is pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 114(a)). As described above, the connecting pin 744a is in contact with (pressed against) the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773 as the second displacement member 740 rotates under its own weight. It is guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9773c along the second inner wall 9773b.

In this case, the second inner wall 9773b extends along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 9770 as described above, and the relative displacement of the second connecting member 9770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 A linear motion (slide displacement) in a direction along the direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b), in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, the rotational axis 741 of the second displacement member 740 relative to the first displacement member 730 No relative displacement (relative rotation) about rotation is formed. As a result, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4.

112(b) and 114(b), when the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 114(b)), the connection first When the member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(b)), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(b)). 113(a) and 115(a), and is further rotated (upright) in the retraction direction.

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connection member 9770 is further pushed upward (upper left in FIG. It is further guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9773c along the inner wall 9773b, and hits the inner wall surface of the third inner wall 9773c, thereby reaching the connecting portion (starting end of the third inner wall 9773c) of the second inner wall 9773b and the third inner wall 9773c. be located.

As described above, in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 about the rotation axis 741 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 113(a) and 115(a), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4. be done.

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. A state is created in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position.

In this case, the connecting pin 744a is guided along the third inner wall 9773c in the direction toward the first inner wall 9773a by pushing up the second connecting member 9770 to the uppermost position. is positioned (returned) to the connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9773a) of the first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) returns (decreases) from the intersection angle β4 to the intersection angle β1.

115(a) to the state shown in FIG. 115(b), the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 crosses the vertical line Z. , can be rotated prior to being pushed up by the second connecting member 9770 .

Specifically, when the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is positioned on the same side of the vertical line Z as the connecting pin 744a (the right side in FIG. 115(a)), the second displacement member 740 Since the connection pin 744a is pressed against the third inner wall 9773c by rotation due to its own weight, it gradually rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 115(a), the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 crosses the vertical line Z and is positioned on the opposite side of the connecting pin 744a (left side in FIG. 115(a)). is rotated in a direction to lift the connecting pin 744a upward by its own weight. That is, it rotates prior to being pushed up by the second connecting member 9770 .

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 is reduced in the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. While the modes can be the same, the mode of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 to the first displacement member 730 can be changed. The angle formed with the member 740 (virtual line M2) is displaced toward the retracted position while maintaining the crossing angle β4, and the crossing angle β4 is changed from the crossing angle β4 to the crossing angle β1 at high speed (short time) immediately before being arranged at the retracted position. A reducing aspect can be formed.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Here, the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment differs from the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment only in that it is provided with a retainer 10746, and the rest of the configuration is the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

116 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 10700 according to the tenth embodiment, illustrating a state where the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is positioned on the vertical line Z. FIG. As shown in FIG. 116, a retainer 10746 is arranged on the back surface of the second displacement member 740 in the left rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment. The retainer 10746 will now be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 117(a) is a front view of the retainer 10746, FIG. 117(b) is a cross-sectional view of the retainer 10746 along line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. 117(a), and FIG. 117(a) is a cross-sectional view of the retainer 10746 along line CXVIIc-CXVIIc of FIG. 117(a). FIG.

As shown in FIG. 117, the retainer 10746 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an internal space with a circular cross section, and a predetermined heavy load is displaceably accommodated in the internal space. In this embodiment, the liquid LQ is a predetermined heavy object, and the liquid LQ fills about 1/3 of the volume of the internal space. Therefore, according to the inclination of the retainer 10746, the liquid LQ can be displaced to one end side or the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the retainer 10746 (right or left side in FIG. 117(c)) (see FIGS. 118 to 121).

Returning to FIG. 116, description will be made. The retainer 10746 has a posture (horizontal posture) in which its longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 116) is orthogonal to the vertical line Z when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) (that is, the state in FIG. 116). It is disposed on the back surface of the second displacement member 740 at a position where the longitudinal center thereof coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 .

Therefore, when the second displacing member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side about the rotation shaft 741, the retainer 10746 in the horizontal posture is tilted so that one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction is positioned downward. , the contained heavy object (liquid LQ) is displaced to one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction (that is, the same side as the moving direction of the center of gravity G).

As a result, when the second displacement member 740 rotates around the rotation shaft 741, the second displacement member 740 and the retainer 10746 are integrally formed as compared to the case where the retainer 10746 is not provided. , the amount of change in the position of the center of mass (center of gravity G′) can be increased.

Next, the operation of left rotation unit 10700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 121. FIG. Figures 118 and 119 are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 in each state during forward movement from the retracted position to the extended position, and Figures 120 and 121 from the extended position to the retracted position. 107A and 107B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 in each state when operating on the return path.

As shown in FIGS. 118 to 121, the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction to rotate the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720, and the first displacement member When the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to 730, the retainer 10746 is tilted according to the rotational position of the second displacement member 740, and the liquid LQ filled in the internal space thereof is displaced. The retainer 10746 can be displaced to one longitudinal end or the other.

As a result, the center of gravity G' of the second displacement member 740 and the retainer 10746 can be positioned farther from the vertical line Z than when the retainer 10746 is not provided.

Therefore, in the section in which the connecting pin 744a is displaced along the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c of the guide portion 9773, the second displacing member 740 using the center of gravity G′ is rotated by its own weight to ensure the rotation of the connecting pin 744a. can be easily maintained in contact with the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c. As a result, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed, and the relative displacement (rotation) thereof can be stabilized.

On the other hand, in the section in which the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight prior to the push-up by the second connecting member 9770, it is possible to ensure that the second displacement member 740 advances by using the center of gravity G'. As a result, the rotation from the crossing angle β4 to the crossing angle β1 can be performed at a higher speed (shorter time) immediately before being arranged at the retracted position.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 130. FIG. In the first embodiment, a case where relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed in both the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position will be described. However, in the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 according to the eleventh embodiment, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed only in the forward trip and not formed in the return trip. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 illustrates a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 11700 (the rear base 710 and the front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIG. 122, in a left rotation unit 11700 according to the eleventh embodiment, a second displacement member 740 and a second connecting member 11770 are connected by a rack and pinion mechanism consisting of a pinion gear 11747 and a rack gear 11774 . In this case, as will be described later, the pinion gear 11747 is configured as a one-way clutch. By restricting the conversion of the linear motion of the member 11770 into the rotational motion of the second displacement member 740, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be formed only in the outward path.

The pinion gear 11747 is formed as a cam-type one-way clutch with a roller and a spring interposed between the inner ring and the outer ring. A gear that meshes with is engraved. In this case, when the outer ring is rotated clockwise in the rear view of the second displacement member 740, the pinion gear 11747 transmits the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740), while the outer ring rotates counterclockwise. Then, the transmission of that rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740) is cut off.

The rack gear 11774 is a gear engraved on the side surface of the second connection member 11770 and meshes with the pinion gear 11747 . The engraving range of the rack gear 11774 is a range in which the engagement with the pinion gear 11747 is released when the second connecting member 11770 is drawn downward to the maximum (see FIGS. 126(b) and 129). ).

Between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740, a biasing spring SP formed as a torsion spring made of metal is interposed. The coil portion of the biasing spring SP is fitted around the rotation shaft 741 and is elastically torsionally deformed. An arm extending from the other end of the coil portion is engaged with the second displacement member 740, and its elastic recovery force is distributed between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2). , in the direction of maintaining the crossing angle γ1.

Next, the operation of left rotation unit 11700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 130. FIG.

Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides in the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), so that the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 11770, the first displacement member 730, and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement between the first connection member 760, the second connection member 11770, and the first displacement member 730 is similar to that of the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, its detailed description is omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126, the operation of left rotation unit 11700 when moving forward from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

Figures 123 and 124 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in each state during forward movement from the retracted position to the extended position, and Figures 125 and 126 are views from the retracted position to the extended position. 117A and 117B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in each state when the forward movement is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 125(a), at the retracted position, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is the intersection angle γ1. In this case, the second connection member 11770 is in a state of being pushed up most upward (the upper side in FIG. 125(a)).

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 125(a)), the first connecting member 760 extends in the direction of extension (counterclockwise in FIG. 125(a)) about the rotation shaft 761. 110(a)), the first displacement member 730 is rotated about the rotation shaft 731 in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)). 124(a) and 126(a), the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the projecting direction through the states shown in FIGS. 123(b) and 125(b).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 11770 is drawn downward (lower side in FIG. 125(a)), so that the rack gear 11774 of the second connection member 11770 becomes the pinion gear. 11747 (outer ring) is rotated clockwise in FIG. 125(a). Rotation of the outer ring in such a direction is rotation in a direction that transmits the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

123(b) and 125(b), and then as shown in FIGS. ) is further elastically deformed in the torsional direction and rotated relative to the first displacement member 730, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is The crossing angle γ1 is changed (increased) to the crossing angle γ3 via the crossing angle γ2 (γ1<γ2<γ3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 extends to the maximum as shown in FIGS. 730 and second displacement member 740 are positioned in the extended position.

In this case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 124(b) and 126(b), when the second connection member 11770 is pulled to the lowest position, the rack gear 11774 and the pinion gear 11747 are disengaged. As a result, the second displacement member 740 receives the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP (see FIG. 122) and returns to the initial position. That is, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) returns (decreases) from the intersection angle γ3 to the intersection angle γ1.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

Figures 127 and 128 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in each state during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position, and Figures 129 and 130 are views from the extended position to the retracted position. 117A and 117B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating on the return path. FIG. 127(a) is the same as FIG. 124(b), and FIG. 128(b) is the same as FIG. 123(a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 127(b) and 129(b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 124(a) and 126(a). 128(a) and 130(a) are the same as the rotational positions of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 123(b) and 125(b). .

123 to 126), the transmission member 754 moves in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in ), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. It rotates in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 129(a)) about the center of rotation. 128(b) and 130(b) through the states shown in FIGS. 127(b) and 128(a) and FIGS. ), it is placed (raised) at the retracted position.

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 11770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 129(a)), thereby turning into FIGS. 127(b) and 129(b). As shown, the rack gear 11774 meshes with the pinion gear 11747, and the second coupling member 11770 is further pushed upward, causing the rack gear 11774 to rotate the pinion gear 11747 (outer ring) counterclockwise in FIG. 129(b). Rotation of the outer ring in such a direction is rotation in a direction that cuts transmission of that rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 127(b) and 129(b), through the states shown in FIGS. 128(a) and 130(a), the retracted position shown in FIGS. , the second displacement member 740 is not relatively rotated with respect to the first displacement member 730, and the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) are separated from each other. is maintained at the intersection angle γ1.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the forward trip, as the first displacement member 730 rotates (tilts) with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 in the projecting direction, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (tilted). The second displacement member 740 is gradually relatively displaced, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is increased from the intersection angle γ1 to the intersection angle γ3, In the overhang position, a displacement mode is formed in which the crossing angle γ1 is changed, while in the return path, a relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed (that is, the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) while maintaining the crossing angle γ1), the first displacement member 730 rotates (stands up) in the retraction direction with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720. It is possible to form a displacement mode that

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the base-side engaging member 726 is fixed so as to protrude from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. It is arranged so that it can appear in front of the. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 131 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 12700 in the twelfth embodiment. 132(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 12720, and FIG. 132(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 12720 taken along line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in FIG. 132(a).

As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, a left rotation unit 12700 according to the twelfth embodiment accommodates a base-side engagement member 12726 and a transmission member 12728 in an internal space of a front base 12720, and a second displacement member. An insert member 12745 is disposed on the back of 12740 .

The base-side engaging member 12726 is a sliding portion that is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 132(a) and the vertical direction in FIG. 132(b)) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720. 12726c, and a base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface of the slide portion 12726c (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 132(a) and the lower side of FIG. 132(b)).

The sliding portion 12726c of the base-side engaging member 12726 slides toward the front along a guide groove (not shown), thereby moving the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b from the receiving recess 727 to the front side (Fig. 132(a) paper surface). 132c (b) lower side), and the sliding portion 12726c slides toward the back side (FIG. 132 (a) back side of the paper surface and FIG. 132 (b) upper side) along a guide groove (not shown). By being displaced, the base portion 726 a and the bent portion 726 b can be retracted into the receiving recess 727 .

In this case, between the front surface of the slide portion 12726c and the rear surface of the front base 12720, an urging spring SP1 made of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically compressed state, and the urging spring SP1 is elastically restored. The force maintains the base side engaging member 12726 in the retracted state (the state shown in FIG. 132(b)). In this immersed state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 12720 are flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the base-side engaging member 12726. FIG.

A side surface of the slide portion 12726c (left side in FIG. 132(b)) is formed as an inclined surface inclined in a direction away from the transmission member 12728 toward the rear side, and the inclined surface of the transmission member 12728 is formed on the inclined surface. abutted.

The transmission member 12728 is slidably displaceable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 132(a), left-right direction in FIG. 132(b)) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720. b) right side) is exposed from the insertion opening 12720a formed in the side surface of the front base 12720; In addition, on the other end side of the transmission member 12728 (left side in FIG. 132(b)), an inclined surface inclined in a direction away from the base-side engaging member 12726 toward the front side is formed. , the inclined surface of the base-side engaging member 12726 abuts thereon.

Therefore, the inclined surfaces of the base-side engaging member 12726 and the transmission member 12728 slidably displace the transmission member 12728 in a direction approaching the base-side engaging member 12726, thereby moving the base-side engaging member 12726 toward the front side. In addition, by slidingly displacing the transmission member 12728 in a direction away from the base-side engaging member 12726, the base-side engaging member 12726 can be slid to the rear side (inside the receiving recess 727). It can be displaced (immersed).

Between the transmission member 12728 and the front base 12720, an urging spring SP2 made of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically deformed state. 12728 is maintained at a position spaced apart from the base side engaging member 12726 (the position shown in FIG. 132(b), that is, the position where the base side engaging member 12726 is retracted).

The pressing member 12745 includes a base portion 12745a erected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 12740, and an insertion portion 12745b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 12745a. In the pressing member 12745, the standing height of the base portion 12745a is set higher than the standing height of the base portion of the displacement side engaging member 742 so that the insertion portion 12745b can be inserted into the insertion opening 12720a of the front base 12720. In addition, the extension direction of the insertion portion 12745b is the same direction (parallel) as the extension direction of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the engagement action by the base-side engagement member 12726 and displacement-side engagement member 742 will be described.

FIG. 133 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 12700 for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member 12726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742, in which the second displacement member 12740 is displaced toward the retracted position. Schematically, the transition state when the 133(a) to the state shown in FIG. 133(c), the second displacement member 12740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), when the second displacement member 12740 is displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 133(a)) with respect to the front base 12720, the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 is first displaced. The tip abuts on one end side of the transmission member 12728 via the insertion opening 12720a of the front base 12720 .

From the state shown in FIG. 133(a), when the second displacement member 12740 is further displaced toward the retreating direction (left side in FIG. 133(a)) with respect to the front base 12720, the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 is By inserting the transmission member 12728 into the front base 12720 through the insertion port 12720a against the biasing force of the biasing springs SP1 and SP2, the transmission member 12728 is pushed in a direction approaching the base-side engagement member 12726 (sliding displacement). is done).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 133(b) and 133(c), the base side engaging member 12726 is gradually protruded to the front of the front base 12720 and displaced toward the base side engaging member 12726. The side engaging member 742 is brought closer, and the mutual bent portions 726b, 742b enter the inner surfaces of the mating bent portions 726b, 742b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 133(d), when the second displacement member 12740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 from tilting away from the front base 12720 .

In particular, in this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 are extended to the extended position, the base-side engaging member 12726 is pushed into the receiving recess 727 by the elastic recovery force of the biasing springs SP1 and SP2. You can immerse yourself inside. That is, in the retracted state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 12726 can be arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 12720. As shown in FIG. As a result, even when the front surface of the front base 12720 is exposed, the base-side engaging member 12726 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance can be improved.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 136. FIG. In the first embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base-side engaging member 726 projecting from the front of the front base 720. However, the thirteenth embodiment The displacement side engaging member 13742 of the second displacement member 13740 in the form is engaged with the wall surface on the front side of the front base 13720 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 134 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 13700 in the thirteenth embodiment. 135(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 13720, and FIG. 135(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 13720 along line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in FIG. 135(a).

As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, a left rotation unit 13700 according to the thirteenth embodiment is attached to a front base 13720 on the front side (FIG. 135(a) front side, FIG. 135(b) bottom side) and side sides. 135(a) and 135(b) right side) is formed, and a rotating member 13726 is rotatably disposed in the space formed by the opening 13720a.

The rotating member 13726 is formed in a V shape in cross section from a side portion 13726a that closes the side surface of the front base 13720 in the opening 13720a and a front portion 13726b that closes the front side of the front base 13720. One side (opposite side of front portion 13726b) is rotatably supported.

That is, the rotating member 13726 is rotated to one side about the pivotal portion of the side surface portion 13726a, and is placed in the initial position (the position shown in FIGS. 134 and 135) to close the opening 13720a. It is retracted into the front base 13720 by rotating to the other side around the pivotal portion of the side surface portion 13726a.

In this case, between the front base 13720 and the rotating member 13726, an urging spring SP3 made of a torsion spring is disposed in an elastically torsionally deformed state. Rotating member 13726 is maintained in the initial position. In this initial position, the front of the front portion 13726b and the side of the side portion 13726a are flush with the front and side of the front base 13720, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the rotating member 13726.

The displacement-side engaging member 13742 includes a base portion 13742a erected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 13740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 13742a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface. The standing height of the base portion 13742a is set to such a height that the bent portion 742b can come into contact with the side portion 13726a of the rotating member 13726. As shown in FIG. As a result, when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b can rotate the rotating member 13726 in the retracting direction along with the displacement (see FIG. 136).

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the engagement action by the front base 13720 and displacement side engagement member 13742 will be described.

FIG. 136 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 13700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 13720 and the displacement-side engagement member 13742, when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retracted position. is schematically illustrated. 136(a) to the state shown in FIG. 136(b), the second displacement member 13740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 136(a), when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 136(a)) with respect to the front base 13720, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 , abuts on the side surface portion 13726 a of the rotating member 13726 .

From the state shown in FIG. 136(a), when the second displacement member 13740 is further displaced toward the retreating direction (left side in FIG. 136(a)) with respect to the front base 13720, the bent portion of the displacement-side engaging member 13742 742b pushes (rotates) the rotating member 13726 in the retraction direction against the biasing force of the biasing spring SP3.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 136(b), the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 is gradually advanced into the internal space of the front base 13720 through the opening 13720a, as shown in FIG. 136(c). Thus, when the second displacement member 13740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 13742 can face the rear surface of the front base 13720 in an engageable manner. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 from tilting away from the front base 13720 .

In particular, in this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 are extended to the extended position, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP3 places (returns) the rotating member 13726 to the initial position. can be made That is, in its initial position, the front surface of the front portion 13726b and the side surface of the side surface portion 13726a can be flush with the front surface and side surfaces of the front base 13720, respectively. As a result, even when the front and side surfaces of the front base 13720 are exposed, the opening 13720a and the rotating member 13726 are difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved.

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the base-side engaging member 726 is fixed so as to protrude from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. It is arranged so that it can appear in front of the. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 137 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit 14700 according to the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 138(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 with the second displacement member 740 arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 138(b) is the line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb of FIG. 138(a). is a partially enlarged cross-sectional schematic diagram of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 in FIG. 139(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 with the second displacement member 740 arranged at the extended position, and FIG. 139(b) is CXXXIXb of FIG. 139(a). 147 is a partially enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 taken along line -CXXXIXb; FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 137 to 139, a left rotation unit 14700 according to the fourteenth embodiment accommodates a base-side engagement member 14726 in the internal space of a front base 14720, and a rack member 14752 on one longitudinal end side ( A transmission portion 14752b is formed on the front surface of FIG. 137 (upper side).

The base-side engaging member 14726 includes a slide portion 14726c that is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 14720. , a base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface of the slide portion 14726c (the left side surface in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)).

The base-side engaging member 14726 slides and displaces the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b toward the front side (the left side in FIG. 138(b)) from the receiving recess 727 by sliding the sliding portion 14726c toward the front along a guide groove (not shown). ) (see FIG. 138), and the slide portion 14726c is slid along a guide groove (not shown) toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 139(b)) to receive the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b. It can be retracted into recess 727 (see FIG. 139).

In this case, between the rear surface of the slide portion 14726c and the front surface of the rear base 710, an urging spring SP4 made of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically deformed state. The force maintains the base-side engaging member 14726 in the retracted state (the state shown in FIG. 139(b)). In this immersed state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 14720 are flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the base-side engaging member 14726. FIG.

The rear surface of the slide portion 14726c (right side in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)) is inclined in a direction away from the rack member 14752 as it goes upward (upper side in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)). It is formed as an inclined surface, and the inclined surface (front surface) of the transmission portion 14752b of the rack member 14752 abuts against the inclined surface.

138(b) and 139(b)), the base side engaging member 14726 (slide portion 14726c) is formed, and the inclined surface of the slide portion 14726c abuts on the inclined surface.

Therefore, the base side engaging member 14726 slides toward the front side (in the direction in which it protrudes from the receiving recess 727) as the rack member 14752 is displaced downward by the action of the inclined surfaces of the base side engaging member 14726 and the transmission portion 14752b. In addition, as the rack member 14752 is displaced upward, the base-side engaging member 14726 can be slid to the rear side (into the receiving recess 727).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 138, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the lowest position and the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b are brought into contact with each other. The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be prevented from tilting away from the front base 14720 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 139, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the uppermost position and the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the extended position, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP4 causes the base side engagement. Member 14726 can be recessed into receiving recess 727 . That is, in the retracted state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 14726 can be arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 14720. As shown in FIG. As a result, even when the front surface of the front base 14720 is exposed, the base-side engaging member 14726 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance can be improved.

Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the base-side engaging member 726 is fixed so as to protrude from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. is slidably disposed in front of the . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 140 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 15700 in the fifteenth embodiment. 141(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 15720, and FIG. 134(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 15720 taken along line CXLIb-CXLIb in FIG. 141(a).

As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, a left rotation unit 15700 according to the fifteenth embodiment is attached to a front base 15720 on the front side (FIG. 141(a) front side, FIG. 141(b) bottom side) and side sides. (Fig. 141(a) and Fig. 141(b) right side) is formed, and the front side (Fig. 141(b) lower side) of the front base 15720 in the space formed by the opening 15720a is formed. A base-side engaging member 15726 is slidably disposed in the portion.

The base-side engaging member 15726 is formed in a flat plate shape having substantially the same shape as the front side of the front base 15720 in the opening 15720a (that is, a shape that closes the opening 15720a when viewed from the front). Along the first guide groove 15720b1 and the second guide groove 15720b2, it is disposed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(b)).

The first guide groove 15720b1 is formed to have a first inclination angle with respect to the left-right direction of the front base 15720 (left-right direction in FIG. 141(b)) when viewed from above in FIG. The guide groove 15720b2 is formed to have an angle of inclination (second angle of inclination) smaller than the angle of inclination of the first guide groove 15720b1 with respect to the left-right direction of the front base 15720 (the left-right direction in FIG. 141(b)). be. In this embodiment, the second tilt angle is 0°. That is, the second guide groove 15720b2 is formed parallel to the left-right direction of the front base 15720. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, the base-side engaging member 15726 is guided along the first guide groove 15720b1 from the initial position shown in FIG. left upper side), and then guided along the second guide groove 15720b2, so that the front base 15720 is slid sideways (left side in FIG. 141(b)), It is immersed inside the base 15720 .

In this case, between the front base 15720 and the base-side engaging member 15726, an urging spring (not shown) consisting of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically deformed state. The elastic recovery force maintains the base side engaging member 15726 in the initial position. In this initial position, the front surface of the base-side engaging member 15726 (the surface on the front side in FIG. 141(a) and the bottom surface in FIG. 141(b)) and the front surface of the front base 15720 are arranged flush with each other. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the side engaging member 15726 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the engagement action by the base-side engagement member 15726 and displacement-side engagement member 742 will be described.

FIG. 142 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 15700 for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member 15726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742, in which the second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the retracted position. Schematically, the transition state when the 142(a) to the state shown in FIG. 142(c), the second displacement member 740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 142(a) and 142(b), when the second displacement member 740 is displaced with respect to the front base 15720 toward the retreating direction (left side in FIG. 142(a)), displacement-side engagement occurs. The tip of the bent portion 742b of the member 742 is inserted through the opening 15720a into the front base 15720, and the base portion 742a of the displacement-side engaging member 742 is brought into contact with the side surface of the base-side engaging member 15726.

From the state shown in FIG. 142(b), when the second displacement member 740 is further displaced toward the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 142(b)) with respect to the front base 15720, as shown in FIG. 142(c). , the base portion 742a of the displacement-side engaging member 742 pushes (slides) the base-side engaging member 15726 in the retracting direction along the first guide groove 15720b1 against the biasing force of the biasing spring. When the second displacement member 740 is further displaced in the retreating direction from the state shown in FIG. is done).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 142(d), when the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742 faces the rear surface of the base-side engaging member 15726. , can be engagably opposed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 from tilting away from the front base 15720 (downward in FIG. 142(c)).

In particular, in this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are extended to the extended position, the base-side engaging member 15726 is arranged (returned) to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring. ). That is, in the initial position, the front surface of the base-side engaging member 15726 can be arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 15720 . As a result, even when the front of the front base 15720 is exposed, the opening 15720a and the base-side engaging member 15726 are made difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved.

Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. FIG. In the first embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base-side engaging member 726 projecting from the front of the front base 720. The displacement side engaging member 16742 of the second displacement member 16740 in the form is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 143 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 16700 in the sixteenth embodiment. 144(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 16720, and FIG. 144(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 16720 taken along line CXLIVb-CXLIVb in FIG. 144(a).

FIG. 145 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 16700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 16720 (opening 16720a) and the displacement side engagement member 16742, and the second displacement member 16740 moves to the retracted position. Schematically illustrated is the transition state as it is displaced towards. 145(a) to the state shown in FIG. 145(b), the second displacement member 16740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, the left rotation unit 16700 in the sixteenth embodiment has an opening 16720a formed in the side surface of the front base 16720 (the right side surface in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b)). .

The displacement-side engaging member 16742 includes a base portion 16742a erected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 16740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 16742a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface. The standing height of the base portion 16742a is set to a height that allows the bending portion 742b to be inserted into the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. As shown in FIG.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 16742 is moved through the opening 16720a along with the displacement to the front base. 16720, and when the second displacement member 16740 is placed at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 16742 is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. can face each other as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 16740 from tilting away from the front base 16720 .

In particular, in this embodiment, it is only necessary to open the opening 16720a in the front base 16720, and there is no need to provide a base-side engaging member, so the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, since the opening 16720a is arranged on the side surface of the front base 16720, the opening 16720a is visible to the player when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the projecting direction and the front of the front base 16720 is exposed. The appearance can be improved by making it difficult.

Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIG. In the first embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base-side engaging member 726 projecting from the front of the front base 720. The displacement side engaging member 17742 of the second displacement member 17740 in the form is engaged with the rear surface of the rear base 710 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 146 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 17700 in the seventeenth embodiment. 147 is a schematic top view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 17700 for explaining the engagement action by the rear base 710 and the displacement-side engagement member 17742, in which the second displacement member 17740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state at the moment is schematically illustrated.

147(a) to the state shown in FIG. 147(b), the second displacement member 17740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, in the left rotation unit 17700 of the seventeenth embodiment, the entire front and side surfaces of one longitudinal end side (upper side in FIG. 146) of the front base 17720 are formed as decorative surfaces. That is, the front base 17720 is formed in a shape in which the base-side engaging member 726 and the receiving recess 727 are omitted from the front base 720 in the first embodiment.

The displacement-side engaging member 17742 includes a base portion 17742a erected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 17740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 17742a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface. The standing height of the base portion 17742a is set to such a height that the inner surface of the bent portion 742b can face the rear surface of the rear base 710 with a predetermined gap therebetween.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 17740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 17742 is gradually moved toward the rear side of the rear base 710 along with the displacement. , and the second displacement member 17740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 17742 can face the rear surface of the rear base 710 in an engageable manner. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 17740 from tilting away from the front base 17720 .

In particular, in this embodiment, since it is not necessary to provide the front base 17720 with a base-side engaging member, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, since it is not necessary to form an opening on the side surface of the front base 17720, the appearance of the front base 17720 can be improved by avoiding the functional part unrelated to the decoration from being visually recognized by the player. can be done. In other words, there is no need to obscure the sides of the front base 17720 from the player by means of the second displacement member 17740 arranged at the overhanging position, so the amount of overhang of the second displacement member 17740 is increased to enhance the presentation effect. be able to.

Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. FIG. In the right rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, the operation of displacing (raising) the first displacement member 630 tilted in the overhanging direction toward the retracted position (raising operation of the first displacement member 630) is performed by the drive motor 650. Although the case where it is performed only by the rotational driving force has been described, the erecting operation of the first displacement member 630 in the right rotation unit 18600 of the eighteenth embodiment utilizes the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 and the action of the inertial force. is done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of a right rotation unit 18600 according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a front view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 18600 is a rear view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section of FIG.

149(a) and 150(a) show the state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 are arranged in the extended position (that is, FIGS. 34(c) and 36(c)). corresponds to 149(b) and 150(b) correspond to FIGS. 34(b) and 36(b), and FIGS. 149(c) and 150(c) correspond to FIGS. 36(a).

FIG. 151 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when moving from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 151(c) corresponds to FIGS. 150(a), 150(b) and 150(c) respectively.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the right rotation unit 18600 according to the eighteenth embodiment, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped abutted portion 18629 from the front of the front base 18620 is attached to the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 18642 of the second displacement member 18640. Approximately cylindrical contact portions 18644 protrude from the rear surface. The contact portion 18644 is disposed at the end portion of the connecting displacement member 18642 in the longitudinal direction opposite to the pivot hole 642a (support shaft 633).

As shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, the abutted portion 18629 and the abutting portion 18644 are in the middle of displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 from the extended position to the retracted position. In a predetermined section, the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 18644 is formed so as to contact the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629 (upper surface in FIG. 148).

Specifically, from the extended position shown in FIGS. 149(a), 150(a) and 151(a), as shown in FIGS. 149(b), 150(b) and 151(b), 149(c), 150(c) and 151(c), the connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated about the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) in the direction of retreating to the rear surface of the first displacement member 630. ), when the connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated to the maximum around the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a), the contact portion 18644 is brought into contact with the upper surface of the contact portion 18629. As shown in FIG.

From the states shown in FIGS. 149(c), 150(c) and 151(c), the first displacement member 630 starts to rotate (stand up) toward the retracted position about the rotation shaft 631. 33(b), 35(b), and 37(b), the contact portion 18644 is separated from the upper surface of the contact portion 18629, and the contact portion 18629 and the contact portion 18644 are separated from each other. Abutment is released.

In this case, the drive motor 650 moves only the second displacement member 18640 in the interval until the contact portion 18644 contacts the contacted portion 18629 (that is, the interval shown in FIGS. 149, 150, and 151). Rotational driving is sufficient, and the driving load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section where the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 is rotationally driven. is assumed to be the load of In addition, since the displacement direction of the connecting displacement member 18642 is the downward direction of gravity, the load on the drive motor 650 is reduced in this respect as well.

On the other hand, when the contact portion 18644 is in contact with the contacted portion 18629 , the driving pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 reaches the working section 635 a of the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 . Therefore, from this state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 630 is added as the load of the rotational drive of the drive motor 650 . In particular, from this state, the first displacement member 630 is raised against gravity, so the load on the drive motor 650 is rapidly increased in this respect as well.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the contact portion 18644 is provided at the end of the connecting displacement member 18642 opposite to the shaft support hole 642 a (support shaft 633 ), and the connecting displacement member 18642 rotates the support shaft 633 . When rotated around the center, the abutting portion 18644 abuts on the abutted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 (see FIG. 151(c)).

That is, the rotation of the connecting displacement member 18642 about the support shaft 633 can be regulated by the abutment of the abutted portion 18629 and the abutting portion 18644, and the rotation of the connecting displacement member 18642 can be suddenly stopped. , the inertial force of the connecting displacement member 18642 generated by the sudden stop is the force in the direction (arrow F) can act on the first displacement member 630 .

As a result, the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, and the weight of the first displacement member 630 as well as the weight of the second displacement member 18640 is reached. Also, when added as a load for rotationally driving the drive motor 650 , the inertial force described above can be used as a force that assists the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive motor 650, stabilize the displacement of each of the displacement members 630 and 18640 from the extended position to the retracted position, and increase the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve the quality.

Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160. FIG. In the right rotation unit 18600 of the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the abutting portion 18644 of the connecting displacement member 18642 contacts the abutted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 has been described. The contact portion 19644 of the contact portion 19639 provided on the first displacement member 19630 contacts the contact portion 19639 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

152 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 19600 in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 153 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 19600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, in a right rotation unit 19600 according to the nineteenth embodiment, the connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 19641 of the second displacement member 19640 and the connecting displacement member 19642 is the first. It is set at a position different from that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 29 and 30).

Specifically, one end in the longitudinal direction of the driven member 19641 (the side opposite to the second groove 641b across the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIGS. 152 and 153) is curved in an arc, and the curved portion A connecting groove 641c is provided on the extended distal end side of the . This curved portion avoids interference between the driven member 19641 and the shaft support hole 642 a of the connecting displacement member 19642 . The connecting displacement member 19642 is formed by projecting a plate-like projecting portion 19642c outward from the shaft support hole 642a, and a connecting pin 643 projects from the front side of the projecting portion 19642c.

In this case, in the above-described first embodiment, the axis of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 641 is centered and the axis of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connecting displacement member 19642 is The connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 is positioned inside (on the center side) of the virtual circle passing through the center.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an imaginary shaft centered on the shaft center of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 19641 passes through the shaft center of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connecting displacement member 19642. The connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 19641 and the connecting displacement member 19642 is positioned outside the circle.

Therefore, the direction of relative rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 with respect to the first displacement member 19630 is opposite to that in the first embodiment. Here, the relative rotation in the opposite direction will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 157. FIG.

154 and 155 are front views of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state during operation between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 19600 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state when rotating. FIG.

154(a), 154(b) and 154(c) are the same states as FIGS. 156(a), 156(b) and 156(c) respectively, ), FIGS. 155(b) and 155(c) are the same states as FIGS. 157(a), 157(b) and 157(c), respectively. 154(c) is the same as FIG. 155(a), and FIG. 156(c) is the same as FIG. 157(a).

Here, in the right rotation unit 19600 in the nineteenth embodiment, relative rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 with respect to the first displacement member 19630 is caused by the difference in the positions of the connecting portions (the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643) described above. , is opposite to that of the first embodiment, the other operation modes are formed substantially in the same manner, so description of the same portions will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 154 and 156, at the retracted position, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. By pushing down the inner wall surfaces of the section 635a) and the second groove 641b in the projecting direction, the first displacement member 19630 is rotated (tilted) in the projecting direction integrally with the second displacement member 19640.

155(a) and 157(a), when the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. The inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the driven member 19641 is pushed downward (lower side in FIG. 157(a)) while passing through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of .

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 155(b) and 157(b), the driven member 19641 rotates around the support shaft 632 in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 157(b)) to raise the connecting groove 641c. , the rotation of the driven member 19641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 19642 through the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 19642 lowers the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the rotation center. direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 108(b)).

That is, while the first displacement member 19630 is stopped, the connecting displacement portion 19642 is displaced (rotated) relative to the first displacement member 19630 in the direction opposite to that in the first embodiment. After that, as shown in FIGS. 155(c) and 157(c), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640. By reaching the end of the second groove 641b, the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are arranged at the overhang position.

Returning to FIGS. 152 and 153, description will be made. In this embodiment, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped contacted portion 19639 projects from the back surface of the first displacement member 19630, and a substantially cylindrical contact portion 19644 projects from the front surface of the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 19642. . The contacted portion 19639 is arranged between the rotation shaft 631 and the support shaft 632 in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 19630 .

The contacted portion 19639 and the contact portion 19644 are arranged in a predetermined section in the middle of the displacement of the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 from the extended position to the retracted position. The outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 19644 is formed so as to be able to contact with the side surface of (the right side surface in FIG. 153). 158 to 160, the effect of the abutment of the abutted portion 19639 and the abutting portion 19644 will be described.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 19600 is a rear view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section of FIG.

158(a) and 159(a) show the state in which the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are arranged in the extended position (that is, FIGS. 155(c) and 157(c)). corresponds to 158(b) and 159(b) correspond to FIGS. 155(b) and 157(b), and FIGS. 158(c) and 159(c) correspond to FIGS. 157(a).

FIG. 160 is a schematic back view of the clockwise rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when it operates from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 160(a), FIG. 160(c) corresponds to FIGS. 159(a), 159(b) and 159(c) respectively.

From the extended position shown in FIGS. 158(a), 159(a) and 160(a), as shown in FIGS. 158(b), 159(b) and 160(b), the connecting displacement member 19642 158(c), 159(c), and 160(c) are rotated in the direction of retracting to the rear surface of the first displacement member 19630 with the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) as the center of rotation. Further, when the connecting displacement member 19642 is rotated to the maximum around the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a), the contact portion 19644 is brought into contact with the lower surface of the contacted portion 19639 .

In this case, the drive motor 650 moves only the second displacement member 19640 in the interval until the contact portion 19644 contacts the contacted portion 19639 (that is, the interval shown in FIGS. 158, 159 and 160). Rotational driving is sufficient, and the driving load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section where the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interfering section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 is rotationally driven. is assumed to be the load of

On the other hand, when the contact portion 19644 is in contact with the contacted portion 19639 , the drive pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 reaches the working section 635 a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630 . Therefore, in such a state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 19630 is added as a load for rotationally driving the drive motor 650 . In particular, from this state, the load on the drive motor 650 is abruptly increased because the first displacement member 19630 is erected against gravity.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 19642 is provided with the abutting portion 19644, and the connecting displacement member 19642 is rotated around the support shaft 633, thereby rotating the connecting displacement member 19642. The abutting portion 19644 lifted upward along with this abuts against the lower surface of the abutted portion 19639 of the first displacement member 19630 (see FIG. 160(c)).

That is, the rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 about the support shaft 633 can be restricted by the abutment of the abutted portion 19639 and the abutting portion 19644, and the rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 can be suddenly stopped. , the inertial force of the connecting displacement member 19642 generated by the sudden stop is the force in the direction (arrow F) can act on the first displacement member 19630 .

As a result, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, and the weight of the first displacement member 19630 as well as the weight of the second displacement member 19640 is reached. Also, when added as a load for rotationally driving the drive motor 650 , the inertial force described above can be used as a force that assists the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive motor 650, stabilize the displacement of the displacement members 19630 and 19640 from the extended position to the retracted position, and increase the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve the quality.

Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. FIG. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, the game ball is delivered from the delivery port 821c to the seesaw member 840 (receiving surface 844) regardless of the state of the seesaw member 840 (that is, either the first state or the second state). state), but the winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment restricts the delivery of game balls from the delivery port 821c to the seesaw member 20840 (receiving surface 844) at least in the second state. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 161 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment. Also, FIG. 162(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 20065 with the seesaw member 20840 forming the first state, and FIG. 162(b) is a winning device with the seesaw member 20840 forming the second state. 20065 is a cross-sectional view of device 20065. FIG. 162(a) and 162(b) correspond to FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 161, in the prize winning device 20065 of the twentieth embodiment, a seesaw member 20840 is formed with a restricting portion 20848 . The restricting portion 20848 is formed as a substantially triangular portion in front view that stands upward (upper side in FIG. 161) from the edge portion of the receiving surface 844 opposite to the inclined surface 845 .

As shown in FIG. 162(a), when the seesaw member 20840 is in the first state, the restricting portion 20848 is positioned outside the opening area of the delivery port 821c. (Fig. 162(a) left-right dimension) is maintained at a dimension W1 larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is allowed.

On the other hand, when the seesaw member 20840 is in the second state, as shown in FIG. A portion is located inside the opening region of the delivery port 821c (that is, a portion of the restricting portion 20848 overlaps the opening region of the delivery port 821c). As a result, the opening width of the delivery port 821c is reduced to the dimension W2 which is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (W2<W1). Therefore, the delivery of game balls from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is restricted (prohibited).

Thus, according to this embodiment, the delivery of the game ball from the guide passage (delivery port 821c) of the intermediate base 820 to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 20840 is controlled (allowed) according to the state of the seesaw member 20840. or regulation).

That is, in the first state, the game ball is delivered from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844, and the game ball is rolled from the receiving surface 844 toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846, thereby rotating the seesaw member 20840. , the second state can be formed quickly.

Here, even after the seesaw member 20840 starts rotating toward the second state, when the game balls are sent out in a row from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844, they were sent out first (the receiving surface 844 received ) A state in which the game ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 is formed, and the seesaw member 20840 is likely to be maintained in the second state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the seesaw member 20840 starts to rotate toward the second state, the restricting portion 20848 narrows the opening width of the delivery port 821c to the dimension W2, so that the receiving surface is separated from the delivery port 821c. By restricting (prohibiting) the delivery of game balls to 844, it is possible to secure time for discharging the game balls rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d.

That is, until game balls are completely discharged from the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d and there are no more game balls on the seesaw member 20840, the delivery of the game balls from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is on standby. can be made As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

The dimension W2 may be larger than the diameter of the game ball as long as it is smaller than the dimension W1. That is, the dimension W2 may be a dimension that allows the game ball to be delivered from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844. Even in this case, the width of the opening of the delivery port 821c is narrowed by the restricting portion 20848, making it difficult for the game ball to pass through. (delay the passage of the game ball). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, a twenty-first embodiment will be described. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, by rolling along the downward slope of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball is discharged to the discharge port 821d. The winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment comprises a rotating member 21870 for pushing out game balls and discharging them to the discharge port 821d. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

163(a) and 163(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment, corresponding to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 163, the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment comprises a rotating member 21870 above the seesaw member 840. As shown in FIG. The rotating member 21870 does not interfere with the seesaw member 840 and does not contact the game ball on the seesaw member 840 even if the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or the second state. placed at the height possible.

The rotating member 21870 includes a shaft support portion 21871 through which a shaft support pin (not shown) is inserted so as to be rotatably supported on the rear surface of the front base 810, and a delivery port 821c that protrudes from the shaft support portion 21871 to one side. A plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 facing the receiving plate 21872, and a plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 and a push plate projected from the shaft support portion 21871 to the other side opposite to the receiving plate 21872 and facing the discharge port 821d 21873.

The shaft support portion 21871 is disposed in a posture in which the axial direction thereof is along the direction of gravity (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 163(a)) (that is, perpendicular to the rotation shaft (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840). The receiving plate 21872 and the ejecting plate 21873 are connected with a predetermined crossing angle with the shaft support portion 21871 as the crossing center. Therefore, the rotating member 21870 is bent in a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the direction of the pivot 21871 (gravitational force).

163(a), the rotating member 21870 is such that when the pushing plate 21873 rotates along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (horizontal direction in FIG. 163(a)), the receiving plate 21872 can 163(a), and when the receiving plate 21872 rotates along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIG. 163(b), The pushing plate 21873 is in a posture protruding above the inclined surface 845 and/or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 .

163(a), the rotating member 21870 is such that when the push plate 21873 is retracted to the side opposite to the discharge port 821d (lower side in FIG. 163(a)), the receiving plate 21872 is positioned at the discharge port 163(b), the receiving plate 21872 is advanced toward the side close to 821c, and the receiving plate 21872 is retracted to the side opposite to the delivery port 821c (lower side in FIG. 163(b)), as shown in FIG. 163(b). The pushing plate 21873 is advanced toward the outlet 821d.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. When the game ball is delivered to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball delivered to the receiving surface 844 from the delivery port 821c is received by the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870, and the rotating member 21870 pushes the pushing plate 21873. is rotated in a direction to protrude above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 . By this rotation, as shown in FIG. 163(b), the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be pushed out by the pushing plate 21873 and discharged to the discharge port 821d.

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are changed. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

In addition, the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870 receives the game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c, and the rotating member 21870 is in a posture in which the ejecting plate 21873 protrudes above the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846 (that is, , posture shown in FIG. 163(b)), the game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side of FIG. Since it rolls along the discharge surface 846, the rotating member 21870 can be returned to the posture in which the receiving plate 21872 protrudes above the receiving surface 844 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 163(a)).

In this way, the rotating member 21870 uses the rolling motion of the game ball to move to the initial position (the position where the game ball can be received by the receiving plate 21872 and the game ball can be pushed out by the pushing plate 21873, that is, FIG. position shown in (a)). Therefore, since driving by the driving means and detection by the sensor device can be eliminated, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Next, a twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

164(a) and 164(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 22065 in the twenty-second embodiment, corresponding to FIG. 165(a) and 165(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device 22065, corresponding to FIG.

Here, the prize winning device 22065 of the twenty-second embodiment differs from the prize winning device 21065 of the twenty-first embodiment by having an opening 22849 formed in the seesaw member 22840 and a projecting piece 22874 projecting from the rotating member 22870. Furthermore, since only the provision is different and the other configurations are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the rotating member 22870 has a plurality of (three in this embodiment) projecting pieces 22874 protruding from the lower side of the pushing plate 21873 (on the side of the seesaw member 22840, on the lower side in FIG. 165). is set. On the other hand, a plurality of (three in this embodiment) openings 22849 for receiving the projecting pieces 22874 are formed in the plate-like portion where the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 are formed.

The protruding piece 22874 is curved in an arc around the rotation axis of the seesaw member 22840 when viewed from the front (when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 22840, i.e., the state shown in FIG. 165). be. On the other hand, the opening 22849 is curved in an arc shape around the rotation axis of the rotation member 22870 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (shaft support portion 21871) of the rotation member 22870, that is, the state shown in FIG. 164). It is formed.

Therefore, the seesaw member 22840 rotates between the first state and the second state around the support shaft 821e (bearing 841), and the rotating member 22870 rotates through its movable range around the shaft support 21871. In either state, interference of the projecting piece 22874 with the inner edge of the opening 22849 can be suppressed. As a result, the seesaw member 22840 and the rotating member 22870 can be made independent of each other and smoothly rotated.

Here, when the pushing plate 21873 of the rotating member 21870 does not have a projecting piece as in the case of the twenty-first embodiment, the seesaw member 840 is in the second state (or in a state similar thereto). , When the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the push plate 21873, the distance between the push plate 21873 and the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 is large, the lower part of the ejector plate 21873 is brought into contact with the upper part of the game ball (the front part of the paper surface in FIG. 163(a)). Therefore, the time required for the pushing plate 21873 to contact the upper part of the game ball increases, and it becomes difficult to discharge the game ball to the discharge port 821d quickly. In addition, it becomes difficult to sufficiently apply the energy of the rotation of the rotating member 21870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 to the game ball via the pushing plate 21873 .

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the projecting piece 22874 projects downward (the seesaw member 22840) from the ejector plate 21873 of the rotating member 22870. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. In addition, when the seesaw member 22840 forms the second state, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 can be pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the projecting piece 22874.

Therefore, in this case, the projecting piece 22874 can be brought into contact with the side portion of the game ball (lower portion in FIG. 164(a)). Therefore, the time until the projecting piece 22874 comes into contact with the side portion of the game ball can be shortened, and the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d accordingly. Also, the energy of the rotation of the rotating member 22870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently applied to the game ball via the projecting piece 22874 .

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are changed. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

Next, a twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. FIG. In the twenty-first embodiment, the rotating member 21870 is arranged (rotatably supported) on the front base 810, but the rotating member 23870 of the twenty-third embodiment is arranged (rotatably supported) on the seesaw member 840. pivoted on). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 166 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 23065 in the twenty-third embodiment. 167(a) and 167(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device 23065, corresponding to FIG. 168(a) and 168(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device 23065, corresponding to FIG.

Here, the prize winning device 23065 of the twenty-third embodiment differs from the prize winning device 21065 of the twenty-first embodiment in the position where the rotating member 23870 is arranged and the presence or absence of the stopper portion 23875, and the rest of the configuration is the same. Therefore, its description is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 166 to 168 , the rotating member 23870 in the twenty-third embodiment is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the seesaw member 840 by a shaft support pin 23876 inserted through the shaft support portion 21871 . In this case, in this embodiment, the rotating member 23870 is disposed in such a manner that the axial direction of the shaft support portion 21871 is orthogonal to the rotating shaft (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840, The side surfaces face the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 substantially in parallel.

As described above, according to this embodiment, since the rotating member 23870 is disposed on the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or the first state as shown in FIGS. 168(a) and 168(b). In any of the two states, the pushing plate 21873 can face the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 .

Therefore, unlike the case of the twenty-first embodiment described above (that is, the form in which the lower part of the ejector plate 21873 abuts against the upper part of the game ball (the part on the near side of the paper in FIG. 163(a)), the ejector plate 21873 can be brought into contact with the side portion of the game ball (lower portion in FIG. 167(a)). Therefore, the time required for the pushing plate 21873 to come into contact with the side portion of the game ball can be shortened, and the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d accordingly. Also, the energy of the rotation of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently applied to the game ball via the pushing plate 21873 .

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are changed. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

Here, the rotating member 23870 of this embodiment has a stopper portion 23875 projecting from the back surface of the pushing plate 21873 (the surface opposite to the side that pushes out the game ball), and the stopper portion 23875 hits the back surface of the front base 810. be accessible. When the stopper portion 23875 is in contact with the rear surface of the front base 810 (see FIG. 167(a)), the rotating member 23870 moves the pushing plate 21873 in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (horizontal direction in FIG. 167(a)). It is arranged in a rotational position along.

Therefore, compared to the case where the stopper portion 23875 is omitted and the push plate 21873 is retracted to the position where it abuts against the back surface of the front base 810, the push plate is closer to the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846. 21873 can be made to stand by, and the time until the pushing plate 21873 comes into contact with the game ball can be shortened. As a result, the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d.

Here, as described above, even if the rotary member 23870 is arranged in a posture in which the ejector plate 21873 protrudes above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167(b)), The game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side in FIG. 167(b)) rolls along the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 while retracting the ejecting plate 21873. The rotating member 23870 can be returned to the posture in which it protrudes upward from the receiving surface 844 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167(a)).

In this case, since the rotating member 23870 is arranged on the seesaw member 840 in this embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the pushing plate 21873 and the front base 810 . Therefore, when the push-out plate 21873 is retracted to a position where it abuts against the rear surface of the front base 810, the game ball rolls away from the discharge port 821d, and the rolling trajectory of the game ball increases. Therefore, the discharge to the discharge port 821d is delayed.

On the other hand, by protruding the stopper portion 23875 from the back surface of the pushing plate 21873, the game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side in FIG. It is possible to prevent the ejector plate 21873 from being excessively retreated to the rear side of the front base 810 when rolling along (see FIG. 167(a)). That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling in a direction away from the discharge port 821d, and to easily discharge the game ball to the discharge port 821d.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since no stopper portion is formed on the rear surface of the receiving plate 21872, the receiving plate 21872 can be retracted to a position where it contacts the rear surface of the front base 810 (FIG. 167(b)). )reference). That is, by utilizing the gap between the rotating member 23870 and the front base 810 formed by disposing the rotating member 23870 on the seesaw member 840, the receiving plate 21872 receives the game ball and the rotating member 23870 rotates. The rotation angle of the rotating member 23870 (the rotation angle from the rotation position shown in FIG. 167(a) to the rotation position shown in FIG. 167(b)) can be increased.

As a result, the time during which the game ball delivered from the delivery port 821c is in contact with the receiving plate 21872 can be lengthened (that is, the impulse received by the rotating member 23870 from the game ball can be increased). Therefore, the energy of the rotation of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 can be increased, and even when a plurality of game balls roll on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846, they A plurality of game balls can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d by pushing out the push-out plate 21873. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the transition between the first state and the second state is made. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal posture has been described. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

169 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 24065 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 170 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 24065. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, a winning device 24065 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment has bearings 24816 and 24826 protruding from the rear surface of a front base 24810 and the front surface of an intermediate base 24820, respectively. The bearing portions 24816 and 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 24877 on their inner peripheral surfaces, and have substantially U-shaped projections with an open upper side (the upper side in FIGS. 169 and 170). formed as a part.

In this embodiment, the bearing portion 24816 of the front base 24810 has a larger inner radius than the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 24820 . As will be described later, this permits the rotation of one axial end of the rotary shaft 24877 (the end on which the cam portion 24877b is formed).

The rotating shaft 24877 is a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 24810 and the intermediate base 24820 . Here, referring to FIG. 171, the rotating shaft 24877 will be described.

Fig. 171(a) is a front view of the rotating shaft 24877, and Fig. 171(b) is a side view of the rotating shaft 24877 viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXIb in Fig. 171(a).

As shown in FIG. 171, the rotary shaft 24877 includes a body portion 24877a formed as a shaft-like body having a circular cross section, and a cam portion 24877b formed at an axial end of the body portion 24877a. The cam portion 24877b is formed to protrude radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 24877a (that is, the distance from the axis of the main body portion 24877a to the outer peripheral surface of the cam portion 24877b varies depending on the rotation angle). ) is formed as a so-called disc cam.

Returning to FIGS. 170 and 171, description will be made. The rotating shaft 24877 is set such that the axial length of the body portion 24877 a is larger than the axial length of the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 . Therefore, the main body portion 24877a of the rotary shaft 24877 is fitted in the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the cam portion 24877b and the main body portion 24877a projecting from both axial ends of the bearing 841 are connected to the bearing portion 24816 of the front base 24810 and the intermediate base. 24820 are pivotally supported by bearings 24826 (see FIG. 173). The rotating shaft 24877 is fixed to the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 after being positioned at a predetermined phase (rotational position).

Next, the action of the cam portion 24877b on the rotating shaft 24877 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

FIG. 172(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 with the seesaw member 840 forming the first state, and FIG. 172(b) is the winning device 24065 with the seesaw member 840 forming the second state. is a cross-sectional view of. 173(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 along the line CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa in FIG. 172(a), and FIG. 173(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 along the line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 172(b). is a cross-sectional view of. 172(a) and 172(b) correspond to FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 172(a) and 173(a), in the first state, the axis of the rotating shaft 24877 is parallel to the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 173(a)). Both ends in the axial direction are pivotally supported by the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at the first inclination angle.

When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 172(a) and 173(a) toward the second state, the cam portion 24877b at one end of the rotating shaft 24877 in the axial direction increases as the rotation angle increases. gradually acts on the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810 to gradually increase the height position of the one axial end side of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side where the cam portion 24877b is formed).

As shown in FIGS. 172(b) and 173(b), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, the height position of the one axial end side of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side on which the cam portion 24877b is formed) reaches the maximum. , and the axis of the rotating shaft 24877 is tilted downward from the front base 24810 toward the intermediate base 24820 . As a result, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at a second tilt angle larger than the first tilt angle described above.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, as the seesaw member 840 rotates from the first state toward the second state, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be increased.

Here, as in the first embodiment described above, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal position (that is, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is maintained at a predetermined angle). case), if the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the ejection surface 846 is strong (large), the ejection of the game ball from the ejection surface 846 is hasty, and the second state cannot be reliably formed, while the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the ejection surface 846 is If is loose (small), the discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 is slowed down, and the residence time becomes long, so that the alternating switching between the first state and the second state is not performed smoothly.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is relatively loose (small) at the initial stage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rapid discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 (that is, to make the game ball stay on the discharge surface 846), and to make it easier to reliably form the second state. can.

On the other hand, in the final stage, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is relatively strong (large), and the game ball can be discharged quickly from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d. By shortening the time during which the ball is placed (that is, the time during which the second state is formed), the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in the horizontal posture has been described. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

174 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 25065 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 175 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 25065. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, a winning device 25065 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment has bearings 25816 and 24826 protruding from the rear surface of a front base 25810 and the front surface of an intermediate base 24820, respectively. These bearing portions 25816 and 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 25877 on their inner peripheral surfaces, and are formed in the same shape as each other.

The rotating shaft 25877 is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 25810 and the intermediate base 24820, and its axial length is the length of the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. Set to a dimension greater than the axial length. Therefore, the rotating shaft 25877 is fitted in the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the portions protruding from both ends of the bearing 841 in the axial direction are supported by the bearing portion 25816 of the front base 25810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 25820, respectively. (See FIG. 177).

Also, on the rear surface of the front base 25810, a push-up portion 25817 is provided to protrude on the side of the bearing portion 25816. As shown in FIG. The push-up portion 25817 is positioned on the locus of movement of the discharge surface 846 forming portion when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, and is discharged when the seesaw member 840 approaches the second state. It abuts against the lower surface of the surface 846 forming portion. Due to this contact, as will be described later, one side of the seesaw member 840 is pushed up by the push-up portion 25817, and the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is increased.

Next, the action of the push-up portion 25817 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

FIG. 176(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 with the seesaw member 840 forming the first state, and FIG. 176(b) is the winning device 25065 with the seesaw member 840 forming the second state. is a cross-sectional view of.

177(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 along the line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176(a), and FIG. 177(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 176(a). 177(c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 taken along line CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc in FIG. 176(b), and FIG. 177(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId in FIG. 176(b) is a sectional view of the winning device 25065 in FIG. 176(a) and 176(b) correspond to FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 176(a), 177(a), and 177(b), in the first state, since there is a gap between the seesaw member 840 and the push-up portion 25817, the rotating shaft 25877 177(a) left-right direction), both axial ends of the rotating shaft 25877 are supported by the bearing portion 25816 of the front cover 25810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively. be. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at the first inclination angle.

When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 176(a), 177(a), and 177(b) toward the second state, and the discharge surface 846 formation portion of the seesaw member 840 is lowered. , the lower surface of the portion forming the discharge surface 846 is brought into contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (not shown).

From this state, when the seesaw member 840 is further rotated toward the second state, the lower surface of the portion forming the discharge surface 846 is in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817, so that the seesaw member 840 rotates toward the rotation shaft 25877. 174 (left front side in FIG. 174, left side in FIG. 177(a)), and the discharge surface 846 forming portion is not in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (right rear side in FIG. 174). , right side of FIG. 177(b)).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176(b), 27(c), and 177(d), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, the one axial end side of the rotation shaft 25877 moves toward the inner periphery of the bearing portion 25816. It is lifted from the bottom surface, and the axis of the rotating shaft 25877 is tilted downward from the front base 25810 toward the intermediate base 24820 . As a result, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at a second tilt angle larger than the first tilt angle described above.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the initial stage (until the lower surface of the discharge surface 846 formation portion comes into contact with the push-up portion 25817). section), the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is maintained at the first inclination angle (that is, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is not changed), and the final stage (the part where the discharge surface 846 is formed 25817), the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be rapidly increased to the second inclination angle.

As a result, in the initial stage, it is possible to easily suppress the rapid discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 (that is, the game ball can be easily retained on the discharge surface 846), so that the second state can be formed more reliably. . On the other hand, in the final stage, the game ball can be quickly discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d easily, so the time when the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 (that is, the second state is formed) time) can be shortened, so that alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be performed more smoothly.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the groove 971 is recessed in the front surface of the frame plate substrate 910 in the third path M3 has been described. It is also possible to provide a protruding strip that is provided and extends in a substantially sawtooth shape when viewed from the front. In this case, as in the case of the recessed groove 971, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be guided along the outer surface of the ridge to meander left and right. Therefore, the falling speed of the game ball can be slowed down, and the movement of the game ball can be varied. Also, the ridges can be used as lenses for diffusing or condensing light.

In each of the embodiments described above, in the second state, the case where the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is positioned above the downward inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. However, in the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is aligned in the height direction with the downwardly inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 or positioned below the downwardly inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a. You may form so that it may carry out.

In the above-described third embodiment, the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 3662 is used to slide the third displacement member 3660 relative to the first displacement member 3630, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, a groove is provided in one of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660, a pin that slides along the groove is provided in the other of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660, and the pin for the groove may be used to slide the third displacement member 3660 relative to the first displacement member 3630.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed by the weight of the second displacement member 740 (action of gravity) has been described. Instead, the elastic force of an elastic spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring or an elastic body such as rubber or urethane is used to move the second displacement member 740 in either one direction or the other direction with respect to the first displacement member 730 . may be energized. Thereby, the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be stabilized.

In the tenth embodiment, the case of using the liquid LQ as the predetermined heavy object has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Other heavy objects may be those that can be displaced (for example, rolling or sliding) in the internal space of the retainer 10746 along the longitudinal direction as the posture of the retainer 10746 changes. Examples include spheres and cylindrical bodies made of metal. In that case, the internal space of retainer 10746 need not be sealed.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where a predetermined heavy load is held in the internal space of the retainer 10746 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The second displacement member 740 may be suspended from any position on the vertical line Z passing through G. Thus, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated about the rotation shaft 741 to one side or the other side, it is possible to displace a predetermined heavy object to the same side as the movement direction of the center of gravity G.

In the tenth embodiment described above, the retainer 10746 is arranged at a position where the center in the longitudinal direction thereof coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740, but this is not necessarily the case. However, it is preferable to position the center of the retainer 10746 in the longitudinal direction on the vertical line Z passing through the center of gravity G.

In the eleventh embodiment, the return operation of the second displacement member 740 to the crossing angle γ1 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed using the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP, but this is not necessarily the case. However, the biasing spring SP may be omitted and the movement may be performed by the weight of the second displacement member 740 (action of gravity).

In the twenty-fourth and twenty-fifth embodiments, in the first state, the rotating shaft 24877 is pivotally supported in a posture in which the axis is parallel to the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 173(a)). , but not necessarily limited to this, in the first state, the height position of one axial end of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side on which the cam portion 24877b is formed) is higher (or lower) than the other axial end. position may be set. That is, the above-described first tilt angle (the tilt angle at which the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the first state is tilted downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820) is the above-described second tilt angle (the second tilt angle). It suffices if the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the two states is formed to be able to increase to a greater inclination angle than the inclination angle downwardly inclined toward the ejection port 821d of the intermediate base 24820).

In the 21st and 22nd embodiments, a case where a sufficient gap is not formed between the rotating members 21870, 22870 and the front base 810 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A predetermined gap may be provided between the receiving plate 21872 and the pushing plate 21873 and the front base 810 . In this case, it is preferable to provide a predetermined gap only on the receiving plate 21872 side. This provides the same effect as in the twenty-third embodiment.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Right Rotation Unit 600 as an Example>
a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably formed with respect to the base member, a transmission member for transmitting driving force to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the transmission member In the game machine, the transmission member includes a drive pin, the first displacement member and the second displacement member include a first groove and a second groove, respectively, and the second displacement member includes a first groove and a second groove. The first groove includes an action section that receives action from the drive pin and a non-interference section that does not interfere with the drive pin. The second groove includes at least an action section that receives action from the drive pin. The first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on the base member in a posture in which the groove and the second groove are superimposed and the drive pin is inserted through the first groove and the second groove. Gaming machine A1 to play.

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A performance member having a transmission member that transmits and a driving means that imparts a driving force to the transmission member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are provided via the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, JP-A-2009-100994).

According to this game machine, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmitting member, the effecting member transmits the driving force from the transmitting member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member through the first groove and the second groove. is transmitted, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced with respect to the base member.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the first groove and the second groove are arranged side by side, the space required for arranging the first groove and the second groove is large, and the front view of the effect member is correspondingly increased. There was a problem that the outer shape in the case became large. In particular, in recent years, there has been a demand for larger liquid crystal display devices, and an increase in the outer shape of the effect member when viewed from the front hinders an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device, which is not preferable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on the base member in a posture in which the first groove and the second groove are superimposed (superimposed). Compared to the conventional product in which the grooves and the second grooves are arranged side by side, the space required for disposing the first grooves and the second grooves can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the outer size in a front view. In this case, even if the liquid crystal display device is required to be enlarged, the space in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) is relatively large. With the structure in which the two layers are superimposed, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape in a front view by using a relatively large space in the thickness direction, which is particularly effective for increasing the size of the liquid crystal display device.

Further, according to the gaming machine A1, since the drive pin is inserted through the superimposed first groove and the second groove, the driving force from the transmission member is transferred to the first displacement member and the second displacement member by one drive pin. , making it unnecessary to provide a drive pin for each of the first groove and the second groove. That is, the parts can be used in common, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

According to the game machine A1, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmission member, the driving force is transmitted from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member A member is displaced relative to the base member. In this case, in a state in which the action sections of the first groove and the second groove are acted upon by the transmission member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced, while only the action section of the second groove is affected by the transmission member. In a state of being acted upon (the transmission member does not interfere with the first groove due to the non-interference section), the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced.

In the gaming machine A1, the second displacement member is connected to a driven member displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and formed with the second groove, and to a driven portion thereof. A gaming machine A2 comprising a connecting displacement member displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and having a decorative portion.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the second displacement member includes a driven member displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and having the second groove formed thereon; A link structure can be formed by the driven member and the connecting displacement member, since the connecting displacement member is connected to the driven portion and displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member. Accordingly, when the driven member is driven by the transmission member, the decorative portion of the connecting displacement member can be largely displaced relative to the first displacement member.

A gaming machine A3 in the gaming machine A2, wherein the second displacement member can form a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are superimposed.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the second displacement member can form a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are overlapped. It is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape of the displacement member when viewed from the front.

In the game machine A3, the first displacement member is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an overhanging position, and the second displacement member has a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are superimposed. A gaming machine A4, characterized in that it is formed so as to be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member in the retracted position.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the second displacement member can be arranged behind the first displacement member in the retracted position in a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are superimposed. Since it is formed, it is possible to reduce the outer size of the first displacement member and the second displacement member arranged at the retracted position in a front view by the amount corresponding to the overlap.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A4, the connecting displacement member has an overhanging portion formed so as to overhang in the opposite direction to the decorative portion across a portion displaceably arranged to the first displacement member. A gaming machine A5 characterized by:

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A4, the connecting displacement member protrudes to the side opposite to the decorative portion across the portion displaceably arranged to the first displacement member. With the overhang formed, the overhang can act as a weight.

For example, when the driven portion is driven to lift the decorative portion of the connecting displacement member upward, the weight of the overhanging portion is used because the overhanging portion is formed on the side opposite to the decorative portion. , the decorative portion can be easily lifted upward. Therefore, the overhanging portion can be lifted quickly and the driving force required for lifting can be suppressed. In addition, after the decorative portion is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion and the weight of the overhanging portion can be hung together. The lifted posture can be stabilized and the driving force required to maintain the posture can be suppressed.

A game machine A6 in the game machine A5, wherein the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the protruding portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member. When displacing the displacement member, the projecting portion is brought into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member, so that rattling of the connecting displacement member (decorative portion) can be suppressed. In addition, the protruding portion serving as a weight can also play a role of suppressing rattling by coming into contact with the first displacement member, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing the parts cost accordingly. can be achieved.

A game machine A7, wherein in the game machine A6, the projecting portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, the protruding portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape, so that the weight and rigidity can be ensured while reducing the outer shape. can. Therefore, in a state where the projecting portion is hidden behind the back surface of the first displacement member (that is, in a state in which it is not visible from the front), the connecting displacement member can be displaced, and the function as a weight and the back surface of the first displacement member It is possible to reliably exhibit the function of suppressing rattling by coming into contact with.

In any one of game machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and a projecting portion that projects from an outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion. The first displacement member has a contact portion formed to be able to come into contact with the protrusion, the bearing portion pivotally supports the first displacement member in a raised state from the base member, and the protrusion is provided with the first displacement member. A game machine A8 characterized in that the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member is restricted within a predetermined range by the abutment of the abutment portion.

According to game machine A8, in the game machine according to any one of game machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the bearing portion supports the first displacement member. Since it is pivotally supported in a raised state from the base member, such raising makes it possible to form a space for disposing the second displacement member between the base member and the first displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to dispose the first displacement member and the second displacement member in an overlapping posture.

In this case, according to the game machine A8, the base member further includes a projecting portion formed to project from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, and the first displacement member is a contact portion formed to be able to contact the projecting portion. and the contact portion is brought into contact with the projection portion, whereby the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, in order to dispose the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a superimposed posture, the bearing portion that raises the first displacement member from the base member has a relatively high rigidity, and the outer peripheral side of the bearing portion has a A projecting portion is provided from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion where the dead space is formed, and the abutting portion is brought into contact with the projecting portion, thereby preventing the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member. The rigidity of the portion to be regulated can be ensured to improve the durability, and the dead space can be effectively used, so that the size can be reduced accordingly.

A game machine A9 in the game machine A8, wherein the projecting portion of the base member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the projecting portion of the base member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member, so when the first displacement member is displaced, , the projecting portion of the base member is brought into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member, thereby suppressing rattling of the first displacement member. In addition, the projecting portion, which serves to restrict the relative displacement of the first displacement member with respect to the base member, can also serve to suppress rattling by coming into contact with the first displacement member, thereby simplifying the structure. Therefore, the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

In particular, in the game machine A9 subordinate to the game machine A2, the second displacement member (the driven member and the connecting displacement member) is disposed on the first displacement member, so the first displacement member is the weight of the second displacement member. It is necessary to rotate with respect to the base member while supporting the base member, and rattling is likely to occur. Therefore, it is effective to have the protruding portion of the base member contact the rear surface of the first displacement member to suppress rattling of the first displacement member.

In the game machine A9, the first displacement member has its longitudinal one end side pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the protrusion of the base member is located at the edge portion of the longitudinal direction one end side of the first displacement member. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with its back surface.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of the game machine A9, one longitudinal end of the first displacement member is pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the projecting portion of the base member corresponds to one longitudinal end of the first displacement member. Since it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the side edge, when the first displacement member tilts due to its own weight, the projection can be arranged at a position where the tilting can be suppressed. As a result, rattling of the first displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

A game machine A11 in the game machine A10, wherein the projecting portion projects from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion and is connected to the front surface of the base member.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, the protrusion protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing and is connected to the front surface of the base member, so that the rigidity of the protrusion can be increased. can be done. In particular, when the first displacement member is tilted by its own weight, it is possible to increase the rigidity in the direction in which the tilting is supported (that is, the direction in which the projecting portion is pressed against the front surface of the base member). Sticking can be effectively suppressed.

A game machine A12 according to any one of the game machines A2 to A11, wherein the base member has an inclined surface formed by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side surface and the front surface thereof.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A11, the base member has an inclined surface formed by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side surface and the front surface. It is possible to prevent the second displacement member from being locked by the side surface of the base member and becoming unable to be displaced. In this case, in the present invention, the connecting displacement member of the second displacement member is displaceably arranged in a cantilevered state on the back surface of the first displacement member, so that the first displacement member and/or the second displacement member When displacing, the connecting displacement member of the second displacement member tends to swing in the direction of approaching and separating from the base member, and the connecting displacement member tends to be locked to the side surface of the base member. Therefore, the configuration in which the base member is provided with the inclined surface is particularly effective.

In the gaming machine A12, the second displacement member is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the base member protrudes from the front surface thereof and extends along the displacement direction of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A13 characterized by having a ridge.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effects of the game machine A12, the base member has a ridge projecting from the front surface and extending along the displacement direction of the second displacement member. can be brought into contact with the second displacement member. Therefore, compared to the case where the entire front surface of the base member comes into surface contact with the second displacement member, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed.

Here, since the second displacement member is made of a light-transmitting material, when displacing the connection displacement member and making it visible to the player, the second displacement member transmits the irradiated light to produce an effect. can increase In this case, when the second displacement member is displaced, if the entire front surface of the base member comes into contact with the connecting displacement member, the friction between the front surface of the base member and the front surface of the base member causes clouding of the connecting displacement member. The performance effect of transmitting light of the connecting displacement member is impaired. On the other hand, according to the game machine A12, a ridge is formed on the front surface of the base member, and only the tip of the ridge can be brought into contact with the connection displacement member, so that the connection displacement member rubs. can be partially cloudy due to As a result, it is possible to exhibit a performance effect by allowing light to pass through the connecting displacement portion.

In the gaming machine A13, the second displacement member includes a connection pin that connects the driven member and the connection displacement member and is formed of a metal material, and the ridge of the base member is configured so that the second displacement member A gaming machine A14, characterized in that it extends along the trajectory of the connecting pin when it is displaced.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effects of the game machine A13, the second displacement member includes a connection pin that connects the driven member and the connection displacement member and is formed of a metal material, is extended along the trajectory of the connecting pin when the second displacement member is displaced, so that the connecting pin can be brought into contact with the projecting tip of the ridge. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of cloudiness on the portion of the light-transmissive material of the connecting displacement member due to friction with the ridges, and to exhibit the presentation effect by allowing light to pass through the connecting displacement member. can be done.

In the game machine A13 or A14, a gear interposed between the drive means and the transmission member is provided, and the base member includes a gear receiving portion for supporting the gear in its internal space, and A gaming machine A15, wherein a gear receiving portion projects from the front surface of the base member, and the ridge extends to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion.

According to the game machine A15, in addition to the effects of the game machine A13 or A14, the ridge is extended to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion projecting from the front surface of the base member, so that the second displacement member It is possible to prevent the member from being locked by the gear receiving portion projecting from the side surface of the member and becoming unable to be displaced or hindered from displacing it. In other words, by providing a ridge on the front surface of the base member and extending the ridge to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion, the gear receiving portion can be projected from the front surface of the base member. can be done. As a result, the gear can be rotatably accommodated in the inner space of the base member while reducing the thickness dimension of the base member. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to fix the drive shaft of the drive means to the gear (that is, the gear is held in the gear receiving portion of the base member, so the drive shaft of the drive means only needs to be inserted through the gear). ), the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the first displacement member is positioned in front of the base member at a retracted position. It is formed so as to be displaceable between an overhanging position that overhangs in a direction away from the base member, and the rotating shaft of the first displacement member is disposed closer to the overhanging position than the rotating shaft of the transmission member. A gaming machine A16 characterized by:

According to the game machine A16, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the rotation shaft of the first displacement member is connected to the transmission member. , the area of the first displacement member protruding to the protruding position can be increased, while the first displacement member can be positioned at any position between the retracted position and the protruding position. Even in the case of , the transmission member can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member to make it easier to make it invisible to the player.

In the game machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member is arranged to rotate the second displacement member when the second displacement member is extended to the extended position. A gaming machine A17 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the bearing.

According to the game machine A17, in addition to the effects of the game machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member has the second displacement member that extends to the projecting position. In this case, the second displacement member is formed so as to abut against the bearing portion of the base member, so that the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member, which serves to transmit the driving force of the driving means, can also serve as a stopper that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member within a predetermined range. It is possible to simplify and reduce the part cost accordingly.

Further, the bearing portion is a portion for raising the first displacement member from the base member and arranging the first displacement member and the second displacement member in an overlapping posture, and has relatively high rigidity. Since a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side of the transmission member, the rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be ensured by adopting a configuration in which the transmission member abuts against the bearing portion. As a result, durability can be improved, dead space can be effectively used, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine A17, the transmission member is provided with a recess corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing, and when the second displacement member projects to the projecting position, the bearing is received in the recess. A gaming machine A18 characterized in that it is formed in such a way that:

According to the game machine A18, in addition to the effects of the game machine A17, the transmission member is provided with a concave portion corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion, and when the second displacement member is overhanging to the overhanging position, the bearing Since the portion is formed receivably in the recess, the movable range of the transmission member can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the displacement amounts of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be secured. In other words, the position of the rotating shaft of the transmission member can be brought close to the bearing portion while ensuring the movable range of the transmission member. It is possible to easily form a state in which the transmission member is hidden behind the first displacement member (that is, a state in which it is not visible from the front) while being displaced between the position and the extended position.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the action sections of the first groove and the second groove are acted upon by the transmission member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are operated. After each displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the action section of the second groove is acted upon by the transmission member, and the non-interference section causes the transmission member to be non-interfering with the first groove, A game machine A19 characterized in that the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in a second direction, and the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions. .

According to the game machine A19, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced in the first direction, and then the second One displacement member is stopped and a second displacement member is displaced in a second direction. In this case, since the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A18, the inertia accompanying the stop of the first displacement member displaced in the first direction The force can be canceled by the inertia force when the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the parts due to the action of the inertial force and improve the durability.

In the game machine A19, one or more gears are provided between the driving means and the transmission member to transmit the driving force, and the weight of the first displacement member is made heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A20 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A19, the weight of the first displacement member is made heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. The heavy first displacement member can be stopped first, and the light weight second displacement member can be stopped last. Thereby, the load on the gear can be reduced.

That is, from a state in which the transmission member is driven in the forward direction and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are each displaced in the first direction, the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. Since the transition to the state of being displaced in the direction is performed by the transmission member moving from the transmission section of the first groove to the non-interference section, the rotation of the driving means and the gear is continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member is stopped, no load is applied to the gear. On the other hand, the transition from the state in which the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction to the state in which the second displacement member is also stopped depends on the rotation of the driving means and the gear. In this case, the only member that is stopped is the light weight second displacement member, so the load on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A20, a third displacement member disposed displaceably on the first displacement member is provided, and the third displacement member is displaced under the action of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A21 characterized by:

According to the game machine A21, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A20, the third displacement member is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member, and the third displacement member is the second displacement member. Since it is displaced by the action of the member, the third displacement member can also be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member.

In the gaming machine A21, one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member includes a drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member and the third displacement member includes a third groove, and the third groove is , a game machine A22 comprising an action section receiving action from the drive pin and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere.

According to the game machine A22, in addition to the effects of the game machine A21, one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member has a drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member and the third displacement member has the third groove. Since the third groove has an action section that receives action from the drive pin and a non-interference section that does not interfere with the drive pin, both the second displacement member and the third displacement member are displaced with respect to the first displacement member. and a mode in which only one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member is displaced with respect to the first displacement member.

A gaming machine A23 characterized in that in the gaming machine A21, the second displacement member is displaceably disposed on the third displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A23, since the second displacement member is displaceably disposed on the third displacement member, when the third displacement member is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member, The relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be superimposed on the relative displacement of the third displacement member with respect to the first displacement member, and as a result, the first It is possible to increase the amount of relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the displacement member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention, Taking the Counterclockwise Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
a base member, a first displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the first displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member and a connecting member connecting between the base member and the second displacement member, wherein the second displacement member is displaced along with the displacement of the first displacement member. In a game machine that is relatively displaced with respect to a first displacement member, the connection member includes a first connection member having one end connected to the base member and the other end connected to the other end of the first connection member. and a connection second member having one end connected to the second displacement member, and a connection portion between the other ends of the connection first member and the connection second member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member A gaming machine B1 characterized by:

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member arranged displaceably on the base member, a second displacement member arranged displaceably on the first displacement member, There is a game machine provided with driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and a connecting member for connecting between the base member and the second displacement member (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013). -17886).

According to this game machine, when the first displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the connection member acts between the base member and the second displacement member, thereby displacing the first displacement member. , the second displacement member can be displaced relative to the first displacement member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the first displacement member is displaced in a direction away from the base member, the connection member connecting between the base member and the second displacement member is exposed. There is a problem that it becomes visible to people, and the appearance is spoiled.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the connecting member includes a connecting first member having one end connected to the base member, and the other end connected to the other end of the connecting first member and to the second displacement member. and a connecting second member to which one end is connected, and the connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member and the connecting second member is connected to the first displacement member so as to be displaceable, so that the first displacement member is the base. Even when displaced in a direction away from the member, the connecting member (the first connecting member and the second connecting member) can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connection member from being exposed and the appearance from being spoiled.

In the gaming machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably arranged on the base member, and the second connecting member of the connecting member is slidably arranged on the first displacement member. Gaming machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member, and the second member connected to the connection member is slidably displaceable to the first displacement member. Therefore, when the first displacement member is rotated with respect to the base member, when the amount of rotation is large (that is, the amount of displacement of the first connecting member and the second connecting member needs to be increased) Even so, it is possible to avoid being viewed by the player by maintaining the state in which the second connecting member of the connecting member is disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second connecting member of the connecting member from being exposed and impairing the appearance.

Further, even when an electrical connection line is wired to the first displacement member, the second connection member of the connection member is slidably disposed on the first displacement member so that the connection line and the second connection member interference with can be easily suppressed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure a large space for wiring the connection lines in order to avoid interference, it is possible to reduce the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member accordingly.

In the game machine B1 or B2, a driving body driven by the driving means is provided, the driving body is connected to the first connecting member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is transferred from the driving body to the first connecting member. A game machine B3 characterized in that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by being transmitted to the member.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the driving body driven by the driving means is provided, the driving body is connected to the connecting first member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is Since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by transmission from the driving body to the connecting first member, it is possible to reduce the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member.

That is, the connection member is positioned between the first displacement member and the base member because the connection portion between the other ends of the first connection member and the second connection member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member. When the driving body is connected to the first displacement member, the driving body and the connecting member may interfere with each other. Therefore, it is necessary to connect the driving body to the first displacement member at a position that does not overlap the displacement trajectory of the connecting member. There is Therefore, the front view shape of the first displacement member needs to have a size that includes the displacement trajectory of the connection member and the connection portion to which the driving body is connected. do. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B3, it is not necessary to avoid interference between the driving body and the connecting member, and the front view shape of the first displacement member only needs to have a size corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the connecting member. Since it is not necessary to include a connecting portion to which the driving body is connected, the front view shape of the first displacement member can be reduced accordingly.

In game machines B1 to B3, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member and is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, and the base member serves as a base-side engagement member. and a displacement-side engaging member formed to be engageable with the base-side engaging member in a state in which the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, of the first displacement member or the second displacement member. A game machine B4 characterized in that one side is provided with the game machine B4.

Here, in the above-described conventional game machine, the connecting member connects the base member and the second displacement member in an erected state, and in the retracted position, at a position relatively distant from the rotation axis of the first displacement member, A connecting member connects the base member and the second displacement member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member tries to tilt the portion on the opposite side of the rotation shaft (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, there will be a gap between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

However, in the game machine B4, since the connection portion between the other ends of the connection first member and the connection second member is connected to the first displacement member so as to be displaceable, the first displacement member is displaceable at the retracted position. With the rotating shaft as the base end, the portion opposite to the rotating shaft (that is, the second displacement member side) is the free end. Therefore, due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member, the portion of the first displacement member opposite to the rotating shaft (second displacement member side) tends to tilt away from the base member.

In this case, according to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B3, the base member includes the base-side engagement member, and one of the first displacement member and the second displacement member is the displacement-side engagement member. When the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are formed so as to be able to engage with each other. It is possible to suppress tilting of the portion (on the side of the second displacement member) in a direction away from the base member.

A gaming machine B5, wherein the second displacement member comprises the displacement side engaging member in the gaming machine B4.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, since the second displacement member includes the displacement side engagement member, the engagement position between the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member is set to the first position. It can be located relatively far from the axis of rotation of the displacement member. Therefore, by utilizing the engagement of the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, the portion of the first displacement member opposite to the rotation shaft (second displacement member side) tilts in a direction away from the base member. can be effectively suppressed.

In the gaming machine B5, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are formed by bending a base portion erected from the front surface of the base member or the rear surface of the second displacement member and bending the tip of the base portion. and a bent portion having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface, and the engaging surfaces of the bent portions are engaged with each other by displacing the first displacement member from the extended position to the retracted position. , the engagement surface of the bent portion of the base-side engaging member is inclined in a direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engaging tip side thereof, or (and) engagement of the bent portion of the displacement-side engaging member. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that the surface is inclined in a direction away from the back surface of the second displacement member toward the engaging tip side thereof.

Here, when the second displacement member includes a displacement-side engagement member as in the game machine B5, the engagement position between the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member is shifted from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. Since the positions are relatively distant, it becomes difficult to engage the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member due to the shaking of the first displacement member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, the engagement surface of the bent portion of the base-side engagement member is inclined in a direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engagement tip side, or (and) displacement-side engagement. The engagement surface of the bent portion of the member is inclined in a direction away from the rear surface of the second displacement member toward the engaging tip side, that is, the engagement surface of the bent portion and the front surface of the base member or the rear surface of the second displacement member. Since the distance between is widened toward the engagement tip side, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, even if the first displacement member shakes, the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member can be easily engaged.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine B6, the engagement surface of the bent portion of at least one of the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member is inclined as described above, so that the first displacement member moves toward the retracted position. When displaced by the second displacement member, the second displacement member can be brought closer to the base member along with the inclination of the engagement surface of the bent portion. As a result, at the retracted position, the projection dimension of the second displacement member from the base member can be suppressed, and rattling of the second displacement member can be absorbed to maintain its posture.

In the gaming machine B5 or B6, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member comprise a base erected from the front surface of the base member or the rear surface of the second displacement member, and a tip of the base that is bent to bent portions having inner surfaces serving as engagement surfaces, and the engagement surfaces of the bent portions are engaged with each other by displacing the first displacement member from the extended position to the retracted position. A gaming machine B7 characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving a bent portion of an opponent is formed on the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5 or B6, the front surface of the base member and the rear surface of the second displacement member are formed with a receiving portion for receiving the bent portion of the opponent. In a state in which the displacement member is arranged at the retracted position (a state in which the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are engaged), the bent portion is received by the receiving portion and approaches the base member of the second displacement member. Directional displacement can be allowed. Therefore, the standing dimensions of the base portions of the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are increased to make it easier to engage the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, while at the retracted position, the second Damage due to collision can be prevented by allowing displacement of the displacement member in a direction approaching the base member.

In any one of game machines B3 to B7, the displacement-side engagement member is engaged with the first displacement member in a state where the first displacement member is arranged at the extended position. Gaming machine B8.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B3 to B7, in the state where the first displacement member is arranged at the projecting position, the displacement side engaging member is the first displacement member. Engaged, that is, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be coupled via the displacement-side engaging member. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress rattling of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member at the overhang position. At the retracted position, the displacement-side engaging member engages with the base-side engaging member to couple the second displacement member to the base member. Since the member can also play the role of connecting the member to the first displacement member, the structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B8, an interposing means interposed between the second displacement member and one end of the second connection member is provided, and the interposing means is adapted to the base member. Different modes of action occurring between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or in the second direction. A game machine B9 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the interposing means interposed between the second displacement member and the one end of the connecting second member, and the interposing means is the action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and in the second direction with respect to the base member. Since the modes are different, depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or in the second direction with respect to the base member, the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member is changed. can be different.

In the gaming machine B9, the interposing means includes a guided portion provided at one end of the first displacement member or the second connection member, and one end of the first displacement member or the second connection member. a guide portion disposed on the other side for guiding the guided portion, and when the first displacement member is displaced in a first direction and in a second direction with respect to the base member, A gaming machine B10 characterized in that by guiding the guide portion along different paths of the guide portion, the mode of action occurring between the second displacement member and the one end of the second connecting member is differentiated.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B9, the intervening means displaces the first displacement member in the first direction and in the second direction with respect to the base member. By guiding the guiding portion along different paths of the guided portion, the mode of action generated between the second displacement member and the one end of the second connecting member is made different. It is possible to easily change the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to one displacement member. That is, the degree of freedom in designing can be increased.

In the gaming machine B9, the interposition means acts between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member. is generated, and when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is released. Gaming machine B11.

According to the game machine B11, when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member, the interposition means causes the action between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member. On the other hand, when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and the one end of the connecting second member is released. It is possible to make the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member largely different between when the member is displaced in the first direction and when the member is displaced in the second direction.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Center Frame 86 as an Example>
Formed so as to be displaceable between a game board having a game area on the front and an opening formed in the center, a retracted position on the back side of the game board, and an overhanging position visible through the opening. and a displacement member, comprising a center frame made of a light-transmitting material and fitted in the opening of the game board, the center frame forming part of the game area. A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising an area forming section.

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a game board having a game area on the front and an opening formed in the center, a retracted position on the back side of the game board, and a tension that can be visually recognized through the opening. There is a game machine provided with a displacement member formed to be displaceable between out positions (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176580).

According to this game machine, the opening of the game board is made larger than the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device to secure an area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since it is necessary to secure an area for the balls to flow down in the game area, there is a limit to enlarging the opening of the game board, and the area where the displacement member can be visually recognized is limited. There was a problem that it could not be sufficiently secured.

On the other hand, the game machine C1 is provided with a center frame made of a light-transmitting material and fitted inside the opening of the game board, and the center frame is provided with an area forming portion that forms a part of the game area. Therefore, the displacement member can be visually recognized through the region forming portion. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure an area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized while securing an area for the ball to flow down in the game area.

In the game machine C1, the area forming part of the center frame forms a continuous area from the inner edge of the opening of the game board to the outer edge of the game area as part of the game area. C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the area forming part of the center frame forms a continuous area from the inner edge of the opening of the game board to the outer edge of the game area as part of the game area. Therefore, it is possible to secure a maximum area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized.

In the gaming machine C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame is set to have a width allowing only one game ball to pass through.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows only one game ball to pass through, so that the opening of the game board ( That is, it is possible to ensure the maximum possible area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized (without passing through the center frame).

In the game machine C2 or C3, the game machine C4 is characterized in that the region forming portion of the center frame comprises a downstream wall portion erected on the downstream side of the region and formed integrally with the center frame.

Here, if the center frame is made of a resin material and nails cannot be implanted, the speed of the game ball flowing down increases, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C4, since the area forming part of the center frame is provided with a downstream wall part erected on the downstream side of the area, the game ball flowing down the area forming part hits the downstream wall part. can be brought into contact. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2 or C3, the falling speed of the game ball can be reduced to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball. In addition, since the downstream wall portion is integrally formed with the center frame, it can be easily molded by molding, and the fastening and fixing of separate parts can be eliminated, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. .

In the game machine C4, the region forming portion of the center frame has a side wall portion which is erected in the region and defines a passage through which game balls flow down, and which is integrally formed with the center frame. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being connected to a wall.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the area forming part of the center frame is provided with a side wall part which is erected in the area and defines a passage through which game balls flow down, and the side wall part is located downstream. Since it is connected to the wall, it is possible to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall that receives the game ball flowing down. This can prevent the downstream wall from being damaged. In addition, since the connecting wall portion is integrally formed with the center frame, it can be easily formed by molding, and the fastening and fixing of separate parts can be eliminated, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. . Furthermore, since the side wall portion which plays the role of partitioning the passage through which the game balls flow down can also play the role of increasing the rigidity of the downstream wall portion, the structure can be simplified and the part cost can be reduced accordingly. be able to.

In the game machine C5, an inner rail is provided to guide a game ball launched from the front surface of the game board to the game area, and the side wall portion is arranged in parallel with the inner rail. Machine C6.

Here, in the conventional game machine, the mode in which the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail after colliding with the nail and bouncing, and the speed is relatively slow, and this causes damage to the inner rail. There was no problem such as inviting On the other hand, in the present invention, in order to maximize the area where the displacement member can be visually recognized, the width of the area forming portion forming a part of the game area is narrow (for example, only one game ball is allowed to pass through). width). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed by the area forming section. Therefore, on the upstream side of the area forming section, it is necessary to guide the game balls flowing down the game area toward the area forming section. , and the inner rail may bend.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C6, since the side wall portion is arranged side by side with the inner rail, the game ball flowing down the game area is guided toward the area forming portion, and as a result, the game ball is directed toward the inner rail. Even if the game ball falls down, the side wall catches the game ball and prevents it from colliding with the inner rail. As a result, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5, it is possible to suppress the bending of the inner rail.

In the gaming machine C5 or C6, a light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the area forming portion of the center frame and formed to emit light, and the side wall portion emits light emitted from the light emitting means. A game machine C7 characterized in that it is formed to function as a light guide leading to the front side of the game area.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5 or C6, the side wall portion is formed to function as a light guide that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front side of the game area. It is possible to demonstrate the effect of directing by. In particular, in the game machine C7 subordinate to the game machine C6, the side wall portion is arranged side by side with the inner rail, so that the inner rail can reduce the leakage of light, and the amount of light that can be guided can be increased accordingly. . As a result, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the light.

In the game machine C7, the light emitting means is arranged on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is the rear surface of the region forming portion of the center frame.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machine C7, the light emitting means is arranged on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is the rear surface of the region forming portion of the center frame. is placed at the retracted position, the displacement member is visible through the region forming portion of the center frame, and the light emitted from the light emitting means of the displacement member is guided through the side wall portion. can be visualized. As a result, the effect of lighting can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C8, the area forming portion of the center frame defines a passage which is erected in the area and through which game balls flow down, and which is formed integrally with the center frame. A game machine C9 characterized in that one or a plurality of protrusions are protruded from the opposing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions.

Here, when the center frame is made of a resin material and nails cannot be implanted in the region forming portion, the speed of the game ball flowing down the passage partitioned by the pair of side wall portions increases, and the falling game ball is played. difficult for people to see.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C9, since one or a plurality of protrusions are protrudingly provided on the facing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions, when the game ball flows down the passage partitioned by the pair of side wall portions In addition, the game ball can be made to collide with the protrusions to hinder its flow. As a result, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C8, the falling speed of the game balls can be slowed down, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game balls.

A gaming machine C10 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C9, the projections on one facing surface and the projections on the other facing surface of the pair of side wall portions are arranged in a zigzag pattern.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9, the projections on one facing surface of the pair of side wall portions and the projections on the other facing surface are arranged in a zigzag manner, so that the pair of side wall portions are partitioned. When the game ball flows down the passage, the game ball is caused to alternately collide with left and right projections, thereby making the flowing down game ball meander. As a result, in addition to the effects of the game machine C9, the falling speed of the game ball can be made slower so that the player can easily see the falling game ball, and the flowing game ball can be seen in the direction perpendicular to the flowing direction. It can be displaced to change the movement of the game ball.

In the game machine C10, the game machine C11 is characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a concave groove that is concavely formed in the front surface thereof and extends in a substantially sawtooth shape.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is recessed in the front surface thereof and has a concave groove extending in a substantially sawtooth shape, so that the area forming portion can be used as a game. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the inner surface of the concave groove to meander. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be slowed down, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball. In addition, according to the game machine C11 subordinate to the game machine C7, the recessed groove can be used as a lens to guide the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front of the game area, so that the effect of the light can be exhibited. can do.

In the game machine C11, the game machine C12 is characterized in that the concave groove is arranged such that the bent portion thereof is displaced from the protrusion in the flowing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effects of the game machine C11, the bent portion of the recessed groove is displaced from the projection in the direction in which the game ball flows, so the game ball flows down the area forming portion. In this case, the meandering game ball guided by the inner surface of the groove can easily collide alternately with the protrusions. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of the concave groove and the action of the projection. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be made slower, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball. In addition, it is possible to increase the change in the motion of the game ball.

In the game machine C10, the game machine C13 is characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a ridge projecting from the front surface thereof and extending in a substantially sawtooth shape.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a ridge projecting from the front surface and extending in a substantially sawtooth shape, so that the area forming portion can be used as a game. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the outer surface of the ridge to meander. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be slowed down, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball. Further, according to the game machine C13 subordinate to the game machine C7, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be guided to the front of the game area by using the ridge as a lens, and the effect of the light can be exhibited. can do.

In the game machine C13, the game machine C14 is characterized in that the bent portion of the protruding line is aligned with the projection in a flowing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine C14, in addition to the effects of the game machine C13, the bent portion of the ridge is aligned with the protrusion in the flowing direction of the game ball, so the game ball flows down the area forming portion. In this case, the meandering game ball guided by the outer surface of the ridge can easily collide alternately with the protrusions. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of the ridges and the action of the protrusions. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be made slower, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball. In addition, it is possible to increase the change in the motion of the game ball.

In any one of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the terminal end side of the groove or the ridge is arranged so that its extending direction overlaps with the downstream wall portion and faces the exit of the passage partitioned by the pair of side wall portions. Characterized game machine C15.

According to the game machine C15, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C11 to C14, the terminal end side of the recessed groove or the ridge overlaps the downstream wall portion in the extending direction and is partitioned by the pair of side wall portions. Since the outlet of the passage is oriented, the game ball guided to the end side of the concave groove or the ridge can collide with the downstream wall from an oblique direction, thereby suppressing the bouncing of the game ball. The game ball can be made to flow down toward the exit of the passage while reducing the flow speed. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly discharged from the outlet of the passage.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Winning Device 65 as an Example>
A first seesaw member having one end side and the other end side rotatably supported by a rotating shaft is provided, and the seesaw member is lowered at one end side and raised at the other end side in an unloaded state. The seesaw member in a gaming machine that forms a state and forms a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered by placing a game ball on the other end side of the rotating shaft. The seesaw member has a receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided by the guiding means, and the receiving surface is positioned closer to the one end than the rotating shaft. Gaming machine D1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side. While forming a first state in which the other end side is raised while the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft, the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered A second state There is a gaming machine that forms a (for example, JP-A-2007-283136).

According to this gaming machine, when a game ball is dropped onto the seesaw member in the first state and placed between the rotating shaft and the other end, the weight of the game ball causes The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form the second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is ejected, the other end side is raised and the one end side is lowered to return to the first state. In other words, the weight of the dropped game ball can be used to alternately appear the first state and the second state, and an effect is produced by an action in which one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member are displaced up and down. It can be carried out.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the second state is maintained in which the other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised, and the first state and the second state are maintained. There was a problem that it was not possible to alternately switch between

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since the receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided from the guide means is located on the one end side of the rotating shaft, the other end side of the seesaw member is lowered and the one end side is raised. Even in the second state, the one end side can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving surface. That is, it is possible to form the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is formed so as to be able to deliver the game ball to the other end side when receiving the game ball guided from the guide means in the first state. Game machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is formed so as to be able to deliver the game ball to the other end when receiving the game ball guided from the guiding means in the first state. Therefore, switching from the first state to the second state can be reliably performed.

Examples of a configuration in which the game ball can be delivered to the other end include a configuration in which the receiving surface is inclined downward from one end to the other end even in the first state, a projection formed on the receiving surface, For example, the protrusion is formed in a shape that bounces the game ball guided from the guide means toward the other end side.

The game machine D1 or D2 includes a rotatably pivotally supported decorative member, one end of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the decorative member rotates around the rotation axis of the seesaw member. is displaced.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, it is provided with a rotatably pivotally supported decorative member, one end of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the rotation axis of the seesaw member is the center. Since a link mechanism is formed in which the decorative member is displaced in accordance with the rotation, the movable range of the decorative member can be expanded according to the link ratio, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Here, in order to reliably alternately switch the seesaw member between the first state and the second state, the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised when the no-load state is established. It is preferable to be able to return the seesaw member early. In this case, according to the gaming machine D3, since the decorative member is connected to one end of the seesaw member, the weight of the decorative member is applied to the one end of the seesaw member to lower the one end. be able to. Therefore, in the no-load state, the seesaw member can be quickly returned to the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. Alternate switching between states can be easily performed.

The weight of the decorative member prevents one end of the seesaw member from rising (forming the second state). is placed on the other end side, it is possible to form a second state in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the guide means includes a passage through which the game balls pass, and on the terminal end side of the passage, a rolling roller that extends in a substantially horizontal direction and on which the game balls roll. A game machine D4 is characterized in that a horizontal passage having a guide surface is formed, and a game ball rolling on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is guided substantially horizontally to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machines D1 to D3, the guide means has a passage through which the game balls pass, so a plurality of game balls can be stored using the passage. , the plurality of game balls can be sequentially guided from the passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

However, even in this case, in the form in which the game balls are guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member by falling from above, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, the plurality of game balls will fall on the receiving surface. The seesaw member cannot be alternately switched between the first state and the second state.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D4, a horizontal passage extending substantially horizontally and having a rolling guide surface on which game balls roll is formed on the end side of the passage, and the horizontal passage rolls. Since game balls rolling on the dynamic guide surface are guided substantially horizontally to the receiving surface of the seesaw member, they can be guided one by one from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member (that is, the receiving surface is horizontal). One ball at a time can be received from the passage in order), and it is possible to avoid stacking a plurality of game balls on the receiving surface. Therefore, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member.

In the gaming machine D4, the guide means includes an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extending in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, and the length of extension of the horizontal passage is is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4, the guide means includes an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extending in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, Since the extension length of the horizontal passage is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the passage, the game balls are placed one by one on the receiving surface of the seesaw member. It is possible to provide guidance while keeping an interval.

That is, since the extension length of the horizontal passage is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, the horizontal passage can be in a state in which only one game ball exists, and the extension of the horizontal passage can be reduced. Since the installation direction and the extension direction of the upstream passage are different directions, when the ball flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction, It is possible to lengthen the time required to flow into the horizontal passage. Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member, the game ball behind the upstream passage flows into the horizontal passage while taking time to change direction, and after that, A game ball is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, the later game ball is spaced from the previous game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member one by one while being spaced apart.

In the game machine D4 or D5, the game machine D6 is characterized in that, at least in the second state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned above the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4 or D5, at least in the second state (state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered), the receiving surface of the seesaw member rolls in the horizontal path. Since a step is formed between the receiving surface and the rolling guide surface located above the guide surface, the game ball rolling on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. When it is played, the game ball can be run on the receiving surface (collision with the step), and the receiving surface of the seesaw member can be easily lowered by using this running operation (collision). As a result, it is possible to easily form the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised.

In the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path or positioned below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path. Characterized game machine D7.

Here, the fact that the seesaw member is in the first state means that the seesaw member is in an unloaded state, and the game ball received by the receiving surface after being guided from the horizontal passage is quickly sent out to the other end side. It means that the weight of the game ball is required to act on the other end side of the rotating shaft to lower the other end side (to form the second state).

In this case, according to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path or the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path. Since it is positioned below the dynamic guide surface, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, unlike the case of the second state, the game ball does not need to ride on the receiving surface (collide with the step), and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly sent out to the other end side, and as a result, it is possible to easily form the second state in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

In addition, in the first state, it is preferable that the receiving surface of the seesaw member is flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. When the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage, the game ball guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage falls onto the receiving surface of the seesaw member. This is because the ball bounces, resulting in a time lag and an increased load on the rotating shaft of the seesaw member due to the impact of the drop.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member is formed such that the other end side thereof is bent upward in a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft. Machine D8.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member has the other end bent upward in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotation shaft. Since it is formed, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

That is, the seesaw member, if the downward inclination of the other end side of the rotating shaft is insufficient, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side (that is, the other end side is lowered and the second state is formation time) is lengthened, and alternating switching between the first state and the second state is hindered. However, if the entire area on the other end side of the rotating shaft is inclined downward, the other end side protrudes from the space allowed for disposing the seesaw member (that is, the space required for disposing the seesaw member increases. ). On the other hand, if the length from the rotating shaft to the other end is shortened so as to fit within the space allowed for the arrangement of the seesaw member, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end (that is, Since the other end side is lowered and the time during which the second state is formed is shortened and the formation of the second state becomes uncertain, alternating switching between the first state and the second state is hindered. In addition, in order to fit the seesaw member in the space allowed for disposing the seesaw member while ensuring the length from the rotating shaft to the other end side, the downward inclination of the other end side from the rotating shaft is insufficient. .

On the other hand, by forming the other end side of the seesaw member in a shape that bends upward in a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft, the problems described above can be resolved, and as a result, It is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D8, the seesaw member is provided with an inlet into which game balls rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side are introduced, and the other end side of the seesaw member is provided with the above-mentioned A game machine D9, characterized in that a pawl portion is protrudingly formed so as to be capable of switching a rolling direction of a game ball rolled from a rotating shaft toward the other end side to a direction toward the inflow port.

According to the game machine D9, in any one of the game machines D1 to D8, the other end side of the seesaw member has a rolling direction of the game ball rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side toward the inlet. Since the pawl is formed to be switchable in direction, the game ball can be quickly introduced into the inlet. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the seesaw member (that is, the time during which the other end side is lowered and the second state is formed) becomes too long, resulting in the first state and the second state. It is possible to suppress the inhibition of alternating switching between and.

In the game machine D9, the game machine D10 is characterized in that the pawl portion is biased toward the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effects of the game machine D9, the pawl portion is disposed on the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, so that the rolling position of the game ball is aligned with the seesaw member. Even if there is variation in the width direction, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member (that is, the time during which the other end side is lowered and the second state is formed). It can be easily made constant.

That is, the pawl portion is biased toward the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, so that the game ball that rolls on the back side in the width direction of the seesaw member (opposite side to the inflow port) is Since the distance to the inlet in the width direction of the seesaw member is long, it is made to collide with the claw at an early stage and roll to the inlet, while the front of the seesaw member in the width direction (closer to the inlet) rolls. Since the ball has a short distance to the inlet in the width direction of the seesaw member, it is possible to delay the collision with the claw. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member can be made to be equally close.

As a result, even if the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member (that is, the other end side is time during which the second state is formed) can be easily made constant.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inlet into which the game ball rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side is introduced, and the width of the inlet is equal to the diameter of the game ball. A gaming machine D11 characterized in that it is set to a size larger than double.

According to the game machine D11, in any of the game machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inlet into which game balls rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side are introduced, and the width of the inlet is is set to a dimension larger than twice the diameter of the game ball, so that the next game ball rolls further toward the other end side while the previous game ball exists on the other end side of the seesaw member. In this case, each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the inlet. For example, even if a later game ball collides with a previous game ball and these game balls roll into the inlet at the same time, they can be made to flow in smoothly.

In the game machine D11, the game machine D12 is characterized in that the height of the inflow port is set to be larger on the rotating shaft side than on the other end side of the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D11, the height of the inlet is set to be larger on the rotating shaft side than on the other end of the seesaw member. Even when the next game ball rolls further toward the other end side and collides with the previous game ball existing on the other end side of the seesaw member, each of these game balls is smoothly moved to the inflow port. can flow in. That is, even if the game ball bounces up after colliding with the previous game ball, the height of the inlet is increased on the side of the rotating shaft, so that the height of the game ball can be used to catch the subsequent game ball. It can be ejected smoothly. On the other hand, even if the previous game ball collides with the next game ball, it is difficult to bounce up, so by reducing the height dimension on the other end side, the previous game ball smoothly flows into the inlet. In addition, the space required for the inlet can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

Any one of the game machines D1 to D12 is characterized by comprising suppressing means for suppressing guidance of a game ball from the guide means to the seesaw member when the seesaw member is arranged at least in the second state. Game machine D13.

According to the game machine D13, in any one of the game machines D1 to D12, when the seesaw member is arranged at least in the second state, the game machine D13 is provided with the suppressing means for suppressing the guidance of the game ball from the guide means to the seesaw member. , the time for the game ball on the other end side of the seesaw member to be kicked can be secured. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine D13, the guide means includes a delivery port for delivering game balls to the seesaw member, and the suppressing means includes a restricting portion disposed closer to one end of the seesaw member than the rotating shaft, When the seesaw member is rotated to at least a second state, at least a portion of the restricting portion projects to the delivery port, thereby suppressing delivery of the game ball from the delivery port to the seesaw member. Gaming machine D14.

According to the game machine D14, in addition to the effects of the game machine D13, the suppressing means includes a regulating portion arranged on the one end side of the seesaw member relative to the rotation shaft, and the seesaw member is rotated at least to the second state. By projecting at least a part of the regulating portion to the delivery port, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port to the seesaw member is suppressed, so that the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. That is, the seesaw member can also serve as a mechanism for projecting the restricting portion into the delivery port, and a driving mechanism for displacing the restricting portion and a control means for controlling the displacement timing thereof can be eliminated.

The state in which the restricting portion protrudes into the delivery port and the delivery of the game ball is suppressed means that the game machine cannot pass through the delivery port and the game ball can pass through the delivery port. Including both. Even in the latter case (passable), the regulation portion protrudes into the delivery port and narrows the passage width of the delivery port so that the game ball collides with the inner wall of the delivery port and the outer wall of the regulation portion. Since the game ball is delivered from the delivery port, throwing of the game ball is suppressed. That is, the game balls in a continuous state can be separated.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Winning Device 65 as an Example>
A first seesaw member having one end side and the other end side rotatably supported by a rotating shaft is provided, and the seesaw member is lowered at one end side and raised at the other end side in an unloaded state. A gaming machine that forms a second state in which a game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft so that one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered, wherein the rotating shaft A game machine E1 characterized by comprising a discharge means for easily discharging a game ball placed on the other end side of the game machine E1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side. While forming a first state in which the other end side is raised while the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft, the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered A second state There is a gaming machine that forms a (for example, JP-A-2007-283136).

According to this gaming machine, when a game ball is dropped onto the seesaw member in the first state and placed between the rotating shaft and the other end, the weight of the game ball causes The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form the second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is ejected, the other end side is raised and the one end side is lowered to return to the first state. That is, the weight of the dropped game ball can be used to alternately appear the first state and the second state, and the action of moving one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member up and down is produced. It can be carried out.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the second state is maintained in which the other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised, and the first state and the second state are maintained. There was a problem that it was not possible to alternately switch between

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the seesaw member is provided with a discharge means for easily discharging the game ball placed on the other end side, so that the other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised. Even in this state, the game ball can be discharged from the other end by the discharge means, the weight of the game ball on the other end can be removed, and the one end can be easily lowered. That is, the state in which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft (that is, the state in which the second state is formed) is terminated early, and the one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. a first state can be formed. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine E1, the discharging means includes a rotatably supported shaft support portion, a receiving portion disposed on one side of the shaft supporting portion and receiving the game ball guided from the guide means, and a receiving portion. and a push-out portion arranged to sandwich the shaft support portion with respect to the portion, and when the receiving portion receives the game ball guided from the guide means, the push-out portion is rotated around the shaft support portion. A game machine E2 characterized in that a portion protrudes to the other end side of the seesaw member.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, when the receiving part receives the game ball guided from the guide means, the ejecting part rotates about the shaft supporting part so that the pushing part moves to the seesaw member. Since it protrudes to the other end side, the game ball placed on the other end side of the seesaw member can be pushed out by the pushing portion and discharged from the seesaw member. As a result, the other end side of the seesaw member can be raised by discharging the game ball by the pushing portion, and the one end side of the seesaw member can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving portion. Early termination can facilitate switching between the first state and the second state. In addition, the operation of receiving the game ball by the receiving portion is used to rotate the ejecting means (protruding the push-out portion).

In the game machine E2, the game machine E3 is characterized in that the shaft supporting portion of the discharge means is rotatably supported by the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the ejecting means is rotatably supported by the seesaw member at the shaft supporting portion, so that the relative position of the ejecting means to the seesaw member can be kept constant. . Therefore, the game ball guided from the guide means can be easily received by the receiving part, and the rotation around the shaft support part can be surely formed, and the pushing part projected to the other end side of the seesaw member by the rotation can be played. The game ball can be reliably pushed out (discharged) from the seesaw member by facilitating contact with the ball. As a result, it is possible to facilitate switching between the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the receiving portion of the discharging means has a larger retractable amount than the pushing portion with respect to a virtual plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the seesaw member and the pivotal support portion of the discharging means. A gaming machine E4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the ejection means has a larger retractable amount of the receiving portion than the push-out portion. , and the energy received from the received game ball can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to ensure the pushing force of the game ball by the pushing portion accompanying the retreat of the receiving portion. That is, the game ball can be quickly discharged easily.

On the other hand, by making the retraction amount of the pushing portion smaller than that of the receiving portion, when the game ball rolling toward the other end of the seesaw member causes the pushing portion to retreat, the rolling trajectory of the game ball increases. can be suppressed, and such game balls can be quickly discharged easily.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the discharging means is mounted on the other end side of the rotating shaft by relatively raising one of the rotating shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction with respect to the other in the axial direction. The game machine E5 is characterized by making it easy to discharge placed game balls.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E4, one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction by the ejecting means, By increasing the downward inclination angle of the seesaw member from one axial direction to the other axial direction of the rotating shaft, a game ball placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft can be ejected from the seesaw member. This makes it easier to alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

It should be noted that the fact that one of the rotating shafts in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction means that it is sufficient if the amount of rise in one of the axial directions is greater than the amount of rise in the other axial direction. Therefore, after being raised, one axial direction may be arranged at a lower position than the other axial direction.

In the game machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, the discharging means moves one axial direction of the rotation shaft of the seesaw member in the first section. In the second section which is not raised relative to the other and which is closer to the second state than the first section, one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is relative to the other in the axial direction. The game machine E6 is characterized by being raised in a positive manner.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state toward the second state, the ejection means rotates the rotation axis of the seesaw member in the first section. in the second section, which is closer to the second state than the first section, the one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is shifted to the other axial direction. , it is possible to reliably form the second state and smoothly alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

That is, when the operation of relatively raising one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction is performed from the first section, the discharge of the game ball is accelerated, and the second state is surely formed. Can not. On the other hand, if the operation to raise one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction is not performed, the ejection of the game ball is slowed down (residence time is lengthened), resulting in the second state. easier to maintain.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, in the first section, one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is rotated to the other axial direction. On the other hand, since it does not rise relatively, it is possible to suppress the ejection of the game ball from being hastened (that is, to make the game ball stay), and to make it easier to reliably form the second state. On the other hand, in the second section, since one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction, the game ball can be discharged quickly, and the game ball is placed. The time (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened. As a result, alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly while the second state can be reliably formed.

In the gaming machine E5 or E6, the seesaw member is formed with a cam on at least one side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and along with the rotation of the rotating shaft, from the axis of the rotating shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam. A game machine E7 characterized in that one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction by increasing the distance of the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5 or E6, a cam is formed in at least one axial direction of the rotating shaft, and along with the rotation of the rotating shaft, from the axis of the rotating shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam By increasing the distance of the seesaw member, one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction, so control for controlling the drive mechanism and its drive timing for operating such a rotating shaft No means required. Moreover, the first section and the second section can be reliably formed, and the degree of freedom in designing the ratio of the first and second sections can be increased.

In any one of game machines E5 to E7, a push-up portion is provided on a moving locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, and the push-up portion hits the seesaw member. A game machine E8 characterized in that one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction by being brought into contact with each other.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E5 to E7, the seesaw member is provided on the movement locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, When the push-up portion is brought into contact with the seesaw member, one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction. Control means for controlling timing can be made unnecessary. In addition, the first section and the second section can be reliably formed, and the degree of freedom in designing the ratio of each section can be increased.

<Regarding the concept of the invention as an example of the base side engaging member 12726>
A game machine comprising a base member and a displacement member rotatably disposed on the base member at its base end side and rotated between a retracted position and an extended position, wherein the base member comprises a base-side engagement member. In addition, the displacement member includes a displacement-side engagement member formed to be engageable with the base-side engagement member at the retracted position, and in a state in which the first displacement member is arranged at the extended position, the base The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the base-side engaging member is formed such that it is difficult for a player to visually recognize the member when viewed from the front.

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A performance member having a transmission member that transmits and a driving means that imparts a driving force to the transmission member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are provided via the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, JP-A-2009-100994).

In this conventional game machine, the connecting member connects the base member and the second displacement member in an erected state, and in the retracted position, the base member and the second displacement member are positioned relatively apart from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. 2 displacement members are connected by a connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member tries to tilt the portion on the opposite side of the rotation shaft (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, there will be a gap between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

However, in the game machine F1, the base end side of the displacement member is rotatably supported, while the side opposite to the base end side (tip end side) is a free end. Therefore, at the retracted position, the side opposite to the proximal side (tip side) tends to tilt (forward) in a direction away from the base member due to its own weight and the weight of the decorative portion provided on the front side.

In this case, according to the gaming machine F1, the base member includes the base-side engagement member, the displacement member includes the displacement-side engagement member, and in a state in which the displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base-side engagement Since the member and the displacement-side engaging member are formed to be engageable, it is possible to suppress tilting of the side opposite to the base end side of the displacement member (the distal end side) in a direction away from the base member.

On the other hand, in the case where the base member is provided with the base-side engaging member and the displacement member is provided with the displacement-side engaging member as described above, when the displacement member is extended to the projecting position, the front surface of the base member is exposed, the base-side engagement member is visually recognized by the player, and the appearance is spoiled. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is formed so as to be difficult for the player to visually recognize when the base member is viewed from the front.

In the game machine F1, the base-side engaging member is disposed in front of the base member so as to be retractable, and when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member moves in front of the base member. and when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base-side engagement member is retracted toward the back side of the base member.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the base-side engaging member is disposed in front of the base member so as to be retractable, and when the displacement member is rotated to the projecting position, the base-side engaging member is engaged. Since the joining member is retracted toward the back side of the base member, the base-side engaging member can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize when the base member is viewed from the front, and the deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed.

Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member protrudes from the front surface of the base member. be able to. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the displacement-side engaging member from interfering with other members when the displacement member is rotated. In other words, since the protrusion height of the displacement-side engaging member can be reduced, a space for displacing other members can be secured.

In the game machine F2, a drive means is provided for rotating the displacement member with respect to the base member, and the base-side engagement member is projected from the front surface of the base member by the action of the driving force of the drive means. A game machine F3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the driving means for rotating the displacement member with respect to the base member is provided, and the driving force of the driving means causes the base-side engagement member to move to the base member. Since it protrudes from the front, it can also be used as a driving means, and the product cost can be reduced. That is, the driving force for rotationally driving the displacement member can also be used as the driving force for protruding the base-side engaging member, making it unnecessary to separately provide a driving means for such projection.

As a form of projecting the base-side engaging member by the action of the driving force of the driving means, when the displacement member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the base-side engaging member is directly or indirectly engaged by the displacement member. When the member is displaced in the projecting direction, or when the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the displacing member is displaced, the displacing member directly or indirectly displaces the base-side engaging member in the projecting direction. and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine F3 is provided with biasing means for biasing the base-side engaging member in the retraction direction, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, the action of the biasing force of the biasing means The game machine F4 is characterized in that the base-side engaging member is returned to the retracted position.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the biasing means for biasing the base-side engaging member in the direction of insertion is provided, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, the biasing means is activated. Since the base-side engaging member is returned to the retracted position by the action of the biasing force of the biasing means, it is not necessary to interlock both the projecting direction and the retracting direction with the action of the driving force of the driving means, and only the projecting direction is interlocked. The structure can be simplified accordingly.

In the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is arranged so as to be retractable from the front surface of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member moves to the front surface of the base member. a gaming machine F5, wherein the base-side engaging member is advanced toward the front side of the base member when the displacement member is retracted from the base member and the displacement member is rotated to the extended position.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base side engagement member is retracted from the front of the base member. By engaging the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, it is possible not only to suppress tilting of the base end side and the opposite side (distal end side) of the displacement member in a direction away from the base member, but also to prevent the base-side engaging member from tilting. By narrowing the distance between the engaging surfaces (inner surfaces) of the member and the displacement-side engaging member, it is possible to suppress back-and-forth rattling on the distal end side of the displacement member.

Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base-side engaging member is advanced toward the front of the base member, so that the base-side engaging member is visually recognized by the player when the base member is viewed from the front. It can be made difficult, and it can be suppressed that the appearance is spoiled.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the right rotation unit 18600 as an example>
a base member, a first displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the first displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member , wherein the first displacement member is formed to be displaceable in at least a first direction, and the second displacement member is capable of coming into contact with the first displacement member or the base member The inertial force generated by contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member acts as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. Characteristic game machine G1.

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. There is a game machine provided with driving means for giving (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-100994). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to form a mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced and a mode in which only one of the first displacement member or the second displacement member is displaced.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, for example, in a mode in which only the second displacement member is displaced, the load on the drive means is relatively small, while in a mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, Since the load on the driving means is relatively large, the load on the driving means changes (increases) abruptly when the mode is switched. As a result, there is a problem that the durability of the driving means is lowered, and the displacement speed is lowered when the mode is switched, making stable (constant) displacement difficult.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the second displacement member is formed to be able to contact the first displacement member or the base member, and the second displacement member is generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member. Since the inertial force applied acts as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction, the first mode of displacing the second displacement member is switched to the second mode of displacing the first displacement member. In this case, the action of the inertial force can be used as an auxiliary force, and a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the driving means, suppress a decrease in displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode, and facilitate stable (constant) displacement. .

As the first mode and the second mode, for example, the first mode displaces only the second displacement member, and the second mode displaces both the first displacement member and the second displacement member. Alternatively, a mode is exemplified in which the first mode displaces only the second displacement member and the second mode displaces only the first displacement member. The latter aspect is particularly useful when the load required for displacement of the first displacement member is sufficiently greater than the load required for displacement of the second displacement member (for example, the weight of the first displacement member relative to the weight of the second displacement member). is sufficient).

In the gaming machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. and the rotation axes of the second displacement member are parallel to each other.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. Since the directions of the rotation axes of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are parallel to each other, the inertial force generated by the contact of the second displacement member with the first displacement member or the base member is reduced to , can be efficiently acted on the first displacement member as a force for displacing the first displacement member in the first direction.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member is brought into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is a direction including a downward component in the direction of gravity. A game machine G3 characterized by.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member abuts against the first displacement member or the base member is downward in the direction of gravity. Since it is a direction including a facing component, it is possible to easily secure the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member.

A game machine G4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines G1 to G3, the first direction is a direction including an upward component in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, since the first direction is a direction including an upward component in the gravity direction, the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base It is particularly effective to use the inertial force generated by the contact with the member as an assisting force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the first displacement member has one end rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member has one end supported by the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side, and the other end side of the second displacement member approaches the one end side of the first displacement member from the direction opposite to the first direction, the second displacement member a gaming machine G5, wherein the other end side of the is abutted against the base member.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is the first displacement member. When the other end of the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the other end of the member and the other end of the second displacement member approaches the one end of the first displacement member from the direction opposite to the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the first displacement member abuts against the base member, the inertial force generated by the abutment between the second displacement member and the base member can be efficiently acted as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. can be done. That is, when switching from the first mode in which the second displacement member is displaced to the second mode in which the first displacement member is displaced, the action of the inertial force is used as an auxiliary force for displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. Power can be used effectively.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means, improve the durability of the driving means, and reduce the displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode. It can be restrained to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the first displacement member has one end rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member has one end supported by the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side and approaches the one end side of the first displacement member from the same direction as the first direction, the second displacement member is abutted against the first displacement member.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably pivotally supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is the first displacement member. When the other end of the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the other end of the member and the other end of the second displacement member approaches the one end of the first displacement member in the same direction as the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the first displacement member contacts the first displacement member, the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member is effectively used as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. can act on That is, when switching from the first mode in which the second displacement member is displaced to the second mode in which the first displacement member is displaced, the action of the inertial force is used as an auxiliary force for displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. Power can be used effectively.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means, improve the durability of the driving means, and reduce the displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode. It can be restrained to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

In any one of game machines G1 to G7, a transmission member having a drive pin for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, the first displacement member includes the drive pin and a non-interfering section connected to the working section and not interfering with the drive pin, wherein the second displacement member has a working section that receives the action from the drive pin. and a second groove having at least Gaming machine G8.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effects of the game machines G1 to G7, the first groove of the first displacement member is connected to the action section that receives the action from the drive pin and the action section, and the drive pin interferes with the action section. and the second groove of the second displacement member has at least an action section that is acted upon by the drive pin, so that the drive pin intervenes between the non-interference section of the first groove and the action section of the second groove. A first mode in which the second displacement member is displaced while the first displacement member is maintained in a stopped state by being displaced, and a drive pin is displaced in the action section of the first groove and the action section of the second groove. By doing so, it is possible to form a second mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, and to smoothly transition from the first mode to the second mode.

A gaming machine K1 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A23, B1 to B11, C1 to C15, D1 to D14, E1 to E8, F1 to F5 and G1 to G8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A23, B1 to B11, C1 to C15, D1 to D14, E1 to E8, F1 to F5 and G1 to G8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. K2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, on the condition that winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening) is a necessary condition. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning balls is provided. Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of game machines A1 to A23, B1 to B11, C1 to C15, D1 to D14, E1 to E8, F1 to F5 and G1 to G8, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine K3 characterized by: Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotary shaft between one end side and the other end side thereof, and in an unloaded state, a first state is exerted by the weight of a game ball. There is a game machine that respectively forms a second state when the state is set (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-283136).
However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is impossible to alternately switch between the first state and the second state when a plurality of game balls are consecutive.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that can easily alternately switch between the first state and the second state.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of Technical Concept 1 comprises a seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side, and the seesaw member is in an unloaded state. Then, a first state is formed in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised, and the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft, so that the one end side is raised and the other end side is raised. It forms a lowered second state, and has a discharging means for easily discharging the game ball placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the ejecting means comprises a shaft support portion rotatably supported and a guide means disposed on one side of the shaft support portion. a receiving part for receiving the game ball guided from the guide means; and a push-out part disposed on the receiving part with the shaft supported therebetween, wherein the receiving part receives the game ball guided from the guide means. Then, the push-out portion protrudes toward the other end side of the seesaw member due to the rotation about the shaft support portion.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the ejecting means has the pivot portion rotatably supported by the seesaw member.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, it is possible to facilitate switching between the first state and the second state alternately.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, it is possible to facilitate switching between the first state and the second state alternately.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, it is possible to facilitate switching between the first state and the second state alternately.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board 61 Inner rail 86, 2086 Center frame 600, 3600, 4600, 5600, 6600, 7600, 18600, 19680 Left rotation unit (displacement member)
610 back base (base body)
620, 18620 front base (base body)
620a Inclined surface 621 Bearing concave portion (gear receiving portion)
623 protruding part (gear receiving part)
626 Projection 627 Bearing 628 Projection 630, 3630, 4630, 5630, 19630 First displacement member 631 Rotating shaft 634 Contact part 635 First groove 635a Action section 635b Non-interference section 640, 3640, 5640, 6640, 7640, 18640, 19640 Second displacement member 641, 3641, 5641, 6641, 7641, 1961 Driven member 641b Second groove 6641c, 7641c Connection groove (third groove)
6641c1 Action section 6641c2 Non-interference section 3641d, 5641d Connection pin (drive pin)
642, 18642, 19642 connecting displacement member 642b decorative portion 642c projecting portion 643 connecting pin 650 drive motor (driving means)
651 1st pinion (gear)
652 rack member (gear)
653 2nd pinion (gear)
654 Transmission member 654a Rotating shaft 654b Drive pin 654c Recessed portion (recessed portion)
660, 3660, 4660, 5660, 7660 Third displacement member 700, 8700, 9700, 10700, 11700, 12700, 13700, 14700, 15700, 16700, 17700 Right rotation unit (displacement member)
710 rear base (base body)
720, 12720, 13720, 14720, 15720, 16720, 17720 Front base (base body)
726, 12726, 14726, 15726 Base-side engaging member 726a Base portion 726b Bent portion 727 Receiving concave portion (receiving portion)
730 First displacement members 740, 12740, 16740, 17740 Second displacement members 742, 13742, 16742, 17742 Displacement-side engagement members 742a, 13742a, 16742a, 17742a Base portion 742b Bending portion 743 Receiving concave portion 8744a Connecting pin (interposing means, Guided part)
11747 pinion gear (interposed means)
750 drive motor (driving means)
754 transmission member (driving body)
760 connection first member (connection member)
770, 8770, 9770 Connection second member (connection member)
8773, 9773 guide portion (interposing means)
11774 rack gear (interposing means)
25817 push-up part (ejection means)
821c Outlet 821d Outlet (inlet)
821e Support shaft (rotating shaft)
824 intermediate bottom wall (guide means)
824a Guide bottom surface (guide means, rolling guide surface)
840, 20840 Seesaw member 844 Receiving surface 847 Claw portion 20848 Regulating portion (restraining means)
850 driven member (decorative member)
21870, 22870, 23870 Rotating member (ejection means)
21871 Shaft 21872 Receiving plate (receiving portion)
21873 Ejector Plate (Ejector)
24877b cam part (cam, ejection means)
950 Side wall portion 960 Downstream wall portion 971 Groove 972 Projection R Area forming portion L Extension length of horizontal passage SP1 to SP4 Biasing spring (biasing means)

Claims (3)

A first seesaw member having one end side and the other end side rotatably supported by a rotating shaft is provided, and the seesaw member is lowered at one end side and raised at the other end side in an unloaded state. A game machine that forms a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered by placing a game ball on the other end side of the rotating shaft while forming a state,
A game machine comprising a discharging means for easily discharging a game ball placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft. The discharging means includes a rotatably supported shaft support portion, a receiving portion disposed on one side of the shaft supporting portion and receiving the game ball guided from the guide means, and and a push-out portion arranged with a shaft support therebetween, and when the receiving portion receives a game ball guided from the guide means, the push-out portion moves to the seesaw member due to rotation about the shaft support portion. 2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the projection is projected to the other end side of the. 3. The game machine according to claim 2, wherein the shaft supporting portion of the ejecting means is rotatably supported by the seesaw member.

Images